OptiX OSN 7500 II&7500&3500&1500 Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) (V200R011)

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
V200R011C03
Configuration Guide (Packet
Transport Domain)
Issue 03
Date 2013-02-20
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 7500 II V200R011C03
OptiX OSN 7500 V200R011C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00 and later

Intended Audience
This document describes the configuration of different types of Ethernet services of the OptiX
OSN equipments with regard to configuration flow, networking diagram, service planning, and
configuration process.
This document describes the methods of configuring different types of Ethernet services on the
U2000.
The intended audience of this document is:
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Data configuration engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
ii
Symbol Description
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which,
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
TIP
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points in the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Based on Product Version
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the third release. Compared with Issue 02,
Issue 03 includes the following updates in V200R011C03SPC200:
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)" is optimized in section
"Parameter Description: E-Line Service."
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
iii
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the second release. Compared with the
previous release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l Updated the document based on its supporting NMS.
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the first release. Compared with the previous
release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l In topic "Configuring E-Line Services", the description of "Configuration Example: E-Line
Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)" is added.
l In topic "Configuring E-Line Services", the description of "Configuration Example: E-Line
Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)" is added.
l "Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis" is optimized.
l "Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is optimized.
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)" is optimized.
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)" is optimized.
V200R011C02
l In topic "Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs", the description of
"Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Creating E-AGGR Services
Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring an ATM Policy
Profile" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring an ATM CoS
Mapping Profile" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR
Services (End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l "Split Horizon Group" is optimized.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
iv
V200R011C02
l "Configuring ATM Services" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring ATM PWE3
Services" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing the Blacklist" is
added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: ATM/IMA
Services" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: Address
Parse" is added.
l "Creating the Network" is optimized.
l "Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs" is optimized.
V200R011C01
l In topic "Managing PWE3 Services", the description of "Searching for PWE3 Services" is
added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring the NE-Level
TPID" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: CES Port" is
added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: MPLS OAM"
is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel
APS" is added.
l "Creating Optical Fibers by Searching for the Optical Fibers on the NMS" is optimized.
l "Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration" is optimized.
l "Configuring an MPLS Tunnel" is optimized.
V200R011C01
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
v
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing MPLS Tunnels"
is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing MPLS Tunnel APS
Protection Groups" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: CES Services"
is added.
V200R011C00
This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the second release. Compared with the first
release, the contents of this document are modified or optimized as follows:
l In topic "Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services", the description of "Configuring
E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs", the description of
"Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l "Configuring Cross-Domain Services" is optimized.
V200R011C00
This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the first release. Compared with
V100R009C03, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l OptiX OSN 7500 is added.
l "Starting the T2000" is deleted.
l "Getting Started" is added.
l "Creating the Network" is added.
l "Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l "Configuring Cross-Plane Services" is added.
l "Configuring CES Services" is added.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
vi
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Getting Started...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server.........................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 Client.................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Exiting a U2000 Client..............................................................................................................................3
1.1.4 Shutting Down the U2000 Server..............................................................................................................3
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000....................................................................................4
1.2.1 Components of the Client GUI..................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Key GUI Components...............................................................................................................................6
1.2.3 Frequently Used Buttons...........................................................................................................................7
1.2.4 Shortcut Icon..............................................................................................................................................9
1.2.5 Common Shortcut Keys...........................................................................................................................11
1.2.6 Main Windows........................................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.1 Workbench......................................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.2 Main Topology...............................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.3 NE Explorer....................................................................................................................................14
1.2.6.4 Clock View.....................................................................................................................................15
1.2.6.5 NE Panel.........................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.6 Browse Alarm.................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.7 Browse Event..................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.8 Browse Performance Window........................................................................................................18
2 Creating the Network.................................................................................................................19
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet......................................................................................................................20
3 Configuring E-Line Services.....................................................................................................21
3.1 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................................23
3.1.1 E-Line Services........................................................................................................................................23
3.1.2 UNI..........................................................................................................................................................27
3.1.3 NNI..........................................................................................................................................................28
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services....................................................................................................28
3.2.1 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services ..........................................................................29
3.2.2 E-Line Services Carried by Ports ...........................................................................................................33
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
vii
3.2.3 E-Line Services Carried by PWs ............................................................................................................35
3.2.4 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links .................................................................................................38
3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services........................................................................................43
3.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................43
3.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................44
3.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................45
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports..............................................................................48
3.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................51
3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration...................................................................53
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)...................................................55
3.5.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).........................................................................................60
3.5.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).....................................................................66
3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services.......................................................................................................................74
3.6 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
................................................................................................................................................................................75
3.6.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).........................................................................................80
3.6.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).....................................................................87
3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services.......................................................................................................................95
3.7 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
................................................................................................................................................................................97
3.7.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................102
3.7.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................108
3.7.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration.................................................................117
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by QinQ links..................................................................118
3.8.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................118
3.8.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................120
3.8.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................121
3.8.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration.................................................................124
4 Configuring E-LAN Services...................................................................................................127
4.1 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................................128
4.1.1 E-LAN Services.....................................................................................................................................128
4.1.2 UNI........................................................................................................................................................131
4.1.3 NNI........................................................................................................................................................132
4.1.4 Split Horizon Group..............................................................................................................................132
4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services.................................................................................................133
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
viii
4.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports ........................................................................................................133
4.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs .........................................................................................................138
4.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links ..............................................................................................142
4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by Ports...........................................................................146
4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration................................................................153
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs...........................................................................155
4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration........................................................................................169
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ links.................................................................170
4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration................................................................177
5 Configuring E-AGGR Services...............................................................................................180
5.1 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................................181
5.1.1 E-AGGR Services..................................................................................................................................181
5.1.2 UNI........................................................................................................................................................183
5.1.3 NNI........................................................................................................................................................184
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services..............................................................................................184
5.2.1 E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports .....................................................................................................185
5.2.2 E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs ......................................................................................................189
5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports........................................................................195
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs........................................................................203
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration......................................................................217
6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services.....................................................................................221
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board.......................................................................................................222
6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services......................................................................................223
6.3 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 1)..........................................................................................226
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
ix
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services......................................................................................................................255
6.6.1 Using the Ping Commands to Test Cross-domain Services..................................................................256
6.6.2 Using Loopbacks to Test Cross-domain Services.................................................................................258
7 Configuring CES Services........................................................................................................260
7.1 Introduction to CES........................................................................................................................................261
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services......................................................................................................263
7.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI CES Services..................................................................................263
7.2.2 Configuration Flow for the UNI-NNI CES Services.............................................................................264
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)........................................................................................266
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)........................................................................................270
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration............................................................................................................289
8 Configuring ATM Services......................................................................................................292
8.1 Introduction to ATM......................................................................................................................................293
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services.....................................................................................................294
8.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI ATM Services.................................................................................294
8.2.2 Configuration Flow for UNIs-NNI ATM Services...............................................................................295
8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services).......................................................................................297
8.3.1 Network Diagram..................................................................................................................................297
8.3.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................300
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services).....................................................................................304
8.4.1 Network Diagram..................................................................................................................................304
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
x
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration..........................................................................................................355
9 Configuration Task Collection............................................................................................... 357
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port..........................................................................................................................360
9.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces............................................................................361
9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports....................................................................................362
9.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports....................................................................................362
9.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports................................................................................363
9.1.5 Configuring the Flow Control...............................................................................................................363
9.2 Configuring CES Ports...................................................................................................................................364
9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports.................................................................................................364
9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports.............................................................................................................................365
9.3 Configuring the NNIs.....................................................................................................................................366
9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports..............................................................366
9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels....................................367
9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links...................................................368
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel........................................................................................................................369
9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID..............................................................................................................................369
9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.................................................................................370
9.4.2.1 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.......................................370
9.4.2.2 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis..........................................372
9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................373
9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode.............................374
9.4.3.2 Configuring a Static and Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode...............................376
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels...............................................................................................................................378
9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................379
9.5.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology..................................................................................................379
9.5.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels...................................................................................................................380
9.5.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................381
9.5.5 Deleting MPLS Tunnels........................................................................................................................382
9.5.6 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.......................................................................................................383
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM...............................................................................................................................383
9.6.1 Configuring the MPLS OAM on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................383
9.6.2 Configuring MPLS OAM in End-to-End Mode....................................................................................386
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.....................................................................................................................388
9.7.1 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS on a Per-NE Basis.............................................................................389
9.7.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel APS in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................390
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups..........................................................................................392
9.8.1 Automatically Discovering Protection Groups......................................................................................392
9.8.2 Deploying MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups................................................................................393
9.8.3 Ranaming an MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Group.............................................................................393
9.8.4 Deleting MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups...................................................................................394
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services.........................................................................................395
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xi
9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services................................................................................................395
9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports.....................................................................397
9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis........................................398
9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode....................................................400
9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links................................................................402
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services........................................................................................403
9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports...................................................................................404
9.10.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis...........................................................406
9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode.................................................408
9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links........................................................................410
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services....................................................................................................................413
9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports................................................................................413
9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis........................................................414
9.11.3 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode....................................................416
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services........................................................................................418
9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports........................................................418
9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs........................................................419
9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links.............................................420
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services...........................................................................................421
9.13.1 Creating UNI-UNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis..........................................................................421
9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis..........................................................................422
9.13.3 Creating a CES Service in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................................424
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services..................................................................................................428
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services...............................................................................................................428
9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces...............................................................................................................428
9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile....................................................................................................433
9.15.3 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile........................................................................................434
9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by Using the Trail Function......................................................................436
9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.........................................................................................438
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services............................................................................................................................441
9.16.1 Searching for PWE3 Services..............................................................................................................442
9.16.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status.....................................................................................................442
9.16.3 Deploying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................443
9.16.4 Modifying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................444
9.16.5 Deleting PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................445
9.16.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................445
9.17 Managing Composite Services.....................................................................................................................446
9.17.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services.................................................................................446
9.17.2 Deploying Composite Services...........................................................................................................447
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution..................................................................................................................448
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID..................................................................................................................449
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link...................................................................................................................................449
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xii
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group..............................................................................................................................450
9.22 Managing the Blacklist.................................................................................................................................451
10 Parameter Description............................................................................................................453
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface .............................................................................455
10.1.1 General Attributes................................................................................................................................455
10.1.2 Flow Control........................................................................................................................................456
10.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes................................................................................................................................459
10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes................................................................................................................................461
10.1.5 Advanced Attributes............................................................................................................................462
10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS......................................................................................................................464
10.2.1 Basic Configuration.............................................................................................................................464
10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).......................................................464
10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).......................................................469
10.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service........................................................................................................476
10.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................476
10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)......................................................478
10.3.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................489
10.3.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................490
10.3.5 Maintenance Association.....................................................................................................................493
10.3.6 MEP Point............................................................................................................................................494
10.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................495
10.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).........................................................495
10.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).....................................................496
10.4.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................507
10.4.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................508
10.4.5 Split Horizon Group............................................................................................................................512
10.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters....................................................................................................512
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing................................................................................................................513
10.4.8 Static MAC Address............................................................................................................................514
10.4.10 MEP Point..........................................................................................................................................515
10.4.11 V-UNI Group.....................................................................................................................................516
10.5 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Service....................................................................................................517
10.5.1 E-AGGR Service Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).............................................................................517
10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode)..................................................517
10.5.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................522
10.5.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................523
10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding Table Item............................................................................................................526
10.5.7 MEP Point............................................................................................................................................528
10.6 Parameter Description: CES Port.................................................................................................................528
10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.....................................................................................................................528
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xiii
10.6.2 E1 Port.................................................................................................................................................532
10.7 Parameter Description: CES Services..........................................................................................................535
10.7.1 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-UNI).......................................................................................535
10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-NNI).......................................................................................536
10.7.3 QoS (UNI-NNI)...................................................................................................................................539
10.7.4 Advanced Attributes (UNI-NNI).........................................................................................................540
10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode)..........................................................544
10.8 Parameter Description: ATM/IMA Services................................................................................................547
10.8.1 Creating an ATM Service....................................................................................................................547
10.8.2 Connection...........................................................................................................................................549
10.8.3 CoS Mapping.......................................................................................................................................552
10.8.4 Configuring an ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................................................................552
10.8.5 ATM Policies.......................................................................................................................................553
10.8.6 SDH Interface......................................................................................................................................559
10.8.7 IMA Group Management....................................................................................................................562
10.9 Parameter Description: MPLS OAM...........................................................................................................567
10.9.1 Tunnel OAM Parameters.....................................................................................................................567
10.9.2 Ping Test..............................................................................................................................................570
10.9.3 Traceroute Test....................................................................................................................................570
10.10 Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel APS...............................................................................................571
10.10.1 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (on a Per-NE Basis)..............................................571
10.10.2 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End Mode)..........................................572
10.11 Parameter Description: Inband DCN..........................................................................................................575
10.11.1 Port Settings.......................................................................................................................................575
10.11.2 Access Control...................................................................................................................................576
10.11.3 Bandwidth Management....................................................................................................................577
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters...................................................................577
10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse.......................................................................................................579
A List of Parameters.....................................................................................................................580
A.1 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)....................................................................................582
A.1.1 MAC Loopback(Ethernet Interface).....................................................................................................582
A.1.2 PHY Loopback(Ethernet Interface)......................................................................................................583
A.1.3 Enable Port(Ethernet Interface)............................................................................................................584
A.1.4 Encapsulation Type(Ethernet Interface)...............................................................................................585
A.1.5 Working Mode(Ethernet Interface)......................................................................................................586
A.1.6 Max Frame Length(byte) for an Ethernet Port.....................................................................................587
A.1.7 Enable Tunnel(Ethernet Interface)........................................................................................................588
A.1.8 Specify IP(Ethernet Interface)..............................................................................................................589
A.2 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)......................................................................................590
A.2.1 Port Attribute (Ethernet Port)...............................................................................................................590
A.2.2 Enable Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................................................................592
A.2.3 Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute)......................................................................................592
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xiv
A.2.4 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................593
A.2.5 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)...........................................................594
A.2.6 MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)............................................................................................595
A.2.7 PHY Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute).............................................................................................596
A.2.8 QinQ Type Area...................................................................................................................................597
A.2.9 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute).............................................................................................598
A.2.10 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................................................598
A.2.11 Traffic Threshold(Mpbs)(External Ethernet Port Attribute)..............................................................599
A.2.12 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (Ethernet Interface Attributes)..........................................599
A.2.13 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression (Ethernet Interface Attributes)...........................................600
A.2.14 Zero-Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)............................................................................601
A.2.15 Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min).......................................................................................601
A.2.16 Jumbo Frame Type.............................................................................................................................602
A.2.17 Default VLAN ID (Ethernet Port Attribute).......................................................................................603
A.2.18 VLAN Priority (Ethernet Port Attribute)............................................................................................603
A.2.19 Entry Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)...........................................................................................604
A.2.20 Tag Identifier......................................................................................................................................605
A.2.21 Mapping Protocol...............................................................................................................................606
A.2.22 Scramble.............................................................................................................................................608
A.2.23 Set Inverse Value for CRC.................................................................................................................609
A.2.24 Check Field Length.............................................................................................................................609
A.2.25 FCS Calculated Bit Sequence.............................................................................................................610
A.2.26 Extension Header Option....................................................................................................................612
A.3 Ethernet Service Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)...............................................................................613
A.3.1 PW Signaling Type(PW Management)................................................................................................613
A.3.2 Bearer Type (E-Line Service)...............................................................................................................614
A.3.3 PW ID(E-Line Service)........................................................................................................................614
A.3.4 BPDU....................................................................................................................................................615
A.3.5 MTU(bytes)(E-Line Service)................................................................................................................616
A.3.6 Static MAC Address (E-LAN Service)................................................................................................617
A.3.7 Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN Service)...................................................................................618
A.3.8 Aging Time (min)(E-LAN Service).....................................................................................................619
A.3.9 Default Forwarding Priority.................................................................................................................620
A.3.10 Default Packet Relabeling Color(E-LAN Service).............................................................................621
A.3.11 Split Horizon Group ID(E-LAN Service)...........................................................................................622
A.3.12 Split Horizon Group Member (E-LAN Service)................................................................................623
A.3.13 Source Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)..........................................................................................623
A.3.14 Sink Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)..............................................................................................624
A.4 CES Service Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................625
A.4.1 Packet Loading Time (us).....................................................................................................................625
A.4.2 RTP Header..........................................................................................................................................626
A.4.3 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us).............................................................................................627
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xv
A.4.4 Clock Mode..........................................................................................................................................629
A.5 Data Service Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).......................................................................................630
A.5.1 Operation Type (EPL Service).............................................................................................................630
A.5.2 Service Type (EPL Service).................................................................................................................632
A.5.3 Encapsulation Format of P Port (Network Attributes).........................................................................633
A.5.4 C-VLAN and S-VLAN.........................................................................................................................634
A.5.5 VLAN ID (For Creation of Ethernet Virtual Private Lines).................................................................635
A.5.6 MAC Address Aging Time / Aging Time Unit....................................................................................636
A.5.7 Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service).....................................................................................................637
A.5.8 Actual MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service)...........................................................637
A.5.9 Specified MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service)......................................................638
A.5.10 Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN Service)................................................................................640
A.5.11 Self-learning MAC Address (Ethernet LAN Service)........................................................................641
A.5.12 Tunnel.................................................................................................................................................641
A.5.13 VC.......................................................................................................................................................642
A.5.14 Operation Type(IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)..............................................................................................643
A.5.15 Bridge Type........................................................................................................................................644
A.5.16 SAN Service Type..............................................................................................................................645
A.5.17 Concatenation Level (SAN)...............................................................................................................646
A.5.18 Enabled Flow Control of FC Port.......................................................................................................646
A.5.19 Initial Value of CREDIT at the Client Side........................................................................................647
A.5.20 Initial Value of CREDIT at the WAN Side........................................................................................648
A.6 ETH OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode).......................................................................................649
A.6.1 CC Test Transmit Period(Ethernet Service OAM Management).........................................................649
A.6.2 Maintenance Domain Level(Ethernet Service OAM Management)....................................................650
A.6.3 CC Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management).................................................................................651
A.6.4 Service Name(Ethernet Service OAM Management)..........................................................................651
A.6.5 Service Type(Ethernet Service OAM Management)............................................................................652
A.6.6 Activation Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management).....................................................................653
A.6.7 Transmitted Packet Count(Ethernet Service OAM Management).......................................................654
A.6.8 Transmitted Packet Length(Ethernet Service OAM Management)......................................................655
A.6.9 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM Management)....................................................655
A.6.10 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address(Ethernet Service OAM Management).....................656
A.6.11 Response Maintenance Point ID(Ethernet Service OAM Management)...........................................656
A.6.12 Hop Count(Ethernet Service OAM Management).............................................................................657
A.6.13 Test Result(Ethernet Service OAM Management).............................................................................658
A.7 ETH-OAM Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).........................................................................................658
A.7.1 MP ID (Ethernet OAM)........................................................................................................................658
A.7.2 Maintenance Point Type (Ethernet OAM)...........................................................................................659
A.7.3 CC Status (Ethernet OAM)...................................................................................................................660
A.7.4 CC Activate Flag..................................................................................................................................660
A.7.5 Test Result (LB and LT Test)...............................................................................................................661
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xvi
A.7.6 Responding MP Type (Ethernet LT Test)............................................................................................662
A.7.7 Hop Count (Ethernet LT Test)..............................................................................................................662
A.7.8 Send Mode (Ping Test).........................................................................................................................663
A.7.9 Packet Length (Ping Test)....................................................................................................................664
A.7.10 Timeout (Ping Test)............................................................................................................................664
A.7.11 Time To Live......................................................................................................................................665
A.7.12 Delay...................................................................................................................................................665
A.7.13 Average Delay....................................................................................................................................666
A.7.14 Max. Delay.........................................................................................................................................666
A.7.15 Min. Delay..........................................................................................................................................667
A.7.16 Detect Attempts..................................................................................................................................667
A.7.17 Send Direction (Ethernet Test)...........................................................................................................668
A.7.18 Error Frame Monitor Window(ms)....................................................................................................669
A.7.19 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries)..........................................................................................669
A.7.20 Error Frame Period Window (Frame).................................................................................................670
A.7.21 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Frame)...........................................................................................671
A.7.22 Error Frame Second Window(s).........................................................................................................671
A.7.23 Error Frame Second Threshold(s)......................................................................................................672
A.7.24 Enable OAM Protocol........................................................................................................................673
A.7.25 OAM Working Mode.........................................................................................................................673
A.7.26 Remote Alarm Support for Link Event..............................................................................................674
A.7.27 Unidirectional Operation....................................................................................................................674
A.7.28 Loopback Status (OAM Parameter)...................................................................................................675
A.8 PW Associated Parameters............................................................................................................................676
A.8.1 Control Word........................................................................................................................................676
A.8.2 Control Channel Type...........................................................................................................................677
A.8.3 VCCV Verification Mode.....................................................................................................................678
A.8.4 Request VLAN.....................................................................................................................................679
A.8.5 Competitive Working Status.................................................................................................................680
A.8.6 Associate AC State...............................................................................................................................681
A.8.7 Max.Concatenated Cell Count..............................................................................................................681
A.9 PW APS Protection Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)..........................................................................682
A.9.1 Protection Mode....................................................................................................................................682
A.9.2 Protection Mode....................................................................................................................................683
A.9.3 Switchover Status.................................................................................................................................684
A.9.4 Protocol Status......................................................................................................................................687
A.9.5 PW Type...............................................................................................................................................688
A.10 HQoS Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................689
A.10.1 Traffic Classification Rule(Policy Management)...............................................................................689
A.10.2 Match Type(Policy Management)......................................................................................................690
A.10.3 Match Value(Policy Management).....................................................................................................693
A.10.4 Wildcard(Policy Management)...........................................................................................................695
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xvii
A.10.5 PW Direction(PW Policy)..................................................................................................................698
A.10.6 Direction (PW Policy)........................................................................................................................698
A.10.7 Duplicated Policy Name(PW Policy).................................................................................................699
A.10.8 Policy ID(Policy Management)..........................................................................................................699
A.10.9 Policy Name (Policy Management)....................................................................................................700
A.10.10 QinQ Link ID(QinQ Policy).............................................................................................................701
A.10.11 Physical Port ID(QinQ Policy).........................................................................................................701
A.10.12 S-VLAN ID(QinQ Policy)................................................................................................................701
A.10.13 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing(Policy Management)......................................................702
A.10.14 Coloring Mode (V-UNI Ingress Policy)...........................................................................................703
A.10.15 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules(V-UNI Ingress Policy)..................................................704
A.10.16 Processing Mode(V-UNI Ingress Policy).........................................................................................705
A.10.17 AF1 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)..........................................................................706
A.10.21 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED Policy).......................................................708
A.10.22 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED Policy).......................................................709
A.10.23 Discard Probability (%) (Service WRED Policy)............................................................................710
A.10.24 PHB (Diffserv domain Management)...............................................................................................710
A.10.25 Packet Type (Diffserv domain Management)...................................................................................711
A.10.26 Committed Information Rate (Kbit/s)..............................................................................................712
A.10.27 Committed Burst Size (byte)............................................................................................................713
A.10.28 Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)..........................................................................................................713
A.10.29 Peak Burst Size (byte)......................................................................................................................714
A.10.30 EXP...................................................................................................................................................715
A.10.31 LSP Mode.........................................................................................................................................716
A.11 QoS Associated Parameters.........................................................................................................................717
A.11.1 Flow Type (Flow Configuration)........................................................................................................717
A.11.2 Bound CAR (Flow Configuration).....................................................................................................718
A.11.3 Bound CoS (Flow Configuration)......................................................................................................719
A.11.4 CAR ID (CAR Configuration)............................................................................................................719
A.11.5 CAR Enabled/Disabled (CAR Configuration)...................................................................................720
A.11.6 Committed Information Rate (CAR Configuration)...........................................................................721
A.11.7 Committed Burst Size (CAR Configuration).....................................................................................722
A.11.8 Peak Information Rate (CAR Configuration).....................................................................................722
A.11.9 Maximum Burst Size (CAR Configuration).......................................................................................723
A.11.10 CoS ID (CoS Configuration)............................................................................................................724
A.11.11 CoS Type (CoS Configuration)........................................................................................................725
A.11.12 CoS Priority (CoS Configuration)....................................................................................................726
A.11.13 Shaping.............................................................................................................................................729
A.12 ATM Interface Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)...............................................................................730
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xviii
A.12.1 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling(ATM Interface Management)..........................................................730
A.12.2 Min.VPI(ATM Interface Management)..............................................................................................731
A.12.3 Min.VCI(ATM Interface Management).............................................................................................732
A.12.4 VCC-Supported VPI Count(ATM Interface Management)................................................................733
A.13 ATM/IMA Services Associated Parameters (Packet Mode).......................................................................734
A.13.1 IMA Transit Frame Length.................................................................................................................734
A.13.2 IMA Symmetry Mode.........................................................................................................................735
A.13.3 Maximum Delay Between Links(ms)(IMA Group Management).....................................................736
A.13.4 Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links(IMA Group Management)...................................737
A.13.5 Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links(IMA Group Management).......................................738
A.13.6 Clock Mode(IMA Group Management).............................................................................................739
A.13.7 Near-End Group Status(IMA Group Status)......................................................................................740
A.13.8 Differential Delay Check Status(IMA Link States)............................................................................741
A.13.9 Connection Type(Per-NE ATM Service Management).....................................................................742
A.13.10 Uplink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM Connections).........................................................743
A.13.11 Downlink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM Connections)....................................................744
A.13.12 CoS Mapping(Per-NE Configuration for CoS Mapping).................................................................745
A.13.13 Traffic Service(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................745
A.13.14 Clp01Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).........................................................................................................749
A.13.15 Clp01Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).........................................................................................................751
A.13.16 Clp0Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................753
A.13.17 Clp0Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................755
A.13.18 Clp01Mcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)........................................................................................................757
A.13.19 Max.Cell Burst Size(cell)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................759
A.13.20 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance(0.1us)(ATM Policy)......................................................................760
A.13.21 UPC/NPC(ATM Policy)...................................................................................................................762
A.14 ATM OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)....................................................................................763
A.14.1 Connection Direction..........................................................................................................................763
A.14.2 Segment and End Attribute.................................................................................................................764
A.14.3 Country Code(Hexadecimal Code).....................................................................................................766
A.14.4 Network Code(Hexadecimal Code)....................................................................................................767
A.14.5 NE Code(Hexadecimal Code)............................................................................................................768
A.15 ATM/IMA Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).......................................................................................769
A.15.1 VCTRUNK Port (ATM Bound Path Management)...........................................................................769
A.15.2 Level (ATM Bound Path Management).............................................................................................772
A.15.3 Direction (ATM Bound Path Management).......................................................................................773
A.15.4 Port (ATM Port Management)............................................................................................................774
A.15.5 Port Type (ATM Port Management)..................................................................................................777
A.15.6 Max. VPI Bits.....................................................................................................................................777
A.15.7 Max. VCI Bits.....................................................................................................................................778
A.15.8 Max. VPC...........................................................................................................................................779
A.15.9 Max. VCC...........................................................................................................................................779
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xix
A.15.10 VPC Configured...............................................................................................................................780
A.15.11 VCC Configured...............................................................................................................................781
A.15.12 Number of VPI that Supports VCC..................................................................................................781
A.15.13 UPC/NPC Enabled/Disabled............................................................................................................782
A.15.14 Positive UPC/NPC(ATM Service Management).............................................................................783
A.15.15 ID (ATM Traffic Management)........................................................................................................784
A.15.16 Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management)........................................................................................785
A.15.17 Service Type (ATM Traffic Management).......................................................................................789
A.15.18 PCR (ATM Traffic Management)....................................................................................................792
A.15.19 SCR (ATM Traffic Management)....................................................................................................793
A.15.20 MBS..................................................................................................................................................794
A.15.21 CDVT...............................................................................................................................................795
A.15.22 Open Flow Frame Discarding Flag...................................................................................................795
A.15.23 Positive Traffic Descriptor...............................................................................................................796
A.15.24 Connection ID (ATM Service Management)...................................................................................797
A.15.25 Connection Type (ATM Service Management)...............................................................................798
A.15.26 Spread Type (ATM Service Management).......................................................................................799
A.15.27 VPI and VCI (ATM Service Management)......................................................................................801
A.15.28 Positive Service Status(ATM Service Management).......................................................................803
A.15.29 Positive Service Failure Reason(ATM Service Management).........................................................804
A.15.30 Source/Sink Switching Cause...........................................................................................................805
A.15.31 Protection Type (ATM Service Management).................................................................................806
A.15.32 Switching Direction (ATM Service Management)...........................................................................808
A.15.33 Switching Status (ATM Service Management)................................................................................808
A.15.34 Switching Type (ATM Service Management).................................................................................809
A.15.35 Revertive Mode (ATM Service Management).................................................................................811
A.15.36 Pause Time(0-100) *100 ms (ATM Service Management)..............................................................811
A.15.37 WTR Time(0-30min) (ATM Service Management)........................................................................812
A.15.38 External Command (ATM Protection Group)..................................................................................812
A.15.39 IMA Group Number.........................................................................................................................813
A.15.40 IMA Protocol Version......................................................................................................................814
A.15.41 IMA Transmit Frame Length............................................................................................................815
A.15.42 IMA Group Configuration Mode......................................................................................................815
A.15.43 Minimum Number of Active Links..................................................................................................818
A.15.44 IMA Group Status.............................................................................................................................819
A.15.45 Protocol Mode (IMA1.0 Mode)........................................................................................................820
A.15.46 Enable/Disable Cell Payload Scramble............................................................................................821
A.15.47 Link Frame Format...........................................................................................................................821
A.15.48 Connection Direction (ATM Segment End Attribute).....................................................................822
A.15.49 Segment and End Attribute (ATM Segment End Attribute)............................................................823
A.15.50 LLID.................................................................................................................................................825
A.15.51 Maximum Ingress Bandwidth...........................................................................................................826
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xx
A.15.52 Maximum Egress Bandwidth...........................................................................................................826
A.16 RPR Associated Parameters........................................................................................................................827
A.16.1 RPR Node ID......................................................................................................................................827
A.16.2 RPR Protocol......................................................................................................................................828
A.16.3 RPR Node Protection Slow Timer Value(ms)....................................................................................829
A.16.4 RPR ATD Timer Value(s)..................................................................................................................830
A.16.5 RPR Protection Mode.........................................................................................................................830
A.16.6 RPR Hold-off Time(ms).....................................................................................................................833
A.16.7 RPR Protection Restoration Mode......................................................................................................834
A.16.8 RPR Protection Wait-to-restore(s)......................................................................................................835
A.16.9 RPR Send link weight.........................................................................................................................836
A.16.10 RPR Used and Reserved bandwidth of priority A............................................................................837
A.16.11 RPR Used bandwidth of priority B-CIR(Mbps)...............................................................................838
A.16.12 RPR Circle Name.............................................................................................................................839
A.16.13 RPR Node Reachability....................................................................................................................840
A.16.14 RPR Node Hop.................................................................................................................................841
A.16.15 RPR Adjacent node ID.....................................................................................................................841
A.16.16 RPR Node Direction.........................................................................................................................842
A.16.17 ECHO Path ID (RPR Node Information).........................................................................................843
A.16.18 ECHO Working Mode (RPR Node Information).............................................................................843
A.16.19 ECHO Request Loop (RPR Node Information)...............................................................................845
A.16.20 ECHO Response Loop (RPR Node Information).............................................................................845
A.16.21 ECHO Frame Service Type (RPR Node Information).....................................................................846
A.16.22 Is ECHO Path Protected (RPR Node Information)..........................................................................847
A.16.23 ECHO T1 Transmit Period (RPR Node Information)......................................................................848
A.16.24 ECHO T2 Response Time (RPR Node Information).......................................................................849
A.16.25 Number of Echo Messages Received (RPR Node Information)......................................................849
A.16.26 Successfully Processed (RPR Node Information)............................................................................850
A.16.27 Unsuccessfully Processed (RPR Node Information)........................................................................850
A.16.28 dLoc Detected (RPR Node Information)..........................................................................................851
A.16.29 Loc Detected (RPR Node Information)............................................................................................852
A.16.30 RPR Node Protection Status.............................................................................................................852
A.16.31 RPR Node Switching Status.............................................................................................................854
A.16.32 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Times......................................................................................854
A.16.33 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Time........................................................................................855
A.16.34 RPR Node Last Switch Request.......................................................................................................855
A.16.35 RPR Switch Request.........................................................................................................................856
A.17 LAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).................................................................................................857
A.17.1 LAG Type(Link Aggregation Group Management)...........................................................................857
A.17.2 Revertive Mode(Link Aggregation Group Management)..................................................................858
A.17.3 Load Sharing(Link Aggregation Group Management)......................................................................859
A.17.4 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm(Link Aggregation Group Management)............................................860
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xxi
A.17.5 System Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)...................................................................861
A.17.6 Main Port(Link Aggregation Group Management)............................................................................862
A.17.7 Main Port Status(Link Aggregation Group Management).................................................................863
A.17.8 Port Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)........................................................................864
A.18 MC-LAG Associated Parameters................................................................................................................865
A.18.1 Protocol Channel ID...........................................................................................................................865
A.18.2 Hello Packet Sending Interval (s).......................................................................................................866
A.18.3 Timeout Time (s)................................................................................................................................866
A.19 LAG/DLAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).....................................................................................867
A.19.1 Port Priority (Link Aggregation)........................................................................................................867
A.19.2 System Priority (Link Aggregation)...................................................................................................868
A.19.3 Slave Port (Link Aggregation)............................................................................................................868
A.19.4 Status (Link Aggregation)..................................................................................................................869
A.19.5 Branch Port.........................................................................................................................................870
A.19.6 Load Sharing(Ethernet Link Aggregation).........................................................................................871
A.19.7 Revertive Mode (DLAG)....................................................................................................................872
A.19.8 Main Port Priority (DLAG)................................................................................................................873
A.19.9 Slave Port Priority (DLAG)................................................................................................................874
A.20 STP/RSTP Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................874
A.20.1 Protocol Enabled (Spanning Tree)......................................................................................................874
A.20.2 Protocol Type (Spanning Tree Protocol)............................................................................................875
A.20.3 VB Priority (Bridge Parameters)........................................................................................................876
A.20.4 Max Age(s).........................................................................................................................................876
A.20.5 Hello Time(s) (Spanning Tree)...........................................................................................................877
A.20.6 Forward Delay(s) (Spanning Tree).....................................................................................................878
A.20.7 TxHoldCount(per second) (Spanning Tree).......................................................................................878
A.20.8 Root Path Cost....................................................................................................................................879
A.20.9 Hold Count (Spanning Tree)..............................................................................................................879
A.20.10 Port ID..............................................................................................................................................880
A.20.11 Port Path Cost...................................................................................................................................880
A.20.12 Designated Path Cost........................................................................................................................882
A.20.13 Designated Root Bridge Priority......................................................................................................883
A.20.14 Designated Bridge Priority(Spanning Tree).....................................................................................883
A.20.15 Designated Bridge MAC Address (Spanning Tree).........................................................................884
A.20.16 Protocol Enabled (Port Parameter of Spanning Tree)......................................................................884
A.20.17 Admin Edge Attribute.......................................................................................................................885
A.20.18 Edge Port Status (Spanning Tree).....................................................................................................886
A.20.19 VB Port Priority................................................................................................................................887
A.20.20 VB Port Status..................................................................................................................................887
A.20.21 Point to Point Attributes(External Ethernet Port Attributes)............................................................888
A.21 LCAS Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................889
A.21.1 Enabling LCAS...................................................................................................................................889
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xxii
A.21.2 LCAS Mode........................................................................................................................................890
A.21.3 Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS)................................................................................................................891
A.21.4 WTR Time(s) (LCAS)........................................................................................................................891
A.21.5 TSD (LCAS).......................................................................................................................................892
A.21.6 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit Direction................................................................892
A.22 Packet LPT Associated Parameters.............................................................................................................893
A.22.1 Binding Status.....................................................................................................................................893
A.22.2 Primary Function Point.......................................................................................................................894
A.22.3 Secondary Function Point Type..........................................................................................................895
A.22.4 Secondary Function Point...................................................................................................................895
A.22.5 Fault Detection Mode.........................................................................................................................896
A.22.6 User-Side Port Status..........................................................................................................................897
A.23 LPT Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)..................................................................................................898
A.23.1 LPT.....................................................................................................................................................898
A.23.2 Bearer Mode.......................................................................................................................................899
A.23.3 Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms)....................................................................................................899
A.23.4 VCTRUNK Port Hold-off Time(ms)..................................................................................................900
A.24 IGMP Snooping Associated Parameters......................................................................................................900
A.24.1 Protocol Enable (IGMP Snooping Protocol)......................................................................................900
A.24.2 Multicast Aging Time.........................................................................................................................901
A.25 Test Frame Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................902
A.25.1 Frames to Send...................................................................................................................................902
A.25.2 Status...................................................................................................................................................903
A.25.3 Counter of Frames Sent......................................................................................................................903
A.25.4 Counter of Received Response Test Frame........................................................................................904
A.25.5 Counter of Test Frames to Receive....................................................................................................904
A.25.6 Bearer Mode (Ethernet Test)..............................................................................................................905
A.25.7 Send Mode (Ethernet Test).................................................................................................................906
A.26 Orderwire Associated Parameters................................................................................................................906
A.26.1 Call Waiting Time(s)..........................................................................................................................907
A.26.2 Conference Call..................................................................................................................................907
A.26.3 Phone..................................................................................................................................................908
A.26.4 Available Orderwire Port....................................................................................................................909
A.26.5 Available Conference Call Port..........................................................................................................909
A.26.6 Subnet No. Length..............................................................................................................................910
A.26.7 Subnet (Subnet No. for the Optical Interface)....................................................................................911
A.26.8 No.(F1 Data Port)...............................................................................................................................912
A.26.9 Data Channel (F1 Data Port)..............................................................................................................912
A.26.10 Overhead Byte (Broadcast Data Port)..............................................................................................913
A.26.11 Working Mode (Broadcast Data Port)..............................................................................................914
A.26.12 Broadcast Data Source (Broadcast Data Port)..................................................................................915
A.26.13 Broadcast Data Sink (Broadcast Data Port)......................................................................................916
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xxiii
A.27 Clock Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................916
A.27.1 External Clock Output Mode..............................................................................................................917
A.27.2 External Clock Output Timeslot.........................................................................................................917
A.27.3 External Source Output Threshold.....................................................................................................919
A.27.4 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition...........................................................................................920
A.27.5 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action................................................................................................921
A.27.6 Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 Is the Highest)............................................................................922
A.27.7 Clock Source Threshold.....................................................................................................................923
A.27.8 Protection Status.................................................................................................................................924
A.27.9 AIS Alarm Generated.........................................................................................................................925
A.27.10 B1 BER Threshold-Crossing Generated...........................................................................................926
A.27.11 B2-EXC Alarm Generated................................................................................................................927
A.27.12 Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode................................................................................928
A.27.13 Clock Source WTR Time.................................................................................................................929
A.27.14 Switching Status (Clock)..................................................................................................................929
A.27.15 Lock Status (Clock)..........................................................................................................................930
A.27.16 Clock Source ID...............................................................................................................................931
A.27.17 Synchronous Source.........................................................................................................................932
A.27.18 Synchronous Status Byte..................................................................................................................933
A.27.19 S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Information.................................................................................934
A.27.20 NE Clock Working Mode.................................................................................................................935
A.27.21 Clock Source Quality........................................................................................................................936
A.27.22 S1 Byte Received..............................................................................................................................938
A.27.23 Line Port (Clock)..............................................................................................................................939
A.27.24 Control Status (Clock)......................................................................................................................940
A.27.25 Line Port (Clock ID).........................................................................................................................941
A.27.26 Enabled Status (Clock ID)................................................................................................................942
A.27.27 Data Output Method in Holdover Mode...........................................................................................943
A.27.28 Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level...................................................................................................944
A.27.29 Retiming Mode.................................................................................................................................945
A.28 Protection Associated Parameters................................................................................................................946
A.28.1 Switching Mode (MSP)......................................................................................................................946
A.28.2 Initiation Condition (SNCP)...............................................................................................................947
A.28.3 Group Type (SNCP)...........................................................................................................................948
A.28.4 Configure SNCP Tangent Ring..........................................................................................................949
A.28.5 Source(Sink)Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6).............................................................................................949
A.28.6 Switching Status (BPS).......................................................................................................................950
A.28.7 Switching Status (PPS).......................................................................................................................951
A.28.8 External Switching Command Type (BPS)........................................................................................952
A.28.9 External Switching Command Type (PPS)........................................................................................953
A.29 Other Parameters.........................................................................................................................................954
A.29.1 E1/T1 Interconnection........................................................................................................................954
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xxiv
A.29.2 T1 Frame Structure.............................................................................................................................955
A.29.3 E1 Frame Structure.............................................................................................................................956
A.29.4 Service Mode......................................................................................................................................957
A.29.5 Service Type.......................................................................................................................................958
A.29.6 Service Frame Format.........................................................................................................................959
A.29.7 Connection Mode (NE Attribute).......................................................................................................960
A.29.8 Enable Tandem Connection at the Source..........................................................................................961
A.29.9 APId to be Sent at the Source.............................................................................................................962
A.29.10 Optimize Higher Order Pass-Through..............................................................................................962
B Glossary......................................................................................................................................964
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
xxv
1 Getting Started
About This Chapter
The following topices introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, trouble-
free launch of the U2000.
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the U2000.
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. Learning the main windows helps
you to locate the entrances to operations quickly, which increased your operation efficiency.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the U2000.
Context
l You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application in the following
sequence: Start the computer, start the U2000 server, and then start the U2000 client.
l You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer in the
following sequence: Exit the U2000 client, stop the U2000 server, and then shut down the
computer.
1.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server
For network management first start the U2000 server, and then start the U2000 application.
Prerequisites
l The computer time must be set correctly.
l The computer where the U2000 is installed must be started correctly.
l The operating system of the U2000 server must be running correctly and the database must
be started normally.
l The instance must be deployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the U2000 Server shortcut icon to start System Monitor Client.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, set the username (admin, by default) and the password (null, by default).
You need to change the password when logging in for the first time. Then click Login.
NOTE
Periodically change the password and memorize it.
You can login to the U2000 client, checking whether the status of each process is Running.
----End
1.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 Client
To manage networks through the U2000 client graphical user interface, you need to use the
U2000 client to log in to the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server must be started correctly.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
2
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, set the username (admin, by default) and the password (null, by default).
You need to change the password when logging in for the first time. Then click Login.
Step 3 Optional: For the first login, you need to configure the access control list of the system.
----End
1.1.3 Exiting a U2000 Client
Before shutting down the U2000 server, you must exit the U2000 client.
Prerequisites
The U2000 client must be started normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.
Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
NOTE
If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Confirm dialog box appears asking you whether to
save the changes. After you confirm the dialog box, automatically exit the client.
----End
1.1.4 Shutting Down the U2000 Server
When the U2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
U2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut
down the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
All the U2000 clients connected to the U2000 server must be shut down.
Procedure
Step 1 From the Main Menu of System Monitor Client, choose System > Stop All NMS Services to
close all processes of the U2000 server.
Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Wait until the U2000 core process, and the processes
that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Stopped state. Now the U2000 server
is shut down successfully.
Now you cannot shut down the MDP process or initialize the database.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
3
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. Learning the main windows helps
you to locate the entrances to operations quickly, which increased your operation efficiency.
1.2.1 Components of the Client GUI
This topic describes the components of the client GUI.
Figure 1-1 shows the client GUI.
Figure 1-1 Client GUI
1: Menu bar 2: Toolbar 3: Workbench list
4: Output pane 5: Status bar 6: Workbench

Menu Bar
The menu bar provides the entries to all the functions of the U2000 client. It consists of the
following menus: File, Fault, Performance,Configuration, Service, Inventory,
Administration, Window, and Help. In the topology window, the menu bar also provides the
Edit and View menu items.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
4
Toolbar
The toolbar provides the shortcut icons for major operation tasks. The shortcut icons are as
follows:
l : Workbench.
l : Exit.
l : Lock Terminal.
l : Log Out.
l : Full Screen.
l : Browse Current Alarm.
l : Create Fiber.
l : NE Explorer.
l : Main Topology.
l : Browse SDH performance.
l : Browse WDM performance.
l : SDH Protection Subnet Maintenance.
l : WDM Trail Management.
l : SDH Trail Creation.
l : SDH Trail Management.
Workbench list
You can create or modify a workbench through the shortcut icons.
Output Pane
The output pane displays the returned information and other relevant information.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the information such as the system status, the login users, and the IP
address of the connected server. The information displayed from left to right is as follows:
l Connection information: Displays the name and IP address of the server.
l Login user: Displays the name of the login user.
l Connection duration: Displays the duration of the connection between the client and the
server.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
5
l Login mode: Displays the login mode. It can be single-user mode and multi-user mode.
l Operation prompt: Displays the result of the operation.
l Logo: Displays the logo of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Workbench
The shortcut icons on the workbench help you perform operations.
1.2.2 Key GUI Components
The key U2000 GUI components are as follows:
Component Example
Button
Shortcut icon
Radio button
Check box
Tab
Field
Drop-down
menu
Menu
Function Tree
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
6
Component Example
Dialog box

1.2.3 Frequently Used Buttons
The frequently used buttons on the U2000 GUI are as follows:
Button Functionality
Selects the objects.
Expands all available options.
Collapses all available options.
Displays or hides a dialog box.
Selects the objects.
Selects the objects as a batch.
Increases the priority of the selected object.
Decreases the priority of the selected object.
Displays a dialog box.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
7
Queries results from the NE.
Imposes the current settings.
Displays the latest result(s).
Exports the selected scheduled tasks to the
browser of the operating system for printing.
Saves selected data to the specified file.
Makes the current setting effective and closes
the dialog box.
Cancels the current setting and closes the
dialog box.
Closes the operation wizard.
Allows the user to view and select the board
ports.
Deletes the selected data or icon.
Creates a new service, protection or physical
inventory information etc.
Proceeds to the next step.
Returns to the previous step.
Closes the dialog box.
Expands the Object Tree.
Collapses the Object Tree.
Makes the current setting effective and closes
the dialog box.
Cancels the current setting and closes the
dialog box.
Search the correlative information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
8
Sets the correlative condition.

1.2.4 Shortcut Icon
This topic describes the shortcut icons on the Main Topology.
You can customize the toolbar so that only the frequently-used buttons are displayed on the
toolbar. To customize the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item from the
shortcut menu.
Button Name Description
Workbench Adds the commonly used functions to
the favorites folder.
Exit Exits from the client.
Lock Terminal Locks the current client.
Main Topology Switches to the Main Topology.
Log Out Logs out of the current session.
Full Screen. Views the current window in full
screen.
Browse Current
Alarm
Displays the Current Alarms
window.
SDH Protection
Subnet
Maintenance
Accesses the SDH Protection Subnet
Common Attributes window.
SDH Trail
Management
Accesses the SDH Trail
Management window.
SDH Trail Creation Accesses the SDH Trail Creation
window.
WDM Trail
Management
Accesses the WDM Trail
Management window.
NE Explorer Accesses the NE Explorer window of
the selected NE.
Create Link Creates fiber and radio links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
9
Browse SDH
Performance
Accesses the Browse SDH
Performance window.
Browse WDM
Performance
Accesses the Browse WDM
Performance window.
New Selects Custom View, NESubnet, or
Link from the drop-down list box.
Up Returns to the previous level.
Zoom out Zooms out the Main Topology.
Zoom in Zooms in the Main Topology.
Zoom in Partially Zooms in an area selected in the Main
Topology.
View Move Moves the Main Topology. When you
click this icon, the Main Topology can
be moved. When you click the icon
again, the Main Topology cannot be
moved.
Alarm List Area Views the alarm list area in the lower
part of the Main Topology.
Search NE Searches for an NE in the view.
Select Selects the NE in the Main Topology.
Topology
Navigator
Views the navigation tree in the
Topology.
Filter Tree and
Legend
Opens the setting area of the view to
display the filter plane and legends.
Device Statistics Views the quantity of the equipment on
the network.
Save the Location
of the Current
Submap Icons
Saves the location of the current
submap icons.
Refresh View Refreshes the current view.
Lock View
Unlock View
Locks out the position of an NE icon in
the active view.
Unlocks the position of an NE icon in
the active view.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
10
NE Time
Sychronization
Synchronizes the NE time and NMS
time.
Synchronize
Current Alarms
Synchronizes the current alarms of an
NE.
Browse Current
ALarms
Browses the current alarms of an NE.
Clear ALarm
Indication
Clears the current alarm indications of
an NE.
Refresh NE Panel
Status
Refreshes the NE panel status to make
the NE panel display the latest data.
Back Up NE
Database To SCC
Backs up the NE data to the SCC.
Display/Hide
Extended Slot
Displays or hides the extended slot on
the Extended Slot tab page.
Legend Displays a legend and its description.

1.2.5 Common Shortcut Keys
This topic describes the common shortcut keys. Using shortcut keys, you can increase the
operation efficiency. The shortcut keys include Enter, Ctrl, Esc, and Tab.
Shortcut Key Description
F1 Opens the Help.
Enter Confirms the operation or moves downward to the next line. If the
cursor is on a button, pressing Enter means to confirm the operation.
If the cursor is in the list box, press Enter once and the cursor then
moves downward to the next line.
Esc Closes a dialog box.
Tab Switches between buttons if the cursor is on a button. Switch between
text boxes if the cursor is in the list box.
Ctrl+F Searches resources such as the NEs, subnets, cards, frames, interfaces,
and VLANs in basic and rapid modes by pressing Ctrl+F in all views.
Ctrl+A Selects all NEs or selects all contents in the list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+A to select all NEs. If the cursor is in the list box,
press Ctrl+A to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+C Quickly copies the table texts.
Ctrl+V Pastes the copied data to another text area.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
11
Shortcut Key Description
Alt+F Opens the File menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+E Opens the Edit menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+V Opens the View menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+U Opens the Fault menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+P Opens the Performance menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+C Opens the Configuration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+R Opens the Service menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+I Opens the Inventory menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+S Opens the Administration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+W Opens the Window menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+H Opens the Help menu from the Main Menu.

1.2.6 Main Windows
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. And tells you what you can do in
the windows.
1.2.6.1 Workbench
This topic describes the workbench. After a client is started, the system automatically accesses
the default workbench. The default shortcut icons are displayed on the workbench.
l In the main window of the U2000, click the drop-down button to the right of the icon
and then select Workbench to access the workbench.
l You can do as follows to modify a workbench: Right-click the icon of the workbench and
choose Modify Workbench from the shortcut menu to modify the name or description of
a workbench.
l You can expand and order workbenches to separate the customized workbenches from the
default workbench.
l You can view the description about the function of the workbench in the background picture
of the workbench and press F1 to view the Help. Alternatively, you can choose Help >
Workbench from the shortcut menu to view the Help.
1.2.6.2 Main Topology
This topic describes the items in the Main Topology. All topology management functions can
be accessed through the Main Topology in . These functions include creating topological objects,
subnets, searching for the existing equipment in the network. You can search, view, create, set,
and manage subnets; and search, create, configure, and maintain management functions on trails.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
12
GUI
To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000. If the preceding operation closes the Main
Topology, you can choose Window > Main Topology from the main menu to open the Main
Topology. Figure 1-2 shows the Main Topology of the U2000.
Figure 1-2 Main Topology
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10
11
12

1: Network management
system name
2: Menu bar
You can operate the NM and
the NE with submenu bar,
include configure tasks,
manage tasks and so on.
3: Shortcut button
Click the button, you can
perform a simple task
quickly. For example: exit
NM, lock terminal, log out,
NMS user management, stop
the current alarm sound,
browse alarm, NE explorer,
creating connections,,
browse performance
window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
13
4: Shortcut button
Click the button, you can
perform a simple task quickly
on the Main Topology. For
example: zoom in or zoom
out or refresh or save the
view, show or hide the
navigators, search objects,
see object attributes, lock or
unlock the view.
5: Alarm button bar
The Alarm buttons for
alarms at different severity
levels are in different colors.
You can click the button to
view the number of the
alarms generated on the
current U2000. You can click
the button to view current
alarms. For example:
browsing the alarm list, show
alarm panel.
When the U2000 has
abnormal events, the
Abnormal event indicator
turn to red from green. You
can click the indicator to
view current abnormal
events.
6: NMS status bar
Views the running
information of the NMS. For
example, NMS login, and
loading of each module.
7: Views the current location
of the cursor in the Main
Topology.
8: Physical Map
Views the managed
equipment.
On the Physics Map, you can
perform operations, such as
creating NEs, deleting
topology objects, NE
explorer, creating
connections, browsing
fibers/cables, configuring the
NE data, browse
performance window, and so
on.
9: Views the name which is
set by the current U2000
client, and views the IP
address of the current U2000
server.
10: Views user name of the
logged-in U2000 user
currently.
11: Filter Tree and Legend
In this area, you can set the
display types of the objects in
a view, and view the
descriptions of legends in the
view. To locate an operation
object quickly.
12: Total elapsed time after
the current user is logged in
to the U2000.

1.2.6.3 NE Explorer
The NE Explorer is the main user interface used to manage equipment. In the NE Explorer, a
user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. The NE
Explorer is the main user interface for commissioning and configuration on a per-NE basis. The
NE Explorer contains a Function Tree that makes the operations easy. To display the
configuration window for an object, the user can just select the object and then choose a desired
function in the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
14
NOTE
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.
GUI
l Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
l In the left-hand pane of the Main Topology, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer
from the shortcut menu.
Correlation operation
l Click the in NE Explorer window, display the NE Panel.
l Click the in NE Explorer window, switch to other NE.
1.2.6.4 Clock View
The Clock View provides a visible platform to enable NE clock settings, networkwide clock
synchronization status query, and clock tracing and search functions.
GUI
Access the clock view. In the Main Topology window, select Clock View from the Current
View drop-down list. Select the NE to be queried or configured from the object tree. Figure
1-3 shows the clock view.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
15
Figure 1-3 Clock View

Legends
l By choosing View > Display Setting > Legend from the main menu, you can learn
meanings of various legends in different colors in the Clock View.
l By choosing View > Display Setting > Filter from the main menu, you can display the
required elements in the Clock View based on the filter function.
l The Clock View uses continuous lines to represent the trace relations between NEs. Smaller
number indicates higher priority. The number displayed on the continuous line indicates
the priority of the traceable clock. The Clock View displays the line clock source numbers
only. Internal and tributary clock sources are also numbered, but they are not displayed in
the Clock View.
l The arrow direction in the Clock View indicates the clock tracing direction. For example,
if NE2 points to NE3, it indicates that NE3 traces the clock information transmitted from
NE2, and that NE3 traces the primary PRC NE1-External 1.
l The arrow direction in the Clock View indicates the clock tracing direction.
l An internal clock source is the clock provided by an NE, and has no trace relations with
other NEs. Therefore, internal clock sources are not displayed on the Clock View.
l Tributary clock sources have no relation with the clock sources that are not provided by
the U2000. Therefore, the clock trace relations are not displayed on the Clock View.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
16
l In the Clock View, you can select multiple NEs, right-click, and query the clock
synchronization status or search for clock trace relations.
NOTE
The rule of verifying an invalid clock tracing relation is as follows: First, verify whether a clock source is in the
SSM protocol mode. In the non-SSM protocol mode, verify the status of a clock source. The status directly
determines whether a clock tracing relation is invalid. In the SSM protocol mode, verify the status of a clock
source. If the status is unavailable, it indicates that the clock tracing relation is invalid. If the status is available,
you also need to verify the S1 byte (clock quality). When you manually cancel settings of the quality of the S1
byte and the quality of the S1 byte is unknown, the clock tracing relation is invalid.
1.2.6.5 NE Panel
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors depending on their current status. In
the U2000, most operations such as equipment configuration, monitoring, and maintenance are
performed in the NE Panel window.
GUI
Double-click an NE on the Main Topology to display the NE Panel.
To add a new board, right-click an idle slot and choose a board type.
NOTE
l Choose the Always On Top for the Slot Layout window to always remain on top.
l When a board occupies multiple slots, the slot ID of the main slot is displayed in boldface, and the slot
ID of the slave slot is grayed out.
l In the NE panel, when you click the processing board that is accompanied by an interface board, the
slot ID of this interface board is displayed in orange.
Click the icon on the toolbar, to view the legends of the boards and ports on the right of the
Slot Layout.
To select an operation related to an installed board, right-click the installed board and choose it
from the shortcut menu. For example, right-click an AUX board and choose Path View to display
the detailed path information.
1.2.6.6 Browse Alarm
This topic describes the user interface for viewing the current and history alarms, Alarm Logs.
In this user interface, buttons are provided, such as Filter, Synchronize, Refresh, and
Acknowledge, to help you quickly locate the alarm cause.
GUI
l Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the main menu.
l Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the main menu.
l Choose Fault > Query Alarm Logs from the main menu.
1.2.6.7 Browse Event
In the Browse Event window, you can view events at different levels. This window provides
buttons, such as Filter by Template, Filter and Refresh, to help you to quickly locate the alarm
cause.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
17
GUI
Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the main menu.
1.2.6.8 Browse Performance Window
You can view the current and history performance data, UAT events and performance threshold
crossings.
GUI
Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
18
2 Creating the Network
About This Chapter
NEs and fibers/cables can be managed on the NMS only after their topologies are created.
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet
Network services and protection schemes can be configured only after NEs, optical fibers, and
topology subnets are created.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 2 Creating the Network
19
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet
Network services and protection schemes can be configured only after NEs, optical fibers, and
topology subnets are created.
Item Procedure
Creating NEs Creating a Single NE
Creating NEs in Batches
Configuring the NE Data Manually
Replicating the NE Data
Uploading the NE Data
Creating optical fibers Creating Fibers in the TDM Domain Automatically
Creating Fibers Manually
Creating Virtual Fibers
Creating DCN Communication Cable
Creating topology
subnets
Creating a Topology Subnet

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 2 Creating the Network
20
3 Configuring E-Line Services
About This Chapter
You can configure the E-Line services to realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet
services.
3.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-Line services.
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-Line service differs according to the type of the E-Line
service.
3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports
configure the E-Line services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.6 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on
VLAN Priorities)
In this example, services with a same VLAN ID but different VLAN priorities need to be mapped
to different PWs.
3.7 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on
VLAN Switching)
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by QinQ links
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
21
configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
22
3.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-Line services.
3.1.1 E-Line Services
In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the
point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services.
According to the service transmission mode, the E-Line services can be classified into the
following types:
l UNI-UNI E-Line services
l E-Line services carried by ports
l E-Line services carried by pseudo wires (PWs) (newly created)
l E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities)
l E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
UNI-UNI E-Line Services
Figure 3-1 shows the networking diagram of the UNI-UNI E-Line service.
Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and need to communicate with each other.
Company A and Company B are connected to the same NE. Hence, you can configure the
Ethernet services from the UNI to the UNI to realize the communication between Company A
and Company B.
In this case, the equipment equals a Layer 2 switch, which only exchanges the data of Company
A and Company B. In the uplink direction of the UNI at the two ends, complex traffic
classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used
according to the traffic types.
Figure 3-1 UNI-UNI E-Line services
PSN
Company B
NE2
UNI
UNI
Company A
City 1
NE1
NE4
NE3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
23

E-Line Services Carried by Ports
Figure 3-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by ports.
Branches of Company A are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to communicate with each
other. Hence, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by ports and from the UNI
to the NNI, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A.
In this case, each branch of Company A can use the UNI exclusively. An E-Line service
exclusively occupies all the physical ports on the network across which the E-Line travels. If
the services of the departments of Company A in City 1 need to be isolated from each other, you
can distinguish different services on the same UNI by using the "port+VLANs" mode. On a
single station, in the uplink direction of the UNI at the two ends, complex traffic classification
can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic
types.
Figure 3-2 E-Line services carried by ports
PSN
Company A
City 1
Company A
City 2
UNI NNI NNI UNI
NE1
NE2

E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)
Figure 3-3 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs.
The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to
communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated
from each other. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by PWs and
from the UNI to the NNI, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A or
Company B. In addition, different services are carried by different PWs, realizing the isolation
of the services of Company A from the services of Company B.
The services that are accessed from the UNI are encapsulated and transmitted to the PWs. Then,
the services are transmitted through the tunnel.
The E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs and then to the same
port on the NNI. In this manner, the port resources on the NNI are saved and the bandwidth
utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the UNI, layered QoS configuration can be
performed for data packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
24
Figure 3-3 E-Line services carried by PWs (newly created)
Company A
City2
Tunnel
PW
Company B
Company A
City 1
Company B
PSN
NNI UNI
NE1
NE2
NNI UNI

E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
Figure 3-4 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN priorities). This type of E-Line maps packets with a same VLAN
ID but different VLAN priorities to different PWs.
Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100 but different
VLAN priorities, and need to be transported to a same RNC. Services from NodeB 1 have a
VLAN priority of 3, and services from NodeB 2 have a VLAN priority of 2. To isolate services
from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2, the services are mapped to different PWs based on
Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI before being transported to the RNC.
The services that are received from the UNI are encapsulated into PWs and then carried on
tunnels. In the uplink direction of the UNI, hierarchical QoS configuration can be performed for
data packets.
Figure 3-4 E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities)
NodeB 1
VLAN: 100
PRI: 3
RNC
UNI
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI
UNI
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI NNI
NNI
NNI
NNI
NodeB 2
VLAN: 100
PRI: 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
25
E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
Figure 3-5 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN switching). To transport different NodeBs' services that have a same
VLAN ID but are previously transported to different RNCs to a same RNC, this type of E-Line
enables VLAN switching to isolate the services before they are transported to the RNC.
Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100, and need to
be transported to a same RNC. To isolate services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2,
VLAN switching is required. After VLAN switching, the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 1
remains unchanged, whereas the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 2 is changed to 200.
The services that are received from the UNI are encapsulated into PWs and then carried on
tunnels. In the uplink direction of the UNI, hierarchical QoS configuration can be performed for
data packets.
Figure 3-5 E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
NodeB 1
RNC
UNI
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI
UNI
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI NNI
NNI
NNI
NNI
NodeB 2
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 100
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 200
E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
During the transmission on QinQ links, the packets that carry C-VLAN tags on the user-side
network are added with S-VLAN tags. Then the packets are sent across the network when
carrying two layers of VLAN tags. In this manner, the L2-VPN tunnel which is simple is provided
to the user. Figure 3-6 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by QinQ
links.
The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to
communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated
from each other. The internal VLANs of Company A range from 1 to 100. The internal VLANs
of Company B range from 1 to 200. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are
carried by QinQ links and from the UNI to the NNI, to realize the communication between the
branches of Company A or Company B. Different services are carried by QinQ links with
different VLAN IDs, realizing the isolation of the services of Company A from the services of
Company B and saving the VLAN resources on the packet switching network.
The packets of different companies that are accessed from the UNI are added with different
VLAN IDs and then transmitted on the same link on the NNI.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
26
The E-Line services of different companies are added with a layer of VLAN tags each and then
transmitted to the same port. In this manner, the port resources on the NNI are saved and the
bandwidth utilization is increased. In addition, the E-Line services carried by QinQ links occupy
few VLANs on the packet switching network, saving the VLAN resources on the packet
switching network. You can configure the QinQ policy to realize the QoS for the services carried
by QinQ links.
Figure 3-6 E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Company A
Company B
Company A
City 1
Company B
PSN
An outer tag (VLAN = 40) is
added to the packets of
Company B
NE1
NE2
Intranet of Company A
VLAN = 1-100
Intranet of Company A
VLAN = 1-100
Intranet of Company B
VLAN = 1-200
Intranet of Company B
VLAN = 1-200
An outer tag (VLAN = 30) is
added to the packets of
Company A
City 2
QinQ link

3.1.2 UNI
A UNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the user equipment. A UNI is used for the
user-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
V-UNI
A V-UNI is a virtual user-network interface. Each service on a UNI corresponds to a logical V-
UNI.
A UNI can receive multiple services. That is, a UNI may correspond to multiple V-UNIs.
V-UNI Group
A V-UNI group contains multiple V-UNIs, and limits the total bandwidth of the Ethernet services
received on the member V-UNIs.
For a user or an Ethernet service that has multiple access points, you can add the access points
to a V-UNI group and set a total bandwidth for the V-UNI group. Bandwidth parameters include
committed information rate (CIR), maximum burst size, peak bandwidth, and committed burst
size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
27
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group share the total bandwidth but their bandwidths are limited by the total
bandwidth. To be specific, when the bandwidth of member A does not reach the CIR, member
B can use the remaining bandwidth; when the bandwidths of member A and member B do not
reach the CIR but their sum exceeds the total bandwidth of the V-UNI group, member A and
member B pre-empt the bandwidth based on service priorities.
Multiple V-UNIs on a board can be added to a V-UNI group.
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group can be changed/deleted at any time, and values of bandwidth
parameters can also be modified at any time.
3.1.3 NNI
An NNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the packet transport network. An NNI is
used for the network-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
Based on the modes of carrying services, NNIs can be classified into three types, namely, NNIs
carrying services by ports, NNIs carrying services by PWs, and NNIs carrying services by QinQ
links.
Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by ports, the encapsulation type can be 802.1Q
or QinQ. In this case, the NNIs that an Ethernet service traverses are exclusively occupied. The
other physical ports that the Ethernet service traverses may be shared.
Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by PWs, you need to create static MPLS
tunnels for the NNIs. To create the Ethernet services carried by PWs, you need to create the PWs
first. In this case, different Ethernet services can be encapsulated into different PWs and
transmitted in a tunnel to the same NNI. Therefore, the occupied NNIs are reduced and the
bandwidth utilization is improved.
Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by QinQ links, you need to create QinQ links
for the NNIs. The port attribute and the encapsulation mode of the NNIs corresponding to the
QinQ links are Layer 2 and QinQ, respectively. On a QinQ link, the packets that are accessed
are encapsulated with one layer of VLAN tags in QinQ encapsulation mode at the access ports.
In this manner, multiple packets with different VLAN tags from the user-side network can be
encapsulated into the same VLAN for transport. Therefore, the occupied VLAN resources on
the transport network are reduced. E-Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the
QinQ link on the network side. In this case, the packets of different companies that are accessed
on the user side are added with different VLAN tags and then are transmitted by the same QinQ
link on the network side.
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-Line service differs according to the type of the E-Line
service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
28
3.2.1 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services
You need not configure the NNIs when configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Table 3-1 provides the process for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Figure 3-7 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Create the UNI-UNI
E-Line services
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
29
Table 3-1 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
30
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the
packets are
untagged
frames, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the
packets are
tagged
frames, Tag is
set to Tag
Aware.
If the packets
contain
untagged
frames and
tagged
frames, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
31
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
packet switched
network (PSN)
adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent
link congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Optional) This
operation is
applicable only when
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, DCN
Enabled State
needs to be set to
Disabled for the
UNI.
3 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
4 9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line
Services
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
32
5 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to

3.2.2 E-Line Services Carried by Ports
You need not configure the MPLS tunnel or QinQ link when configuring the E-Line services
carried by ports.
Table 3-2 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by ports.
Figure 3-8 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by ports
Create the E-Line
services carried by
ports
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
33
Table 3-2 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports
St
e
p
Operation Remarks
1 Config
uring
the
UNI
(when
the
UNI is
an
Ethern
et port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General
Attributes of
Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The parameters are set as follows:
l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
When the packets do not need to be distinguished
according to the VLAN tags, Encapsulation Type
is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same as
the working mode of the Ethernet equipment on the
opposite end. Generally, this parameter takes the
default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted, Max
Frame Length(byte) takes the default value 1620.
In other cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted JUMBO
frames.
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Tag needs to be set according to the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets, Tag is set
to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets, Tag is set
to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority parameters need to
be set for the untagged frames. VLAN Priority
needs to be set according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
prevent link congestion. Hence, Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode and Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode need to be set to the default
value Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
34
St
e
p
Operation Remarks
2 Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
(Required) The E-Line services carried by ports occupy
the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you need to set DCN
Enabled State of the NNIs to Disabled.
(Optional) This operation is valid only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The UNI is connected to the external
equipment and thus does not need to transmit the in-
band DCN information. Hence, set DCN Enabled
State of the UNIs to Disabled.
3 9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs
for Ethernet Services
Carried by Ports
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to
4 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set according to
the service QoS planning.
5 9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI
E-Line Services Carried by
Ports
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to
6 9.21 Creating a V-UNI
Group
(Optional) The parameters need to be set according to

3.2.3 E-Line Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
Table 3-3 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
35
Figure 3-9 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs
Configure the UNI
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
the services carried by
the static MPLS tunnel
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Create the E-Line
services carried by
PWs

Table 3-3 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs
1 Configur
ing the
UNI
(when
the UNI
is an
Ethernet
port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q. When the packets do not need to
be distinguished according to the VLAN
tags, Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be
the same as the working mode of the
Ethernet equipment on the opposite end.
Generally, this parameter takes the default
value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte)
takes the default value 1620. In other
cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
36
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
l Tag needs to be set according to the type
of the packets that are transmitted from
the equipment on the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets,
Tag is set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged
packets and tagged packets, Tag is set
to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent link congestion. Hence,
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control
Mode need to be set to the default value
Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port
(Optional) This operation is applicable only
when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
l The UNI is used for connecting the
external equipment and need not transmit
in-band DCN information. Hence,
Enable Port needs to be set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for
Ethernet Services Carried by
Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.
l Set Specify IP Address to Manually, and
set IP Address and IP Mask according to
the service plan.
4 Configur
ing the
MPLS
tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
37
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
l OAM Status is set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode is set to Manual.
l Detection Packet Type is set to FFD.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to
3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS
parameters according to the service planning
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection
Groups.
5 l 9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI
E-Line Services Carried by
PWs on a Per-NE Basis
l 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line
Services Carried by PWs in
End-to-End Mode
Ethernet services carried by PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3 Services.
6 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning.

3.2.4 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ
links.
Table 3-4 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
38
Figure 3-10 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI
for the services
carried by QinQ
links
Configure the QinQ
links
Create the E-Line
services carried by
QinQ links

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
39
Table 3-4 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
40
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the
packets are
untagged
packets, Tag
is set to
Access.
If all the
packets are
tagged
packets, Tag
is set to Tag
Aware.
If the packets
contain
untagged
packets and
tagged
packets, Tag
is set to
Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
41
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
operation is
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, DCN
Enabled State
needs to be set to
Disabled for the
UNI.
3 9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
4 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link (Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
42
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
6 9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services
Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
parameters need to
be set according to

3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services
configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.3.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
On the network shown in Figure 3-11, the service requirements of User A are as follows:
l User A1 and User A2 need to communicate with each other. The services of User A1 are
accessed onto the PSN through the 21-PETF8-1 port. The services of User A2 are accessed
onto the PSN through the 21-PETF8-2 port.
l The services between User A1 and User A2 contain the voice service, video service, and
common Internet access service. The voice service and video service use the fixed
bandwidth whereas the common Internet access service can use all the bandwidth at a burst.
Table 3-5 lists the service requirements.
Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of the UNI-UNI E-Line services
User A1
User A2
NE1
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
UNI: 21-PETF8-2
PSN
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
43
NOTE
This topic considers the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.

Table 3-5 Requirements for the E-Line services
Service Type Requirement
Voice service (VLAN ID=100) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10 Mbit/s
Video service (VLAN ID=200) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40 Mbit/s
Common Internet access service (VLAN
ID=300)
CIR=10 Mbit/s, PIR=50 Mbit/s

3.3.2 Service Planning
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services, you only need to configure the data of the UNIs.
The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2 need to be separated from each other through VLAN tags. In addition, the voice service and
video service use the fixed bandwidths whereas the common Internet access service can use all
the bandwidths at a burst. Hence, different QoS processing operations need to be performed for
different services. Table 3-6 provides the service planning information.
Table 3-6 Planning information of the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Parameter Value Description
Service ID 1, 2, 3 The service ID can be entered
manually.
Service
Direction
UNI-UNI In this example, the UNI-UNI E-
Line services are created.
UNI 21-PETF8-1(Port-1), 21-PETF8-2
(Port-2)
The 21-PETF8-1 port (Port 1)
accesses the E-Line service of User
A1 and the 21-PETF8-2 port (Port
2) accesses the E-Line service of
User A2.
VLANs 100, 200, 300 l The VLAN ID of the voice
service is 100.
l The VLAN ID of the video
service is 200.
l The VLAN ID of the common
Internet access service is 300.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
44
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted BPDU packets are processed as
service packets, which are
processed differently according to
port attributes. When the port
attribute is Tag Aware, BPDU
packets are discarded because they
do not carry any VLAN IDs.
QoS Policy for
Voice Service
Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10000
kbit/s
-
QoS Policy for
Video Service
Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40000
kbit/s
-
QoS Policy for
Common
Internet Access
Service
CIR=10000 kbit/s, PIR=50000
kbit/s
-

3.3.3 Configuration Process
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services is to configure the E-Line services on an NE. This
topic describes how to configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the UNI-
UNI E-Line service.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If the UNI-UNI E-Line service needs to occupy a port exclusively, disable the DCN
function of the port. For the operations for disabling the DCN function of the port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the voice service between User A1 and User A2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the voice service between User A1 and User A2.
Table 3-7 Parameters of the voice service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
45
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-UNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
VLANs 100
VLANs 100
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters for the voice service between User A1 and User
A2.
Table 3-8 QoS parameters of the voice service between User A1 and User A2
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 2 Configure the video service between User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the video service between User A1 and User A2.
Table 3-9 Parameters of the video service between User A1 and User A2
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-UNI
VLANs 200
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
46
VLANs 200
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 3-10 QoS parameters of the video service between User A1 and User A2
CIR(kbit/s) 40000 40000
PIR(kbit/s) 40000 40000

Step 3 Configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2.
Table 3-11 Parameters of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2
Service ID 3
Direction UNI-UNI
VLANs 300
VLANs 300
MTU (bytes) 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
47
Table 3-12 QoS parameters of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000 50000

----End
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports
configure the E-Line services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by ports.
On the network shown in Figure 3-12, the service requirements of User A are as follows:
l User A1 and User A2 need to communicate with each other. The services of User A1 are
accessed onto NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 port. The services of User A2 are accessed
onto NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 port.
l The E-Line services of User A exclusively occupy all the UNIs and physical ports that the
E-Line services traverse on the network.
l The services between User A1 and User A2 contain the voice service, video service, and
common Internet service. The voice service and video service use the fixed bandwidths
whereas the common Internet access service can use all the bandwidths at a burst. Table
3-13 lists the service requirements.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
48
Figure 3-12 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by ports
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
Voice service
(VLAN=100)
Video service
(VLAN=200)
Common Internet
access service
(VLAN=300)
User A2
User A1
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NE1
NE2
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by ports, see 9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.

Table 3-13 Requirements for the E-Line services
Service Type Requirement
Voice service (VLAN ID=100) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10 Mbit/s
Video service (VLAN ID=200) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40 Mbit/s
Common Internet access service (VLAN
ID=300)
CIR=0 Mbit/s, PIR=50 Mbit/s
Total bandwidth 100 Mbit/s

To configure the E-Line services carried by ports, you need to configure the data of the UNI and
the data of the NNI.
The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2 need to be separated from each other through VLAN tags. In addition, the voice service and
video service use the fixed bandwidths whereas the common Internet access service can use all
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
49
the bandwidths at a burst. Hence, different QoS processing operations need to be performed for
different services. Table 3-14 provides the service planning information.
Table 3-14 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by ports
Parameter NE1 NE2 Description
Service ID 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 The service ID can be
entered manually.
Service
Direction
UNI-NNI UNI-NNI In this example, the
UNI-NNI E-Line
services are created.
UNI 21-PETF8-1(Port-1) 21-PETF8-1(Port-1) The 21-PETF8-1 port
(Port 1) of NE1 accesses
the E-Line service of
User A1 and the 21-
PETF8-1 port (Port 2) of
NE2 accessed the E-
Line service of User A2.
VLANs 100, 200, 300 100, 200, 300 l The VLAN ID of the
voice service is 100.
l The VLAN ID of the
video service is 200.
l The VLAN ID of the
common Internet
access service is 300.
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
BPDU packets are
processed as service
packets, which are
processed differently
according to port
attributes. When the
port attribute is Tag
Aware, BPDU packets
are discarded because
they do not carry any
VLAN IDs.
Bearer
Type
Port Port In this example, the E-
Line services are
configured to be carried
by ports from the user
side to the network side.
NNI 3-PEG16-1(Port-1) 3-PEG16-1(Port-1) -
QoS Policy
for Voice
Service
Fixed bandwidth,
CIR=PIR, 10000 kbit/s
Fixed bandwidth,
-
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
50
Parameter NE1 NE2 Description
QoS Policy
for Video
Service
Fixed bandwidth,
Fixed bandwidth,
-
QoS Policy
for
Common
Internet
Access
Service
CIR=0 kbit/s,
PIR=50000 kbit/s
CIR=0 kbit/s,
PIR=50000 kbit/s
-
Total
bandwidth
CIR=50000 kbit/s,
PIR=100000 kbit/s
CIR=50000 kbit/s,
PIR=100000 kbit/s
-

The E-Line services carried by ports need to occupy the NNI ports exclusively. Hence, you need
to disable the DCN function of the NNI ports before configuring the E-Line services.
Prerequisites
NNI E-Line services carried by the ports.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-Line service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy (OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500
II).
l The E-Line services carried by ports need to occupy the NNI ports exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNI ports. If the E-Line services carried by ports
need to occupy the UNI ports, you also need to disable the DCN function of the UNI ports.
For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between
User A1 and User A2.
Tree.
the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
51
Table 3-15 Parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
VLANs 100, 200, 300
Bearer Type Port
Sink Port 3-PEG16-1 (Port-1)
MTU (bytes) 1526

4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters for the E-Line services between User A1 and
User A2.
Table 3-16 QoS parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between
User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2.
----End
Relevant Task
See 3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
E-Line services carried by ports are configured correctly.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
52
3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration
After the E-Line services are configured, the correctness of service configuration should be
verified. The Ethernet OAM function is used to verify the correctness of E-Line service
configuration.
Prerequisites
The E-Line services must be already created.
Context
In the case of UNI-UNI E-Line services, you need not perform the connectivity check by using
the 802.1ag OAM function. By default, the UNI-UNI E-Line services are normal. The
connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line
services carried by ports and QinQ links is the same as the connectivity check method (by using
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-Line services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-Line services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
to configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 OAM of the E-Line services
Unicast tunnel
PW
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance association
MEP
MEP
M A
MD
MD: maintenance domain
M A
MEP: maintenance end point
NE1 NE2
User A1
User B1
User A2
User B2

As shown in the figure, two E-Line services are configured between User A1 and User A2 and
between User B1 and User B2. The two E-Line services are carried and isolated by PWs. To
check whether the two E-Line services are configured correctly, you need to configure the
Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-Line service between User A1 and User A2
as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-Line service between User A1 and
User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
53
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD MD
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-Line service between User A1
and User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD MD
Maintenance Association
Name
MA MA
Relevant Service 1-E-Line-1 1-E-Line-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance end points (MEPs). For the creation method, see
Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA MA
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
CC Status Active Active
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
54

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. Perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
----End
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs
(Newly Created)
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs.
On the network shown in Figure 3-14, the service requirements of User A and User B are as
follows:
l User A1 and User B1 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2 ports
respectively.
respectively.
l The service between User A1 and User A2 is the common Internet access service of which
the CIR is 10 Mbit/s and the PIR is 30 Mbit/s.
l The service between User B1 and User B2 is the data service of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR is 50 Mbit/s.
l The services of User A and User B each are carried on different PW links.
l The two PW links that carry the services of User A and User B share the bandwidth of one
tunnel.
l The services of User A and User B are protected.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
55
Figure 3-14 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs
User A2 User A1
User B1
User B2
UNI for A1:21-PETF8-1
UNI for B1:21-PETF8-2
MPLS Tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI:3-PEG16-2
UNI for A2:21-PETF8-1
UNI for B2:21-PETF8-2
NE 1 NE3 NE2
NNI:3-PEG16-4
NNI:3-PEG16-2
NNI:3-PEG16-1
NNI:3-PEG16-3
NNI:3-PEG16-1
NOTE
product.
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG16-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG16-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
56
NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.

The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs contains the
engineering information for configuring the tunnel carrying the PWs, the engineering
information for configuring the PWs, and the engineering information for configuring the UNI-
NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by a tunnel. Hence, you need to plan the
tunnel during the service planning. Therefore, planning the E-Line services carried by PWs
involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 3-17 and Table 3-18.
l Plan the MPLS Tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-19.
l Plan the MPLS Tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-20.
l Plan the PWs. Refer to Table 3-21.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 3-22.
Table 3-17 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 3-18 Planning information of the tunnels
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
57
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Table 3-19 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, the OAM packet is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
58
Table 3-20 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE
Services are not protected with multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time(100ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Table 3-21 Planning information of the PWs
Parameter PW of User A PW of User B
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
MPLS Tunnel name NE1_NE3_working NE1_NE3_working
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
Request VLAN 10 20

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
59
Table 3-22 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the PWs from the user side
to the network side
Parameter User A User B
Service ID 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
UNI 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
PW ID 35 45
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500 1500

3.5.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
Before configuring E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnels that carry
the PWs.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning information
of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
l If the E-Line services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNI ports exclusively, disable
the DCN function of the UNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a
port, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode and
configure tunnels for carrying PWs.
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
nal
Unprotect
ed
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
60
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
nal
Unprotect
ed

MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM and configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
61
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS and configure MPLS tunnel
APS.
Protection Type 1+1
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE

Step 4 Configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2 in end-to-end
mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic attributes of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
62
Table 3-27 Parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Configure the source NE and sink NE of the PWE3 service.
a. Under Node List, click Configure Source And Sink. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
b. Select the source NE from Physical Topology on the left.
c. Set the SAI attributes of the E-Line service in SAI Configuration. Then, click Add
Node.
Table 3-28 Parameters of the service ports between User A1 and User A2
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100

4. Click the PW tab and set the basic attributes of the PW.
Table 3-29 Parameters of the PW between User A1 and User A2
PW ID 35
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
63
5. Click Detail, set the Advanced attributes of the PW.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the parameters of the PW QoS.
Table 3-30 Parameters of the service bandwidth between User A1 and User A2
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes of the PW.
Table 3-31 Parameters of the advanced attributes of the PW between User A1 and User
A2
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 10
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19
Configuring the NE-Level TPID.

6. Click OK.
Step 5 Configure the data service between User A1 and User A2 in end-to-end mode.
Configure the data service between User B1 and User B2 according to Step 4.
Table 3-32 Parameters of the E-Line services between User B1 and User B2
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
64
Table 3-33 Parameters of the service ports between User B1 and User B2
Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 100

Table 3-34 Parameters of the PW between User B1 and User B2
PW ID 45
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30

Table 3-35 Parameters of the service bandwidth between User B1 and User B2
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
65
Table 3-36 Parameters of the advanced attributes of the PW between User B1 and User B2
Request VLAN 20
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

----End
Relevant Task
See 3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services to check whether the E-Line services carried by PWs are
configured correctly.
3.5.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
Before configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnels that
carry the PWs.
Prerequisites
NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
l If the UNI-NNI E-Line services need to occupy the UNI ports exclusively, disable the DCN
function of the UNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure tunnels that carry PWs. For the configuration procedures,
see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
nal
Unprotect
ed
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
66
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel OAM. For the configuration procedures, see
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM.
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
67
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Step 3 On NE1 and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel APS. For the configuration procedures, see 9.7
Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Protection Type 1+1
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE

Step 4 On NE1, configure the E-Line services of User A1.
Tree.
the E-Line services of User A1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
68
Table 3-41 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User A1
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

3. Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the PW
parameters.
Table 3-42 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User A1
General Attributes PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring
the NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
69
5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A1.
Table 3-43 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A1
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000

Step 5 On NE1, configure the E-Line services of User B1.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services of User B1.
Table 3-44 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User B1
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

Table 3-45 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User B1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
70
Port
30
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

Table 3-46 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User B1
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

Step 6 On NE3, configure the E-Line services of User A2 and User B2.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services of User A2 and User B2.
Table 3-47 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User A2
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1500
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
71
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

Table 3-48 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User A2
Port
20
Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

Table 3-49 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A2
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
72

Table 3-50 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User B2
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

Table 3-51 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User B2
Direction Bidirectional
PW Ingress Label 30
PW Egress Label 30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
73
Table 3-52 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User B2
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
l End-to-end PW-carried E-Line services have been configured.
l If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for
PWE3 Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click Run.
Step 5 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether the service
is available.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
74
NOTE
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the service is
available. If testing packet loss fails, troubleshoot it by referring to Troubleshooting Service Packet Loss.
----End
(Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
In this example, services with a same VLAN ID but different VLAN priorities need to be mapped
to different PWs.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs
(network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
On the network shown in Figure 3-15, services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have
a same VLAN ID, and need to be mapped to different PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI before being transported to the RNC. Service requirements are as follows:
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 are transported to NE1 through the 21-
PEFF8-1 and 21-PEFF8-2 ports respectively.
l NE3 converges services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2, and transports the services to the
RNC.
l Services from NodeB 1 are common Internet access services of which the CIR is 10 Mbit/
l Services from NodeB 2 are data services of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50
Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 1 have a VLAN ID of 100 and VLAN priorities of 3, 4, and 5; services
from NodeB 2 have a VLAN ID of 100 and a VLAN priority of 2. Services from NodeB
1 and NodeB 2 are mapped to two PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI.
l Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are protected by tunnel APS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
75
Figure 3-15 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment
based on VLAN priorities)
NodeB 1
VLAN ID: 100
PRI: 3, 4, 5
RNC
UNI for NodeB 1: 21-PEFF8-1
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
UNI for RNC: 3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI: 3-PEG8-4
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NNI: 3-PEG8-3
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NodeB 2
VLAN ID: 100
PRI: 2
NOTE
product.
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for the Ethernet services
NE1 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
76
NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE must not be in the same network segment.

The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN priorities) contains the engineering information for configuring the
tunnels carrying the PWs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by tunnels. Therefore, you need to plan the
tunnels during the service planning. Planning the E-Line services carried by PWs involves the
following:
l Plan the tunnels that carry the PWs. Refer to Table 3-53 and Table 3-54.
l Plan MPLS tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-55.
l Plan MPLS tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-56.
NOTE
The E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities) do not apply to the
following scenarios:
l Service Tag Role is User; the service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG.
l PWs are in Ethernet tagged mode; Service Tag Role is Service. In addition:
l The service that a UNI receives contains a C-TAG, and the TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x8100, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x88A8, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x8100.
Table 3-53 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
77
Table 3-54 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
78
Protection Type 1+1
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.

Table 3-57 Parameter planning for the PWs
Parameter NodeB 1 PW NodeB 2 PW
PW ID 35 45
Port
20 30
Port
20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
79
Request VLAN 10 20
TPID 0x88A8 0x88A8

Table 3-58 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Parameter NodeB 1 NodeB 2 RNC
Service ID 1 2 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2 E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Service Tag
Role
User User User User
UNI 21-PEFF8-1 21-PEFF8-2 3-PEG8-3 3-PEG8-3
VLANs 100 100 100 100
PRI 3, 4, 5 2 3, 4, 5 2
Bearer Type PW PW PW PW
PW ID 35 45 35 45
BPDU Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500 1500 1500 1500

This section describes how to configure E-Line services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service plan of the E-Line
services carried by PWs (in the scenario of network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
Procedure
Step 1 See 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode to configure a tunnel for
carrying PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
80
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 See 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM to configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
81
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Step 3 See 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS to configure MPLS tunnel APS.
Protection Type 1+1
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE

Step 4 Configure common Internet access services on NodeB 1 in end-to-end mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
82
2. Set general attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1.
Table 3-63 General attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1

3. Configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service.
a. On the Node List tag page, click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is
displayed.
b. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
c. In SAI Configuration, set the parameters for the service port on NodeB 1 and click
Add Node.
Table 3-64 Parameters for the service port on NodeB 1
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Priority Type 802.1p
Priority Field 3,4,5
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Priority Field 3,4,5

4. Click the PW tab, and set the general attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
Table 3-65 General attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
PW ID 35
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
83

5. Click Detail and set the advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 1.
Table 3-66 QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 1
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes for the PW on
NodeB 1.
Table 3-67 Advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE

c. Click the Service Parameter tab and set the service tags for NodeB 1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
84
Table 3-68 Service tags for NodeB 1
Source Service Tag User
Sink Service Tag User

6. Click OK.
Step 5 Configure data services on NodeB 2 in end-to-end mode.
See Step 4 to configure data services on NodeB 2.
Table 3-69 General attributes for the data services on NodeB 2
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2

Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Priority Field 2
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Priority Field 2

PW ID 45
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
85
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30

CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
86

----End
Related Task
This topic describes the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
Prerequisites
of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure the tunnels that carry the PWs. For the configuration
procedures, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
87
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
88
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Protection Type 1+1
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE

Step 4 On NE1, configure an E-Line service for NodeB 1.
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the displayed
parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
89
Table 3-79 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs of NodeB 1
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 21-PEFF8-1
Source VLANs 100
PRI 3, 4, 5
Bearer Type PW

parameters.
Table 3-80 PW parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
General
Attributes
PW ID 35
PW Incoming Label/Source Port 20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Advance
d
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
90
Other parameters Default Values

5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1.
Table 3-81 QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

Refer to Step 4 and configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source VLANs 100
PRI 2
Bearer Type PW

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
91
Tunnel Type MPLS
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Step 6 On NE3, configure an E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC, and an E-Line service
between NodeB 2 and the RNC.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
92
Table 3-85 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source Port 3-PEG8-3
Source VLANs 100
PRI 3, 4, 5
Bearer Type PW

Table 3-86 PW parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
93
Table 3-87 QoS parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source VLANs 100
PRI 2
Bearer Type PW

Port
30
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
94
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
Level TPID.

PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

----End
Relevant Task
3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services
After configuring E-Line services, verify the E-Line services by using the SmartBits.
Prerequisites
l E-Line services carried by PWs are configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
95
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
SmartBits and U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 3-16 shows the connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs.
Figure 3-16 Connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs
21-PEFF8-1
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
SmartBits SmartBits
NOTE
In this example, the SmartBits devices are connected to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 (source) and 3-PEG8-3 on
NE3 (sink). In actual situations, determine the source and sink as required, and follow the same testing
procedure.

Context
CAUTION
l During a test, only test personnel are allowed in the testing environment.
l Exercise caution when touching cables and optical fibers.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SmartBits devices to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 and 3-PEG8-3 on NE3.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. See Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE
to start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring on NE1 and NE3.
NOTE
The performance monitoring tasks help analyze and locate a problem during the test.
Step 3 Use the SmartBits devices to perform a packet transmitting and receiving test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
96
NOTE
l Packets whose bytes are all 0s are considered as special packets. Do not use those packets for a packet
transmitting and receiving test.
l In the first packet transmitting and receiving period, learning the MAC addresses of the packets may
cause packet loss.
l If the service is normal, the number of received packets is equal to the number of transmitted packets.
If it is a VLAN-based service that involves VLAN switching, check whether VLAN switching functions
properly for transmitted and received packets.
l If packet loss occurred, rectify the fault. Then, perform 24-hour tests until no packet loss occurs.
----End
(Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
for each NE according to the networking diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs
(network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
On the network shown in Figure 3-17, services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have
a same VLAN ID, and need VLAN switching before being transported to the RNC. Service
requirements are as follows:
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 are transported to NE1 through the 21-
PEFF8-1 and 21-PEFF8-2 ports respectively.
l NE3 converges services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2, and transports the services to the
RNC.
l Services from NodeB 1 are common Internet access services of which the CIR is 10 Mbit/
l Services from NodeB 2 are data services of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50
Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100, and are
mapped to two PWs. After VLAN switching, the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 1
remains unchanged, whereas the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 2 is changed to 200.
l Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are protected by tunnel APS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
97
Figure 3-17 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment
based on VLAN switching)
NodeB 1
RNC
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI: 3-PEG8-4
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NNI: 3-PEG8-3
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NodeB 2
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 100
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 200
NOTE
product.
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for the Ethernet services
NE1 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
98

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE must not be in the same network segment.

The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN switching) contains the engineering information for configuring the
tunnels carrying the PWs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by tunnels. Therefore, you need to plan the
tunnels during the service planning. Planning the E-Line services carried by PWs involves the
following:
l Plan the tunnels that carry the PWs. Refer to Table 3-91 and Table 3-92.
l Plan MPLS tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-93.
l Plan MPLS tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-94.
NOTE
The E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching) do not apply to the
following scenarios:
l Service Tag Role is User; the service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG.
l PWs are in Ethernet tagged mode; Service Tag Role is ServiceIn addition:
l The service that a UNI receives contains a C-TAG, and the TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x8100, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x88A8, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x8100.
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
99
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
100
Protection Type 1+1
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE

Table 3-95 Parameter planning for the PWs
PW ID 35 45
Port
20 30
Port
20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
101
Request VLAN 10 20
TPID 0x8100 0x8100

Paramete
r
NodeB 1 NodeB 2 RNC
Service ID 1 2 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2 E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Service
Tag Role
User Service User Service
UNI 21-PEFF8-1 21-PEFF8-2 3-PEG8-3 3-PEG8-3
VLANs 100 100 100 200
Bearer
Type
PW PW PW PW
PW ID 35 45 35 45
BPDU Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU
(bytes)
1500 1500 1500 1500

This section describes how to configure E-Line services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service plan of the E-Line
services carried by PWs (in the scenario of network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
Procedure
Step 1 See 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode to configure a tunnel for
carrying PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
102
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 See 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM to configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
103
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Step 3 See 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS to configure MPLS tunnel APS.
Protection Type 1+1
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE

Step 4 Configure common Internet access services on NodeB 1 in end-to-end mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
104
2. Set general attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1.
Table 3-101 General attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1

3. Configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service.
a. On the Node List tag page, click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is
displayed.
c. In SAI Configuration, set the parameters for the service port on NodeB 1 and click
Add Node.
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100

4. Click the PW tab, and set the general attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
PW ID 35
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
105

5. Click Detail and set the advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB1.
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes for the PW on
NodeB 1.
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE

c. Click the Service Parameter tab and set the service tags for NodeB 1.

6. Click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
106
Step 5 Configure data services on NodeB 2 in end-to-end mode.
See Step 4 to configure data services on NodeB 2.
Table 3-107 General attributes for the data services on NodeB 2
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2

Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 200

PW ID 45
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
107
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Reverse CIR (kbit/s) Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

Source Service Tag Service
Sink Service Tag Service

----End
Related Task
E-Line services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
This topic describes the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
108
Prerequisites
of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure the tunnels that carry the PWs. For the configuration
procedures, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
tional
Unprot
ected

MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
109
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
3.3

Protection Type 1+1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
110
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE

Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the displayed
parameters.
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
111
General
Attributes
PW ID 35
Tunnel Type MPLS
Advance
d
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
Level TPID.

5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1.
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

Refer to Step 4 and configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
112
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role Service
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

Tunnel Type MPLS
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
113
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Step 6 On NE3, configure an E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC, and an E-Line service
between NodeB 2 and the RNC.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services.
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
114
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID.

PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
Service Tag Role Service
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
115
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source VLANs 200
Bearer Type PW

Port
30
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
Level TPID.

PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
116
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

----End
Relevant Task
E-Line services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
After configuring E-Line services, verify the E-Line services by using the SmartBits.
Prerequisites
l E-Line services carried by PWs are configured.
SmartBits and U2000
Figure 3-18 shows the connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs.
Figure 3-18 Connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs
21-PEFF8-1
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
SmartBits SmartBits
NOTE
In this example, the SmartBits devices are connected to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 (source) and 3-PEG8-3 on
NE3 (sink). In actual situations, determine the source and sink as required, and follow the same testing
procedure.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
117
Context
CAUTION
l During a test, only test personnel are allowed in the testing environment.
l Exercise caution when touching cables and optical fibers.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SmartBits devices to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 and 3-PEG8-3 on NE3.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. See Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE
to start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring on NE1 and NE3.
NOTE
The performance monitoring tasks help analyze and locate a problem during the test.
Step 3 Use the SmartBits devices to perform a packet transmitting and receiving test.
NOTE
l Packets whose bytes are all 0s are considered as special packets. Do not use those packets for a packet
transmitting and receiving test.
l In the first packet transmitting and receiving period, learning the MAC addresses of the packets may
cause packet loss.
l If the service is normal, the number of received packets is equal to the number of transmitted packets.
If it is a VLAN-based service that involves VLAN switching, check whether VLAN switching functions
properly for transmitted and received packets.
l If packet loss occurred, rectify the fault. Then, perform 24-hour tests until no packet loss occurs.
----End
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by
QinQ links
configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links.
On the network shown in Figure 3-19, the service requirements of User A and User B are as
follows:
respectively.
respectively.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
118
l The services of user A and User B must be isolated from each other. The internal VLAN
IDs of the services of User A range from 1 to 100. The internal VLAN IDs of the services
of User B range from 1 to 200.
l Different S-VLAN IDs need to be added to the services of User A and User B on the network
side, thus realizing the service isolation. The S-VLAN of 30 is added to the services of User
A and the S-VLAN of 40 is added to the services of User B.
l The service between User A1 and User A2 is the common Internet access service of which
the CIR is 10 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50 Mbit/s.
l The service between User B1 and User B2 is the data service of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/
Figure 3-19 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
User A2
User A1
User B1
User B2
PSN
NE 1
NE2
Intranet of User A
C-VLAN =1 to 100
Intranet of User A
C-VLAN =1 to 100
Intranet of User B
C-VLAN =1 to 200
Intranet o User B
C-VLAN =1 to 200
The S-VLAN ID of 30 is added
to the packets of User A.
V-UNI for User A1: 21-PETF8-1
V-UNI for User B1: 21-PETF8-2
NNI : 3-PEG16-1
V-UNI for User A2: 21-PETF8-1
V-UNI for User B2: 21-PETF8-2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
The S-VLAN ID of 40 is added
to the packets of User B.
NOTE
product.
carried by QinQ links, see 9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
119
The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links contains
the engineering information for configuring the QinQ links carrying the E-Line services and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links.
The E-Line services need to be carried by QinQ links. Hence, the service planning includes the
planning of the QinQ links. Planning the E-Line services carried by QinQ links involves the
following:
l Plan the QinQ links that carry the E-Line services. Refer to Table 3-129.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links. Refer to Table 3-130.
Table 3-129 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the QinQ links
Parameter User A(NE1-NE2) User B(NE1-NE2)
QinQ Link ID 1 2
Board 3-PEG16 3-PEG16
Port 1 (NE1, NE2) 1 (NE1, NE2)
S-Vlan ID 30 40
Committed Information Rate
(kbit/s)
10000 30000
Peak Information Rate(kbit/
s)
50000 50000

Table 3-130 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the QinQ links from the
user side to the network side
Parameter User A User B
Service ID 1 1
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
UNI 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-100 1-200
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1 2
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
120

Before configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links, you need to configure the QinQ
links.
Prerequisites
NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links.
l The QinQ links must be configured on NE1 and NE2. For the configuration method, see
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1.
Tree.
the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1.
Table 3-131 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 1-100
Bearer Type QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1

4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of
User A1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
121
Table 3-132 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

Step 2 On NE1, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1.
Table 3-133 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-200
QinQ Link ID 2

Table 3-134 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
122

Step 3 On NE2, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2 and User B2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2 and User
B2.
Table 3-135 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 1-100
QinQ Link ID 1

Table 3-136 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

Table 3-137 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B2
Service ID 2
Direction UNI-NNI
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
123
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-200
QinQ Link ID 2

Table 3-138 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B2
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

----End
Relevant Task
E-Line services carried by QinQ links are configured correctly.
After the E-Line services are configured, the correctness of service configuration should be
verified. The Ethernet OAM function is used to verify the correctness of E-Line service
configuration.
Prerequisites
The E-Line services must be already created.
Context
In the case of UNI-UNI E-Line services, you need not perform the connectivity check by using
the 802.1ag OAM function. By default, the UNI-UNI E-Line services are normal. The
connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
124
This topic considers the E-Line services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-Line services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
to configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 3-20.
Figure 3-20 OAM of the E-Line services
Unicast tunnel
PW
MEP
MEP
MEP
MEP
M A
MD
M A
NE1 NE2
User A1
User B1
User A2
User B2

As shown in the figure, two E-Line services are configured between User A1 and User A2 and
between User B1 and User B2. The two E-Line services are carried and isolated by PWs. To
check whether the two E-Line services are configured correctly, you need to configure the
Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-Line service between User A1 and User A2
as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-Line service between User A1 and
User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD MD
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-Line service between User A1
and User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
125
Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA MA
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance end points (MEPs). For the creation method, see
Creating an MEP.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA MA
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. Perform the CC test. For the test method, see
NOTE
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
126
4 Configuring E-LAN Services
About This Chapter
You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of
Ethernet services.
4.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-LAN services.
4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-LAN service differs according to the type of the E-LAN
service.
4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
configure the E-LAN services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ links
configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
127
4.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-LAN services.
4.1.1 E-LAN Services
As shown in the networking topology, the E-LAN services are multipoint-to-multipoint services.
The equipment realizes the multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of Ethernet services through
the E-LAN.
According to the service transmission mode on the network side, the E-LAN services can be
classified into the following types:
l E-LAN services carried by ports
l E-LAN services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
Figure 4-1 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Three user-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the operator network through the
FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each other.
You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different user-
side networks.
You need to configure the services to be carried by ports on the network side to realize the
transmission of the Ethernet services from the user side. In the uplink direction of the user side
on each NE node, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets and different
QoS policies can be used according to the traffic types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
128
Figure 4-1 E-LAN services carried by ports
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
UNI
NNI
NNI

E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
Figure 4-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Three network-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the operator network through
the FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each
other. You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different
users.
On the network side, the accessed user services are carried by PWs after PW encapsulation, and
then are transmitted through the tunnel. In this manner, the transmission of Ethernet services is
realized. In the uplink direction of the user side on each NE node, complex traffic classification
can be performed for data packets and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic
types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
129
Figure 4-2 E-LAN services carried by PWs
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW

E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
Figure 4-3 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Three network-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the supplier network through
the FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each
other. You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different
user-side networks.
On the network side, the Ethernet services are transmitted over QinQ links. When the services
are carried by QinQ links, the packets that carry C-VLAN tags from the user-side network are
added with the S-VLAN header of the transport network. That is, the packets from the user-side
network traverse the transport network, carrying two layers of tags. In the uplink direction of
the user side on each NE node, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets
and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
130
Figure 4-3 E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN
QinQ link

4.1.2 UNI
V-UNI
UNI.
V-UNI Group
size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
131
4.1.3 NNI
links.
4.1.4 Split Horizon Group
A split horizon group consists of some specified ports. The ports in one split horizon group
cannot forward packets to each other.
To better isolate E-LAN services and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service loop,
you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
Figure 4-4 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west NNI ports and service access ports are
configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured
at NE1, a broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west NNI ports can
forward packets to each other. If a split horizon group is configured at NE1 and the east and
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
132
west NNI ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west NNI
ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.
Figure 4-4 Service model that applies a split horizon group
NE1
NE3
NE2
NE4
BSC
Split horizon group
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB

4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-LAN service differs according to the type of the E-LAN
service.
4.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
You need to configure the NNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-LAN services carried
by ports.
Table 4-1 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
133
Figure 4-5 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
by ports
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
ports
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
134
Table 4-1 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
135
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
136
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Required) The E-
LAN services carried
by ports occupy the
NNIs exclusively.
Hence, you need to
set Enable State of
the NNIs to
Disabled.
(Optional) This
operation is valid
only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The
UNI is connected to
the external
equipment and thus
does not need to
transmit the in-band
DCN information.
Hence, set Enable
State of the UNIs to
Disabled.
Services Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
137
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
5 9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services
Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
parameters need to
be set according to

4.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-2 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
138
Figure 4-6 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
by static MPLS
tunnel
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Configure the E-LAN
services carried by
PWs

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
139
Table 4-2 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs
1 Configur
ing the
UNI
(when
the UNI
is an
Ethernet
port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q. When the packets do not need to
be distinguished according to the VLAN
tags, Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be
the same as the working mode of the
Ethernet equipment on the opposite end.
Generally, this parameter takes the default
value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte)
takes the default value 1620. In other
cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
l Tag needs to be set according to the type
of the packets that are transmitted from
the equipment on the opposite end. If all
the packets are untagged packets, Tag is
set to Access. If all the packets are tagged
packets, Tag is set to Tag Aware. If the
packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent link congestion. Hence,
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control
Mode need to be set to the default value
Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
140
2 Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port
(Optional) This operation is applicable only
when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
l The UNI is used for connecting the
external equipment and need not transmit
in-band DCN information. Hence,
Enable Port needs to be set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for
Ethernet Services Carried by
Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.
4 Configur
ing the
MPLS
tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to
3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS
parameters according to the service planning
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection
Groups.
5 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service QoS planning.
6 l 9.10.2 Creating E-LAN
Services Carried by PWs on
a Per-NE Basis
l 9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN
Services Carried by PWs in
End-to-End Mode
Ethernet services carried by PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3 Services.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
141
4.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ
links.
Table 4-3 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Figure 4-7 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Confiure the NNI for
by QinQ links
Configure the QinQ
links
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
QinQ links

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
142
Table 4-3 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
143
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
When
Encapsulation
Type is set to
QinQ, the Tag
parameter cannot
be set.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
144
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
operation is
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, Enable
Port needs to be
set to Disabled
for the UNI.
Services Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
4 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link The parameters need
to be set according to
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
145
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
6 9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Carried by QinQ Links
The parameters need
parameters need to
be set according to

4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by
Ports
configure the E-LAN services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by ports.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-8, the service requirements of each customer edge (CE)
are as follows:
l CE1, CE2, and CE3 are connected to NE1, NE2, and NE3 through the 21-PETF8-1 ports
on NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively.
l Three types of services, which are the voice service (VLAN=100), data service
(VLAN=200), and common Internet access service (VLAN=300) in the descending order
of priority, are configured between the three CE networks.
l The voice service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 10 Mbit/s.
l The data service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 40 Mbit/s.
l In the case of the normal Internet access service, the CIR is 0 Mbit/s and the PIR is 100
Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
146
Figure 4-8 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by ports
NE 1
FE
NE 2
NE 3
CE 2
FE
FE
CE 1
CE 3
UNI for CE1: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-1
PSN
NOTE
product.

The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by ports contains the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs and the engineering information for
configuring the NNIs.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by ports. Hence, you need to plan the parameters
related to the ports.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by ports involves the following:
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by ports. Refer to Table 4-4.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-5.
l Plan the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-6.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
147
l Plan the QoS of each NE. Refer to Table 4-7.
NOTE
You can set one split horizon group for each E-LAN service.
You need to configure the NNI of each node with a split horizon group to prevent the data from being
forwarded between the UNIs, which may result in a broadcast storm.
You can set the unknown frames to be broadcast.
Table 4-4 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Name E-LAN E-LAN E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled Enabled
MAC Address
Learning Mode
IVL IVL IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Table 4-5 Planning information of the UNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Table 4-6 Planning information of the NNI
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2
3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2
3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

Table 4-7 Planning information of the QoS
Parameter voice service data service common Internet
access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
148
You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by ports according
to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
LAN services carried by the ports.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-LAN service planning. For the
II).
l The E-LAN services carried by ports need to occupy the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNIs. If the E-LAN services carried by ports need
to occupy the UNIs exclusively, you also need to disable the DCN function of the UNIs.
For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-8 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Service ID 1
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
149
Table 4-9 Parameters of the UNIs
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. Set the parameters of the NNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 4-10 Parameters of the NNIs
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

5. Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the split horizon group. After setting the
parameters, click OK.
Table 4-11 Parameters of the split horizon group
Selected Interfaces 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-12 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
150
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Service ID 2
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

3-PEG16-2

Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
151
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Service ID 3
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

3-PEG16-2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
152

Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

----End
Relevant Task
See 4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the
E-LAN services carried by ports are configured correctly.
4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration
Prerequisites
The E-LAN services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-LAN services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-LAN services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 4-9.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
153
Figure 4-9 OAM of the E-LAN services
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
MD 1
MA 1
MEP
MEP
Tunnel
PW

As shown in the figure, the E-LAN services are configured between CE1, CE2, and CE3. The
services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-LAN services are configured
correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-LAN
service between CE1 and CE2 as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-LAN service between CE1 and CE2.
For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-LAN service between CE1 and
CE2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
154
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Relevant Service 1-E-Lan-1 1-E-Lan-1
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the MEPs. For the creation method, see Creating an MEP.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA 1 MA
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. perform the CC test. For the test method, see
NOTE
----End
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
155
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-10, the service requirements of each CE are as follows:
Mbit/s.
Figure 4-10 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
NE 1
FE
NE 2
NE 3
CE 2
FE
FE
CE 1
CE 3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
MPLS
Tunnel 1
MPLS Tunnel 3
MPLS Tunnel 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
156
NOTE
product.

NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.3.2 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.3.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs contains the
information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and
the engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by the PWs.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by PWs. Hence, you need to plan the parameters
related to the PWs and the MPLS tunnel.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by PWs involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 4-23.
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 4-24.
l Plan the PW on the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-26.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
157
NOTE
Table 4-23 Planning information of the tunnel carrying the PWs
Par
am
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Tun
nel
ID
1 2 3 4 2 1 5 6 6 5 4 3
Tun
nel
Na
me
NE1
-
NE2
#1
NE2
-
NE1
#1
NE1
-
NE3
#3
NE3
-
NE1
#3
NE2
-
NE1
#1
NE1
-
NE2
#1
NE2
-
NE3
#2
NE3
-
NE2
#2
NE3
-
NE2
#2
NE2
-
NE3
#2
NE3
-
NE1
#3
NE1
-
NE3
#3
Nod
e
Typ
e
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egre
ss
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ban
dwi
dth
(kbi
t/s)
100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
-
In
Boa
rd/
Log
ic
Inte
rfac
e
Typ
e
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PEG
16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
In
Port
- 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 - 1
In
Lab
el
- 17 - 19 - 16 - 21 - 20 - 18
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
158
Par
am
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Out
Boa
rd/
Log
ic
Inte
rfac
e
Typ
e
3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
-
Out
Port
1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 - 1 -
Out
Lab
el
16 - 18 - 17 - 20 - 21 - 19 -
Nex
t
Hop
Add
ress
18.1
.1.2
- 18.1
.3.1
- 18.1
.1.1
- 18.1
.2.2
- 18.1
.2.1
- 18.1
.3.2
-
Sou
rce
Nod
e
- 130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
1
- 130.
0.0.
3
-130
.0.0.
18.1
.1.2
- 130.
0.0.
1
Sink
Nod
e
130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
1
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
1
-

Table 4-24 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-LAN-1 E-LAN-2 E-LAN-3
Self-Learning MAC
Address
MAC Address
Learning Mode
SVL SVL SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
159
Table 4-25 Planning information of the UNIs
VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Paramete
r
NE1 NE2 NE3
PW ID 10 11 20 21 30 31
PW
Signaling
Type
Static Static Static Static Static Static
PW Type Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
PW
Direction
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
PW
Incoming
Label/
Source
Port
20 30 20 40 40 30
PW
Outgoing
Label/
Sink Port
21 31 21 41 41 31
Peer LSR
ID
130.0.0.2 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.1
Tunnel
No.
Tunnel 1 Tunnel 3 Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 3
Request
VLAN
10 30 10 20 20 30

access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
160
access service
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

This section describes how to configure E-LAN services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
LAN services carried by the PWs.
l The tunnels that carry the PWs must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the
configuration method, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy(OptiX OSN 3500).
l If the E-LAN services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Basic Attribute tab, set the parameters of the VPLS services.
Table 4-28 Basic attributes of the VPLS services
Service Name E-LAN
Signal Type LDP
Networking Mode Full-Mesh VPLS
Service Type Service VPLS

Step 3 Select the VPLS service nodes.
1. On the right of "Node List", choose Add > NPE. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
2. In Physical Topology, select NE1, NE2, and NE3.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the VPLS service nodes.
1. In "Node List", select an NE. Then, click Detail.
2. Click the VSI Configuration tab and set the relevant parameters of the VPLS service nodes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
161
Table 4-29 Parameters of the VPLS services
MTU 1526
Tag Type C-Awared
MAC Address Learning Enable
Learning Mode Unqualify(SVL)
Enable BPDU Transparent Transmission Not Transparently Transmitted

Step 5 Select the tunnel for carrying the VPLS services.
1. Click the PW Configuration tab and select the PW between NE1 and NE2.
2. Click Modify. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the PW parameters.
3. Refer to steps a and b and set the PW between NE2 and NE3 and the PW between NE1
and NE3.
Table 4-30 PW parameters
NE1-NE2 NE2-NE3 NE1-NE3
Genera
l
PW ID 10 21 31
In Label 20 40 30
Out Label 20 40 30
Advanc
ed
In Tunnel Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 3
Encapsulati
on Type
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Request
VLAN ID
10 20 30
Other
parameters
Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.

Step 6 Configure the service access ports.
1. Click the SAI Configuration tab and select NE1 in "Node List".
2. Click Create. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters of the service ports.
3. Refer to steps a and b and set the service access ports on NE2 and NE3.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
162
Table 4-31 Parameters of the service ports
Parame
ter
Value in This Example
NE1 NE2 NE3
Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN
ID
100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Step 7 Configure QoS.
1. Click the SAI QoS tab.
2. Select the ports for which you need to configure QoS and then set the QoS parameters.
Table 4-32 Parameters of the service ports
NE1 NE2 NE3
Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
Direction Ingress Ingress Ingress
Global QoS
Policy Template
Note: Select the global QoS policy template that is already configured.
Bandwidth Limit Enable Enable Enable
CIR(kbit/s) 50000 50000 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000 100000 100000

----End
Relevant Task
services are configured correctly.
You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by PWs according to
the engineering information.
Prerequisites
LAN services carried by the PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
163
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy(OptiX OSN 3500).
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Tree.
the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-33 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Service ID 1
Service Name E-LAN-1
Tag Type C-Awared
MAC Address Learning Mode SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526
MAC Address Withdrawal Disabled

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click New. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the
parameters of the PWs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
164
Table 4-35 Parameters of the PWs
General Attributes PW ID 10 11
PW Type Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Incoming
Label/Source Port
20 30
PW Outgoing
Label/Sink Port
20 30
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1-NE2#1 NE1-NE3#3
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.3
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10 30
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.

Selected Interfaces PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 10)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 11)

7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-37 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
165
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Service ID 2
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526
MAC Address Withdrawal Disabled

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
166
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20 40
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20 40
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10 20
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-Level
TPID.


Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
167
Service ID 3
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
40 30
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
40 30
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.1
NOTE
TPID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
168


Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-LAN services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete Ethernet services to complete Ethernet services.
See 4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the E-LAN services
carried by PWs are configured correctly.
4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration
Prerequisites
l End-to-end PW-carried E-LAN services have been configured.
l If you configure PW-carried E-LAN services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for
PWE3 Services and convert discrete Ethernet services to complete Ethernet services.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Manage VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
169
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Service Type to Service
VPLS. Then, click Filter. Query all E-LAN services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.
Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click Run.
Step 6 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether the service
is available.
NOTE
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the service is
available. If testing packet loss fails, troubleshoot it by referring to Troubleshooting Service Packet Loss.
----End
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by
QinQ links
configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-11, the service requirements of each CE are as follows:
l The three CE networks can communicate with each other. The VLAN ID of the three CE
networks is 100.
Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
170
Figure 4-11 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE 3
PSN
PE
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN
QinQ link
NOTE
product.
carried by QinQ links, see 9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links.

The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links contains
the engineering information for configuring the QinQ links carrying the E-LAN services, the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs, and the engineering information for
configuring the E-LAN services carried by the QinQ links.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by QinQ links. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the ports.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links involves the following:
l Plan the QinQ links that carry the E-LAN services. Refer to Table 4-48.
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links. Refer to Table 4-49.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
171
NOTE
Table 4-48 Planning information of the QinQ links carrying the services
Parameter NE1-NE2 NE2-NE3 NE3-NE1
QinQ Link ID 1 2 3
Board 3-PEG16 3-PEG16 3-PEG16
Port 1(NE1)
2(NE2)
1(NE2)
2(NE3)
1(NE3)
2(NE1)
S-Vlan ID 10 20 30

Table 4-49 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by the QinQ links
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-LAN-1 E-LAN-2 E-LAN-3
Self-Learning MAC
Address
MAC Address
Learning Mode
IVL IVL IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
172
Table 4-51 Planning information of the NNIs
Parameter NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
QinQ Link ID 1,3 1,2 2,3

access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
according to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
LAN services carried by the QinQ links.
II).
l The QinQ links must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the configuration method,
see 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Tree.
the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-53 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Service ID 1
Tag Type C-Awared
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
173
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > QinQ Link. Click Add. Then, the QinQ Link Management dialog box is
displayed. Select the QinQ link according to the planning information. Then, click OK.
Table 4-55 Parameters of the QinQ link
QinQ Link ID 1, 3

Selected Interfaces QinQ Link-1
QinQ Link-3

7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-57 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
174
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Service ID 2
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

QinQ Link ID 1, 2

QinQ Link-2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
175

Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Service ID 3
Tag Type C-Awared
MTU (bytes) 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

QinQ Link ID 2, 3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
176

QinQ Link-3

Direction Ingress
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000

----End
Relevant Task
See 4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the
E-LAN services carried by QinQ links are configured correctly.
4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration
Prerequisites
The E-LAN services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-LAN services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-LAN services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 4-12.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
177
Figure 4-12 OAM of the E-LAN services
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
MD 1
MA 1
MEP
MEP
Tunnel
PW

As shown in the figure, the E-LAN services are configured between CE1, CE2, and CE3. The
services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-LAN services are configured
correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-LAN
service between CE1 and CE2 as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-LAN service between CE1 and CE2.
For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-LAN service between CE1 and
CE2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
178
Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Relevant Service 1-E-Lan-1 1-E-Lan-1
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Parameter NE1 NE2
Name
MA 1 MA
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2

NOTE
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
179
5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
About This Chapter
You can configure E-AGGR services to realize the multipoint-to-point service aggregation.
5.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-AGGR services.
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-AGGR service differs according to the type of the E-AGGR
service.
5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
180
5.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-AGGR services.
5.1.1 E-AGGR Services
As shown in the networking topology, the E-AGGR services are multipoint-to-point services.
The equipment aggregates Ethernet services accessed by multiple UNIs to the same UNI or to
the same NNI of which the Ethernet services are carried by ports or PWs, or aggregates the
Ethernet services that are carried by ports or PWs of multiple NNIs to the same UNI.
According to the service transmission mode on the network side, the E-AGGR services can be
classified into the following types:
l E-AGGR services carried by ports
l E-AGGR services carried by PWs
E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
An operator constructs a 3G network. On the 3G network, the services of each node need to be
aggregated and then transmitted to the RNC. The services that are transmitted from a NodeB
are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to configure the
services to be carried by ports, thus realizing the aggregation and transmission of the Ethernet
services from the user side.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
181
Figure 5-1 E-AGGR services carried by ports
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
UNI
NNI
UNI
UNI
PSN

E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
Figure 5-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
An operator constructs a 3G network. On the 3G network, the services of each node need to be
aggregated and then transmitted to the RNC. The services that are transmitted from a NodeB
are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to configure the
services to be carried by PWs, thus aggregating the Ethernet services from the user side to the
PWs on the network side. On the node that is connected to the RNC, the tunnels that carry
different services are aggregated again and then transmitted to the RNC.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
182
Figure 5-2 E-AGGR services carried by PWs
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW

5.1.2 UNI
V-UNI
UNI.
V-UNI Group
size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
183
5.1.3 NNI
links.
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-AGGR service differs according to the type of the E-AGGR
service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
184
5.2.1 E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
You need to configure the NNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-AGGR services carried
by ports.
Table 5-1 provides the process for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Figure 5-3 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
by port
Create the E-AGGR
services carried by
ports

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
185
Table 5-1 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by ports
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
186
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
187
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Required) The E-
AGGR services
carried by ports
occupy the NNIs
exclusively. Hence,
you need to set
Enable State of the
NNIs to Disabled.
(Optional) This
operation is valid
only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The
UNI is connected to
the external
equipment and thus
does not need to
transmit the in-band
DCN information.
Hence, set Enable
State of the UNIs to
Disabled.
Services Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
188
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
5 9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Carried by Ports
The parameters need
parameters need to
be set according to

5.2.2 E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-AGGR services carried by
PWs.
Table 5-2 provides the process for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
189
Figure 5-4 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by the MPLS tunnel
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Configure the NNI
for the services
carried by static
MPLS tunne
Create the E-AGGR
services carried by
PWs

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
190
Table 5-2 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by the MPLS tunnel
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
191
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
192
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
operation is
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, Enable
Port needs to be
set to Disabled
for the UNI.
Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the
parameters as
follows:
l Set Port Mode to
Layer 3.
l Set Enable
Tunnel to
Enabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
193
4 Configuring the
MPLS tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage MPLS
tunnels, see 9.5
Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
(Optional) The
follows:
l OAM Status is
set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode
is set to Manual.
l Detection
Packet Type is
set to FFD.
l Detection
Packet Period
(ms) is set to 3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the
MPLS tunnel APS
parameters
according to the
service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage MPLS
tunnel APS
protection groups,
see 9.8 Managing
MPLS Tunnel APS
Protection Groups.
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
194
6 9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried
by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage Ethernet
services carried by
PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3
Services.
NOTE
You can selectively
configure MPLS PW
APS according to the
service planning
information. MPLS
tunnel APS and
MPLS PW APS
cannot be configured
for the same service.
Therefore, do not
configure MPLS PW
APS if you already
configure MPLS
tunnel APS.
parameters need to
be set according to

5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by
Ports
configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
On the network shown in Figure 5-5, the NodeBs that are connected to NE1 and NE2
respectively need to communicate with the RNC that is connected to NE3. The services are
transmitted from Node B to any other node through the UNIs. On the network side, you need to
configure the services to be carried by ports, thus realizing the aggregation and transmission of
the Ethernet services from the user side.
The services of all the NodeBs carry the VLAN ID of 100.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
195
The service requirements are as follows:
l NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2
ports respectively.
ports respectively.
l The RNC, NE1, and NE2 are connected to NE3 through the 3-PEG16-1, 3-PEG16-2, and
3-PEG16-3 ports respectively.
l The NodeBs and the equipment are interconnected through FE ports. The RNC and the
equipment are interconnected through GE ports.
l The services on NodeB 1 and NodeB 3 are the voice services that require the CIR of 15
Mbit/s and the PIR of 30 Mbit/s.
l The services on NodeB 2 and NodeB 4 are the data services that require the CIR of 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR of 50 Mbit/s.
Figure 5-5 Networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
RNC
NE1
GE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
UNI for NodeB 3: 21-PETF8-1
NodeB 2
NodeB 4
NodeB 3
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for NE1: 1-PEG16-2
NodeB 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
196
NOTE
product.

The engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by ports contains the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring
the E-AGGR services carried by the ports, and the engineering information for configuring the
VLAN forward tables.
On the network, the E-AGGR services are carried by ports. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the ports.
Planning the E-AGGR services carried by ports involves the following:
l Plan the E-AGGR services carried by ports. Refer to Table 5-3.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2. Refer to Table 5-6.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE3. Refer to Table 5-7.
Table 5-3 Planning information of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-Aggr-1 E-Aggr-2 E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100 100 100,200,300,400

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
197
Table 5-5 Planning information of the NNIs
Port 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-2
1-PEG16-3

Table 5-6 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2
Parameter NE1 NE2
Source Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN
ID
100 100 100 100
Sink Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 1 2 3 4

Table 5-7 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE3
Parameter NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Source Interface
Type
Source Interface 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-3 1-PEG16-3
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400

You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by ports according
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
198
Prerequisites
AGGR services carried by the ports.
l The E-AGGR services carried by ports need to occupy the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNIs. If the E-AGGR services carried by ports
need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, you also need to disable the DCN function of the
UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration
> Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-8 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Aggr-1
MTU (bytes) 1526

Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. Set the parameters of the NNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Location Sink
Port 3-PEG16-1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
199

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the VLAN
forwarding table item. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-11 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETFF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN ID 100 100
Sink Interface Type V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 1 2

7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-12 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000

Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Service ID 2
MTU (bytes) 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
200
Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

Location Sink
Port 3-PEG16-1

Source Interface 21-PETR8-1 21-PETR8-2
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 3 4

Table 5-17 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
201
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Service ID 3
MTU (bytes) 1526

Location Sink
Port 1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100,200,300,400

Location Source
Port 1-PEG16-2
1-PEG16-3

Source Interface
Type
Source Interface 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-3 1-PEG16-3
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
202

----End
Relevant Task
See 5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration to check whether the
E-AGGR services carried by ports are configured correctly.
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by
PWs
configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
On the network shown in Figure 5-6, the NodeBs that are connected to NE1 and NE2 need to
communicate with the RNC that is connected to NE3. The services that are transmitted from a
NodeB are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to
configure the services to be carried by PWs, thus aggregating the Ethernet services from the user
side to the PWs on the network side. On the node that is connected to the RNC, the tunnels that
carry different services are aggregated again and then transmitted to the RNC. The services of
all the NodeBs carry the VLAN ID of 100.
The service requirements are as follows:
ports respectively.
ports respectively.
l The RNC, NE1, and NE2 are connected to NE3 through the 1-PEG16-1, 1-PEG16-2, and
1-PEG16-3 ports respectively.
l The NodeBs and the equipment are interconnected through FE ports. The RNC and the
equipment are interconnected through GE ports.
l The services of NodeB 1 and NodeB 3 are the voice services that require the CIR of 15
Mbit/s and the PIR of 30 Mbit/s.
l The services of NodeB 2 and NodeB 4 are the data services that require the CIR of 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR of 50 Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
203
Figure 5-6 Networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
MPLS tunnel 1
MPLS tunnel 2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NodeB 4
NodeB 1
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
NOTE
product.

NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
NE3 3-
PEG16-2
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-3
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
204
NOTE
The engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by PWs contains the
information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, the
engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the VLAN forward table.
On the network, the E-AGGR services are carried by PWs. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the PWs and the PLS tunnel.
Planning the E-AGGR services carried by PWs involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 5-22.
l Plan the E-AGGR services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 5-23.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2. Refer to Table 5-26.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE3. Refer to Table 5-27.
Table 5-22 Planning information of the tunnel carrying the PWs
Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Tunnel
ID
1 2 3 4 2 1 4 3
Tunnel
Name
NE1-
NE3#1
NE3-
NE1#1
NE2-
NE3#2
NE3-
NE2#2
NE3-
NE1#1
NE1-
NE3#1
NE3-
NE2#2
NE2-
NE3#2
Node
Type
Ingress Egress Ingress Egress Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwi
dth
(kbit/s)
100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
-
In
Board/
Logic
Interfac
e Type
- 3-
PEG16
- 3-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
In Port - 1 - 1 - 2 - 3
In
Label
- 17 - 19 - 16 - 18
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
205
Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Out
Board/
Logic
Interfac
e Type
3-
PEG16
- 3-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
-
Out
Port
1 - 1 - 2 - 3 -
Out
Label
16 - 18 - 17 - 19 -
Next
Hop
Addres
s
18.1.1.
2
- 18.1.2.
2
- 18.1.1.
1
- 18.1.2.
1
-
Source
Node
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.1
- 130.0.0
.2
Sink
Node
130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.1
- 130.0.0
.2
-

Table 5-23 Planning information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-Aggr-1 E-Aggr-2 E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100 100 100

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
206
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Location Sink Sink Source Source
PW ID 10 20 10 20
PW Signaling
Type
Static Static Static Static
PW Type Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming
Label/Source
Port
20 30 20 30
PW Outgoing
Label/Sink Port
20 30 20 30
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.2
Tunnel No. Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2
Bandwidth
Limit
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 45000 45000 45000 45000
PIR(kbit/s) 80000 80000 80000 80000
Request VLAN 10 20 10 20

Table 5-26 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2
Parameter NE1 NE2
Source
Interface
Type
Source
Interface
21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN
ID
100 100 100 100
Sink Interface
Type
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
207
Parameter NE1 NE2
Sink Interface PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
Sink VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4

Table 5-27 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE3
Parameter NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Source Interface
Type
Source Interface PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400

You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs according
Prerequisites
AGGR services carried by the PWs.
l If the E-AGGR services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
208
Procedure
Step 1 Configure an E-AGGR service from NodeB 1, NodeB 2, NodeB 3, and NodeB 4 to the RNC.
1. Choose Service > E-AGGR Service > Create E-AGGR Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set basic attributes for the E-AGGR service.
Table 5-28 Basic attributes for the E-AGGR service
Service ID 1
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Configure source and sink NEs for the E-AGGR service.
a. Click the Node List tab, and choose Add > Source or Add > Sink. Then, a dialog
box is displayed.
c. Configure boards and ports that receive services, and set attributes for the ports in
SAI Configuration. Then, click OK.
Table 5-29 Parameters for the ports that receive services
NE NE1 NE2 NE3
Location Source Source Sink
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLAN ID 100 100 100, 200, 300, 400

4. Click the PW tab, and set basic attributes for the PWs.
Table 5-30 Basic attributes for the PWs
Sour
ce
NE
Sink
NE
PW
ID
Sign
alin
g
Typ
e
For
war
d
Labe
l
Rev
erse
Labe
l
For
war
d
Typ
e
For
war
d
Tun
nel
Rev
erse
Typ
e
Rev
erse
Tun
nel
Enca
psul
atio
n
Typ
e
NE1 NE3 10 Stati
c
20 20 Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE1-
NE3
#1
Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE3-
NE1
#1
MPL
S
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
209
Sour
ce
NE
Sink
NE
PW
ID
Sign
alin
g
Typ
e
For
war
d
Labe
l
Rev
erse
Labe
l
For
war
d
Typ
e
For
war
d
Tun
nel
Rev
erse
Typ
e
Rev
erse
Tun
nel
Enca
psul
atio
n
Typ
e
NE2 NE3 20 Stati
c
30 30 Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE2-
NE3
#2
Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE3-
NE2
#2
MPL
S

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table tab, and click Add to set parameters.
Table 5-31 Parameters in the VLAN forwarding table
Source
SAI
Source
VLAN ID
PW ID Transit
VLAN ID
Sink SAI Sink
VLAN ID
NE1-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
100 10 1 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
100
NE1-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
100 10 2 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
200
NE2-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
100 20 3 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
300
NE2-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
100 20 4 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
400

6. Click Advanced to set advanced attributes for the E-AGGR service.
a. Click SAI QoS tab to set QoS parameters for the ingress direction.
Table 5-32 QoS parameters for the ingress direction
SAI Direction Bandwidt
h Enabled
CIR (kbit/
s)
PIR (kbit/
s)
Other
Paramete
rs
NE1-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Ingress Enabled 15000 30000 Default
values
NE1-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
values
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
210
SAI Direction Bandwidt
h Enabled
CIR (kbit/
s)
PIR (kbit/
s)
Other
Paramete
rs
NE2-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
values
NE2-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
values

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab, and set advanced attributes for the PWs.
Table 5-33 Advanced attributes for the PWs
PW Trail PW Type Request VLAN Other
Parameters
(NE1<--->NE3) Ethernet Tagged
Mode
10 Default values
(NE2<--->NE3) Ethernet Tagged
Mode
20 Default values

----End
Relevant Task
E-AGGR service is configured correctly.
You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs according
Prerequisites
AGGR services carried by the PWs.
l If the E-AGGR services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
Procedure
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
211
> Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Table 5-34 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Service ID 1
MTU (bytes) 1526

Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

4. Choose NNI > PW. Click New. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the
parameters of the PWs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
General Attributes Location Sink
PW ID 10
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
Port
20
Tunnel No. NE1-NE3#1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
212
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring
the NE-Level TPID.

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the VLAN
forwarding table item. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Sink Interface PW (Ethernet Tagged
Mode, 10)
PW (Ethernet Tagged
Mode, 10)
Sink VLAN ID 1 2

7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Table 5-38 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
213
Service ID 2
MTU (bytes) 1526

Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

General Attributes Location Sink
PW ID 20
PW Type Ethernet
Port
30
Port
30
Tunnel No. NE2-NE3#2
NOTE
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
214
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Sink Interface PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode,
20)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode,
20)
Sink VLAN ID 3 4

CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000

Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Service ID 3
MTU (bytes) 1526

Location Sink
Port 1-PEG16-1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
215
VLANs 100

General Attributes Location Source Source
PW ID 10 20
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20 30
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.2
NOTE
TPID.

Source
Interface
Type
Source
Interface
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20)
Source
VLAN ID
1 2 3 4
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
216
Sink
Interface
Type
Sink
Interface
1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN
ID
100 200 300 400

CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000

----End
Relevant Task
E-AGGR services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service
Configuration
Prerequisites
The E-AGGR services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the E-AGGR services
carried by ports is the same as the connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM
function) of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
217
This topic considers the E-AGGR services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to
check whether the E-AGGR services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check,
you need configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 OAM of the E-AGGR services
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
MD 1
MA 1
MA 2
MEP
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance
association
MD: maintenance
domain
MEP: maintenance
end point
Tunnel
PW
NodeB2
NodeB1
NodeB3
NodeB4

As shown in the figure, the services of NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are aggregated on NE1, the services
of NodeB 3 and NodeB 4 are aggregated on NE2, and then all the services are aggregated to the
RNC through NE3. The services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-AGGR
services are configured correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic
considers the E-AGGR service between NodeB 1 and RNC as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE3, create the maintenance domain for the E-AGGR service between NodeB 1
and NodeB 2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
218
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
Step 2 At NE1 and NE3, create the maintenance association for the E-AGGR service between NodeB
1 and NodeB 2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Name
MA 1 MA 1
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Parameter NE1 NE3
Name
MA 1 MA 1
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
219
NOTE
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
220
6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
About This Chapter
You can configure cross-domain services to achieve the service transmission from the TDM
domain to the packet domain and vice versa.
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD board, which enables service conversion between
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services
This topic describes the operation tasks of cross-domain service configuration and the flow
relationships between the operation tasks. The flows of configuring cross-domain services in
different scenarios are similar, and therefore This topic describes the general-purpose
configuration model only. For application scenario 3, This topic describes the configuration flow
for cross-domain service configuration only.
6.3 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 1)
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received and processed at the EoD board, and then
are transmitted to the packet domain.
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received on the SDH line board, and then are
transmitted to the EoD board for processing before entering the packet domain.
The SDH services (including the pure SDH service and EoS service) from the TDM domain are
processed on the EoD board. Then, pure SDH services are transmitted to the TDM domain, and
EoS services are transmitted to the packet domain.
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services
Cross-domain services refer to the services that are transmitted from the TDM domain to the
packet domain by using the EoD board. After configuring cross-domain services, you need to
test whether the configuration is correct.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
221
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD board, which enables service conversion between
Figure 6-1 shows the typical networking and application of the EDQ41.
Figure 6-1 Networking and application of the EDQ41
10GE ring
STM-16/STM-64 ring
STM-1/STM-4 ring
E1
FE
FE
BSC
RNC
GE ring
Networking in the
TDM domain
Networking in the
packet domain
TDM traffic direction Packet traffic direction

The EDQ41 is applicable in four typical networking scenarios. Figure 6-2 shows the service
signal flow in each application scenario.
l Application 1: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from other NEs and then converts the
EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from the STM-1/STM-4
SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
l Application 2: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from line boards on the same NE and
then converts the EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from
the SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
l Application 3: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including SDH services and EoS
services) from SDH line board, processes and then distributes the services to GE/10GE
packet networks and STM-1/STM-4 SDH networks.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
222
l Application 4: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including pure SDH services and
EoS services) from SDH line boards, processes and then sends the services directly to the
SDH network. In this case, the EDQ41 board functions like an SDH line board.
NOTE
The EDQ41 supports the maximum processing capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s. Therefore, only 2.5 Gbit/s services
of the services received from STM-N (1N64) line boards can be processed and sent to the packet
network.
Figure 6-2 Service signal flow on the EDQ41
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
STM-1/STM-4
ring
STM-N
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
STM-N
TDM
core
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
Application 1:
Application 2:
Application 4:
Application 3:
Packet
core
Packet
board
STM-1/STM-4
ring
STM-N
STM-1/STM-4
ring

6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services
This topic describes the operation tasks of cross-domain service configuration and the flow
relationships between the operation tasks. The flows of configuring cross-domain services in
different scenarios are similar, and therefore This topic describes the general-purpose
configuration model only. For application scenario 3, This topic describes the configuration flow
for cross-domain service configuration only.
Table 6-1 provides the procedures for configuring cross-domain services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
223
Figure 6-3 Configuration flow for cross-domain services
1. Configure network
ports
Start
Required
Optional
7. Configure E-Line
service on the packet
domain
6. Configure HQoS
4. Configure MPLS
tunnel
5. Configure protection
on the packet domain
2. Configure services
on the TDM domain
3. Configure protection
on the TDM domain
8. Configure Composite
Service
End
NOTE
The service configuration procedures on the TDM domain and the packet domain are not in sequence. In
the figure, the sequence numbers are presented to facilitate description.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
224
Table 6-1 Configuration flow for inter-NE service conversion
Ste
p
Ser
vic
e
Do
ma
in
Operation Remarks
1 - Configuring
network
ports
Required.
Including the following parameters:
l Configuring network ports on the TDM domain
Configuring Ethernet external ports
Configure Ethernet internal ports
l Configuring network ports on the packet domain
Configuring general attributes of Ethernet ports
Configuring Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports
2 TD
M
Configuring
services on
the TDM
domain
Required.
The services on the TDM domain generally are Ethernet private
line (EPL) services on the TDM domain, and you need to specify
such information as the service source and sink.
NOTE
In the case of cross-domain NEs, pure SDH services can be configured
on the TDM domain when the EDQ41 board accomplishes TDM-
domain and packet-domain service distribution.
3 Configuring
protection on
the TDM
domain
Optional. By configuring SNCP services on the TDM domain,
the services on the TDM domain can be transmitted through the
specified timeslots on the transmission lines, and are under 1+1
protection.
NOTE
Currently, only SNCP is supported.
4 Pac
ket
Configuring
an MPLS
tunnel
Required. An MPLS tunnel can be created in two manners: per-
NE and end-to-end. Set the tunnel ID, service name, tunnel
label, ingress node, egress node, and transit node according to
the network planning.
NOTE
MPLS tunnels are not configured on the EDQ41 board.
5 Configuring
protection on
the packet
domain
Optional.
MPLS tunnel APS can be used to protect packet services.
NOTE
l MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS PW APS are not configured on the
EDQ41 board.
l In the case of EDQ41 board, you can configure LAG of
VCTRUNKs between boards to protect cross-domain services.
6 Configuring
HQoS
Optional. The parameters need to be set according to the service
QoS planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
225
Ste
p
Ser
vic
e
Do
ma
in
Operation Remarks
7 Configuring
E-Line
services on
the packet
domain
Required. The parameters need to be set according to the service
planning.
8 TD
M/
Pac
ket
Configuring
composite
services
Optional.
If no protection is configured, you can configure the composite
service, implementing end-to-end management of services on
the TDM domain and packet domain. For details about
composite service management, see 9.17 Managing
Composite Services.

The EoS services from the TDM domain are received and processed at the EoD board, and then
are transmitted to the packet domain.
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board, you can shift EoS services from a
non-local NE on the TDM domain to the packet domain and vice versa.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-4, NE2 is the intersecting node between the
TDM domain and the packet domain. The EoS services are received on the EDQ41 boards on
NE2, and are then converted through the EDQ41 boards. In this manner, network communication
is achieved between the TDM domain and the packet domain.
l The NodeB receives 2 Mbit/s services, and transmits the services to the TDM domain.
l The EDQ41 board converges the services from the TDM domain, and transmits the services
to the packet domain.
l The service between the NodeB and the RNC uses the VLAN ID of 100.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
226
Figure 6-4 Networking diagram of cross-domain services
NE1
NE2
NE3
RNC
NodeB
TDM domain
Packet domain
2-EFS4
11-SL1
7-EDQ41-1
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2 3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
8-SL1
12-EDQ41-1

NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
The engineering information of application scenario 1 includes parameters of the services on
As shown in Figure 6-5, application scenario 1 mainly involves the following parameters on
the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for EPL services
l Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
l Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
227
Figure 6-5 Planning information of TDM service parameters
EDQ41
bound paths
NodeB
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SDH service
cross-connections
EDQ41
(PORT5)

Table 6-2 Parameter planning for EPL services
Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Internal Port VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
Bound Path VC4-4-VC12(1)
Type of Service EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Table 6-3 Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
Board 7-EDQ41
Configurable Ports VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
228

Table 6-4 Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Parameter NE3 NE2
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Level VC-12 VC-12
Source Slot 8-SL1-1(SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1(SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)
NOTE
7-EDQ41-5 corresponds to
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 5
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1

the packet domain:
l Parameter planning for tunnels carrying PWs
l Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Figure 6-6 Service parameter planning on the packet domain
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
UNI-NNI E-Line services
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
229
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
Service Name E-Line-1 E-Line-1
Service Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) This parameter adopts the default
value.
This parameter adopts the default
value.
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to VCTRUNK1.
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to External Port
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
Protection Type Unprotected Unprotected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
230
Table 6-8 Parameter planning for PWs
PW ID 1
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

Inter-domain services include EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the packet
domain. It is easier to configure EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the
packet domain in end-to-end mode than on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical port on the TDM domain is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure VC-4 server trails between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC4 Server Trail
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select NE3 as the source NE and select NE2 as the sink NE.
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
5. Create the other VC-4 server trail by referring to Step 1.1-Step 1.4.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
231
NOTE
l If you select Calculate Route, the SDH trail is automatically computed after the source and sink NEs
are specified.
l After selecting Set Route Timeslot, you can specify timeslots for the SDH trail. Normally, the SDH
trail uses its default timeslots.
l If you select Activate the trail, the SDH trail is created on the NMS and deployed to the corresponding
NEs.
l If you select Copy after Creation, you can duplicate the created SDH trail to other timeslots.
Step 2 Create SDH cross-connections.
l Level: VC12
2. Click Browse and select the source and sink timeslots.
l Source: NE3-2-EFS4-1(SDH-1)-VC4:4-VC12:1[1-1-1]
l Sink: NE2-7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)-VC4:5-VC12:1[1-1-1]
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Create trunk links between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Trunk Link from the main menu. In the dialog
box that is displayed, set the following trunk link parameters:
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
The server trails have been created in Step 1. Therefore, you do not need to select Auto Create
Server Trail in this step.
2. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE3 as the source NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 2-EFS4 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
3. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE2 as the sink NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 7-EDQ41 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
4. Select Server Layer Trail.
5. Click Apply.
Step 4 Create an unterminated EPL service between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Unterminated EPL from the main menu. Set
Port Usage Strategy of the EPL service to Port+VLAN.
2. Click Browse . Select NE3-2-EFS4-PORT1 as Port and select VLAN as 100.
3. Click Next and set parameters such as the port attribute and service name.
l Parameters for the EFS4 board external ports:
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Working Mode: Auto-Negotiating
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
232
l Parameters for the EFS4 board internal ports:
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
configure a tunnel for carrying PWs.
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
nal
Unprotect
ed

N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode and configure a PWE3 service.
Table 6-11 Basic attributes of a PWE3 service
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Protection Type UNprotected

Table 6-12 Parameters for PWE3 service ports
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1
Sink Port 3-PEG8-3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
233

PW ID 1
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE1#1
Reverse Tunnel NE1-NE2#1
Request VLAN 10

Step 7 Create a composite service.
1. Choose Service > Composite Service > Create Composite Service from the main menu.
Set Service Name of the composite service to EPL+PWE3_01.
2. In Service Component, click Select > EPL. In the Ethernet Trail Management dialog
box that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Name is EPL_01.
3. In Service Component, click Select > PWE3. In the Manage PWE3 Service dialog box
that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Service Name is E-Line-1.
4. In Connection Point, click Create > Interface. In the dialog box that is displayed, set
Type to PWE3+EPL.
5. In Interface Information List, select port information and click to add the port
information. Then, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
234
l EPL service:
Service Name: EPL_01
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
Service Name: E-Line-1
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
Follow the instructions in Testing Cross-domain Services to check whether services are
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received on the SDH line board, and then are
transmitted to the EoD board for processing before entering the packet domain.
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board, you can shift EoS services of the
line boards on the local NE to the packet domain and vice versa.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-7, NE2 is the intersecting node of the TDM
domain and the packet domain. The EoS services are received on the SL1 board on NE2, and
are then converted through the EDQ41 board. In this manner, network communication is
achieved between the TDM domain and the packet domain.
l The NodeB receives 2 Mbit/s services, and transmits the services to the TDM domain.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
235
l The SL1 board receives the EoS services, and transmits the services to the EDQ41 board
for conversion.
l The EDQ41 board converges the services from the TDM domain, and transmits the services
to the packet domain.
Figure 6-7 Networking diagram of service conversion
NE1
NE2
NE3
RNC
NodeB
TDM domain
Packet domain
2-EFS4
11-SL1
7-EDQ41
(PORT5)
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2 3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
8-SL1 11-SL1
8-SL1
12-EDQ41
(PORT5)

NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
l PORT5 of the EDQ41 board in the figure corresponds to the internal port.
the TDM domain:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
236
Figure 6-8 Planning information of TDM service parameters
NodeB
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SNCP
EDQ41
(PORT5)
SDH service
cross-connection

Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Level VC12
Type of Service EPL
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Parameter NE3 NE2
Level VC12 VC12
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Slot 8-SL1-1 (SDH-1) 11-SL1-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
237
Parameter NE3 NE2
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5 (SDH-5)
NOTE
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

the packet domain:
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
238
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
value.
value.
NOTE
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW

PW ID 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
239
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

Prerequisites
Procedure
4. Click Apply.
NOTE
are specified.
NEs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
240
l Level: VC12
4. Click Apply.
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
5. Click Apply.
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
nal
Unprotect
ed
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
241

N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Service Type ETH
Service ID 1

Sink Port 3-PEG8-3

PW ID 1
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
242
Request VLAN 10

Type to PWE3+EPL.
l EPL service:
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
243
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
The SDH services (including the pure SDH service and EoS service) from the TDM domain are
processed on the EoD board. Then, pure SDH services are transmitted to the TDM domain, and
EoS services are transmitted to the packet domain.
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board EDQ41, the hybrid services from
the line boards (on the local NE or not) are distributed and transmitted to the packet domain and
TDM domain.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-10, NE2 is the intersecting node of the TDM
domain and the packet domain. On NE2, the hybrid services from the SL4 board on NE1 are
distributed on the EDQ41 board, and are then transmitted to the packet domain and TDM domain.
l NodeB1 receives 2 Mbit/s data services, and NodeB2 receives 2 Mbit/s voice services.
Then, the services are transmitted to the TDM domain through NE3.
l The EDQ41 board distributes the hybrid services from the TDM domain.
The data services from NodeB1 are transmitted to the packet domain, and arrive at
RNC1.
The voice services from NodeB2 are transmitted to another TDM domain through the
line board, and arrive at RNC2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
244
Figure 6-10 Networking diagram of cross-domain services
NE1
RNC2
Packet domain
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
7-EDQ41-1
8-SL4
2-EFS4-1
NodeB1
3-PQ1
8-SL4
TDM domain
7-SL4
NE3
NE4
12-EDQ41-1
11-SL4
11-SL4
11-SL4
FE
E1
NodeB2
7-SL4
NE2
TDM domain
RNC1

NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-11, application scenario 3 mainly involves the following parameters
configure the services from NodeB1 on the TDM domain:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
245
Figure 6-11 Planning information of configure the services from NodeB1 on TDM domain
parameters
EDQ41
bound paths
NodeB1
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SDH service
cross-connections
EDQ41
(PORT5)

Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Level VC12
Type of Service EPL
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Table 6-26 Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
Board 7-EDQ41
Configurable Ports VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
246

Parameter Service Planning
Level VC-12 VC-12
Source Slot 7-SL4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5 (SDH-5)
NOTE
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for SNCP services
Figure 6-12 Planning information of configure the services from NodeB2 on TDM domain
parameters
RNC2
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
SNCP
SDH service
cross-connections
NodeB2
SDH service
NE4
SNCP
SDH service
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
247

Table 6-28 Parameter planning for SNCP services (optional)
Parameter NE3 NE4
Parameter Value of the
Service from NodeB2
Parameter Value of the
Service from the RNC
Type of Service SNCP SNCP
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Level VC-12 VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 0
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive
WTR Time (s) - -
Working
Service
Source Slot 7-SL4-1(SDH-1) 8-SL4-1(SDH-2)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
2 1
Protectio
n Service
Source Slot 11-SL4-1(SDH-1) 11-SL4-1(SDH-2)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 3-PQ1(SDH-1) 7-SL4-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1 1

Level VC-12 VC-12
Source Slot 7-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1) 12-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
2 1
Sink Slot 8-SL4-1 (SDH-1) 11-SL4-1 (SDH-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
248
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

the packet domain:
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
249
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
value.
value.
NOTE
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW

PW ID 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
250
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

Prerequisites
NOTE
This topic describes the end-to-end configuration process of cross-domain services. The configuration
process for E1 services from NodeB2 is simple and therefore not described here.
Procedure
4. Click Apply.
NOTE
are specified.
NEs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
251
l Level: VC12
4. Click Apply.
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
5. Click Apply.
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
252
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
nal
Unprotect
ed

N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Service Type ETH
Service ID 1

Sink Port 3-PEG8-3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
253
PW ID 1
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Request VLAN 10

Type to PWE3+EPL.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
254
l EPL service:
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services
Cross-domain services refer to the services that are transmitted from the TDM domain to the
packet domain by using the EoD board. After configuring cross-domain services, you need to
test whether the configuration is correct.
Based on the functions of the EoD board in cross-domain services, cross-domain services can
be applied in the following scenarios:
l Application 1
The EoD board receives and processes the EoS services from the TDM domain and then
transmits the services to the packet domain. For details, see 6.3 Configuration Example
(Application Scenario 1).
l Application 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
255
The SDH line board receives the EoS services from the TDM domain. Then, the EoD board
processes the EoS services and transmits them to the packet domain. For details, see 6.4
Configuration Example (Application Scenario 2).
l Application 3
The EoD board receives and processes the SDH services from the TDM domain (including
pure SDH services and EoS services) and then transmits the pure SDH services to the TDM
domain and the EoS services to the packet domain. For details, see 6.5 Configuration
Example (Application Scenario 3).
l Application 4
When functioning as a common line board, the EoD board receives and processes the SDH
services (including pure SDH services and EoS services) from the TDM domain, but does
not transmit the services to the packet domain.
You can test cross-domain services by using the following two methods.
Test Method Application Scope
Using the ping
commands to test cross-
domain service channels
This method is simple because it does not require any instrument
or meter. Use this method to check the status of cross-domain
service channels.
Using loopbacks to test
cross-domain service
channels
This method requires the Network Analyzer. Use this method to
measure the packet loss ratio on cross-domain service channels.

6.6.1 Using the Ping Commands to Test Cross-domain Services
For the cross-domain services, you can connect the test computers at both of the services and
use the ping commands to test the cross-domain service channels.
Prerequisites
l The services are configured according to actual situations. For details, see 6 Configuring
Cross-Domain Services in the Configuration Guide.
Two computers with Windows operating system installed
NOTE
The methods for testing various cross-domain services are the same. This section describes only a general-
purpose test model.
Figure 6-14 shows how to test the cross-domain service channels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
256
Figure 6-14 Connection diagram for testing cross-domain service channels
NE1 NE2 NE3
TDM
domain
Packet
domain
PC 1
EDQ41
PC 2
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 1500 NE3
NE2
NE1

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the PC to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according to
the previous connection diagram.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for PC 1 and PC 2. The two IP addresses must be set in the same network
section.
l Set the IP address for PC 1.
IP address: 192.168.0.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
l Set the IP address for PC 2.
IP address: 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on PC 1 to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping
192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command:
l -n Num: transit Num packets to the PC at the opposite end
l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.
l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64
time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal.
l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the
Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration of
the Ethernet service. Rectify the fault, and then continue the test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
257
NOTE
The values of time and TTL are associated with the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is
normal.
----End
6.6.2 Using Loopbacks to Test Cross-domain Services
To test cross-domain service channels, you can perform a loopback on the access side of cross-
domain services and test whether packet loss occurs on the convergence side by using a Network
Analyzer.
Prerequisites
l Cross-domain services are configured according to actual situations. For details, see 6
Configuring Cross-Domain Services in the Configuration Guide.
Network Analyzer, U2000
Figure 6-15 shows how to test cross-domain service channels.
Figure 6-15 Connection diagram for testing cross-domain service channels
NE1 NE2 NE3
TDM
domain
Packet
domain
EDQ41
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 1500 NE3
NE2
NE1
MAC inloop
SmartBits
2-EFS4-1
3-PEG8-3
NOTE
An inloop at the MAC layer is performed at the 2-EFS4-1 port on NE3. A SmartBits is connected to the
3-PEG8-3 port on NE1. In actual situations, you can select different ports at the access node and the
convergence node and perform a test similarly.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
258
Context
CAUTION
l Ensure that only the commissioning engineers are present during the test.
l Do not touch optical fibers, wires, or cables without permission.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a SmartBits to the 3-PEG8-3 port on NE1 according to the connection diagram.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring for NE1 and
NE3. For details, see Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE.
NOTE
The performance monitoring is set to analyze and locate faults that occur during the test.
Step 3 Log in to the U2000. Perform an inloop at the MAC layer on the 2-EFS4-1 port of NE3. For
details, see Setting a Loopback on an Ethernet Port.
Step 4 Use the SmartBits to transmit and receive packets.
NOTE
l Packets with all 0s are regarded as special packets. Therefore, do not use packets of all 0s for testing
transmitted and received packets.
l When the SmartBits transmits and receives packets for the first time, packet loss occurs due to MAC
address learning. Therefore, it is normal that the number of transmitted packets is different from the
number of received packets.
l In the tests after the first time, if the number of transmitted packets is the same as the number of received
packets, the cross-domain service channels are normal.
l If packet loss occurs during the tests, troubleshoot the fault and then perform 24-hour tests until the
channels pass the tests.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
259
7 Configuring CES Services
About This Chapter
The circuit emulation service (CES) function supports direct access of TDM E1 services to the
packet domain. Therefore, the CES function helps achieve smooth evolution from the TDM
domain to the packet domain.
7.1 Introduction to CES
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create
circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information,
alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the
TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN.
After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created.
On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock
synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services
The configuration flow varies according to the types of the CES services.
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-UNI CES services.
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-NNI CES services.
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration
After configuring a CES service, you need to verify whether the service configuration is correct.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
260
7.1 Introduction to CES
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create
circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information,
alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the
TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN.
After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created.
On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock
synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
Emulation Mode
The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic
TDM over packet (SAToP) CES.
In the case of CESoPSN CES:
l The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information
in the TDM circuit.
l The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then,
the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the
services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
l The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM
signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals
is emulated.
l The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type
CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service
implementation point.
l UNI-UNI CES services
As shown in Figure 7-1, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
261
Figure 7-1 UNI-UNI CES services
BTS
BSC
TDM link
NE
PSN
Channelized STM link

l UNI-NNI CES services
As shown in Figure 7-2, the OptiX OSN NEs support UNI-NNI CES services. In the case
of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through
E1 ports or STM-1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate
end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 7-2 UNI-NNI CES services
BTS
BSC
BTS
TDM link
NE
NE
NE
PSN
Tunnel
PW

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
262
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services
The configuration flow varies according to the types of the CES services.
7.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-UNI CES services and the
relationships between the operations tasks.
Table 7-1 provides the process for configuring UNI-UNI CES services.
Figure 7-3 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI CES services
2. Configure CES
service ports
3. Configure UNI-
UNI CES services
Required
End
1. Create the
network
Start

Table 7-1 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI CES services
Ste
p
Operation Remarks
1 Creating the
network
Create NEs, configure NE data, create optical fibers, and configure
clocks.
2 Configuring
CES service
ports
Required.
l 9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
l 9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
Use the CES board to support access of base station services.
3 Configuring
UNI-UNI CES
services
Required.
Set the service ID, service name, service source, and service sink.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
263
7.2.2 Configuration Flow for the UNI-NNI CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-NNI CES services and the
Table 7-2 provides the process for configuring UNI-NNI CES services.
Figure 7-4 Configuration flow for UNI-NNI CES services
2. Configure the LSR
IDs of NEs
6. Configure UNI-NNI
CES services
5. Configure CES
service ports
Start
Required
Optional
End
1. Create the network
3. Configure the NNIs
on the packet domain
4. Configure the MPLS
tunnels

Table 7-2 Configuration flow for UNI-NNI CES services
St
ep
Operation Remarks
1 Creating the network Create NEs, configure NE data, create optical fibers, and
configure clocks.
2 Configuring the LSR ID -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
264
St
ep
Operation Remarks
3 Configuring the NNI
ports on the packet
domain
Required.
l Set the general attributes of Ethernet ports.
l Set the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports, including
tunnel enabled status and IP address.
This operation task is performed so that the NNI ports on
the packet domain can carry tunnels.
4 Configuri
ng MPLS
tunnels
Configurin
g an MPLS
Tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels.
Configurin
g MPLS
OAM
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to 3.3.
Configurin
g MPLS
Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters according
to the service planning information. For details on how to
manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups.
5 Configuring CES service
ports
Required.
l 9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
l 9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
Use the CES board to support access of base station
services.
6 Configuring UNI-NNI
CES services
Required.
1. Create CES services, that is, set the service ID and
service name.
2. Set the source and sink information, that is, set the source
and sink boards and channels.
3. Configure PWs, that is, set information such as the PW
type, Protection Type, PW label, and tunnel type.
4. Set the advanced attributes, including the RTP head,
jitter buffer time and packet loading time.
NOTE
You can selectively configure MPLS PW APS according to the
service planning information. MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS PW
APS cannot be configured for the same service. Therefore, do not
configure MPLS PW APS if you already configure MPLS tunnel
APS.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
265
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-UNI CES services.
This topic describes the networking diagram of UNI-UNI CES services.
As shown in Figure 7-5, an OptiX OSN 3500 is used to support access of CES services between
the two BTSs and the BSC. One CES service is configured between BTS1 and the BSC and one
CES service is configured between BTS2 and the BSC.
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram of UNI-UNI CES services
TDM link
BSC
BTS1
NE 1
BTS2
23-MD75
35-MD75
21-CQ1-1
21-CQ1-2
NOTE
This topic considers the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
product.

The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.
A UNI-UNI CES service is generally configured to implement access of base station services
and transmission of base station services to the BSC. As shown in Figure 7-5, two CES services
are configured between the two BTSs and the BSC in this example.
Table 7-3 lists the planned parameters of NE1 and their values.
Table 7-3 UNI-UNI CES parameters (NE1)
Parameter Value
NE NE1 NE1
Service ID 1 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
266
Parameter Value
Service Name CES1 CES2
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-UNI UNI-UNI
Source Board 23-MD75 35-MD75
Source High Channel - -
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot - -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-1 21-CQ1-2
Sink High Channel VC4-1 VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1 1
Sink 64K Timeslot - -

This topic describes how to configure UNI-UNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the service requirements and service planning information of
the example network.
l The network must be created, the equipment must operate properly, and the equipment
must communicate with the NMS normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the channelized STM-1 ports, including the BTS-side PDH port and BSC-side
channelized STM-1 port.
1. Configure the BTS-side PDH port.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, configure the BTS-side port.
b. Select 23-N1MD75-(E1-1) and 35-N1MD75-(E1-1), and set associated parameters
according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-4 BTS-side port
Port 23-N1MD75-(E1-1) 35-N1MD75-(E1-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
267
Name port1 port2
Port Mode Layer 1 Layer 1
Frame Format Unframe Unframe

c. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
2. Configure the BSC-side channelized STM-1 port.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, configure the BSC-side port.
b. Select 21-CQ1-1(PORT-1) and 21-CQ1-2(PORT-2), and set associated parameters
according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-5 BSC-side port
Port 21-CQ1-1(PORT-1) 21-CQ1-2(PORT-2)
Name port1 port2
Laser Interface Enabling
Status
Open Open
Frame Format Unframe Unframe

c. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Create the CES1 service.
> CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Set the parameters of CES1 according to the service planning information.
Table 7-6 CES1 service parameters
Service ID 1
Service Name CES1
Level E1
Mode UNI-UNI
Source Board 23-N1MD75
Source High Channel -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
268
Source Low Channel 1
Source 64K Timeslot -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-1(PORT1-1)
Sink High Channel VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1
Sink 64K Timeslot -

3. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 3 Create the CES2 service.
> CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Set the parameters of CES2 according to the service planning information.
Table 7-7 CES2 service parameters
Service ID 2
Service Name CES2
Level E1
Mode UNI-UNI
Source Board 35-N1MD75
Source High Channel -
Source Low Channel 1
Source 64K Timeslot -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-2(PORT1-2)
Sink High Channel VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1
Sink 64K Timeslot -

3. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
269
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-NNI CES services.
This topic describes the networking diagram of UNI-NNI CES services.
As shown in Figure 7-6, the service requirements on the network are as follows:
l BTS1, BTS2, and the BSC need to access the PSN through CES boards.
l BTS1 and BTS2 need to communicate with the BSC. The services on BTS1 and BTS2 need
to be isolated from each other.
l One E1 service from BTS1 and one E1 service from BTS2 need to be transmitted through
the 19-MD75 on NE1 to the PSN.
l E1 services from the BSC need also be transmitted through the 21-CQ1 board on NE1 to
the PSN.
Figure 7-6 Networking diagram of UNI-NNI CES services
BTS2
BSC
BTS1
TDM link
NE1
NE 2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-1
19-MD75
19-MD75
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2
21-CQ1-2
21-CQ1-1
NOTE
product.
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for CES services, see 9.14
Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
270
The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring
the NE data, including the information for planning NNI ports, MPLS tunnels, and services.
The OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through TDM ports or channelized STM-1
ports. CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services,
therefore implementing service transmission between the BTSs and the BSC. Figure 7-6 shows
an example network.
Planning NE Parameters
Table 7-8 Planning information of NE parameters (NE1, NE2, and NE3)
NE LSR ID Port Port IP
Address
IP Mask
NE1 130.0.0.1 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.2.2 255.255.255.25
2
NE2 130.0.0.2 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.1.1 255.255.255.25
2
NE3 130.0.0.3 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.2.1 255.255.255.25
2
3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
18.0.1.2 255.255.255.25
2

Planning the Tunnel Between NE1 and NE3
Table 7-9 Planning information of tunnel parameters (tunnel between NE1 and NE3)
Parameter NE1 NE3
Tunnel ID 1 2 2 1
Tunnel Name NE1-NE3#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE1-NE3#1
Node Type Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 1
In Label - 17 - 16
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
271
Parameter NE1 NE3
Out Port 1 - 1 -
Out Label 16 - 17 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.2.1 - 18.0.2.2 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1 -

Planning the Tunnel Between NE2 and NE3
Parameter NE2 NE3
Tunnel ID 3 4 4 3
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 2
In Label - 19 - 18
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 2 -
Out Label 18 - 19 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.1.2 - 18.0.1.1 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2 -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
272
Planning the CES Service from BTS1 to the BSC
Table 7-11 Planning information of the service parameters (UNI-NNI CES service between
NE1 and NE3)
Parameter Value
NE NE1 NE3
Service ID 1 1
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Source Board 19-MD75 21-CQ1-1
Source High Channel - VC4-1
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31
Priority EF EF
PW ID 1 1
PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN
Port
20 20
Port
20 20
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1
RTP Head Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000 1000
Ingress Clock Mode - -
Egress Clock Mode - -
Enable CES Service Alarm
Transparent Transmission
Enable Enable
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
273
Parameter Value
Threshold of Entering R Bit
Inserting Status
100 100
Threshold of Exiting R Bit
Inserting Status
5 5
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode

Planning the CES Service from BTS2 to the BSC
NE2 and NE3)
Parameter Value
NE NE2 NE3
Service ID 2 2
Level E1 E1
Priority EF EF
PW ID 2 2
PW Ingress Label 21 21
PW Egress Label 21 21
Tunnel NE2-NE3#1 NE3-NE2#1
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.2
RTP Head Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
274
Parameter Value
Enable Enable
Inserting Status
100 100
Inserting Status
5 5

This topic describes how to configure UNI-NNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l The clocks must be configured for the NE that receives the CES service. For details on how
to configure clocks, see Configuring Clocks.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the LSR IDs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID.
NE LSR ID
NE1 130.0.0.1
NE2 130.0.0.2
NE3 130.0.0.3

Step 2 Configure the NNI ports of NE1, NE2, and NE3 on the packet domain.
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Configure the NNI ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
275
2. In the General Attributes tab, select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1). Right-click the Port Mode
filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters according to the actual requirements. Click
Apply.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Parameter Value Remarks
Port Enabled Enabled -
Port Mode Layer 3 The port carries a tunnel.
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to be the same.
Max Frame
Length (byte)
1620 Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All the received data packets that exceed the
maximum frame length are discarded.

3. Select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-click the Enable
Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually.
Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply.
Enable Tunnel Enabled -
Specify IP Manually Manually indicates that you can set the IP address
of the port.
IP Address 18.0.2.2 -
IP Mask 255.255.255.252 -

4. Navigate to the NE Explorer of NE2 and NE3 separately. Set the parameters associated
with each port according to Step a to Step c.
Set the basic attributes of each port to be the same as the basic attributes of NE1-3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1).
Set the Layer 3 attributes of each port as follows.
l NE2-3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
276
Parameter Value
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.2
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Parameter Value
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.2.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Configure the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3 and the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and
NE3. For details, see 9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-
to-End Mode.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Tunnel ID 1 2 2 1
PIR(kbit/s) 100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 1
In Label - 17 - 16
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 1 -
Out Label 16 - 17 -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
277
Parameter NE1 NE3
Next Hop
Address
18.0.2.1 - 18.0.2.2 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1 -

Parameter NE2 NE3
Tunnel ID 3 4 4 3
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 2
In Label - 19 - 18
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 2 -
Out Label 18 - 19 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.1.2 - 18.0.1.1 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2 -

Step 4 Configure the CES service ports on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.2.1 Configuring
Channelized STM-1 Ports.
Step 5 Configure the UNI-NNI CES service between NE1 and NE3 and the UNI-NNI CES service
between NE2 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE
Basis.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
278
NE1 and NE3)
Parameter Value
Station NE1 NE3
Service ID 1 1
Level E1 E1
Priority EF EF
PW ID 1 1
PW Ingress Label 20 20
PW Egress Label 20 20
RTP Header Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Enabled Enabled
Inserting Status
100 100
Inserting Status
5 5

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
279
NE2 and NE3)
Parameter Value
Station NE2 NE3
Service ID 2 2
Level E1 E1
Priority EF EF
PW ID 2 2
Port
21 21
Port
21 21
RTP Header Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Enabled Enabled
Inserting Status
100 100
Inserting Status
5 5
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
280

----End
This topic describes how to configure UNI-NNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l The clocks must be configured for the NE that receives the CES service. For details on how
to configure clocks, see Configuring Clocks.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the LSR IDs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID.
NE LSR ID
NE1 130.0.0.1
NE2 130.0.0.2
NE3 130.0.0.3

Step 2 Configure the NNI ports of NE1, NE2, and NE3 on the packet domain.
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Configure the NNI ports.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1). Right-click the Port Mode
filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters according to the actual requirements. Click
Apply.
Port Enabled Enabled -
Port Mode Layer 3 The port carries a tunnel.
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to be the same.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
281
Max Frame
Length (byte)
1620 Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All the received data packets that exceed the
maximum frame length are discarded.

3. Select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-click the Enable
Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually.
Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply.
Enable Tunnel Enabled -
Specify IP Manually Manually indicates that you can set the IP address
of the port.
IP Address 18.0.2.2 -
IP Mask 255.255.255.252 -

4. Navigate to the NE Explorer of NE2 and NE3 separately. Set the parameters associated
with each port according to Step a to Step c.
Set the basic attributes of each port to be the same as the basic attributes of NE1-3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1).
Set the Layer 3 attributes of each port as follows.
Parameter Value
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Parameter Value
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.2
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
282
Parameter Value
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.2.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Configure the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3 and the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and
NE3. For details, see 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode.
NOTE
This topic considers the MPLS tunnel between the NE1 and NE3 as an example. The operations for configuring
the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and NE3 are similar to operations for configuring the MPLS tunnel between
NE1 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel Name NE1-NE3
Protocol Type MPLS
Signaling Type Static CR
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected

3. On the physical topology, double-click NE1 and NE3 to add them and set the corresponding
NE roles.
Parameter Value
Auto-Calculate route Deselected
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE3: Egress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
283
Parameter Value
Deploy Selected

4. Click Details and set the advanced parameters of the forward and reverse MPLS tunnels
between NE1 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel ID Forward Tunnel: 1
Reverse Tunnel: 2
CIR(kbit/s) Forward and Reverse Tunnels: 100000
LSP Type Forward and Reverse Tunnels: E-LSP
EXP Forward and Reverse Tunnels: None
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3:3-PEG8-1
l NE1: -
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 16
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 17
l NE1: -
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: -
l NE3: 3-PEG8-1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: -
l NE3: 16
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 17
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
284
Parameter Value
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 18.0.2.1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18.0.2.2
l NE1: -

5. Refer to Steps Step 3.1 to Step 3.4 and configure the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel Name NE2-NE3
Protocol Type MPLS
Signaling Type Static CR
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected
Auto-Calculate route Deselected
NE3: Egress
Deploy Selected
Tunnel ID Forward Tunnel: 3
Reverse Tunnel: 4
CIR(kbit/s) Forward and Reverse Tunnels: 100000
LSP Type Forward and Reverse Tunnels: E-LSP
EXP Forward and Reverse Tunnels: None
l NE2: 3-PEG8-1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-PEG8-2
l NE2: -
l NE1: 18
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18
l NE1: -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
285
Parameter Value
l NE1: -
l NE3: 3-PEG8-2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
In Label Positive Tunnel
l NE1: -
l NE3: 19
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 19
l NE1: 18.0.1.2
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18.0.1.1
l NE1: -

Step 4 Configure the CES service ports on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.2.1 Configuring
Channelized STM-1 Ports.
Step 5 Configure the CES service between NE1 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.3 Creating a CES
Service in End-to-End Mode.
2. Set the basic attributes.
Parameter Value
Service Type CES
Service ID 1
Service Name CES1
Protection Type No Protection

3. Click Configure Source And Sink. Then, the Configure Source And Sink dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select NE1 as the source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
parameters and then click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
286
Parameter Value
Board 19-MD75
Port -
High TimeSlot -
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Deselected

5. Select NE3 as the sink NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
Parameter Value
Board 21-CQ1
Port 1
High TimeSlot 1
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Deselected
64K Timeslot 1-31

6. Under PW, set the associated parameters.
Parameter Value
Forward Tunnel NE1-NE3
Reverse Tunnel NE3-NE1
PW ID 1
Forward Label 16
Reverse Label 16

7. Click Detail and then set the Advanced PW Parameters.
Parameter Value
Control Word Use
Control Channel Type CW
VCCV Verification Mode Ping
RTP Header Disabled
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) 8000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
287
Parameter Value
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode

Step 6 Configure the CES service between NE2 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.3 Creating a CES
Service in End-to-End Mode.
2. Set the basic attributes.
Parameter Value
Service Type CES
Service ID 2
Service Name CES2

displayed.
4. Select NE2 as the source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
Parameter Value
Board 19-MD75
Port -
High TimeSlot -
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Selected

5. Select NE3 as the sink NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
Parameter Value
Board 21-CQ1
Port 2
High TimeSlot 1
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Selected
64K Timeslot 1-31
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
288

6. Under PW, set the associated parameters.
Parameter Value
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE3
Reverse Tunnel NE3-NE2
PW ID 1
Forward Label 17
Reverse Label 17

7. Click Detail and then set the Advanced PW Parameters.
Parameter Value
Control Character Use
Control Channel Type CW
VCCV Verification Mode Ping
RTP Header Disabled
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode

----End
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration
After configuring a CES service, you need to verify whether the service configuration is correct.
Prerequisites
l CES services must be configured as required. For details, see 7 Configuring CES
Services in the Configuration Guide.
BER tester or SDH analyzer, the U2000
Figure 7-7 shows the connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES service. You can
replace the SDH analyzer with a BER tester.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
289
Figure 7-7 Connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES services
SDH
analyzer
Tx
Rx
Inloop
NE1 NE2
Packet
domain
DDF

WARNING
l Only commissioning engineers are present during the test.
l Do not touch the cable, unless necessary.
Procedure
Step 1 As shown in Figure 7-7, connect the CES service interface on NE1 to the BER tester.
Step 2 Perform an inloop for the UNI that receives CES services on NE2 on the U2000.
1. In the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click the required NE and then choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.
2. Select the board that provides CES services.
3. In the Function Tree, select the type of the interface that receives the CES services.
If an E1 interface receives the CES services, choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
If an SDH interface receives the CES services, choose Configuration > Packet
4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then select the interface to perform a loopback.
5. Right-click the Loopback Mode field, and then choose Inloop from the shortcut menu.
6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Perform a 24-hour bit error test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
290
NOTE
Set the coding to HDB3 and pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) to 2
15
-1 for the signals transmitted
by the BER tester.
Set the BER tester according to the encapsulation method that the CES services adopt and the frame format
that the E1 interface adopts. Set the timeslots on the BER tester consistently with the CES service timeslots.
l If the CES services adopt the SATop method, you need to enable the BER tester to transmit unframed
signals, double-frame signals, or CRC-4 multiframe signals.
l If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the double-frame format, you
need to enable the BER tester to transmit double-frame signals.
l If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the CRC-4 multiframe format,
you need to enable the BER tester to transmit CRC-4 multiframe signals.
Step 4 Test the performance of the CES services. That is, check whether bit errors occur in the CES
services in the 24-hour period.
Step 5 Check for the alarms associated with the CES services. If there is any, see the Alarms and
Performance Events Reference and Troubleshooting to clear the alarms.
Step 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 4 to perform the 24-hour bit error test again.
Step 7 Release the inloop that is set on the interface on NE2. For details, see Step 2.
Step 8 Reconnect the cable to the CES service interface on NE1.
Step 9 Repeat Step 1 to Step 8 to test the CES services on all the other 2 Mbit/s interfaces on NE1 and
NE2.
Step 10 Repeat Step 1 to Step 9 to test connectivity of the CES services on the other NEs.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
291
8 Configuring ATM Services
About This Chapter
This section describes how to configure ATM services.
NOTE
This section describes how to configure ATM services on the OptiX OSN 7500 II. Procedures for
configuring ATM services on other OptiX equipment are similar. The only difference lies in that associated
boards may be housed in different slots on different devices. For slots valid for the boards that a product
supports, see the Hardware Description of the product.
8.1 Introduction to ATM
This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services
This section describes the configuration flows for UNI-UNI ATM services and UNIs-NNI ATM
services.
8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNI-UNI ATM services
according to network conditions.
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNIs-NNI ATM services
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration
Use the ATM OAM function to test the connectivity of UNIs-NNI ATM services to ensure that
the ATM services are transmitted normally. This section describes how to test the connectivity
of ATM services by performing a loopback (LB) test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
292
8.1 Introduction to ATM
This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
Definition
The ATM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM services
on a packet switched network (PSN) by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated ATM
services can be transmitted on a PSN.
Purpose
Aided by the ATM PWE3 technology, conventional ATM networks can be connected by a PSN.
Specifically, ATM PWE3 allows transmitting conventional ATM services over a PSN by
emulating the ATM services.
The networking type of ATM PWE3 can be one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS depending
on the encapsulation type of ATM PWE3 packets. It is obvious that ATM PWE3 helps to transmit
ATM services over the PSN, without adding ATM equipment or changing the configuration of
the ATM CE equipment.
Figure 8-1 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
Packet transmission equipment
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE2 CE1
NodeB
RNC
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
293
Figure 8-2 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
Packet transmission equipment
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE4 CE2
CE1
CE3
NodeB
RNC
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

NOTE
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services
This section describes the configuration flows for UNI-UNI ATM services and UNIs-NNI ATM
services.
8.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI ATM Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-UNI ATM services and the
Figure 8-3 shows the flow for configuring UNI-UNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
294
Figure 8-3 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI ATM services
3. Configure ATM ports.
4. Configure UNI-UNI
ATM services.
Required
End
2. Configure ATM
policies.
Start
1. Create the network.

Table 8-1 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI ATM services
1 Creating the network Create NEs, configure NE data, and create optical
fibers.
2 Configuring ATM
policies
The ATM policies are configured for ATM traffic
management. For details, see Creating the ATM Policy.
3 Configuring ATM
ports
The ATM ports are configured for receiving services
from base stations. For details, see 9.15.1 Configuring
ATM Interfaces.
4 Configuring UNI-
UNI ATM services
Set the service ID, service name, and connection type,
and configure connections. For details, see 9.15.5
Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.

8.2.2 Configuration Flow for UNIs-NNI ATM Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services and the
Figure 8-4 shows the flow for configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
295
Figure 8-4 Configuration flow for UNIs-NNI ATM services
1. Create the network.
6. Configure ATM
ports.
7. Configure UNIs-NNI
ATM services.
Start
Required
End
5. Configure ATM
policies.
4. Configure
MPLS tunnels.
3. Configure the NNI
ports.
2. Configure the LSR
ID.

Table 8-2 Configuration flow for UNIs-NNI ATM services
1 Creating the
network
Create NEs, configure NE data, and create optical fibers.
2 Configuring the
LSR ID
-
3 Configuring the
NNI ports
l Set the general attributes of Ethernet ports.
l Set the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports, including the
tunnel enabled status and IP address.
4 Config
uring
MPLS
tunnel
s
Configu
ring an
MPLS
tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
296
Configu
ring
MPLS
OAM
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to 3.3.
Configu
ring
MPLS
tunnel
APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters according to
the service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8 Managing MPLS
Tunnel APS Protection Groups.
5 Configuring
ATM policies
The ATM policies are configured for ATM traffic management.
l For details about configuring ATM policy in per-NE mode,
see Creating the ATM Policy.
l For details about configuring ATM policy profile in end-to-
end mode, see 9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy
Profile.
6 Configuring
ATM ports
The ATM ports are configured for receiving services from base
stations. For details, see 9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces.
7 Configuring
UNIs-NNI ATM
services
1. Create CES services, that is, set the service ID, service name,
service type, and connection type.
2. Configure ATM connections, that is, set the source
information, PW ID, sink information, and policies.
3. Configure PWs, that is, set information such as the PW type,
PW label, and tunnel type.
4. Configure CoS mappings, that is, set the CoS policy for PWs.
l For details about configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services in
per-NE mode, see 9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-
NE Basis.
l For details about configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services in
end-to-end mode, see 9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by
Using the Trail Function.

8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNI-UNI ATM services
8.3.1 Network Diagram
This section describes the networking information about the example where R99 services,
signaling services, and HSDPA services are transported between a NodeB and an RNC.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
297
Figure 8-5 shows a network diagram of UNI-UNI ATM services. ATM services are required
between the NodeB and the RNC. Connection 1 is used for transmitting R99 services, connection
2 is used for transmitting HSDPA services, and connection 3 is used for transmitting signaling
services. The NodeB transmits services to the RNC through NE1. NE1 uses the OptiX OSN
7500 II to receive the services from the NodeB, and transmits the services to the RNC through
STM-1.
Figure 8-5 Network diagram of UNI-UNI ATM services
UNI UNI
IMA 1
STM-1
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
VPI
70
VCI
32
71 32
Node B NE 1 RNC
1 102 Connection 3 72 32 Signaling

Figure 8-6 NE planning diagram
UNI UNI
IMA 1 STM-1
Node B NE 1 RNC
35-N1D12E 32-N1AFO1

To transport the R99 services, signaling services, and HSDPA services between the NodeB and
the RNC, three ATM connections need to be created.
The NodeB receives the ATM services through IMA1, and then transmits the services to the
RNC. N:1 VCC ATM services containing three connections need to be created. Figure 8-5
shows VPI/VCI switching. The network shown in Figure 8-5 is taken as an example.
Table 8-3 lists the parameters planned for NE1.
Table 8-3 Parameters planned for NE1
Attribute Description
Base Station of Service NodeB
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
298
IMA Group IMA1
Port Accessing the IMA Group at NodeB NE1-35-N1D12E-1
Port Connected to RNC NE1-32-N1AFO1-1
Conn
ection
1
Source VPI/VCI 1/100
Sink VPI/VCI 70/32
Conn
ection
2
Sink VPI/VCI 71/32
Conn
ection
3
Sink VPI/VCI 72/32

Table 8-4 lists the QoS policies planned for the ATM services.
Table 8-4 Service categories and QoS requirements
Service Category ATM Policy PW Bandwidth Tunnel
Bandwidth
Audio service, which
is carried by RT-
VBR
l Policy ID: 1
l Policy name: RT-
VBR
l Service category:
RT-VBR
l Traffic type:
ClpNoTag-
gingScrCdvt
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s):
4000
l Clp0Scr(cell/s):
1000
l MBS(cell): 100
l CDVT(us):
10000
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
4 Mbit/s 30 Mbit/s
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
299
Service Category ATM Policy PW Bandwidth Tunnel
Bandwidth
Signaling service,
which is carried by
CBR
l Policy ID: 2
l Policy name:
CBR
l Service category:
CBR
l Traffic type:
NoClpNoScr
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s):
800
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
1 Mbit/s
Data service, which
is carried by UBR
l Policy ID: 3
l Policy name:
UBR
l Service category:
UBR
l Traffic type:
NoTrafficDe-
scriptor
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
15 Mbit/s

8.3.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis
This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.
l A network must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, and UBR.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
300
1. Configure the CBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 2.
2. Configure the RT-VBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 1.
3. Configure the UBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 3.
Step 2 Configure ATM ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
1. Configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
b. Select 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Right-click the Port
Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.
NOTE
Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1), 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes
the port from other ports and helps to query the port.)
l Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.)
l Encapsulation: ATM (default)
c. In the Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for ports 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Click Apply.
l Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
d. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management > ATM
IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click the Binding tab.
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the parameters such as Available
Boards and Configuration Ports. Then, click OK.
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configuration Ports: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1.)
l Available Resources: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
301
f. In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable
Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click
Apply.
Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry
Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active
Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters
the same as those of the NodeB.
g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI and
Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Loopback: Non-Loopback
2. Configure RNC-side ATM ports.
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure RNC-side ATM ports.
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1), and set the parameters
such as Max. VPI and Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
l Port Type: UNI
l Max. VPI: 255
l Max. VCI: 127
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32
Step 3 Configure a UNI-UNI ATM service and add three connections.
1. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > ATM Service Management from the
Function Tree.
2. In the Connection tab, click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. In the
window, configure a UNI-UNI service.
l Service ID: 10
l Service Name: ATMService-10
l Service Type: UNI-UNI
l Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection
can be changed; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be
changed.)
3. Click the Connection tab and click Add to add connection 1, connection 2, and connection
3. Then, click OK.
l Connection 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
302
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service from the NodeB.)
Source VCI: 100 (This parameter indicates the VCI information that is transmitted
with the service from the NodeB.)
PW ID: -
Sink Board: 32-N1AFO1
Sink Port: 1(PORT-1)
Sink VPI: 70 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service after VPI switching. The sink VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
Sink VCI: 32 (This parameter indicates The VCI information that is transmitted with
the service after VCI switching. The sink VCI ranges from 32 to Max. VCI.)
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99
service.)
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an
R99 service.)
l Connection 2
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: -
Sink VPI: 71
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA
service.)
Downlink Policy: UBR (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA
service.)
l Connection 3
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
303
Sink VPI: 72
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signaling
service.)
Downlink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signaling
service.)
----End
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNIs-NNI ATM services
8.4.1 Network Diagram
This section describes the networking information about the example where R99 services,
signaling services, and HSDPA services are transported between NodeB1 and the RNC, and
between NodeB2 and the RNC.
Figure 8-7 shows a network diagram of UNIs-NNI ATM services. 3G R99 services, signaling
services, and HSDPA services are required between NodeB1/NodeB2 and the RNC. NE1
accesses the MPLS network formed by Hybrid MSTP equipment. NodeB1 is connected to NE1
through IMA1, and NodeB2 is connected to NE1 through IMA2. VPI/VCI switching is
performed on NE1, and VPI/VCI transparent transmission is performed on NE2 and NE3.
Between NE1 and NE3, three PWs are used to carry the R99 services, signaling services, and
HSDPA services, and one PW carries one category of service. At the remote end, to transparently
transmit the ATM services on the MPLS network, NE3 is connected to the RNC through STM-1.
NE1 and NE3 are OptiX OSN 7500 IIs, and NE2, NE4, NE5 and NE6 are OptiX OSN 3500s.
The ATM services are carried by the working tunnel. The protection tunnel can be created to
protect the services that have high real-time requirements.
The working tunnel is NE1-NE2-NE3, and the protection tunnel is NE1-NE6-NE5-NE4-NE3.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
304
Figure 8-7 Network diagram of UNIs-NNI ATM services
Working Tunnel
NodeB 1
RNC
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
GE ring on
access layer
10GE ring on
convergence
layer
NodeB 2
pw1
pw3
pw2
IMA1
IMA2
ATM
STM-1
UNI NNI
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
Connection 3 Signalling 1 102
52 32
UNI
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
52 32
IMA1:
UNI NNI
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
1 102
62 32
UNI
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
62 32
IMA2:
NNI
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
52 32
NNI
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
62 32
PW
Protection Tunnel
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
Connection 3 Signalling

Figure 8-8 shows the NE planning diagram.
Figure 8-8 NE planning diagram
Working Tunnel
Protection Tunnel
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
3-EG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.0.2
3-EX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.1.2
4-PEX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.1.1
32-AFO1-1(PORT-1)
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.4.1
GE ring on
access layer
10GE ring on
convergence
layer
3-EX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.2.1
3-PEX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.2.2
3-PEX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.3.1
4-PEX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.3.2
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.4.2
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.5.2
3-EG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.5.1
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 2
35-D12E

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
305
To transport the R99 services, signaling services, and HSDPA services between NodeB1 and
the RNC, between NodeB2 and the RNC, three ATM services need to be created.
Between NE1 and NE3, the R99 services are carried by PW1, the HSDPA services are carried
by PW2, and the signaling services are carried by PW3. Therefore, three ATM services need to
be created. At NodeB1 and NodeB2, the R99 services are aggregated, and the signaling services
and HSDPA services are received. Therefore, N:1 VCC ATM services containing two
connections need to be created. The network shown in Figure 8-7 is taken as an example.
Table 8-5 Parameters planned for the NEs
NE LSR ID Port Port IP Address IP Mask
NE1 130.0.0.1 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.0.1 255.255.255.252
3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.5.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 130.0.0.2 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.1.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.0.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 130.0.0.3 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.2.1 255.255.255.252
3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE4 130.0.0.4 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.3.1 255.255.255.252
NE5 130.0.0.5 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.3.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.4.2 255.255.255.252
NE6 130.0.0.6 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.4.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.5.2 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
306
Table 8-6 Parameters planned for tunnels
Parameter Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel
Tunnel ID 100 101 120 121
Name Working
Tunnel-Positive
Working
Tunnel-Reverse
Protection
Tunnel-Positive
Protection
Tunnel-Reverse
Signal Type Static Static Static Static
Scheduling
Type
E-LSP E-LSP E-LSP E-LSP
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit
Ingress Node NE1 NE3 NE1 NE3
Transit Node NE2 NE2 NE6, NE5, NE4 NE4, NE5, NE6
Egress Node NE3 NE1 NE3 NE1
Ingress Node
Route
Information
NE1
l Out Port: 3-
EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
20
NE3
l Out Port: 3-
EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
21
NE1
l Out Port: 3-
EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
22
NE3
l Out Port: 3-
EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
23
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
307
Parameter Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel
Transit Node
Route
Information
NE2
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 20
l Out Port: 4-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
30
NE2
l In Port: 4-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 21
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
31
NE6
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 22
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
32
NE5
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 32
l Out Port: 4-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
42
NE4
l In Port: 3-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 42
l Out Port: 3-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
52
NE4
l In Port: 3-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 23
l Out Port: 3-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
33
NE5
l In Port: 4-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 33
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
43
NE6
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 43
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
53
Egress Node
Route
Information
NE3
l In Port: 3-
EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 30
NE1
l In Port: 3-
EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 31
NE3
l In Port: 3-
EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 52
NE1
l In Port: 3-
EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 53

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
308
Base
Station of
Service
NodeB1 NodeB2
IMA
Group
IMA1 IMA2
Source
Port
35-N1D12E-1(Port-1) 35-N1D12E-2(Port-2)
Service R99 HSDPA Signaling R99 HSDPA Signaling
Source
VPI/VCI
1/100 1/101 1/102 1/100 1/101 1/102
Sink VPI/
VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
PW of
Service
PW1 PW2 PW3 PW1 PW2 PW3
PW ID 35 36 37 35 36 37

Attribute Remarks Description
Service R99 HSDPA Signaling R99 HSDPA Signaling
Source
VPI/VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
Sink VPI/
VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
PW of
Service
PW1 PW2 PW3 PW1 PW2 PW3
PW ID 35 36 37 35 36 37
Sink Port 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)

Table 8-9 lists the QoS policies planned for the ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
309
Table 8-9 Service categories and QoS requirements
Service Category ATM Policy
Audio service, which is carried by RT-VBR l Policy ID: 1
l Policy name: RT-VBR
l Service category: RT-VBR
l Traffic type: ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 4000
l Clp0Scr(cell/s): 1000
l MBS(cell): 100
l CDVT(us): 10000
l Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable
Signaling service, which is carried by CBR l Policy ID: 2
l Policy name: CBR
l Service category: CBR
l Traffic type: NoClpNoScr
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 800
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable
Data service, which is carried by UBR l Policy ID: 3
l Policy name: UBR
l Service category: UBR
l Traffic type: NoTrafficDescriptor
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable

This section describes how to configure an ATM service in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must learn about the networking requirements and service plan described in the
example.
l A network must be created and the IP addresses of ports must be automatically allocated.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
310
Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space, and other parameters. Click Apply.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
LSR ID NE1: 130.0.0.1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
addition, this value is
unique on an entire
network.
Start of Global Label Space 0 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

3. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the
preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID.
Selection
LSR ID NE2: 130.0.0.2
NE3: 130.0.0.3
NE4: 130.0.0.4
NE5: 130.0.0.5
NE6: 130.0.0.6
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
unique on an entire
network.
according to the
networking plan.

Step 2 Create the working tunnel.
2. Set the basic information about the working tunnel.
Selection
Tunnel Name Working Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Protocol Type MPLS Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
311
Selection
Signaling Type Static CR Set this parameter
plan.
Service Direction Unidirectional Set this parameter
plan.
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected This parameter is selected
when a reverse tunnel needs
to be created.
Protection Type 1+1 Set this parameter
plan.

3. Configure the NE list. On the physical topology, double-click NE1, NE2, and NE3 to add
them to the NE list and set the corresponding NE roles.
Selection
NE2: Transit
NE3: Egress
An ingress is the incoming
node of a network. In this
example, NE1 is an ingress
node.
A transit is a pass-through
node. In this example, NE2
is a transit node.
An egress is the outgoing
example, NE3 is an egress
node.
Deploy Selected When this parameter is
selected, a tunnel is saved
on the U2000 and applied to
the corresponding NEs.

4. Click Details to set the advanced parameters of the reverse tunnel. Click OK.
Selection
Tunnel ID l Forward Tunnel: 100
l Reverse Tunnel: 101
Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
312
Selection
CIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
CBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
PIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
PBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
MTU (bytes) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
plan.
LSP Type Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: E-LSP
Currently, this parameter
can be set to E-LSP only.
EXP Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only ingress
nodes and transit nodes.
l NE1: 20
l NE2: 30
Forward Tunnel:
l NE3: 21
l NE2: 31
Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
313
Selection
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
to be set for only egress
l NE2: 20
l NE3: 30
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 21
l NE1: 31
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 10.0.0.2
l NE2: 10.0.1.2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.1.1
l NE2: 10.0.0.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 3 Create the protection tunnel.
1. Create the protection tunnel by referring toStep 2
Set the basic Information as follows:
Selection
Tunnel Name Protection Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
314
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
to be created.

Set the node information as follows:
Selection
NE6, NE5, NE4: Transit
NE3: Egress
node.
node. In this example, NE6,
NE5, and NE4 are transit
nodes.
node.

Set the route information as follows:
Selection
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
315
Selection
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Tunnels: E-LSP
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
plan.
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
316
Selection
l NE1: 22
l NE6: 32
l NE5: 42
l NE4: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 23
l NE4: 33
l NE5: 43
l NE6: 53
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
l NE6: 22
l NE5: 32
l NE4: 42
l NE3: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 23
l NE5: 33
l NE6: 43
l NE1: 53
Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
317
Selection
l NE1: 10.0.5.2
l NE6: 10.0.4.2
l NE5: 10.0.3.1
l NE4: 10.0.2.1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.2.2
l NE4: 10.0.3.2
l NE5: 10.0.4.1
l NE6: 10.0.2.1
Set this parameter
plan.

Step 4 Configure ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
to configure NodeB-side ports.
b. Select the ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8), Right-click
the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click
Apply.
NOTE
l Port: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8)
l Encapsulation Type: ATM
c. In the Advanced tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for the ports from 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8). Click Apply.
l Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set bound ports for 35-N1D12E-1
(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Then, click OK.
Set the parameters relevant to 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
318
plan.)
l Configurable Ports: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1
board. For this example, the board is an ATM E1 board.)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv. For this example, the path level is E1.)
l Available Resources: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-4
(PORT-4)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv.)
plan.)
networking plan.)
(PORT-8)
VC12-xv.)
Apply.
The settings of parameters need to be the same as those on the NodeB.
Max. VCI. Then, click Apply.
l Loopback: No Loopback
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
319
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1) and set the parameters
l Max. VPI: 255 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VPI to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
l Max. VCI: 127 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VCI to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to Max. VCI.)
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
Step 5 Create three UNIs-NNI ATM services.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. Create
an R99 service from NE1 to NE3.
Table 8-10 Parameters of general attributes
Selection
Service Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Service ID 1 A service ID uniquely
identifies a service on an
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-R99 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Protection Type Protection-free Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Link Type ATM N-to-1 VCC Cell
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

2. Click Configure Source And Sink. A window is displayed. On the Physical Topology in
the upper left portion of the window, set NE1 as the source NE and NE3 as the sink NE.
Set relevant parameters and click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
320
Table 8-11 Parameters of the source node
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-12 Parameters of the sink node
Selection
according to the
networking plan.

3. In PW in the lower left portion of the window, set relevant parameters.
Selection
Forward Type Static Binding l If you set Forward
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Forward
Tunnel area.
l If you set Reverse
Type to Select Policy,
you need to set a tunnel
priority in the Reverse
Tunnel area so that the
system selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Forward Tunnel Tunnel-001 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
321
Selection
Reverse Type Static Binding l If you set Reverse
Type to Static
manually specify a
tunnel in the Reverse
Tunnel area.
according to the
priority.
Reverse Tunnel Tunnel-001_Reverse Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PW ID 35 A PW ID uniquely
identifies a PW on an entire
network.
Signaling Type Static For a static PW, you need to
set Forward Label and
Reverse Label.
Encapsulation Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

4. Click ATM Link. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters relevant to the
connection.
Table 8-14 Parameters for configuring an ATM connection
Selection
Connection Name Connection1 and
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Role Working Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
322
Selection
Source SAI Connection1: 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Source VPI Connection1: 1
Connection2: 1
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source VCI Connection1: 100
Connection2: 100
the VCI information carried
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: RT-VBR
Connection2: RT-VBR
Connection1 is an R99
service and you need to
select the RT-VBR policy
for it.
for it.
Sink SAI Connection1: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink VPI Connection1: 50
Connection2: 60
by the service after VPI
switching. Max. VPI of an
ATM port is 255 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 0 to 255.
Sink VCI Connection1: 32
Connection2: 32
by the service after VCI
switching. Max. VCI of an
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
323
Selection
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: RT-VBR
Connection2: RT-VBR
for it.
for it.
Transit VPI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Transit VCI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

5. Click Advanced and set PW QoS and Advanced PW Attribute.
Table 8-15 Parameters of advanced attributes
Selection
Control Word Must use On an MPLS PSN, a control
word carries the packet
information. A control
word is the encapsulation
packet header that consists
of four bytes. A control
word can be used to identify
the packet sequence or used
for bit stuffing.
Control Channel Type CW A CW control word is used
to detect the connectivity of
a PW.
VCCV Verification Mode Ping The VCCV verification
mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.
Source ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
324
Selection
Max. Concatenated Cells
Count
10 This parameter specifies
the maximum number of
ATM cells that can be
encapsulated into a packet.
Packet Loading Time (us) 1000 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-16 PW QoS parameters
Selection
EXP 1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 Set the bandwidth based on
the service traffic.
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 Set the bandwidth based on
the service traffic.

6. Click OK. The ATMService-R99 service is created successfully.
7. Create an ATMService-HSDPA service. For details, refer to the preceding steps.
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-HSDPA Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
325
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
Type to Static
manually specify a
Tunnel area.
l If you set Forward
Type, you need to set a
tunnel priority in the
Forward Tunnel area
so that the system
selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
326
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
Type to Static
manually specify a
Tunnel area.
according to the
priority.
according to the
networking plan.
network.
Reverse Label.
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
327
Selection
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Connection2: 1
station.
Connection2: 101
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: UBR
Connection2: UBR
Connection1 is an HSDPA
select the UBR policy for it.
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Connection2: 61
Connection2: 32
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
328
Selection
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: UBR
Connection2: UBR
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
for bit stuffing.
a PW.
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
Count
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
329
Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
the volume of service
traffic.
traffic.

8. Create an ATMService-Signaling service. For details, refer to the preceding steps.
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-Signaling Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
330
Selection
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
Type to Static
manually specify a
Tunnel area.
l If you set Forward
Type, you need to set a
tunnel priority in the
Forward Tunnel area
so that the system
selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
331
Selection
Type to Static
manually specify a
Tunnel area.
according to the
priority.
according to the
networking plan.
network.
Reverse Label.
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
332
Selection
Connection2: 1
station.
Connection2: 102
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: CBR
Connection2: CBR
Connection1 is a signaling
select the CBR policy for it.
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Connection2: 62
Connection2: 32
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: CBR
Connection2: CBR
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
333
Selection
according to the
networking plan.

Selection
for bit stuffing.
a PW.
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
Count
according to the
networking plan.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
334
Selection
according to the
networking plan.
according to the
networking plan.
traffic.
traffic.

----End
This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must learn about the networking requirements and service plan described in the
example.
l A network must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs.
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space, and other parameters. Click Apply.
Selection
LSR ID NE1: 130.0.0.1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
unique on an entire
network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
335
Selection
according to the
networking plan.

3. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the
preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID.
Selection
LSR ID NE2: 130.0.0.2
NE3: 130.0.0.3
NE4: 130.0.0.4
NE5: 130.0.0.5
NE6: 130.0.0.6
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
unique on an entire
network.
according to the
networking plan.

Step 2 Configure NNI ports.
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure NNI
ports.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select ports 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) and 3-EG8-2(PORT-2).
Right-click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and
click Apply.
l Enable Port: Enabled
l Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.)
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to the same.)
l Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All packets with a length greater than the maximum frame length are
discarded.)
3. Select the 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) and 3-EG8-2(PORT-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-
click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP Address
field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask.
Click Apply.
l Enable Tunnel: Enabled
l Specify IP Address: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of
the port.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
336
l 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1
l 3-EG8-2(PORT-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1
l IP Mask: 255.255.255.252
4. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately. Perform 2.1
through 2.3 to set parameters for each port.
Set parameters for each port the same as for NE1-3-EG8-1(PORT-1).
The layer 3 attributes of each port are as follows:
NE Port IP Address IP Mask
NE2 4-PEX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2) 10.0.0.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-EX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.252
3-EX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE4 3-PEX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.3.1 255.255.255.252
NE5 4-PEX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.3.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) 10.0.4.2 255.255.255.252
NE6 3-PEG8-2(PORT-2) 10.0.4.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) 10.0.5.2 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Create the working tunnel.
2. Set the basic information about the working tunnel.
Selection
Tunnel Name Working Tunnel Set this parameter
plan.
plan.
plan.
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
337
Selection
to be created.
Protection Type 1+1 Set this parameter
plan.

3. Configure the NE list. On the physical topology, double-click NE1, NE2, and NE3 to add
them to the NE list and set the corresponding NE roles.
Selection
NE2: Transit
NE3: Egress
node.
node. In this example, NE2
is a transit node.
node.

4. Click Details to set the advanced parameters of the reverse tunnel. Click OK.
Selection
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
338
Selection
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: E-LSP
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
l NE1: 20
l NE2: 30
Forward Tunnel:
l NE3: 21
l NE2: 31
Set this parameter
plan.
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
339
Selection
l NE2: 20
l NE3: 30
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 21
l NE1: 31
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 10.0.0.2
l NE2: 10.0.1.2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.1.1
l NE2: 10.0.0.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 4 Create the protection tunnel.
1. Create the protection tunnel by referring toStep 3.
Set the basic Information as follows:
Selection
Tunnel Name Protection Tunnel Set this parameter
plan.
plan.
plan.
according to the
networking plan.
to be created.

Set the node information as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
340
Selection
NE6, NE5, NE4: Transit
NE3: Egress
node.
node. In this example, NE6,
NE5, and NE4 are transit
nodes.
node.

Set the route information as follows:
Selection
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
plan.
Tunnels: E-LSP
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
341
Selection
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
l NE1: 22
l NE6: 32
l NE5: 42
l NE4: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 23
l NE4: 33
l NE5: 43
l NE6: 53
Set this parameter
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
342
Selection
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
l NE6: 22
l NE5: 32
l NE4: 42
l NE3: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 23
l NE5: 33
l NE6: 43
l NE1: 53
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
l NE1: 10.0.5.2
l NE6: 10.0.4.2
l NE5: 10.0.3.1
l NE4: 10.0.2.1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.2.2
l NE4: 10.0.3.2
l NE5: 10.0.4.1
l NE6: 10.0.2.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
343
Step 5 Configure ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
to configure NodeB-side ports.
b. Select the ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8), Right-click
the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click
Apply.
NOTE
l Encapsulation Type: ATM
c. In the Advanced tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for the ports from 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8). Click Apply.
l Frame Format: CRC-4 multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set bound ports for ports 35-N1D12E-1
(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Then, click OK.
plan.)
networking plan.)
(PORT-4)
VC12-xv.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
344
plan.)
networking plan.)
(PORT-8)
VC12-xv.)
Apply.
The settings of parameters need to be the same as those on the NodeB.
Max. VCI. Then, click Apply.
l Loopback: No Loopback
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1) and set the parameters
l Max. VPI: 255 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VPI to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
l Max. VCI: 127 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VCI to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to Max. VCI.)
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
Step 6 Create three UNIs-NNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
345
ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Then, create an R99 service from
NE1 to NE3.
2. Click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. Then, set Service ID, Service
Name, Service Type, and Connection Type.
l Service ID: 1
l Service Name: ATMService-R99
l Service Type: UNIs-NNI
l Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection
can be changed; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be
changed.)
3. Click the Connection tab and click Add. The Configure Connection window is displayed.
Add connection 1 and connection 2.
l Connection 1
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service from the NodeB.)
Source VCI: 100 (This parameter indicates the VCI information that is transmitted
with the service from the NodeB.)
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 50 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service after VPI switching. Max. VPI of the ATM port is planned to be 255,
and therefore the Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 255.)
Sink VCI: 32 (This parameter indicates The VCI information that is transmitted with
the service after VCI switching. Max. VCI of the ATM port is planned to be 127,
and therefore the Sink VCI ranges from 32 to 127.)
service.)
R99 service.)
l Connection 2
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 100
PW ID: 35
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
346
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 60
Sink VCI: 32
service.)
R99 service.)
4. Click the PW tab and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window,
set attributes for the PW.
Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:
l Basic attributes
PW ID: 35
PW Signaling Type: Static (Static indicates that ingress and egress labels are
manually added.)
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport (Select ATM n-to-one VCC cell
transport if multiple ATM connections are mapped to one PW; select ATM one-to-
one VCC Cell Mode if one ATM connection is mapped to one PW. For this example,
two ATM connections are mapped are mapped to one PW.)
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 1 (Tunnel-0001)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (This parameter specifies the LSR ID of the NE terminating
the PW.)
l Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW (A CW control word is used to detect the connectivity
of a PW.)
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping (The VCCV verification mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.)
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (This parameter specifies the maximum number
of ATM cells that can be encapsulated into a packet.)
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
l QoS
Ingress
EXP: 1
5. Click the CoS Mapping tab and set QoS attributes for PW1.
Set CoS mapping for PW1 as follows:
l PW ID: 35
l CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
6. In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, create an ATMService-R99 service by following
6.1 to 6.5.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
347
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 1
Service Name: ATMService-R99
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 50
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 50
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR
Connection 2
Source VPI: 60
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 60
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR
l Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 35
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
348
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.1
Advanced attributes
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 1
l Set CoS mapping for PW1 as follows:
PW ID: 35
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
7. Create an ATMService-HSDPA service by following 6.1 to 6.6.
Set the parameters related to NE1 as follows:
Service ID: 2
Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA
Connection 1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 51
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Downlink Policy: UBR
Connection 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
349
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 61
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Basic attributes
PW ID: 36
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Advanced attributes
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 3
PW ID: 36
Service ID: 2
Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA
Connection 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
350
Source VPI: 51
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 51
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Connection 2
Source VPI: 61
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 61
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Basic attributes
PW ID: 36
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Advanced attributes
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
351
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 3
PW ID: 36
8. Create an ATMService-Signaling service by following 6.1 to 6.6.
Service ID: 3
Service Name: ATMService-Signaling
Connection 1
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 52
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Downlink Policy: CBR
Connection 2
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 62
Sink VCI: 32
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
352
Uplink Policy: CBR
Basic attributes
PW ID: 37
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Advanced attributes
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 0
PW ID: 37
Service ID: 3
Service Name: ATMService-Signaling
Connection 1
Source VPI: 52
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
353
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 52
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Connection 2
Source VPI: 62
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 62
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Basic attributes
PW ID: 37
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Advanced attributes
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 0
PW ID: 37
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
354
----End
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration
Use the ATM OAM function to test the connectivity of UNIs-NNI ATM services to ensure that
the ATM services are transmitted normally. This section describes how to test the connectivity
of ATM services by performing a loopback (LB) test.
Prerequisites
l An ATM service must be configured. For information on how to configure an ATM service,
refer to section 8 Configuring ATM Services in the Configuration Guide.
U2000
Figure 8-9 shows the connection for testing the connectivity of ATM services.
Figure 8-9 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of ATM services
Inloop
NE1 NE2
PSN
Inloop

Procedure
Step 1 Set the automatic loopback release function to Disabled for the UNI ports receiving the tested
ATM service on NE1 and NE2.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE
Function from the Main Menu.
2. Select NE1 and NE2 from Physical Root and click .
3. Set Auto Disabling to Disabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback of NE1
and NE2.
NOTE
When Auto Disabling of SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on an NE is set to Disabled, the
automatic loopback release function is disabled for all SDH optical ports, PDH electrical ports, and ATM
IMA groups on the NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
355
Step 2 Set an inloop for the UNI port (to be tested) receiving the ATM service on NE1 by using the
U2000.
l If the UNI port receiving the ATM service is an IMA group, do as follows:
1. On the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click NE1 and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function
Tree.
3. Click the ATM Interface Management tab and then select the IMA group carrying the
tested ATM service.
4. Set Loopback to Inloop for the IMA group.
5. Click Apply.
l If the UNI port receiving the ATM service is an AFO1 port, do as follows:
1. On the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click NE1 and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then select the AFO1 port carrying the tested ATM
service.
4. Set Loopback to Inloop for the AFO1 port.
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set an inloop for the UNI port (to be tested) receiving the ATM service on NE2 with reference
to Step 2.
Step 4 In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and set Segment and End Attribute to Endpoint for
the ATM service to be tested whose Connection Direction is Source.
NOTE
Segment and End Attribute of an ATM service specifies the type of ATM OAM cells transmitted during
an LB test.
l If Segment and End Attribute is set to Segment point, seg_LB cells are transmitted.
l If Segment and End Attribute is set to Endpoint, e-t-e_LB cells are transmitted.
Step 6 Set Loopback Point NE of the tested ATM service to NE2.
Step 7 Click Test. After the test is completed, click to check the LB test information.
NOTE
In Browse Event Logs, check Reporting of LB status information. If Test Result is Succeeded, the
tested ATM service is normal. If Test Result is Failed, rectify faults with reference to Troubleshooting.
Step 8 Release the inloops for the UNI ports receiving the ATM service on NE1 and NE2 with reference
to Step 2.
Step 9 Set Automatic Disabling to Enabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on NE1
and NE2 with reference to Step 1.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
356
9 Configuration Task Collection
About This Chapter
This topic lists the relevant configuration tasks.
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port
This topic describes how to set the attributes of an Ethernet port. An Ethernet port can be used
to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the port attributes. The
attributes of an Ethernet port include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes,
advanced attributes, and flow control.
9.2 Configuring CES Ports
This topic describes how to configure channelized STM-1 ports and E1 ports to support access
of CES services.
9.3 Configuring the NNIs
Configuring the NNIs is the basis of configuring the packet Ethernet services.
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
On a PSN network, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel carries PWs where various
services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently transmitted between
NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, you need to
configure the MPLS tunnel that carries the service.
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnels. Managing
MPLS tunnels involves checking the MPLS tunnel topology, deploying MPLS tunnels, deleting
MPLS tunnels, and managing discrete MPLS tunnels.
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM
MPLS OAM effectively detects, confirms, and locates the internal defects of an MPLS network,
and thus monitors the network performance.
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS
MPLS tunnel APS protection is implemented based on the APS protocol. If MPLS tunnel APS
is configured, the services are switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel after
the working tunnel is faulty.
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
357
stability of PWE3 services. MPLS tunnel APS provides protection for MPLS tunnels. Therefore,
it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups. Managing MPLS tunnel
APS protection groups involves automatically discovering, deploying, modifying, and deleting
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services
This topic describes how to configure E-Line services, including UNI-UNI E-Line services, E-
Line services carried by ports, E-Line services carried by PWs, and E-Line services carried by
QinQ links.
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services
This topic describes how to configure E-LAN services, including E-LAN services carried by
ports, E-LAN services carried by PWs, and E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services
This topic describes how to configure E-AGGR services, including E-AGGR services carried
by ports and E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service.
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services in per-NE mode and end-
to-end mode on the NMS.
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services
for a CES service.
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring ATM PWE3 services in per-NE mode
and end-to-end mode on the NMS.
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services
Quality of PWE3 services has significant impacts on customer revenues; stable PWE3 services
increase customer revenues. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage PWE3 services.
Managing PWE3 services involves deploying, modifying, and deleting PWE3 services,
checking the PWE3 service topology, and managing discrete PWE3 services.
9.17 Managing Composite Services
Managing composite services includes automatically discovering and deploying composite
services.
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution
Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) learning is implemented by the dynamic ARP. It
automatically maps IP addresses and MAC address, requiring no manual configuration of an
ARP table. Generally, dynamic ARP learning is applicable to networks with many NEs.
Dynamic ARP protocol packets, however, may significantly affect NE operating. For static ARP
configuration, the ARP table, namely, mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses, is
configured manually, but NE operating is not affected by static ARP protocol packets. Static
ARP configuration is applicable to small networks with specific NEs and NE ports used.
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
358
When the request VLAN function is enabled, PW-carried Ethernet services function properly
only if the TPIDs in the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same at both ends
of a PW.
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link
In the case of the QinQ link, a layer of VLAN tag is added to the packets that are accessed over
a port, through QinQ encapsulation. Hence, the packets from different VLANs on the user-side
network can be encapsulated and then transmitted to the same VLAN on the transport network.
In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service
and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ links on the network side.
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group
Creating a V-UNI group involves selecting the V-UNI group members and setting the overall
bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by
creating the V-UNI group.
9.22 Managing the Blacklist
The blacklist is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC
address. Managing a blacklist involves configuring disabled MAC addresses.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
359
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port
This topic describes how to set the attributes of an Ethernet port. An Ethernet port can be used
to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the port attributes. The
attributes of an Ethernet port include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes,
advanced attributes, and flow control.
The application scenario of an Ethernet port depends on the settings of the port attributes. For
details, refer to Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Application scenario of an Ethernet port
Application Scenario Port Type Required Port Attribute
Accessing the Ethernet
service
Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2
attributes
Carrying the QinQ Link Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2
attributes
Carrying the tunnel Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 3
attributes

NOTE
When the Ethernet port is used to carry the QinQ Link, the configuration procedure is similar to the
configuration procedure when the Ethernet port is used to carry the Ethernet service. In this case, however,
the encapsulation types are different. For details, see 9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 9-1 to set the attributes of an Ethernet port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
360
Figure 9-1 Procedure for configuring an Ethernet port
Carry Ethernet packets
Carry tunnels
Set general attributes
Start
Set general attributes
Start
Configure the flow control
End
Set Layer 3
attributes
Required
Optional
Configure the flow control
End
Set Layer 2
attributes
Set advanced attributes Set advanced attributes

9.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces
Before you set the Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port, you need to set the general
attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define
the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame
length.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
361
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.1
General Attributes.
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only. In this case, the
port can be used to carry the tunnel.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
After the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port are set, the port can be used for connecting to
the client-side equipment at the edge of an SDH network or for forwarding Ethernet packets
within the SDH network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related information
about the data link layer.
Prerequisites
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 2.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the port and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.3
Layer 2 Attributes.
NOTE
l QinQ Type Domain can be set only when Encapsulation Type is QinQ.
l TAG can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.
l Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that
the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
When an Ethernet port is used to carry a tunnel, you need to set the Layer 3 attributes of the
Ethernet port. The Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related attributes of the
network layer.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
362
Prerequisites
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3.
Procedure
Layer 3 Attributes.
NOTE
When changing the IP address of an port, ensure that the IP address of the port and the IP addresses of the
other ports configured with services are not in the same subnet.
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports
You can set the routine maintenance parameters by setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet
ports.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Advanced Attributes.
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.5 Configuring the Flow Control
When the flow control function is enabled, the Ethernet port sends a PAUSE frame to the
opposite end and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets, if a congestion occurs
on the link. As a result, the congestion is prevented.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
363
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required.
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.2 Configuring CES Ports
This topic describes how to configure channelized STM-1 ports and E1 ports to support access
of CES services.
9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
When configuring CES services carried by channelized STM-1 ports, you need to set basic
attributes and the frame format in the advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format of the
channelized STM-1 ports is the same as the service encapsulation format.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE, and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, Port Mode can be set to Layer 1 only. In this case, the OptiX
OSN equipment supports access of channelized STM-1 services.
Step 3 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
364
Step 4 Optional: Select a port and then check its associated services and logical port in the lower
window.
Step 5 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.
Step 7 In the NE Explorer, select the CQ1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management >
Path Configuration from the Function Tree. Set the parameters according to the actual
requirements.
----End
9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
When configuring CES services carried by E1 ports, you need to set basic attributes and the
frame format in the advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format of the E1 ports is the
same as the service encapsulation format.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a CES board.
Step 3 Click the General Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.2 E1 Port.
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, Port Mode can be set to Layer 1 only. In this case, the OptiX
OSN equipment supports access of E1 services.
Step 5 Optional: Select a port and then check its associated services and logical port in the lower
window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
365
Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.2 E1 Port.
NOTE
If an E1 port carries a CESoPSN CES service, set Frame Format of the E1 port to Double Frame or
CRC-4 Multiframe (recommended value). If an E1 port carries an SAToP CES service, set Frame
Format of the E1 port to Unframe.
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, the CES ACR clock mode can be configured on the NMS. Set
CES Encapsulation Clock Mode of an E1 port to Line Clock.
----End
9.3 Configuring the NNIs
Configuring the NNIs is the basis of configuring the packet Ethernet services.
9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
Before configuring the Ethernet services that are carried by ports, you need to set basic attributes
of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define the physical-
layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q, QinQ or Null.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the QinQ packets.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the 802.1Q packets.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to Null, The port transparently transmits the accessed packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
366
is successful.
Layer 2 Attributes.
NOTE
l Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the data packet with a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet
is tagged). If a data packet does not have a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is untagged), the port
discards the data packet. In this case, the Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are meaningless.
l Access: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the data
packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the port
discards the data packet.
l Hybrid: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the data
packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the port
transparently transmits the data packet.
is successful.
Step 8 Click Close.
----End
9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static
MPLS Tunnels
To configure the Ethernet services that are carried by static MPLS tunnels, you need to set the
attributes related to the port of the static MPLS tunnels.
Prerequisites
U2000
Procedure
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
367
Set the general attributes of the port as follows:
l Enable Port: Enabled
l Port Mode: Layer 3
Set the other parameters as required.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 5 Select the desired port and set Enable Tunnel as Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP
Address and IP Mask according to the service planning information. For details about the
parameters, see 10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes.
NOTE
l When changing the IP address of the port, ensure that the IP address of this port and the IP addresses
of the other ports configured with services are not in the same subnet.
is successful.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links
Before configuring Ethernet services that are carried by QinQ links, you need to set the general
attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define
the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame
length.
Prerequisites
Procedure
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
368
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to QinQ. When Encapsulation
Type is set to QinQ, he port identifies the QinQ packets.
l In the case of an NNI port, Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be more than 1020. A DCN packet
contains a maximum of 1020 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is less than 1020, the DCN packets
in the receive direction may be lost.
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
On a PSN network, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel carries PWs where various
services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently transmitted between
NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, you need to
configure the MPLS tunnel that carries the service.
NOTE
During configuration of unidirectional MPLS tunnels, forward MPLS tunnel and reverse MPLS tunnel are
created separately. For a unidirectional forward MPLS tunnel, either its mapping reverse MPLS tunnel or
another tunnel can be configured to transmit BDI packets during MPLS OAM configuration; either its
mapping reverse MPLS tunnel or another reverse MPLS tunnel can be configured as the protection reverse
tunnel during configuration of MPLS tunnel APS.
For bidirectional MPLS tunnels, a forward MPLS tunnel is bound with a specific reverse MPLS tunnel.
During configuration of MPLS OAM, BDI packets are configured to be transmitted by the reverse MPLS
tunnel bound with the forward MPLS tunnel. In addition, only the reverse MPLS tunnel that is bound with
the forward MPLS tunnel can be configured as the protection reverse tunnel during configuration of MPLS
tunnel APS.
Before configuring MPLS tunnels, refer to the number of MPLS tunnels recorded in "Functions and
Features" under "Packet Boards" in the Hardware Description.
9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID
In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR (Label Switch Router) ID.
Prerequisites
U2000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
369
Precautions
NOTE
When planning LSR IDs, adhere to the following principles:
l when ASON and packet services coexist, LSR IDs of packet services and node IDs of ASON services
must be the same.
l An LSR ID can be an IP address of standard class A, B, or C, that is, an IP address within the range
from 1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254. An LSR ID cannot be a broadcast address (*.*.*.255), multicast
address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255), reserved address (240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255), network
address (*.*.*.0), zero address (0.*.*.*), or loopback address (127.*.*.*).
l The address of the network segment used with priority: 172.16.0.0-172.31.255.255. In this network
segment, the number of the available IP address is 1048574 (the 172.16.0.0 and 172.31.255.255 are
exceptional).
l If the previous network segment address conflicts with the network segment address of the management
plane or the DCN network address, use the following network segment address with priority:
10.0.0.0-10.255.255.255. In this network segment, the number of the available IP address is 16777214
(the 10.0.0.0 and 10.255.255.255 are exceptional).
l If the previous network segment address is still conflicting, use the following network segment address:
192.168.0.0-192.168.255.255. In this network segment, the number of the available IP address is 65534
(the 192.168.0.0 and 192.168.255.255 are exceptional).
l Each NE must have an independent and globally unique LSR ID on a network.
l The LSR ID and IP address of an NE must be different from each other and must belong to different
network segments.
l The LSR ID of an NE and the IP addresses of service ports on the NE must belong to different network
segments.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > MPLS
Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set LSR ID.
For details about LSR ID, see 10.2.1 Basic Configuration.
NOTE
l When the LSR ID is specified for the first time, no warm-reset occurs on the NE. If the specified LSR
ID is then changed, a warm-reset occurs on the NE but does not affect services.
l If any tunnel exists, do not change the LSR ID.
----End
9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
This topic describes how to configure an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis by using the U2000.
9.4.2.1 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to configure
the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
370
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New > Unidirectional Tunnel. Then, the New Unicast
Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the forward and reverse MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters,
see 10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
371
NOTE
When Node Type is set to Egress, Bandwidth(kbit/s) is the same as the tunnel bandwidth in the
Ingress direction and cannot be changed manually.
Set Next Hop Address to be the IP address of the port of the next node.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the configuration of the static MPLS tunnel.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink NE.
----End
9.4.2.2 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure an end-to-end bidirectional MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to
configure the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Packet Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New > Bidirectional Tunnel. Then, the New Unicast
Bidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the bidirectional MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see
10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
372
NOTE
l When Node Type is set to Transit, the In port, Out port, Forward In Label, Forward Out Label,
Reverse In Label, Reverse Out Label, Forward Next Hop Address, Reverse Next Hop Address,
Source Node and Sink Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.
l When Node Type is set to Egress, the In port, Forward In Label, Reverse Out Label, Reverse Next
Hop Address and Source Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the configuration of the static MPLS tunnel.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink NE.
----End
9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode
This topic describes how to configure an MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode by using the NMS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
373
9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode
When creating a static and unidirectional MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode, you select the source
NE, sink NE, or transit NE directly in the physical topology and then complete creation of the
unidirectional MPLS tunnel on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l The LSR ID of each NE must be set correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu. Then, the Create Tunnel
window is displayed.
Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Select Create Reverse Tunnel.
Step 3 Set the information in NE List of the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
374
NOTE
Before configuring MPLS tunnels by means of automatic route computation, create the Layer 2 links.
1. Select the source NE, sink NE, and transit NE, and adjust the position of the NE on the
entire MPLS tunnel.
Three methods can be used to select the source, sink, and transit NEs:
l Method 1: In Physical Topology at the upper right, right-click an NE and choose
Add.
l Method 2: In Physical Topology at the upper right, double-click an NE.
l Method 3:
a. Click the Add button and then choose NE from the drop-down menu.
b. Select an NE from the window that is displayed and then click OK.
NOTE
l You can specify the position of an NE on the entire tunnel by setting NE Role or adjust the
position of an NE on the entire tunnel by clicking Up or Down.
l Select Deploy to deliver the tunnel configuration data to the NEs.
Step 4 Click the Details button and set the information about the tunnel. For details about the
parameters, see 10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
375
NOTE
l Click Auto-Assign following the Tunnel ID field box. Then, Tunnel ID is automatically allocated.
l Click the blank cell under Out Interface of an Ingress node and then click . Select the output
port of the ingress node in the list box that is displayed. Use the same method to select the input and
output ports of the transit node and the input port of the egress node.
l After the output port label is added at the ingress node and transit node, the next-hop address is generated
automatically.
l Click Auto-Assign Label at lower right of the window. Then, Out Label of the ingress node, Out
Label and In Label of the transit node, and In Label of the egress node are allocated automatically.
l After you set the parameters of the forward tunnel, the parameters of the reverse tunnel are generated
automatically. Therefore, you need not set the parameters of the reverse tunnel manually.
----End
9.4.3.2 Configuring a Static and Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode
When creating a static and bidirectional MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode, you select the source
NE, sink NE, or transit NE directly in the physical topology and then complete creation of the
unidirectional MPLS tunnel on the NMS.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu. Then, the Create Tunnel
window is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
376
Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Select Create Bidirectional Tunnel.
Step 3 Set the information in NE List of the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
NOTE
Before configuring MPLS tunnels by means of automatic route computation, create the Layer 2 links.
1. Select the source NE, sink NE, and transit NE, and adjust the position of the NE on the
entire MPLS tunnel.
Three methods can be used to select the source, sink, and transit NEs:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
377
l Method 1: In Physical Topology at the upper right, right-click an NE and choose
Add.
l Method 2: In Physical Topology at the upper right, double-click an NE.
l Method 3:
a. Click the Add button and then choose NE from the drop-down menu.
b. Select an NE from the window that is displayed and then click OK.
NOTE
l You can specify the position of an NE on the entire tunnel by setting NE Role or adjust the
position of an NE on the entire tunnel by clicking Up or Down.
l Select Deploy to deliver the tunnel configuration data to the NEs.
Step 4 Click the Details button and set the information about the tunnel. For details about the
parameters, see 10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l Click Auto-Assign following the Tunnel ID field box. Then, Tunnel ID is automatically allocated.
l Click the blank cell under Out Interface of an Ingress node and then click . Select the output
port of the ingress node in the list box that is displayed. Use the same method to select the input and
output ports of the transit node and the input port of the egress node.
l After the output port is added at the ingress node and transit node, the next-hop address is generated
automatically.
l After the input port is added at the egress node and transit node, the reverse next-hop address is
generated automatically.
l Click Auto-Assign Label at lower right of the window. Then, Out Label and Reverse In Label of
the ingress node, In Label, Out Label, Reverse In Label and Reverse Out Label of the transit node,
and In Label and Reverse Out Label of the egress node are allocated automatically.
----End
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels
stability of PWE3 services. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnels. Managing
MPLS tunnels involves checking the MPLS tunnel topology, deploying MPLS tunnels, deleting
MPLS tunnels, and managing discrete MPLS tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
378
9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels
A complete MPLS tunnel has its source and sink NEs. An MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-
NE basis, however, is displayed as a discrete tunnel on the NMS. The tunnel search function on
the NMS helps convert a discrete MPLS tunnel to a complete tunnel, therefore facilitating tunnel
management. This section describes how to search for MPLS tunnels on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create an MPLS
tunnel on a per-NE basis, see 9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for IP Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy.
Step 3 Click Start.
Step 4 Click Close.
----End
9.5.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology
stability of PWE3 services. This section describes how to check the MPLS tunnel topology to
learn configuration information about MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
379
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select the MPLS tunnel whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.
Step 4 In the MPLS tunnel topology view, right-click the NE and choose View Real-Time
Performance from the shortcut menu to check the real-time running status of the MPLS tunnel.
----End
9.5.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels
This section describes how to quickly create MPLS tunnels by using the tunnel duplication
function of the NMS.
Prerequisites
NOTE
Procedure
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel to copy, right-click the tunnel, and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Copy Tunnel dialog box that is displayed, set parameters for the duplicated MPLS tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
380
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
9.5.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels
After being created on the NMS, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy MPLS tunnels from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
NOTE
Procedure
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed MSPLS tunnels.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels to be deployed, right-click the MPLS tunnels, and choose
Deploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
381
9.5.5 Deleting MPLS Tunnels
After being deployed, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete MPLS tunnels from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
NOTE
Background Information
l After being deleted from the network side, MPLS tunnels are deleted from the NMS only
but still stored on the corresponding NEs. In addition, after being deleted from the network
side, MPLS tunnels are displayed as discrete tunnels on the NMS.
l After being deleted from the NE side, MPLS tunnels are deleted from the corresponding
NEs only but still stored on the NMS. In addition, after being deleted from the NE side,
MPLS tunnels are displayed as undeployed.
Procedure
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels that you need to delete, right-click the tunnels.
l Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Undeploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
l After an MPLS tunnel is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment Status is
Undeployed.
l If an MPLS tunnel has been configured in an MPLS tunnel APS protection group or has been configured
with PWE3 services, you need to delete the MPLS tunnel APS protection group or PWE3 services
before deleting the MPLS tunnel.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
382
9.5.6 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels
MPLS tunnels without source or sink NEs and MPLS tunnels that are deleted from the network
side are displayed as discrete tunnels on the NMS. This section describes how to check discrete
MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.
Prerequisites
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Discrete Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel and click the Hops Information tab. In the tab page, check the port
information and label information about the MPLS tunnel.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more MPLS tunnels and click Delete.
----End
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM
MPLS OAM effectively detects, confirms, and locates the internal defects of an MPLS network,
and thus monitors the network performance.
9.6.1 Configuring the MPLS OAM on a Per-NE Basis
Configuring MPLS OAM involves the following operations: enabling the OAM status of the
MPLS tunnel, setting the MPLS OAM parameters for the MPLS tunnel, enabling the tunnel CV/
FFD detection function, performing an MPLS Tunnel Ping test, and performing an MPLS Tunnel
Traceroute test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
383
Prerequisites
An MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > MPLS
Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab. Select Enabled from the drop-down list of OAM Status.
Step 3 Set the parameters. For the details about the parameters, see Tunnel OAM Parameters.
NOTE
l Detection Packet Period: When Detection Packet Type is set to CV, Detection Packet Period is
1 s and cannot be changed manually. When Detection Packet Type is set to FFD, Detection Packet
Period can be set manually.
l Reverse Tunnel: After detecting defects, the egress node sends the BDI packets that carry the defect
information over the reverse tunnel to the ingress node, so that the ingress node can learn the defect
status in time.
l When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Egress, you can set the SD Threshold and SF
Threshold.
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
Step 6 Optional: Perform the CV/FFD. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click
OAM Operation and choose Start CV/FFD from the drop-down menu. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Ingress, the CV/FFD can be enabled.
Step 7 Optional: Perform a ping test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
384
1. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down menu. Then, the Ping Test dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the tunnel is Ingress, you can perform the ping test.
2. Set the parameters. For details about the parameters, see Ping Test.
3. Click Start Test to check the ping test result.
Step 8 Optional: Perform an LSP Traceroute test.
1. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down menu. Then, the Traceroute Test dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
385
NOTE
To support the Traceroute test, the Tunnel Type of the tunnel must be Ingress.
2. Set the parameters. For details about the parameters, see Traceroute Test.
3. Click Start Test to check the Traceroute test result.
----End
9.6.2 Configuring MPLS OAM in End-to-End Mode
Configuring MPLS OAM involves enabling the OAM status of the tunnel, setting the MPLS
OAM parameters of the tunnel, enabling the tunnel CV/FFD check, performing MPLS Tunnel
ping test, and performing the MPLS Tunnel Traceroute test.
Prerequisites
l The MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set the filter conditions and then click
Filter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
386
NOTE
l You can perform filtering by Tunnel Name, Destination IP Address, or Tunnel IP.
l You can also perform filtering by other conditions.
Step 3 In Manage Tunnel, select the MPLS tunnel for which the MPLS OAM needs to be configured.
Step 4 Right-click the MPLS tunnel and then choose OAM > Enable OAM from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Right-click the MPLS tunnel and then choose OAM > Configure OAM from the shortcut menu.
For details about the parameters, see Tunnel OAM Parameters.
Figure 9-2 Unidirectional Tunnel

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
387
Figure 9-3 Bidirectional Tunnel

NOTE
When you set these parameters, pay attention the following points:
l Detection Packet Period(ms): Detection Packet Period(ms) can only be set to 1000ms when
Detection Packet Type is CV.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) can be set to several values when Detection Packet Type is FFD. To
ensure that the MPLS tunnel APS switching time is shorter than 50 ms, set Detection Packet Period
(ms) to 3.3 in this example.
l Reverse Tunnel: When the egress node detects a defect, it transmits the BDI packet that carries the
defect information to the ingress node through the reverse tunnel. Therefore, the ingress node can learn
the defect status in time.
l When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Egress, you can set the SD Threshold and SF
Threshold.
is successful.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS
MPLS tunnel APS protection is implemented based on the APS protocol. If MPLS tunnel APS
is configured, the services are switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel after
the working tunnel is faulty.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
388
9.7.1 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure MPLS tunnel APS to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure a 1+1 or 1:1
MPLS tunnel APS protection group. You need to configure MPLS tunnel APS on the source
and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel.
Prerequisites
l The working and protection MPLS tunnels must be created.
l The MPLS OAM of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group must be enabled.
NOTE
The protection MPLS tunnel cannot carry any extra services.
Procedure
Packet Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New Tunnel Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters for the MPLS tunnel protection group. Select the working and protection
MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see 10.10.1 Parameters for Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
389
l Protection Type: You can set Protection Type to 1+1 or 1:1.
l Switching Mode: You can set Switching Mode to Single-Ended or Dual-Ended. When
Protection Type is set to 1:1, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended only.
l Revertive Mode: You can set Revertive Mode to Non-Revertive or Revertive. If you set
Revertive Mode to Revertive, you can specify the WTR time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms): The unit is 100 ms. You can set Hold-off Time(100ms) to be an
integer from 0 to 100, namely, 0 to 10 seconds.
CAUTION
When creating an APS protection group, you need to set Protocol Status to Disabled. Enable
the protocol only after the configuration of the APS protection group is complete on the source
and sink NEs.
Step 4 Click OK. The MPLS tunnel protection group is configured successfully.
NOTE
The bandwidth of the protection MPLS tunnel must be higher than the bandwidth of the working MPLS
tunnel. To increase the bandwidth of the working MPLS tunnel after the protection group is created, increase
the bandwidth of the protection MPLS tunnel first.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1-4 to configure the protection group on the sink NE.
Step 6 Enable the protocol of the MPLS APS protection group.
1. IN the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration
> Packet Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Right-click a created APS protection group and choose Start Protocol from the shortcut
menu.
3. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Protocol Status of
the APS protection group changes to Enabled.
----End
9.7.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel APS in End-to-End Mode
You can configure MPLS tunnel APS to protect the MPLS tunnel. MPLS tunnel APS can be
configured as the 1+1 or 1:1 mode. When configuring MPLS tunnel APS, you need to configure
MPLS tunnel APS on both the source NE and the sink NE of the MPLS tunnel.
Prerequisites
l The MPLS working and protection tunnels must be created.
l The MPLS OAM of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group must be enabled.
NOTE
The protection tunnel should not carry any extra services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
390
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Protection Group from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In Create Protection Group, set Basic Information of the protection group.
Step 3 Click Add at the lower left of the Create Protection Group window. Select the tunnel in Select
Tunnel dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS for unidirectional tunnels, you need to select four tunnels, which
function as the Forward Working tunnel, Forward Protection tunnel, Backward Working tunnel,
and Backward Protection tunnel.
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS for bidirectional tunnels, you need to select two tunnels, which
function as the Working tunnel, and Protection tunnel.
Step 4 In the Tunnels field box, specify the tunnel type. For details about the parameters, see 10.10.2
Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l Set four unidirectional tunnels to be the Forward Working tunnel, Forward Protection tunnel,
Backward Working tunnel, and Backward Protection tunnel.
l Set two bidirectional tunnels to be the Working tunnel, and Protection tunnel.
Step 5 Set the MPLS tunnel APS attributes at the lower right of the window. For details about the
parameters, see 10.10.2 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End
Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
391
NOTE
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS on a per-NE mode, set Protocol Status to Disabled. Start the
protocol only when MPLS tunnel APS is successfully configured at both ends of the MPLS tunnel.
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS in end-to-end mode, set Protocol Status to Enabled.
Step 6 Click OK. The configuration for MPLS tunnel APS is complete.
----End
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
stability of PWE3 services. MPLS tunnel APS provides protection for MPLS tunnels. Therefore,
it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups. Managing MPLS tunnel
APS protection groups involves automatically discovering, deploying, modifying, and deleting
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
9.8.1 Automatically Discovering Protection Groups
stability of PWE3 services. This section describes how to find MPLS tunnel APS protection
groups by using the automatic discovery function of the NMS, facilitating protection group
management.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnel APS protection groups have been created. For details on how to create an
MPLS tunnel APS protection group, see 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Search for Protection Group from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Add. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the NE
for which you need to configure an MPLS tunnel APS protection group and then click OK.
Step 3 Click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
392
NOTE
After protection groups are automatically discovered, the NMS displays a dialog box showing the number
of found protection groups.
----End
9.8.2 Deploying MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
After being created on the NMS, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are stored on the NMS
but not immediately deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Protection Group from the main menu.
all undeployed MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnel APS protection groups to be deployed, right-click the protection
groups, and choose Deploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel APS protection group is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is
Deployed.
----End
9.8.3 Ranaming an MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Group
Basic information about an MPLS tunnel APS protection group can be represented by an
appropriate protection group name. This section describes how to change the name of an MPLS
tunnel APS protection group.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
393
Procedure
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to 1
+1. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that meet the filter
conditions.
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel APS protection group whose name you need to change, and then click
Modify.
----End
9.8.4 Deleting MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
After being deployed, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are stored on the NMS and the
corresponding NEs. This section describes how to delete MPLS tunnel APS protection groups
from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l After being deleted from the network side, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are deleted
from the NMS only but still stored on the corresponding NEs.
l After being deleted from the NE side, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are deleted from
the corresponding NEs only but still stored on the NMS.
Procedure
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to 1
+1. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that meet the filter
conditions.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that you need to delete, right-click the
protection groups.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
394
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel APS protection group is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment
Status is Undeployed.
----End
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services
This topic describes how to configure E-Line services, including UNI-UNI E-Line services, E-
Line services carried by ports, E-Line services carried by PWs, and E-Line services carried by
QinQ links.
9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services
In the case of the UNI-UNI E-Line services, different users communicate with each other through
the equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently
transmitted on the user side.
Prerequisites
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
395
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
Set Direction to UNI-UNI.
You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".
The OptiX OSN 1500 does not support the setting of MTU (bytes).
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for ports. Click OK. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). Alternatively, you can select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
396
9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by ports, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI, which the user data occupies exclusively. In this manner, the
point-to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 Click the UNI tab and click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
NOTE
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to Port.
l You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for ports. Click OK. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
397
NOTE
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
NOTE
----End
9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a
Per-NE Basis
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a PW. In this manner, the point-
to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.
Prerequisites
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be configured.
Procedure
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
398
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Set Bearer Type to PW.
l You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
l PRI is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI, set PRI to an
integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the highest priority.
l Service Tag Role can be set to User or Service.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as user VLAN tags, and are processed when the
packets are forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as service VLAN tags, and are not processed
when the packets are forwarded.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set Protection
Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and protection PW to
implement MPLS PW APS protection.
Step 4 Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, set
the PW-related parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
399
NOTE
l You can configure the protection PW only if Protection Type is set to PW APS.
l PW Type can be set to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
l Ethernet: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are encapsulated into PWs without changes, and
transparently transmitted to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode: A VLAN tag specified by Request VLAN is added to packets.
l Set other PW-related parameters according to the planning information.
Step 5 Click OK to close the Configure PW dialog box.
Step 6 Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 In the UNI tab, set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority, and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for the ingress direction.
NOTE
----End
9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
In the case of a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs, the user data is received by a UNI and
is then sent to a PW over an NNI. In this manner, point-to-point transparent transmission of the
user data is achieved. This topic describes how to configure the source node, sink node, and PW
attributes of UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs on a GUI of the NMS, therefore quickly
completing the E-Line service configuration.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
400
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, you need to disable the DCN function of the
port. For details, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the attributes. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l You can configure the E-Line service according to the service template. That is, you can select a
template or create a service template in the Service Template field.
l Set Service Type to ETH.
l For rules of setting Protection Type, refer to descriptions about PW protection.
Step 3 Configure the source NE and sink NE of the PWE3 service. For details about the parameters,
see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
The configuration method is the same for the sink NE and source NE. Therefore, only the example for
configuring the source NE is provided as follows.
1. Under Node List, click Configure Source and Sink. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Select the service access port in
the pane on the right and set the associated parameters.
NOTE
l Priority Type is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI, set Priority Type to 802.1Q.
l Priority field is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI,
set Priority field to an integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the highest priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
401
3. After setting the parameters, click Add Node.
4. Refer to Step b and Step c and configure the sink NE.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
l To configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service, you can also double-click the source and
sink NEs in Physical Topology and then set the SAI attributes in the dialog box that is displayed.
l When the request VLAN function is enabled for Ethernet services carried by PWs, the TPIDs in the
request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same on the source and sink NEs.
l When Service Tag is Service and PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode, the TPID of the port is the
same as the TPID of the NE. Set the TPID of the port first and then the TPID of the NE.
Step 4 Optional: Under Node List, click Configure PW Switch Node to add the switching NE
between the source and sink NE.
Step 5 Optional: Click Service Topology to check the configured service topology at upper right.
Step 6 Under PW, set the basic attributes of the PWs.
NOTE
l Double-click the blank box under Forward Tunnel and Reverse Tunnel, click , and then select
the tunnel that carries the PWs from the list.
l The PW ID can be Auto-Assign.
Step 7 Click Detail and then set the advanced attributes of the E-Line service carried by the PW. For
details about the parameters, see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-
to-End Mode).
Step 8 Optional: Click the SAI QoS tab and set the QoS of the service access port.
Step 9 Optional: Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS of the PW.
Step 10 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the parameters associated with the
PW.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ link, the user data is accessed
from a UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a QinQ link. Multiple
VLANs on the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN on the transport
network. In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved.
Prerequisites
l The QinQ link must be created for the NNIs.
l The services carried by the QinQ link do not support the creation of any maintenance point
(MP).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
402
Procedure
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the UNI tab and then click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details of the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
NOTE
l Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link.
l Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.
Step 4 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
Step 5 Click the QoS tab and click the QinQ Link tab.
Step 6 Select the QoS policy for the ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
Before selecting the policy, ensure that the policy is already created. If you set Bandwidth Limit to
Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate(kbit/s).
Step 7 Click Close,
----End
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services
This topic describes how to configure E-LAN services, including E-LAN services carried by
ports, E-LAN services carried by PWs, and E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
403
9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by ports on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.
Procedure
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name, and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN
Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC address
forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled, the bridge
does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC address forwarding
table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning. All
VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding table.
IVL indicates independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are
independent from each other. The MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs, however, are
permitted to contain the same MAC addresses.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets
with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service
packets without any VLAN tags.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
404
successful. Then, click Close.
Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.4.3 UNI Parameters.
Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Ports list.
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
Step 7 Optional: Click the NNI tab. Click the Port tab. Refer to Steps Step 4- Step 6 to add and
configure the NNI port. Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI
Parameters.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.5 Split Horizon Group.
Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon group
to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, click Close.
Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 10.4.6 MAC Address
Learning Parameters.
NOTE
Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.
Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.
Step 14 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 15 Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color of
the port. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Then, click Close.
Step 16 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.8 Static MAC Address.
NOTE
The VLAN ID can be set only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL.
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
405
NOTE
----End
9.10.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by PWs on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be created.
Procedure
Name and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
406
NOTE
packets without any VLAN tags. Currently, S-Awared is not supported.
l When MAC Address Withdrawal is set to Disabled, MAC Address Withdrawal cannot be
performed for E-LAN services carried by static PWs.
Ports list.
Step 7 Click the NNI tab. Click the PW tab. Click New and set the parameters related to the PW. Then,
click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.5 Split Horizon Group.
Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
407
Step 15 Optional: In the QoS tab, click the PW. Set EXP and LSP Mode. Click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy. Before selecting a policy,
you need to create the policy first.
NOTE
NOTE
----End
9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
This section describes how to create E-LAN services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the parameters in the Basic Attribute tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.2 E-
LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
408
Step 3 Select the VPLS service nodes.
l Method 1:
1. In "Node List", choose Add > NPE.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the NEs on which you need to create the VPLS
services.
l Method 2:
1. In Physical Topology, right-click the NEs on which you need to create the VPLS
services and choose NPE from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In "Node List", select an NE and click Detail. Click the VSI Configuration tab and set the VSI
parameters in the tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters
(Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
409
NOTE
You need to set VSI attributes for all the NEs in "Node List".
Step 5 Click the PW Configuration tab and configure the PWs for carrying the services in the tab.
NOTE
l If you set Networking Mode to Full-Mesh VPLS, the NMS automatically creates the PWs between
NEs but you need to create the tunnel for carrying the PWs.
l If you set Networking Mode to Customized, select all the NEs in "Node List". Then, click Create,
and select Bidirectional PW or Unterminated PW as required. In the dialog box that is displayed,
set the PW information.
Step 6 Configure the service access ports.
1. In "Node List", select an NE and click the SAI Configuration tab.
2. Click Create. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the ports to be added, set the relevant
parameters, and click OK.
3. Click the SAI QoS tab. Select a port. Click Configure and select Global QoS policy
Template or QoS CAR Template. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the QoS
parameters.
NOTE
l Before you set Global QoS policy Template, specify Global QoS Policy.
l When setting the QoS parameters of a service access port, you can directly select the service port
and set the global QoS policy or QoS CAR parameter.
Step 7 Select Deploy and then click OK.
NOTE
l If you deselect Deploy, the service configuration is saved only on the NMS. If you select Deploy, the
service configuration is saved on the NMS and deployed to the NEs. By default, Deploy is selected.
l If Deploy and Enable are selected, services on the NE side are available only after the services are
activated.
----End
9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by QinQ links on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l If the services need to be carried by a QinQ link, you must configure a QinQ link first.
Procedure
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
410
Name, and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line
NOTE
packets without any VLAN tags. Currently, S-Awared is not supported.
For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a
Per-NE Basis).
Ports list.
Step 7 Click the NNI tab.
Step 8 Click the QinQ Link tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 9 Click Add. Then, the QinQ Link Management window is displayed.
Step 10 Select a QinQ link ID and click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
411
is successful. Click Close,
Step 12 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 13 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE
Step 19 Click the QinQ Link tab. Enable the bandwidth limit and select the QoS policy for the ingress
and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,
NOTE
Before selecting a policy, you need to create the policy first. If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you
can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate(kbit/s).
NOTE
NOTE
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
412
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services
This topic describes how to configure E-AGGR services, including E-AGGR services carried
by ports and E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
The creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface of the NMS. The equipment
supports aggregation of services from multiple ports to one port and aggregation of services
carried by multiple PWs on one NNI to one UNI.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed, Set Service ID, Service
Name and MTU (bytes). For details about the parameters, see 10.5.1 E-AGGR Service
Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).
Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Port list.
NOTE
The port where the E-AGGR service is configured does not support the S-Aware attribute.
Step 5 In the Selected Port list, set Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE
Location can be set to the source end or the sink end. Multiple source ends can be set, but only one sink
end can be set. Otherwise, the E-AGGR service cannot be correctly configured.
Step 6 Click the NNI tab. Click the Port tab. Refer to Steps Step 3-Step 5 to add and the NNIs. Then,
Step 7 Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item. Click New. Then, the New VLAN Forwarding Table
Item dialog box is displayed. Set the VLAN forwarding attributes. Then, click OK. For details
about the parameters, see 10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding Table Item.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
413
NOTE
The service is forwarded based on VLAN, and thus the forwarding attributes should be set in VLAN
Forwarding Table Item from each source port to sink port.
Step 8 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Close the dialog box.
Step 10 Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color of
the port.
NOTE
NOTE
----End
9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
On the NMS, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The
equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service
aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port.
Prerequisites
l If a port needs to be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
414
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name and MTU (bytes). For details about the parameters, see 10.5.1 E-AGGR Service
Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).
Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the port and click to add the port to the Selected
Port list.
NOTE
The port of the E-AGGR service does not support the S-Aware attribute.
Step 5 In the Selected Port list, set Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE
Location can be set to one or multiple source ends or one sink end. The E-AGGR service cannot be correctly
configured if Location is set to multiple sink ends.
Step 6 Click the NNI tab. Click the PW tab. Click New and set the related parameters of the PW. Then,
NOTE
l Set PW Signaling Type to Static.
l Set PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
Step 7 Optional: Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item and click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the VLAN forwarding attributes in the
dialog box. Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding
Table Item.
NOTE
The services are forwarded based on VLAN tags. Hence, the VLAN forwarding attributes need to be set
for the source and sink ports in VLAN Forwarding Table Item.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
415
Step 8 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Close the dialog box.
Step 10 Optional: In the QoS tab, click the PW and set EXP and LSP Mode.
NOTE
NOTE
----End
9.11.3 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
This topic describes how to create an E-AGGR service carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l If a port needs to be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > E-AGGR Service > Create E-AGGR Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set basic attributes for the E-AGGR service. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.2
Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
Step 3 Configure source/sink NEs and ports that receive services for the E-AGGR service. For details
about the parameters, see 10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-
End Mode).
1. Click the Node List tab, and choose Add > Source or Add > Sink. Then, a dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
416
NOTE
l Location can be set to Source or Sink. You can set multiple source ports but only one sink port.
If multiple sink ports are set, the configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail.
l For an unterminated E-AGGR service (for example, the PE at one end is not managed by the
U2000), choose Add > Unterminated to create source and sink NEs.
2. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
3. Configure boards and ports that receive services, and set attributes for the ports in SAI
Configuration. Then, click OK.
Step 4 Set basic attributes for the PWs that carry the E-AGGR services. For details about the parameters,
see 10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
Click the PW tab, and set basic attributes for the PWs.
Step 5 Optional: Configure the VLAN forwarding table. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.2
Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
1. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table tab.
2. Click Add to set parameters.
Step 6 Optional: Configure bandwidths for the E-AGGR service.
In Service Bandwidth, configure bandwidths for the E-AGGR service.
Step 7 Optional: Set advanced attributes for the E-AGGR service.
1. Click Advanced.
2. In SAI QoS on the right, set QoS parameters for the ports that receive services.
3. In PW QoS on the right, set QoS parameters for the PWs.
4. In Advanced PW Attribute on the right, set advanced attributes for the PWs.
Step 8 Select Deploy and Enable in the lower left corner.
NOTE
After Deploy is selected, the service configuration data is saved on the NMS side and deployed to the NE
side. If you do not select Deploy, the service configuration data is saved on the NMS side but is not deployed
to the NE side.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
417
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services
for an Ethernet service.
9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by
Ports
for an Ethernet service carried by ports.
Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by ports, Port Mode is set to Later 2 and Encapsulation
Type is set to 802.1Q.
l The Ethernet service carried by ports exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its transit NEs.
The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN
function for a port carrying Ethernet services, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the root list, and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
418
Step 3 Set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet service. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1
E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query to check the configured Ethernet service.
----End
PWs
for an Ethernet service carried by PWs.
For transit NEs of an Ethernet service carried by PWs, you only need to configure MPLS tunnels
whose Node Type is Transit. For details on how to configure an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
419
QinQ Links
for an Ethernet service carried by QinQ links.
Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by QinQ links, Port Mode is set to Later 2 and
Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ.
l The Ethernet service carried by QinQ links exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its transit
NEs. The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN
function for a port carrying Ethernet services, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the root list, and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
Step 3 Set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet service. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1
E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
420
NOTE
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query to check the configured Ethernet service.
----End
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services in per-NE mode and end-
to-end mode on the NMS.
9.13.1 Creating UNI-UNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis
When creating a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to set associated service attributes for
the source node and the sink node separately.
Prerequisites
l The CES ports must be configured correctly.
Procedure
CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Set the CES service parameters in the Create CES Service dialog box that is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.1 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-
UNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
421
NOTE
l Set Mode to UNI-UNI.
l When the CES service mode is UNI-UNI, Configure PW is unavailable.
l Set the other parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 3 After the setting, click OK.
----End
9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis
If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service
separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the
corresponding PW is automatically created.
Prerequisites
l The CES port must be configured. The port mode must set to Layer 1. The frame format
must be set if the CES port is a PDH port.
Procedure
CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Set the CES service parameters in the Create CES Service dialog box that is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-
NNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
422
NOTE
l Set Mode to UNI-NNI.
Step 3 Click Configure PW. Set the PW parameters in the Create PW dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Click the General Attributes tab and set the PW parameters of the CES service. For details
about the parameters, see 10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-NNI).
NOTE
l Set PW Signaling Type to Static.
Step 5 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the advanced attributes of the CES service. For
details about the parameters, see 10.7.4 Advanced Attributes (UNI-NNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
423
NOTE
l The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
l The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than two times of the packet loading time.
Step 6 After setting the parameters, click OK.
Step 7 Click OK in the Create CES Service dialog box that is displayed.
Step 8 Navigate to the NE Explorer of the opposite NE and configure the reverse service according to
Step 1 to Step 9.
----End
9.13.3 Creating a CES Service in End-to-End Mode
This topic describes how to create CES service channels for transmitting TDM signals in end-
to-end mode. You can configure the source node, sink node, and PW attributes of a CES service
on a GUI of the NMS, therefore quickly completing the CES service configuration.
Prerequisites
l The CES service port must be configured. The port mode must set to Layer 1. The frame
format and frame mode must be set.
Context
You need to set the frame format for the UNI port that carries the CES service to be the same
as the service encapsulation format. If the encapsulation format of the CES service is CESoPSN,
you can set the frame format of the UNI port to CRC-4 multiframe (recommended value) or
Double frame. If the encapsulation format of the CES service is SAToP, set frame format of the
UNI port to unframed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
424
Step 2 Set the parameters on the General Attributes tab page. For details about the parameters, see
10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l You can configure the CES service according to the service template. That is, you can select a service
template or create a service template in the Service Template field.
l Set Service Type to CES.
l Set Protection Type to Protection-Free.
Step 3 Select the source and sink NEs of the service.
NOTE
The configuration method is the same for the sink NE, source NE, and transit NE. Therefore, only the example
for configuring a source NE is provided as follows.
displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Then, the selected NE is displayed
in the upper right pane.
3. All slots and available boards on the NE are displayed in Basic Slot pane. Select the
appropriate board according to the service type.
4. In SAI Configuration, set High TimeSlot and Low TimeSlot.
5. In SAI Configuration, set the SAI attribute of the CES access port. Click Add Node. Then,
the added source and sink NEs are displayed at the bottom of the pane. Then, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
425
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure Source And Sink and then select Unterminated on the left. Set
the LSR ID of the unterminated node and click Add Node. Then, the added unterminated source
and sink nodes are displayed at the bottom. Then, click OK.
NOTE
Unterminated: On a network, if the equipment at one end of a service can be managed by the U2000, and the
equipment at the other end of the service is from another vendor and cannot be managed by the U2000, select
Unterminated to set the LSR ID of the opposite end of the service.
Step 5 Optional: Click Configure PW Switch Node to add working and protection switching NEs
between the source NE and the sink NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
426
Step 6 Set parameters of the source and sink NEs that are displayed in Node List. To view the topology
of a configured service, click the Service Topology tab in the upper-right area.
Step 7 Click the PW tab at lower left to set basic attributes of the PW. For details about the parameters,
see 10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l The PW ID can be automatically allocated.
l Signaling Type can be set to Static automatically or manually.
l Forward Label and Reverse Label can be allocated automatically and manually.
l Forward Type and Reverse Type support Static Binding. Forward Tunnel needs to be specified
manually.
l You can also set Forward Tunnel and Reverse Tunnel in Service Topology at upper right. Select the
tunnel service between the source NE and the sink NE, select Select Forward Tunnel or Select Reverse
Tunnel, and select the tunnel for static binding.
Step 8 Optional: Click Detail. Then, associated information is displayed in the pane at lower right.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
427
Step 9 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the parameters associated with the
PW. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services
(End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
l The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than two times of the packet loading time.
Step 10 Select Deploy and then click OK.
NOTE
l In this case, If you select Enable, the service configuration is saved on the NMS and deployed to the NEs.
If you deselect Deploy, the service configured is saved only on the NMS but not deployed to NEs. By default,
Deploy is selected.
l When Deploy and Enable are selected, the NE-side tunnel is available only after the tunnel is enabled.
----End
Subsequent Operation
After the service is created successfully, the service is displayed in the PWE3 service
management window.
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services
for a CES service.
For transit NEs of a CES service, you only need to configure MPLS tunnels whose Node
Type is Transit. For details on how to configure an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel.
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring ATM PWE3 services in per-NE mode
and end-to-end mode on the NMS.
9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces
By using the E1 board or STM-1 ATM board, the OptiX OSN equipments can receive ATM
services on the E1/VC-12, fractional E1, or STM-1 level. Specifically, one E1 channel can carry
multiple fractional E1 services. Certain timeslots of the 32 timeslots in an E1 channel can be
allocated for the CES services and the others for the ATM services. In this manner, resources
are saved and expenditure is cut.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
428
l The DCN function of the port that carries ATM IMA services is disabled.
For the OptiX OSN equipments, Frame Mode of the packets at the PDH interface or SDH
interfaces can be 30-timeslot or 31-timeslot.
l When Frame Mode is set to 30, timeslots 1-15 and 17-31 of an E1 frame are used to
transport service data.
l When Frame Mode is set to 31, timeslots 1-31 of an E1 frame are used to transport service
data.
When creating an IMA group of the fractional E1 level, create a serial port of the 64K
Timeslot level. An IMA group of the E1/VC12 level can be directly created.
Procedure
l Use an E1 board to carry ATM IMA services.
Configure an interface at the Fractional E1 level.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select E1 board. Set the Port Mode to Layer 1,
and click Apply.
3. Click Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode according
to networking planning. Then, click Apply.
4. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management >
Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Click New in the General Attributes
tab, and the New Serial Interface dialog box is displayed.
5. In the New Serial Interface dialog box, set the Level, Used Board, Used Port,
and 64K Timeslot fields, and then click OK. Create serial interfaces of E1 board.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
429
6. Select the created serial interfaces, set Port Mode to Layer 2, and then click
Apply.
ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click Configuration in
the Binding tab, and the Bound Path dialog box is displayed.
8. Select the bound board and port, select Fractional E1 for the Level field, and select
Available Resources. Then, click to add the bound board and port to
Selected Bound Paths.
9. Click Apply.
10. In the IMA Group Management tab, select the IMA group. Set the parameters
such as IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode according to
the network planning. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled. Click
Apply.
11. On the ATM Interface Management tab, click the IMA group. Then, set the
parameters such as Port Type, ATM Cell Payload Scrambling for the ports
according to the network planning. Click Apply.
Configure an interface at the E1 level.
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. In General Attributes tab, select E1 port. Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and click
Apply.
3. In Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode according to
networking planning. Then, click Apply.
ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click Configuration in
the Binding tab, and the Bound Path dialog box is displayed.
5. Select E1 for the Level field for the available bound path, and select ports in
Available Resources. Then, click to add the bound board and port to
Selected Bound Paths
6. Click Apply.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
430
7. On the IMA Group Management tab, select the IMA group. Set the parameters
such as IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode according to
the network planning. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled. Click
Apply.
8. On the ATM Interface Management tab, click the IMA group. Then, set the
parameters such as Port Type, ATM Cell Payload Scrambling for the ports
according to the network planning. Click Apply.
l Use the STM-1 ATM board to carry the ATM services.
2. In Layer 2 Attributes, select STM-1 port and set the parameters such as VPI/VCI
range for the ports according to the network planning. Click Apply.
----End
Result
When creating the IMA groups at both ends of the interconnected equipment is complete, you
can query the IMA group status on the U2000 to check whether the IMA groups are in proper
status.
1. In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2. In the IMA Group States tab, click Query. Check Near-End Group Status, Far-End
Group Status, Number of Transmit Links, and Number of Receive Links.
l If Near-End Group Status and Far-End Group Status are displayed as
Operational, the negotiation of the IMA groups succeeded.
l If Near-End Group Status and Far-End Group Status are displayed as other status,
handle the anomaly with reference to Table 9-2.
3. In the IMA Link Status tab, click Query. Check Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End
Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status.
l If Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving
Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status are displayed as Active, it indicates that the
IMA link is normal.
l If Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving
Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status are displayed as Unusable, it indicates that
the IMA link is faulty. For details on the IMA link status parameters, see Table 9-3.
Table 9-2 lists the IMA group status parameters.
Table 9-2 IMA group status parameters
Near-End/Far-End Group
Status
Description Suggestion
Not Configured Displays this state if the IMA
group does not exist.
-
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
431
Near-End/Far-End Group
Status
Description Suggestion
Start-Up This end is in the Start-Up
status and is waiting to be
indicated that the far-end is
also in the Start-Up status.
Start the IMA protocol for the
opposite IMA group and
check whether the IMA
groups are normal.
Start-Up-ACK This is a transitional state.
When both the near-end and
far-end groups start-up, they
move to this state.
The IMA groups are in the
progress of negotiation. Wait
for 500 ms and then check
whether the IMA groups are
normal.
Config-Aborted This state is entered when the
far-end tries to apply
unacceptable configuration
parameters.
Check whether the parameter
settings are consistent for the
IMA groups at both ends. If
not, re-set the inconsistent
parameters to ensure that all
the parameter settings are
consistent for the IMA
groups at both ends.
Insufficient-Links The status is displayed when
the parameter settings for the
IMA groups at both ends are
consistent but the link
resources are insufficient. In
this case, the number of
activated links is less than the
minimum number of
activated links for an IMA
group.
When the fault of the IMA
link is rectified, check
whether the IMA groups are
in proper status.
Blocked The group is blocked. The
group can be blocked for
maintenance purposes while
sufficient links are Active in
both transmitting and
receiving directions.
-
Operational The group is not inhibited
and has sufficient links in
both transmitting and
receiving directions.
-

Table 9-3 lists the IMA link status parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
432
Table 9-3 IMA link status parameters
Receive/Transmit Status Description Suggestion
Not In Group This state is displayed if a
link is not included in an IMA
group.
-
Unusable The status is displayed when
an IMA link is added to an
IMA group but the IMA link
is not available because of
fault-caused or manual
suppression.
When the fault of the IMA
link is rectified, check
whether the IMA links are in
proper status.
Usable This status indicates that the
link is availably and it is
displayed when you are
waiting for the remote
receive link to be activated.
In this case, this link is not
added to the cyclical
transmitting process of the
IMA group.
-
Active This status indicates that the
link is activated. If service
cells accessed, they can be
transmitted. This link is
added to the cyclical
transmitting process of the
IMA group.
-

9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile
This section describes how to configure a traffic management policy, which can be selected as
the traffic management profile for ATM services configured in an end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > PTN QoS Profile > ATM Profile from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click in ATM Profile and choose Add Global Profile from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
433
The Create ATM Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the ATM policy profile according to network planning information so that it is available for
traffic management policy selection during ATM connection creation.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Check and manage the global ATM policy profile in the Details, NE Reference, and NE
Unreference tabs.
----End
9.15.3 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile
This section describes how to configure an ATM CoS mapping profile, which can be selected
as the ATM CoS mapping for ATM services configured in an end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > PTN QoS Profile > ATM CoS Mapping Profile from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select appropriate steps based on the requirement.
If... Then...
You need to change the default global ATM CoS mapping
profile
Perform Step 3 and Step 5
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
434
If... Then...
You need to create a global ATM CoS mapping profile Perform Step 6 and Step 8
Step 3 Double-click the Default ATMCosMap profile.
The Modify ATM CoS Mapping Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Modify the global ATM CoS mapping profile according to network planning information.
NOTE
l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7.
l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather
than delay or jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses
can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Right-click in ATM CoS Mapping Profile and choose Add Global Profile from the shortcut
menu.
The Create ATM CoS Mapping Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Create a global ATM CoS mapping profile according to network planning information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
435
NOTE
l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7.
l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather
than delay or jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses
can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
Step 8 Click OK.
----End
9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by Using the Trail Function
This topic describes how to use the trail function to create an ATM PWE3 service tunnel for
ATM signal transmission. The trail function allows you to fast configure the source and sink
nodes of an ATM service and PW attributes.
Prerequisites
l ATM interfaces are configured. If IMA services are transmitted, an IMA group is
configured.
l An ATM policy is configured.
l An MPLS tunnel is used.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the parameters on the Attributes tab.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
436
NOTE
l Use a template to configure a service. Specifically, select a template in the Service Template field or
personally create another template.
l Set Service Type to ATM.
l If you set Protection Type to PW APS Protection, select Single Source and Dual Sink or Dual Source
and Single Sink on the Node List. You need to configure one source node and two sink nodes for Single
Source and Dual Sink, and two source nodes and one sink node for Dual Source and Single Sink. The
two PWs are the working PW and protection PW. In addition, PW APS Protection can be set to Single
Source and Single Sink.
Step 3 Select the source and sink NEs for a service.
1. Click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Root on the left. Then, the selected NE is displayed in
the upper right pane.
3. In the right portion of NE Panel, all slots and available boards of an NE are displayed.
According to the required service type, select an appropriate board.
4. Select an interface.
5. Set the service access interface attributes. Then, click Add Node. In the lower portion of
the window, the new source and sink NEs are displayed, click OK.
6. Configure the sink NE, protection NE and transit NE with the same method to align with
different protection types.
7. To configure multiple ATM connections for an ATM service at the same time, select
multiple ports for an NE in the same way.
NOTE
The same configuration method is applicable to the sink NE, transit NE, and source NE. This topic considers
the configuration of a source NE as an example.
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure Source And Sink, select the Unterminated in the left, specify the
LSR ID of an unterminated node, and click Add Node. In the lower portion of the window, the
unterminated source and sink NEs are displayed. Then, click OK.
NOTE
On a network, if the equipment at one end of a service can be managed by the U2000, and the equipment at the
other end of the service is from another vendor and therefore cannot be managed by the U2000, select
Unterminated to set the LSR ID at the opposite end of the service.
Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment in the same management domain can be used to configure unterminated
trails.
If Protection Type is PW APS Protection, the unterminated node cannot be set.
Step 5 Optional: Click Configure PW Switch Node to add working and protection transit NEs
between the source NE and sink NE.
Step 6 Set parameters for the source and sink NEs that are displayed in Node List. To view the topology
of a configured service, click the Service Topology tab in the upper-right area.
Step 7 Set parameters in the PW pane in the lower left portion of the window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
437
NOTE
PW ID can be automatically allocated.
Signaling Type can only be set to Static. Forward Label and Reverse Label can be assigned automatically
or manually.
Forward Type and Reverse Type can be set to Static Binding. In this case, manually specify a tunnel in the
Forward Tunnel field.
You may also set the forward tunnel and reverse tunnel by clicking the Service Topology tab in the upper right
area. Right-click a tunnel between the source NE and sink NE, and choose Select Forward Tunnel or Select
Reverse Tunnel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the tunnel for static binding.
Step 8 Click ATM Link. In the dialog box that is displayed, add the ATM connection, and set relevant
parameters of the ATM connection.
NOTE
After you configure VPI/VCI of the source and sink, the U2000 assigns the transit VPI/VCI automatically. On
a network consisting of OptiX OSN 7500 II equipment, the transit VPI/VCI can be set to a value different from
the VPI/VCI of the source and sink.
Step 9 Optional: Click Detail. A pane is displayed in the lower right area.
Step 10 Optional: Click the PW QoS tab to configure the global template of a PW. Alternatively, select
one of the templates that are configured in the Global QoS Policy Template field, and set
parameters.
Step 11 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab to set parameters for a PW.
Step 12 Optional: If the Protection Type is PW APS Protection, click Protection Parameter to set
the protection parameters.
Step 13 Select the Deploy check box, and click OK.
NOTE
If you clear the Deploy check box, the configuration data information is saved only on the U2000. If you select
the Deploy check box, the configuration data information is saved on the U2000 and applied to NEs. By default,
the Deploy check box is selected.
When you select the Deploy and Enable check boxes, a service is available on NEs only when enabled.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the service is created successful, the service is displayed in the PWE3 service management
window.
9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis
This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals
on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means configuring service attributes at both source and
sink ends.
Prerequisites
l ATM interfaces are configured. If IMA services are transmitted, configure an IMA group.
l ATM policies are configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
438
l MPLS tunnels are created.
l The OptiX OSN equipments transmits services at the E1 level or 64 kbit/s timeslot level.
If the services are at the E1 level, all the available timeslots of E1 channels are used to
transport services. If the services are at the 64 kbit/s timeslot level, one E1 channel can be
used to simultaneously transport ATM services and CES services (certain timeslots
allocated for ATM services and others for CES services). In this manner, E1 channels are
used flexibly.
l If the volume of the accessed ATM services is small, one E1 port or several 64 kbit/s
timeslots (less than 30 timeslots) can meet access capacity demand. In this case, bind an
E1 port or 64 kbit/s timeslots into an IMA group, but do not enable the IMA protocol.
Therefore, the IMA group serves as a service access interface.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. The New ATM Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, configure a
UNIs-NNI or UNI-UNI service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
439
NOTE
l For the UNIs-NNI service, set the attributes in the Connection, PW, and CoS Mapping tabs.
l For the UNI-UNI service, set only the attributes in the Connection tab.
Step 3 To create a UNI-UNI service, go to Step 4. To create a UNIs-NNI service, go to Step 5.
Step 4 Optional: Create a UNI-UNI service.
1. Set ATM-related general attributes.
NOTE
Select UNI-UNI for the service type.
Set the connection type as follows.
l For a UNI-UNI service, do not set Connection to Port Transparent.
l PVP: Only the VPI value of an ATM connection can be changed.
l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of an ATM connection can be changed.
2. Click the Connection tab, and click Add. The Configure Connection dialog box is
displayed. In the dialog box, set connection attributes.
NOTE
The Sink VPI value ranges from 0 to Max.VPI, and the Sink VCI value ranges from 32 to Max.VCI.
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: Create a UNIs-NNI service.
1. Set ATM-related general attributes.
NOTE
Select UNIs-NNI for the service type.
Set the connection type as follows.
l When Service Type is set to Port Transparent, only one ATM connection can be created and VPI
or VCI of the ATM connection cannot be changed. To transparently transmit an ATM service, user
ATM cells are encapsulated into PWs as payload without interpretation of ATM cell headers, and are
transported to the other end over a transport network.
l PVP: Only the VPI value of an ATM connection can be changed.
l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of an ATM connection can be changed.
2. Click the Connection tab, and click Add. The Configure Connection dialog box is
displayed. In the dialog box, set connection attributes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
440
NOTE
For a service to be transparently transmitted, configure only PW attributes, but not VPI/VCI or ATM
policy.
3. Click the PW tab, and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window,
set attributes of the PW.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and set the general attributes of PW.
5. Optional: Click the QoS tab, and set the QoS attribute of PW.
6. Optional: Click the Advanced Attributes tab, and set the advanced attributes of PW.
NOTE
l When PW Type is set to ATM n:1, Control Word can be set to either Used required or Not in
use. When Control Word is set to Used required, a PW ping test is feasible.
l When PW Type is set to ATM 1:1, Control Word must be set to Used required.
7. Select the CoS Mapping tab, and then the applied CoS mapping policy is displayed by
default.
NOTE
Configure CoS mapping only after configuring the parameters in the PW tab.
8. Optional: To change the CoS mapping policy for the service, click CoS Mapping, and
click the button. In the CoS Mapping dialog box, select ATM CoS mapping.
9. Click OK.
Step 6 In the New ATM Service dialog box, click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation succeeded. Click Close.
----End
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services
increase customer revenues. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage PWE3 services.
Managing PWE3 services involves deploying, modifying, and deleting PWE3 services,
checking the PWE3 service topology, and managing discrete PWE3 services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
441
9.16.1 Searching for PWE3 Services
A complete PWE3 service contains its source and end. If being created on a per-NE basis, PWE3
services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS. After you search for the PWE3 services
on the NMS, the discrete PWE3 services are converted to complete PWE3 services. This
facilitates future PWE3 service management.
Prerequisites
l PWE3 services have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create PWE3
services on a per-NE basis, see 9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by
PWs on a Per-NE Basis.
l When PWE3 services are created on a per-NE basis, ensure that the PW types are the same;
Peer IP of a local NE equals the LSR ID of the opposite NE; the PW outgoing label of a
local NE equals the PW incoming label of the opposite NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for IP Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy.
Step 3 Click Start.
Step 4 Click Close.
----End
9.16.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status
increase customer revenues. This section describes how to check the topology information and
running status of a PWE3 service, facilitating PWE3 service management.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
442
Procedure
Step 3 Select the PWE3 service whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.
Step 4 In the PWE3 service topology view, right-click the link, and choose View Real-Time
Performance from the shortcut menu to check the real-time running status of the PWE3 service.
Step 5 In the PWE3 service topology view, right-click the link, and choose View Tunnel from the
shortcut menu to check the running status of the tunnel.
----End
9.16.3 Deploying PWE3 Services
After being created on the NMS, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy PWE3 services from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
Procedure
all undeployed PWE3 services.
Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services to be deployed, right-click the PWE3 services, and choose
Deploy from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
443
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
9.16.4 Modifying PWE3 Services
This section describes how to change values of PWE3 service parameters, such as the service
name.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 3 Select the PWE3 service whose parameters you need to modify and click Details. In the dialog
box that is displayed, change the values of the PWE3 services parameters as required.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
444
9.16.5 Deleting PWE3 Services
After being deployed, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete PWE3 services from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l After being deleted from the network side, PWE3 services are deleted from the NMS only
but still stored on the corresponding NEs. In addition, after being deleted from the network
side, PWE3 services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS.
l After being deleted from the NE side, PWE3 services are deleted from the corresponding
NEs only but still stored on the NMS. In addition, after being deleted from the NE side,
PWE3 services are displayed as undeployed.
Procedure
Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services that you need to delete, right-click the services.
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment Status is Undeployed.
----End
9.16.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services
This section describes how to find discrete PWE3 services, convert discrete PWE3 services to
unterminated services, and delete discrete PWE3 services.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
445
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Discrete Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. Query all PWE3 services
that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Optional: Convert a PWE3 service to an unterminated service.
1. Select a PWE3 service and click Convert to Unterminated.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, set attributes of the PWE3 service, such as the service
name.
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is converted to an unterminated service, its service information is displayed
in Manage PWE3 Service.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more PWE3 services and click Delete Discrete Service.
----End
9.17 Managing Composite Services
Managing composite services includes automatically discovering and deploying composite
services.
9.17.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services
With the automatically discovering composite service function, you can discover composite
services and save them to the NMS. The composite service is composed of services associated
with interface connection points or PW connection points.
Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
446
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Composite Service > Search for Composite Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy and click Start.
Step 3 After the composite service search is complete, click Close.
----End
9.17.2 Deploying Composite Services
After being created on the NMS, Composite services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy Composite services
from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Composite Service > Manage Composite Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Statusto Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed Composite services.
Step 3 Select one or more Composite services to be deployed, right-click the Composite services, and
choose Deploy from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
447
NOTE
After a Composite service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution
Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) learning is implemented by the dynamic ARP. It
automatically maps IP addresses and MAC address, requiring no manual configuration of an
ARP table. Generally, dynamic ARP learning is applicable to networks with many NEs.
Dynamic ARP protocol packets, however, may significantly affect NE operating. For static ARP
configuration, the ARP table, namely, mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses, is
configured manually, but NE operating is not affected by static ARP protocol packets. Static
ARP configuration is applicable to small networks with specific NEs and NE ports used.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Control
Plane Configuration > Address Parse from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create. Then, the Add Address Parse dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the IP address and MAC address for each ARP table item, and then click Apply. For details
about the parameters, see 10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse.
WARNING
When configuring the MAC address of each ARP table item, ensure that the first digit of the
address is an even number.
Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.
WARNING
Configuring the address resolution refers to creating the static ARP table items. To delete the
dynamic ARP table items, click Clear. This operation, however, clears all the contents in the
ARP table items and interrupts the services. Hence, exercise caution when performing this
operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
448
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the contents of the static ARP table items.
----End
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID
When the request VLAN function is enabled, PW-carried Ethernet services function properly
only if the TPIDs in the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same at both ends
of a PW.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > TPID Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set TPID(Hexadecimal).
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link
In the case of the QinQ link, a layer of VLAN tag is added to the packets that are accessed over
a port, through QinQ encapsulation. Hence, the packets from different VLANs on the user-side
network can be encapsulated and then transmitted to the same VLAN on the transport network.
In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service
and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ links on the network side.
Prerequisites
l The Layer 2 attributes of the port on the QinQ link must be set and the encapsulation mode
must be the QinQ mode.
l If the QoS parameters of the QinQ link need to be set, the QinQ policy must be configured
first.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New QinQ Link window is displayed.
Step 3 Click the General Attributes tab. Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID.
Step 4 Click the QoS tab and set the QoS-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
449
NOTE
If Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s) for the QinQ link. Alternatively, you can select a QoS policy directly in
Policy. Before selecting a policy, you need to create the policy first.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group
Creating a V-UNI group involves selecting the V-UNI group members and setting the overall
bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by
creating the V-UNI group.
Prerequisites
l Multiple Ethernet services must be created.
l The PIR value of the V-UNI group must be set to a value that is higher than or equal to the
sum of the CIR values of the V-UNI members.
Procedure
Ethernet Service Management > V-UNI Group from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the NEW V-UNI Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set V-UNI Group ID, V-UNI Group Type, PIR(kbit/s), and PBS(byte).
Step 4 Select the port to be added. Click to add the port to the Selected Interface list. For
details about the parameters, see 10.4.11 V-UNI Group.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
450
NOTE
l The ports on an interface board can be configured into the same V-UNI group.
l The ports of a V-UNI group must be on the same board.
----End
9.22 Managing the Blacklist
The blacklist is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC
address. Managing a blacklist involves configuring disabled MAC addresses.
Prerequisites
l E-LAN services are configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the created E-LAN service and click the Disabled MAC Address tab.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
451
Step 2 Click New.
Step 3 In the dialog box that is displayed, set VLAN ID and MAC Address.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
452
10 Parameter Description
About This Chapter
This topic describes the parameters related to the Ethernet services.
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface
The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.
10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS
This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS management.
10.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the ELine service configuration.
10.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-LAN Service configuration.
10.5 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-AGGR service configuration.
10.6 Parameter Description: CES Port
Before configuring a CES service, you must configure the CES port.
10.7 Parameter Description: CES Services
This section describes parameters for CES services.
10.8 Parameter Description: ATM/IMA Services
This section describes parameters for ATM/IMA services.
10.9 Parameter Description: MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM mechanism can be used to effectively detect, confirm, and locate internal
defects that occur on the MPLS layer network, and monitor the network performance.
10.10 Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel APS
This topic describes the parameters related to the MPLS Tunnel APS.
10.11 Parameter Description: Inband DCN
In this interface, you can manage DCN.
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
453
This topic describes the parameters related to QinQ links.
10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse
This topic describes the parameters, such as ARP List IP, ARP List MAC, and ARP List
Type, for configuring the address parse function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
454
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface
The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.
10.1.1 General Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Mode, Enable Port, and Encapsulation Type.
Table 10-1 lists the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-1 Parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port
Field Value Description
Port For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Indicates the port name.
Name For example, Port1 User-defines a port name.
Enable Port Enabled, Disabled.
Default: Enabled
The Enable Port parameter
sets whether the Ethernet port
is usable.
Click A.1.3 Enable Port
(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Selects the working mode of
the Ethernet port.
Layer 2: The port can access
the user-side equipment or
carry Ethernet services that
use the port exclusively.
Layer 3: The port can carry
tunnels.
Encapsulation Type Null, 802.1Q, QinQ
Default: For details, see
configuration guidelines.
The Encapsulation Type
parameter sets the link layer
encapsulation type of the
port, and specifies the link
layer encapsulation type that
can be identified by this port.
Click A.1.4 Encapsulation
Type(Ethernet Interface)
for more information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
455
Working Mode 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-
Duplex, Auto-Negotiation,
100M Half-Duplex, 100M
Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex, 10G Full-Duplex
LAN, 10G Full-Duplex
WAN
Default: Auto-Negotiation
Set the Working Mode
parameter to set the working
mode of the Ethernet port on
the board. The Working
Mode parameter indicates
the maximum transmission
rate and communication
mode of a port.
CAUTION
When configuring a service, set
Working Mode to the same
value if possible for the port and
its interconnected port.
Otherwise, the service may fail.
Click A.1.5 Working Mode
more information.
Max Frame Length (byte) For OptiX OSN 3500/7500:
960 to 9600
For other products: 960 to
9000
Default: 1620
The maximum frame length
is also the maximum
transport unit (MTU).
Click A.1.6 Max Frame
Length(byte) for an
Ethernet Port for more
information.

10.1.2 Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters, such as autonegotiation and non-autonegotiation, which are
used for configuring flow control function of a Packet Ethernet port.
Table 10-2 lists the parameters for configuring flow control of a Packet Ethernet port.
Table 10-2 Parameters for configuring flow control of a Packet Ethernet port
Field Value Range Description
Port For example: 2-N1PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Display the port name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
456
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
If the working mode of the port
is Non-Autosensing, you can
only choose the Non-
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode.
l Disabled: The port disables
the flow control function
(in both the transmit and
receive directions).
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Control: The port
transmits flow control
frames and also responds to
flow control frames.
l Send Only: The port only
transmits flow control
frames.
l Receive Only: The port
only responds to flow
control frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
457
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow Control,
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control, Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow Control
If the working mode of the port
is Auto-Negotiation, you can
only choose the Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control
Mode.
l Disabled: Indicates that the
flow control function of the
port is disabled. (The flow
control function at both the
transmit and receive
directions is disabled.)
l Enable Dissymmetric
Flow Control: Indicates
that the dissymmetric flow
control function is enabled
in the auto-negotiation
state. (The flow control
frames can be transmitted,
but the received flow
control frames are not
responded. The flow
control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Control: Indicates that the
symmetric flow control
function is enabled in the
auto-negotiation state. (The
flow control frames can be
transmitted, and the
received flow control
frames are responded. The
flow control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: Indicates that the
symmetric/dissymmetric
flow control function is
enabled in the auto-
negotiation state. (The flow
control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
458
NOTE
The GE ports on packet Ethernet
boards support the setting of
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control
Mode, but only receive flow
control frames. The ETMC board
and the 10GE ports on packet
Ethernet boards do not support
the setting of Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode.

10.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include QinQ Type Domain, Tag, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
Table 10-3 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-3 Parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port
(Port-1)
Displays the port name.
QinQ Type Domain 0x0600 to 0xFFFE
NOTE
For the PEG8, PEX2, PEX1,
and EDQ41, this parameter can
be set only to 0x88A8.
Sets the QinQ type domain.
This parameter is available
only when you set
Encapsulation Type in
General Attributes to
QinQ.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
459
Tag Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Indicates which type of
packets can be processed.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packet with a VLAN ID
(tagged). If a packet does not
have a VLAN ID (untagged),
the port discards this packet.
In this case, Default VLAN
ID and VLAN Priority are
meaningless.
Access: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN ID
(untagged). If the packet has
a VLAN ID (tagged), the port
discards this packet.
Hybrid: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN ID
(untagged). If the packet has
a VLAN ID (tagged), the port
transparently transmits the
packet.
This parameter is unavailable
when you set Encapsulation
Type in General Attributes
to QinQ.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
460
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Sets the default VLAN ID of
packets that passes through
the port.
When you set Tag to
Access, packets that have a
VLAN ID the same as the
default VLAN ID are
discarded, and packets
without a VLAN are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
When you set Tag to
Hybrid, tagged packets are
allowed to pass, and
untagged packets are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
NOTE
If an MPLS tunnel needs to
traverse a Layer 2 network, set
the VLAN IDs for the tunnels
connected to the NNI ports at
both ends to the same value
according to the VLAN
planning requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 Sets the QoS level. When the
network is busy, packets of a
higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of a
lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the
lowest priority and 7 the
highest.

10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Enable Tunnel, Specify IP, IP Address, and IP Mask
Table 10-4 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-4 Parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port
(Port-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
461
Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Enable Tunnel
(Ethernet Interface)
parameter sets the MPLS
enabling state of the port.
When Enable Tunnel is set
to Enabled, it indicates that
the port can identify and
process the MPLS label.
Click A.1.7 Enable Tunnel
(Ethernet Interface)for
more information.
Specify IP Manually, Unspecified
Default: Unspecified
The Specify IP parameter,
set by port, indicates the
method of specifying the IP
address parameter of a
specified port.
Click A.1.8 Specify IP
more information.
IP Address For example, 192.168.0.1 Sets the IP address for the
port.
IP Mask For example, 255.255.255.0 Sets the subnet mask of the
port.

10.1.5 Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Physical parameters, MAC Loopback, and Loopback Check
Table 10-5 lists the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-5 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
(Port-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
462
Port Physical parameters For example:
l Port Enable: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-
Negotiation
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode:
Disabled
l MAC Loopback: Non-
Loopback
l PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback
Displays physical parameters
of the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Sets the loopback state of the
MAC layer.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-Loopback
The PHY Loopback
parameter indicates the
loopback status of the
physical layer of an Ethernet
port. This parameter is an
advanced attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Click A.1.2 PHY Loopback
more information.
MAC Address For example,
00-5A-3D-03-4C-1B
Default: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-
FF
Displays the MAC address of
the port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/s) For example, 1024 Displays the rate at which
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) For example, 1024 Displays the rate at which
packets are received.
Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets loop detection.
When this function is
enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the related alarm
is reported.
Currently, the OptiX OSN
equipment does not support
this function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
463
Loopback Port Block Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets the automatic shutdown
of the port.
When Loopback Check is
set to Enabled and
Loopback Port Block is set
to Enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the port is
automatically shut down to
release the loop.

10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS
This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS management.
10.2.1 Basic Configuration
This topic describe the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.
Table 10-6 lists the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.
Table 10-6 Parameter for the basic configuration
LSR ID For example, 10.70.73.156 In a PSN network, each NE is
allocated with a unique LSR
ID.

10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE
Basis)
A static tunnel may be unidirectional or bidirectional.
Table 10-7 lists the parameters for configuring a static tunnel.
Table 10-7 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel
Tunnel ID For example, 1 Displays or specifies the
tunnel ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
464
Tunnel Name For example, name1
NOTE
The tunnel name contains a
maximum of 64 bytes.
Displays or specifies the
name of the tunnel.
Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the type of a node.
l Ingress: ingress node
l Egress: egress node
l Transit: pass-through
node
Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the direction of the
tunnel.
For a unidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Unidirectional
by default. For a bidirectional
tunnel, Direction is
Bidirectional by default.
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFFF is invalid)
The Committed
Information Rate (Kbit/s)
parameter specifies the CIR
of the queue. The packets
whose rates are less than the
CIR can be forwarded. When
the rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR, all
messages can be forwarded.
If the rate of the packets is
more than the CIR, some
packets are discarded
according to a certain packet
discarding policy.
Click A.10.26 Committed
CBS(bytes) - The CBS(byte) parameter
specifies the committed burst
size.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
465
PIR(kbit/s) - The PIR(Kbit/s) parameter
specifies the maximum rate
of services allowed, also
called the peak information
rate (PIR).
NOTE
PBS(bytes) - The PBS(byte) parameter
specifies the peak burst size
(PBS).
NOTE
In Board/Logic Interface
Type
Slot ID-Board name Displays or specifies the
ingress board or the logic
interface type.
In Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
ingress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
In Label For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays and specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
The ingress label must be
unique on the entire network.
transit node.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward In Label For example, 17
NOTE
32768.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Forward Out Label
can be set but Forward In
Label cannot be set.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
466
Reverse Out Label For example, 18
NOTE
32768.
egress label of the tunnel.
NOTE
tunnel, Reverse In Label can
be set but Reverse Out Label
cannot be set.
Out Board/Logic Interface
Type
egress board or the logic
interface type.
Out Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
egress port of the tunnel.
transit node.
Out Label For example, 19
NOTE
32768.
egress label of the tunnel. The
egress label must be unique
on the entire network.
transit node.
Egress label is supported
configured with a
Forward Out Label For example, 20
NOTE
32768.
This function is supported
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
Reverse In Label For example, 70
NOTE
32768.
configured with a
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
467
Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.2 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
This parameter can be set
only for the ingress node and
transit node.
configured with a
Forward Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.3 Displays or specifies the
tunnel.
configured with a
Reverse Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.4 Displays or specifies the
tunnel.
NOTE
tunnel, Forward Next Hop
Address can be set but Reverse
Next Hop Address cannot be
set.
Source Node For example, 192.168.0.5 Displays or specifies the
source node of the tunnel.
A source node can be
specified only for the egress
node and transit node.
Sink Node For example, 192.168.0.6 Displays or specifies the sink
node of the tunnel.
A sink node can be specified
transit node.
Tunnel Type E-LSP Displays the tunnel type.
EXP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None
Default: None
The EXP parameter specifies
the field in the MPLS packets
for identifying the priority of
these MPLS packets.
Click A.10.30 EXP for more
information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
468
LSP Mode Pipe, Uniform
Default: Uniform
The LSP Mode parameter
specifies the mode in which
the MPLS network processes
packet priorities.
Click A.10.31 LSP Mode for
more information.
MTU(bytes) - Specifies the MTU value of
MPLS packets. When MTU
is 0, there is no restriction on
the MPLS MTU. If the MPLS
MTU needs to be restricted,
the MPLS MTU must be set
larger than the MTU of the
physical ports where the
tunnel is located.
NOTE

10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters, such as the enabling status, label and type, for configuring
a static tunnel.
Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel 1 Specifies the name of the
tunnel.
Reverse Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel1_RVS Specifies the name of the
Reverse tunnel.
Protocol Type MPLS Specifies the protocol type
used by the tunnel.
Signaling Type Static Specifies the signaling type
of the tunnel.
This parameter is
configurable only when you
set Protocol Type to MPLS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
469
Remarks For example, NE(9-7032)-
NE(9-7037)
Specifies the remarks.
Remarks for a specific tunnel
facilitate management and
maintenance of the tunnel.
Create Reverse Tunnel Checked, Unchecked If Create Reverse Tunnel is
checked, a reverse tunnel is
created when a forward
tunnel is created. If Create
Reverse Tunnel is
unchecked, only a forward
tunnel is created.
Create Bidirectional Tunnel Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Specifies the tunnel as a
If Create Bidirectional
Tunnel is checked, a tunnel
contains a forward path and a
reverse path. No extra port
configurations are required.
Create Protection Group Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
If Create Protection
Group is checked, a
corresponding tunnel
protection group is created
when tunnel 1 is created.
Auto Calculate Route Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
If Auto Calculate Route is
checked, the system
automatically computes the
route after you select the
source node and sink node
and specify the NEs as
explicit/inexplicit nodes in
the physical topology.
NOTE
This function is supported only
by the OptiX OSN 1500 and the
single-slot boards on the OptiX
OSN 3500/7500.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
470
Restriction Bandwidth (Kbit/
s)
1024-1024000, No Limit
Default: No Limit
Specifies the upper
bandwidth limit.
When automatically
computing a route, the NMS
checks whether the computed
route meets the requirement
of Restriction Bandwidth
(Kbit/s).
This parameter is available
only when Auto Calculate
Route is checked.
Deploy Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
Saves the tunnel
configuration on the NMS
and delivers the
configuration to NEs during
tunnel deployment.
Enable Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
Automatically enables the
tunnel during tunnel
deployment.

Tunnel ID For example, 1 Displays or specifies the
tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name For example, name1
NOTE
The tunnel name contains a
maximum of 64 bytes.
name of the tunnel.
Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the type of a node.
node
Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the direction of the
tunnel.
For a unidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Unidirectional
by default. For a bidirectional
tunnel, Direction is
Bidirectional by default.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
471
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
The Committed
discarding policy.
CBS(bytes) - The CBS(byte) parameter
specifies the committed burst
size.
NOTE
PIR(kbit/s) - The PIR(Kbit/s) parameter
specifies the maximum rate
of services allowed, also
called the peak information
rate (PIR).
NOTE
PBS(bytes) - The PBS(byte) parameter
specifies the peak burst size
(PBS).
NOTE
In Board/Logic Interface
Type
ingress board or the logic
interface type.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
472
In Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
ingress port of the tunnel.
transit node.
In Label For example, 17
NOTE
32768.
The ingress label must be
unique on the entire network.
transit node.
configured with a
Forward In Label For example, 17
NOTE
32768.
NOTE
tunnel, Forward Out Label
can be set but Forward In
Label cannot be set.
Reverse Out Label For example, 18
NOTE
32768.
NOTE
tunnel, Reverse In Label can
be set but Reverse Out Label
cannot be set.
Out Board/Logic Interface
Type
egress board or the logic
interface type.
Out Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
egress port of the tunnel.
transit node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
473
Out Label For example, 19
NOTE
32768.
egress label of the tunnel. The
egress label must be unique
on the entire network.
transit node.
Egress label is supported
configured with a
Forward Out Label For example, 20
NOTE
32768.
configured with a
Reverse In Label For example, 70
NOTE
32768.
configured with a
Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.2 Displays or specifies the
tunnel.
transit node.
configured with a
Forward Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.3 Displays or specifies the
tunnel.
configured with a
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
474
Reverse Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.4 Displays or specifies the
tunnel.
NOTE
tunnel, Forward Next Hop
Address can be set but Reverse
Next Hop Address cannot be
set.
Source Node For example, 192.168.0.5 Displays or specifies the
source node of the tunnel.
A source node can be
specified only for the egress
node and transit node.
Sink Node For example, 192.168.0.6 Displays or specifies the sink
node of the tunnel.
A sink node can be specified
transit node.
Tunnel Type E-LSP Displays the tunnel type.
EXP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None
Default: None
The EXP parameter specifies
the field in the MPLS packets
for identifying the priority of
these MPLS packets.
Click A.10.30 EXP for more
information.
LSP Mode Pipe, Uniform
Default: Uniform
The LSP Mode parameter
specifies the mode in which
the MPLS network processes
packet priorities.
Click A.10.31 LSP Mode for
more information.
MTU(bytes) - Specifies the MTU value of
MPLS packets. When MTU
is 0, there is no restriction on
the MPLS MTU. If the MPLS
MTU needs to be restricted,
the MPLS MTU must be set
larger than the MTU of the
physical ports where the
tunnel is located.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
475

10.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the ELine service configuration.
10.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes the parameters, such as Service Name, Service ID, Direction, and Bearer
Type, for configuring an E-Line service.
Table 10-10 lists the parameters for configuring an E-Line service.
Table 10-10 Parameters for configuring an E-Line service
Service ID For example, 11 Sets and queries the ID of the Ethernet service.
Service Name For example, test Sets and queries the name of the Ethernet
service.
Source Node For example, 21-
N1PETF8-1 (Port-1)
(14)
Displays the source node of the E-Line service.
The format is Slot number - Board name - Port
name (VLAN ID).
Sink Node For example, PW-0 Displays the sink node of the E-Line service.
The sink node can be a port, PW or QinQ link.
Direction UNI-UNI, UNI-NNI In the case of the UNI-NNI direction, selects the
network-side bearer type as PW Port or QinQ
Link.
Service Tag
Role
User, Service
Default: User
Specifies how C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of
packets are processed.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are
used as user VLAN tags, and are processed
when the packets are forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets
are used as service VLAN tags, and are not
processed when the packets are forwarded.
NOTE
This parameter is unavailable in
V200R011C00,V200R011C01 and V200R011C02.
Source Port For example, 21-
N1PETF8-1 (Port-1)
(1-2)
Sets and queries the user-side port or network-
side port.
Source VLANs 1-4094 Sets one or several VLAN IDs, or does not set
any VLAN ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
476
PRI 0 to 7
Default: null
UNI-NNI E-Line services can be mapped to
different PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI. If packets need to be forwarded based on
Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI, set PRI to an integer
ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the
highest priority.
PRI can be set to null, one value, or several
values. If PRI is set to several values, separate
the values using commas; if PRI is set to an
interval, represent the interval in a form like 2-5.
l If PRI is set to null, packets are mapped to
different PWs based on VLAN IDs. In this
case, packets whose PRI is set to a value
within the range from 0 to 7 can be carried
in the E-Line service.
l If PRI is not set to null, packets are mapped
to different PWs based on Port+VLAN
+VLAN PRI. In this case, one service
VLAN ID must be added for the E-Line
service.
NOTE
This parameter is unavailable in
V200R011C00,V200R011C01 and V200R011C02.
Bearer Type Port, PW, QinQ Link
Default: -
The Bearer Type (E-Line Service) parameter
specifies the bearer type for different types of
Ethernet services. The value of this parameter
can be set to Port, PW, or QinQ Link.
Click A.3.2 Bearer Type (E-Line Service) for
more information.
PW ID 1-4294967295
Default: -
The PW ID parameter identifies the PW.
Click A.3.3 PW ID(E-Line Service) for more
information.
QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Selects and displays the QinQ link ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
477
BPDU Transparently
Transmitted, Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Default: Not
Transparently
Transmitted
NOTE
This parameter can be
set to Transparently
Transmitted or Not
Transparently
Transmitted for OptiX
OSN 3500's N1PEG16
and N1PEX1 boards,
and OptiX OSN 1500's
Q1PEGS2, R1PEF4F,
R1PEFS8, and
R1PEGS1 boards, and
can be set to only Not
Transparently
Transmitted for the
other OptiX OSN
boards.
The BPDU parameter sets whether the service
needs transparently transmit the bridge protocol
data unit (BPDU) packets. The BPDU is the
information transmitted between bridges. It is
used to switch information between bridges, and
then the spanning tree of the network is
computed.
Click A.3.4 BPDU for more information.
MTU(bytes) 46-9000
Default: 1500
The MTU(bytes) parameter indicates the
maximum transmitted packet length, which is
the length of the packet payload.
Click A.3.5 MTU(bytes)(E-Line Service) for
more information.

10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring E-Line services in end-to-end mode. Before
creating E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnel for carrying the PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
478
Table 10-11 Parameters for configuring PWE3 services
Service Template
NOTE
This parameter is optional and
helps users quickly configure
various services. If the
parameter value is not
specified, subsequent service
configuration is not affected.
DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_P
TN,
DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_P
TN
NOTE
The OptiX OSN equipment
does not support the following
service templates:
l DEFAULT_PWE3_ATM_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_IWF_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_IP_R
OUTER
PWE3 service template.
Service Type varies with
Service Template.
Service Template improves
service configuration
efficiency.
NOTE
After you select a service
template, a dialog box is
displayed, saying After the
template is changed, the
parameters not contained in
the new template may be lost.
Are you sure to continue? You
can also select Apply the
template data to the
configured Objects.
Service Type ETH, CES
NOTE
Specifies the required service
type based on service
configuration. When the
equipment is configured with
PWE3 Ethernet services,
Service Type is set to ETH.
When the equipment is
configured with PWE3 CES
services, Service Type is set to
CES.
type of each PWE3 service.
Service ID Auto-Assign, or manually
enter it.
Default: Auto-Assign
Specifies the ID of each
PWE3 service. The service
ID is unique on the entire
network.
Service Name For example, E-Line-1
NOTE
The value of this parameter
contains 1 to 64 bytes.
name of each PWE3 service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
479
Protection Type Protection-Free Specifies the protection type
for the service.
If Protection Type is PW
Redundancy, you need to
select Single Source and
Dual Sink from Node List. If
Protection Type is PW
APS, you need to select Dual
Source and Single Sink
from Node List. If you select
Single Source and Dual
Sink, you need to configure
one source node and two sink
nodes. If you select Dual
Source and Single Sink, you
need to configure two source
nodes and one sink node. One
PW functions as the working
path and the other PW
functions as the protection
path.
Description For example, E-Line-1
NOTE
service description.
Customer - Displays and specifies the
customer to which a service
belongs.
Remarks - Displays and specifies the
service remarks.

Table 10-12 SAI parameters
ID For example, 1 Displays and specifies the ID
of the service access port.
VLAN ID - Displays and specifies the
VLAN ID of the service
access port.
Priority Type Null, 802.1Q
Default value: Null
Specifies the priority type.
NOTE
Setting this parameter is not
available in the V200R011C00,
V200R011C01, and
V200R011C02 versions.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
480
Priority Field 0 to 7
Default value: Null
can be mapped into different
PWs based on Port+VLAN
+VLAN PRI. Set this
parameter if packets need to
be forwarded based on Port
+VLAN+VLAN PRI This
parameter takes an integral
value ranging from 0 to 7.
Value 7 represents the
highest priority.
NOTE
l Setting this parameter is not
available in the
V200R011C00,
V200R011C01, and
l This parameter takes effect
only when Priority Type is
802.1Q.
Service Tag User, Service
Default value: User
Specifies the way C-VLAN/
S-VLAN tags in user packets
are processed.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN
tags in user packets are
used as user VLAN tags,
and are processed when
the packets are
forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-
VLAN tags in user
packets are used as
service VLAN tags, and
are not processed when
the packets are
forwarded.
NOTE
Setting this parameter is not
available in the V200R011C00,
V200R011C01, and

Table 10-13 Basic PW parameters
Role Working, Protection Displays and specifies the
role of a PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
481
Source NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port-
Higher order timeslot
source NE of a PW.
Sink NE NE-Slot ID-Board-Port-
sink NE of a PW.
PW ID Auto-Assign, or manually
enter it.
For example, 35
identifier of a PW.
Signaling Type Static Displays and specifies the
signaling type of a PW.
If you set Signaling Type to
Static, you need to set the
PW ingress label and PW
egress label. If you set
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
automatically allocates the
egress label.
Forward Label For example, 20
NOTE
32768 in step of 2048, and is
different from the MPLS tunnel
label.
label that the service carries
when entering a PW.
l If you set Signaling
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
automatically allocated
by the system and cannot
be specified manually.
Type to Static, Forward
Label can be
automatically allocated or
manually specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
482
Reverse Label For example, 20
NOTE
label.
when leaving a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
Type to Static, Reverse
Label can be
manually specified.
Forward Type Static Binding Displays and specifies the
binding type of a forward
tunnel.
Forward Tunnel For example, NE1-NE2#1 Displays and specifies the
name of a forward tunnel.
NOTE
supports only Static Binding.
Reverse Type Static Binding Displays and specifies the
binding type of a reverse
tunnel.
Reverse Tunnel For example, NE2-NE1#1 Displays and specifies the
name of a reverse tunnel.
NOTE
NOTE
If you set Encapsulation
Type to MPLS, Tunnel Type
may be MPLS, IP, or GRE. If
you set Encapsulation Type to
UDP, Tunnel Type is IP only.
encapsulation type of a PW.
NOTE
supports only one tunnel type,
namely, MPLS tunnel.

Table 10-14 Advanced PW parameters
PW Trail - Displays the trail of a PW.
Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of a
PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
483
PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Default: Ethernet
l Ethernet: C-VLAN/S-
VLAN tags of packets are
encapsulated into PWs
without changes, and
transparently transmitted
to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode:
A VLAN tag specified by
Request VLAN is added
to packets.
PWs of different types
process their carried services
differently. To tag the
services carried by a PW, set
PW Type to Ethernet
Tagged Mode for the PW;
otherwise, set PW Type to
Ethernet.
Control Word No Use, Used First
Default: -
The Control Word
parameter specifies the PW
control word usage policy.
Click A.8.1 Control Word
Control Channel Type None, CW
Default: CW
The Control Channel Type
parameter specifies the type
of channels for transmitting
VCCV packets.
Click A.8.2 Control
Channel Type for more
information.
VCCV Verification Mode None, Ping
Default: Ping
The VCCV Verification
Mode parameter specifies
the verification mode of
VCCV packets.
Click A.8.3 VCCV
Verification Mode for more
information.
NOTE
Set this parameter if Control
Channel Type is Ping.
Request VLAN For example, 5
1-4095, Non-specified
Default: Non-specified
The Request VLAN
parameter specifies the ETH
request VLAN.
Click A.8.4 Request VLAN

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
484
Table 10-15 QoS parameters for service access ports
Role For example, Working
Source
role of a service access port.
Based on different protection
types, service access ports
can function as different
roles, for example, working
source, working sink,
protection source, protection
sink, FRR source, and FRR
sink.
SAI - Displays and specifies a
service access port.
Direction Ingress, Egress Displays and specifies the
direction of a service access
port.
l Ingress indicates the
inbound direction of a
service.
l Egress indicates the
outbound direction of a
service.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled, Disabled Specifies or displays the
bandwidth limit.
If you set Bandwidth
Limited to Enabled,
bandwidth is limited based
on the specified CIR, PIR,
CBS, and PBS.
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
The Committed
discarding policy.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
485
Committed Burst Size (byte) 64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
The Committed Burst Size
(byte) parameter specifies
the committed burst size.
Burst Size (byte) for more
information.
Peak Information Rate (kbit/
s)
64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
The Peak Information Rate
(kbit/s) parameter specifies
the maximum rate of services
allowed by the PIR.
Click A.10.28 Peak
Information Rate (kbit/s)
Peak Burst Size (byte) 64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
The Peak Burst Size (byte)
parameter specifies the size
of the PBS.
Click A.10.29 Peak Burst
Size (byte) for more
information.
Local QoS Policy - Displays the QoS policy at
the local end.
Default Forwarding Priority CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
Displays the service
forwarding priority.
Different values represent
different service classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service class,
mainly applicable to
signaling transmission.
l EF: indicates expedited
forwarding, applicable to
services (for example,
voice services) with low
transmission delay and
low packet loss rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
applicable to services that
require an assured rate
rather than restricted
delay or jitter.
l BE: applicable to services
that do not need special
processing.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
486
Default Packet Marking
Color
Red, Yellow, Green, None Displays the default packet
marking color.
Based on the labels carried by
packets, different colors are
configured for marking the
packets. Red packets have the
highest priority.
Processing Mode of Green
Packet
Discard, Pass, Remark Specifies the processing
mode of packets.
l Discard: The packets are
discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
CoS of Green Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
Displays the service class of
the packets marked green.
CoS of packets defines
voice and video services)
with low transmission
delay and low packet loss
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Green Packet Green Sets the color of packets to
green.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
487
Processing Mode of Yellow
Packet
mode of packets.
discarded.
forwarded.
CoS of Yellow Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
the packets marked yellow.
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Yellow Packet Yellow Sets the color of packets to
yellow.
Processing Mode of Red
Packet
mode of packets.
discarded.
forwarded.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
488
CoS of Red Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
the packets marked red.
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Red Packet - Sets the color of packets to
red.
VLAN Range - Specifies the VLAN range of
packets.

10.3.3 UNI Parameters
Setting the UNI parameters for an E-Line service focuses on setting of the VLAN information
about UNI ports.
Table 10-16 lists the UNI parameters for an E-Line service.
Table 10-16 Parameters for a UNI port
Port For example, 21-
N1PETF8-1 (port-1)
(1-2)
Indicates the UNI port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
489
VLANs 1 to 4094 Queries and configures the VLAN ID. The
VLAN ID can be null; or you can set one or more
VLAN IDs.
Default
Forwarding
Priority
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, CS7,
NONE
Default: BE
The Default Forwarding Priority parameter
indicates the forwarding priority that the NE sets
to the user packets on the V-UNI side by default.
Click A.3.9 Default Forwarding Priority for
more information.
Default Packet
Relabeling
Color
Red, Yellow, Green,
None
Default: Green
The Default Packet Relabeling Color indicates
the color that the NE sets to the user packets on
the V-UNI side by default.
Click A.3.10 Default Packet Relabeling Color
(E-LAN Service) for more information.

10.3.4 NNI Parameters
NNI parameters are used for NNI Ethernet services. According to different service bearer modes,
NNI parameters include the parameters that are used for a PW, a port and a QinQ link.
PW
Table 10-17 Parameters for a PW
PW ID For example, 123 Specifies the ID of the PW carrying the Ethernet
service.
PW Status Enable, Disable Specifies or displays the enable status of the PW.
PW Signaling
Type
Static In the case of the static PW, the label is manually
allocated. The configuration at the two ends of a
PW should be consistent.
PW Type Ethernet, Ethernet
Tagged Mode
PWs of different types process the borne services
differently. For example, the PW in the Ethernet
tagged mode attaches the tag on the services on
this PW.
PW Direction Bidirectional Specifies the direction of the PW.
PW
Encapsulation
Type
MPLS Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
490
PW Ingress
Label
The value range varies
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
l Other products: 16
to 32768.
Specifies this parameter when the PW Signaling
Type is set to Static.
PW Egress
Label
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
to 32768.
Peer IP For example,
10.70.71.123
Specifies the peer IP of the PW.
Tunnel Type MPLS Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the
PW.
Tunnel No. Tunnel ID
For example, 55
Selects a created tunnel. If no tunnel is available,
creation of a PW fails.
Default: -
The Control Word parameter specifies the PW
Click A.8.1 Control Word for more
information.
Control
Channel Type
None, CW
Default: CW
The Control Channel Type parameter specifies
the type of channels for transmitting VCCV
packets.
Click A.8.2 Control Channel Type for more
information.
VCCV
Verification
Mode
Ping, None Verifies the connectivity of a PW. The VCCV
verification mode is a tool used to manually
verify the connectivity of a virtual circuit.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
491
Local
Operating
Status
Up, Down Displays the working status of the PW at the
local end. Up indicates that the PW works
normally. Down indicates that the PW work
abnormally.
Remote
Operating
Status
remote end. Up indicates that the PW works
abnormally.
Competitive
Working Status
Up, Down The Competitive Working Status parameter
specifies the running status of a PW.
Click A.8.5 Competitive Working Status for
more information.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN equipment, Static can only be set
to Up.
The Request VLAN parameter specifies the
ETH request VLAN.
Click A.8.4 Request VLAN for more
information.
TPID 0x88A8 Identifies the protocol.

Port
Table 10-18 Parameters for an NNI Port
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
Specifies the network-side port.

QinQ Link
Table 10-19 Parameters for a QinQ link
QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Displays the QinQ link ID.
N1PETF8-10 (Port-10)
Displays the board and port.
S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays the S-VLAN ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
492
Direction Ingress, Egress Displays the direction of the
service.
Bandwidth Limit Enabled, Disabled Displays the bandwidth limit.
When Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled, you can set
Committed Information
Rate and Peak Information
Rate.
(kbit/s)
For example, 16000 Displays the committed
information rate, which is the
guaranteed rate that can be
provided to the service.
Committed Burst Size(byte) - Displays the committed burst
size, which is the maximum
flow size allowed for each
burst.
s)
For example, 20000 Displays the peak
maximum rate that can be
provided for the service.
Maximum Burst Size(byte) - Displays the maximum burst
excessive burst.
Policy Policy ID + Policy Name
For example, 1(policy1)
Displays the QinQ policy.

10.3.5 Maintenance Association
The maintenance association (MA) facilitates the connectivity check (CC) of a network that
transports services.
Table 10-20 lists the parameters for a maintenance association.
Table 10-20 Parameters for a maintenance association
Maintenance
Domain Name
1-8 characters Sets an MD name that is unique in the entire
network.
Maintenance
Association
Name
1-8 characters Sets an MA name that is unique in the same MD.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
493
CC Test
Transmit Period
3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms,
1s, 10s, 1m, 10m
Default: 1s
The source end MEP constructs the CC frames,
and then transmits them periodically to the
destination MEP. After the destination MEP
receives the CCM messages from the source
end, the CC check function of the source MEP
is directly started. Within a certain period (3.5
times of the transmission period), if the
destination MEP does not receive the CC
packets from the source end, an alarm is
automatically reported. The CC Test Transmit
Period parameter indicates the transmission
period of the unidirectional connectivity check.
Click A.6.1 CC Test Transmit Period
(Ethernet Service OAM Management) for
more information.

10.3.6 MEP Point
The MEP point is the edge point in an MA.
Table 10-21 lists the parameters for an MEP point.
Table 10-21 Parameters for an MEP point
Maintenance
Domain Name
1-8 characters The name of an MD should be unique in the
entire network.
Maintenance
Association
Name
1-8 characters The name of an MA should be unique in the
same MD.
Board For example, 21-
N1PETF8
Displays the board where the MEP point is
located. The format is Slot number - Board
name.
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
Displays the port where the MEP point is
located. Slot number - Board name - Port
information
Node For example, 21-
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
Sets the node as an MEP point.
VLAN For example, 22 Sets the current VLAN ID of the service.
MEP ID 1-8191 Sets a unique ID for each MP. The ID is required
for OAM operations.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
494
Direction Ingress, Egress Ingress indicates the direction for packets to
enter the board. Egress indicates the direction
for packets to exit the board.
CC Status Active, Inactive Activates or deactivates the CC function of the
MEP point.

10.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-LAN Service configuration.
10.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes the parameters, such as Service ID and Service Name, for configuring an
E-LAN service.
Table 10-22 lists the parameters for configuring an E-LAN service.
Table 10-22 Parameters for configuring an E-LAN service
service.
Tag Type C-Awared, S-Awared,
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared indicates that the learning is based
on the C-TAG (client-side VLAN tag).
S-Awared indicates that the learning is based on
the S-TAG (operator service-layer VLAN tag).
S-Awared is valid only when Encapsulation
Type is set to QinQ for a port.
Tag-Transparent indicates that all Ethernet
packets can be transmitted transparently when
Encapsulation Type is set to Null for a port.
Self-Learning
MAC Address
Enabled, Disabled Adds self-learnt MAC addresses to the MAC
address forwarding table.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
495
MAC Address
Learning Mode
SVL, IVL SVL indicates the shared VLAN learning. All
VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table.
Any MAC address is unique in the forwarding
table.
IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning.
The forwarding tables for different VLANs are
independent from each other. It is acceptable
that the MAC address forwarding tables for
different VLANs have the same MAC address.
When Tag Type is set to Tag-Transparent, the
parameter value is SVL by default and is not
configurable.
MTU (bytes) 64 to 9000
Default: 1500
Sets the maximum transport unit (MTU). When
receiving packets of a length exceeding the
MTU, the port segments the packets and
transports these segments. If the packets contain
a flag indicating that packet segment is not
allowed, the port discards the packet.
Available Ports For example,
Port: 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
VLANs: 12
Displays the available ports for configuring the
Ethernet service and the VLAN values.
Selected Ports For example,
Port: 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
VLAN: 12
Displays the selected ports for configuring the
Ethernet service and the VLAN values.
Available
Interfaces
- Displays the available interfaces for configuring
the split horizon group.
Selected
Interfaces
- Displays the selected interfaces for configuring
the split horizon group.

10.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End
Mode)
Before creating E-LAN services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnel that carries
PWs and configure the VSI attribute of NEs as NPE. This section describes the parameters for
configuring E-LAN services in end-to-end mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
496
Table 10-23 Parameters for the basic VSI attributes
Service Name For example, E-LAN Specifies the name of the E-
LAN service.
Signal Type LDP, BGP Specifies the signaling type.
l LDP: indicates the label
distribution protocol used
for configuring or
maintaining PWs.
l BGP: indicates the
boundary gateway
protocol, which is used
for signaling exchanges
on a mesh network.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN equipment,
this parameter can be set to only
LDP.
Networking Mode Full-Mesh VPLS, H-VPLS,
Daisy Chain, Customized
Specifies the networking
mode of Ethernet services.
l If Networking Mode is
set to Full-Mesh VPLS,
only the NPE attribute of
an NE can be specified.
set to H-VPLS, the NPE
or UPE attribute of an NE
can be specified.
set to Daisy Chain, only
the UPE attribute of an
NE can be specified.
set to Customized, only
the PE attribute of an NE
can be specified.
Service Type Service VPLS, Management
VPLS
Specifies the VPLS type.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
497
VSI Type Service VSI Displays the service type of
the virtual service instance
(VSI).
Regardless of whether
Service Type is set to
Service VPLS or
Management VPLS, VSI
Type is displayed as Service
VSI.
VSI Name For example, VPLS1 Specifies the VPLS service
name.
VSI: indicates the virtual
switching instance. The VSI
name on an NE must be
unique.
VSI ID Default: 1042 Specifies the VSI ID.
The value can be
automatically assigned.
After being specified, the
value of VSI ID cannot be
changed. The IDs of two
VSIs on an NE cannot be the
same.
Default: 1500
Specifies the maximum
transmission unit (MTU).
When the length of a packet
received at the port is greater
than the preset MTU value,
the packet needs to be
transmitted fragment by
fragment. The packet is
discarded if it does not
contain the fragmentation
tag.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
498
Tag Type Tag-Transparent, C-Awared,
S-Awared
Specifies the tag type.
l C-Awared: receives the
service packets that
contain C-VLAN tags.
l S-Awared: receives the
service packets that
contain C-VLAN tags
and S-VLAN tags.
l Tag-Transparent:
receives the service
packets that do not
contain VLAN tags.
NOTE
this parameter can be set to only
C-Awared.

Table 10-24 Parameters for forwarding control
MAC Address Learning Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
Specifies whether to enable
the MAC address learning
function.
Learning Mode Qualify(IVL), Unqualify
(SVL)
Specifies the bridge learning
mode of E-LAN services.
l Qualify(IVL): The
bridge type is IEEE
802.1q or IEEE 802.1ad.
MAC address learning is
based on VLANs of the
VSI. Each VLAN has its
MAC address space. The
MAC address space of
different VLANs can be
overlapped.
l Unqualify(IVL): The
bridge type is IEEE
802.1d or IEEE 802.1ad.
MAC address learning is
based on VSIs. Each VSI
has an MAC address
space.
Max.Leant MAC Addresses Default: 512 Specifies the maximum
number of learnt MAC
addresses.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
499
MAC Address Aging Enable, Disable Specifies whether to enable
the MAC address aging
function.
After the MAC address aging
function is enabled, a MAC
address is deleted from the
MAC address table if no
packets that contain the MAC
address are received within a
certain period of time.
MAC Address Aging Time Default: 5 Specifies the aging time of
MAC addresses.
If the MAC address aging
function is enabled, the
system deletes a MAC
address if no packets that
contain the MAC address are
received after the aging time
expires.
If the MAC address aging
function is disabled, this
parameter is unavailable.
MAC Address Detection
Upper Threshold
80% to 100%
Default: 95%
Specifies the upper threshold
of detected MAC addresses.
The value of MAC Address
Detection Upper
Threshold needs to be
greater than the value of
Lower Threshold. When the
number of learnt MAC
addresses is greater than the
upper threshold, an alarm is
reported.
Lower Threshold
60% to 100%
Default: 90%
Specifies the lower threshold
of MAC addresses detection.
Multicast Broadcast, Discard
Default: Broadcast
Specifies how to process
unknown multicast packets.
Unicast Broadcast, Discard
Default: Broadcast
Specifies how to process
unknown unicast packets.
Enable BPDU Transparent
Transmission
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Specifies whether to
transparently transmit BPDU
packets.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
500
role of a PW.
source NE of a PW.
sink NE of a PW.
enter it.
For example, 35
identifier of a PW.
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
egress label.
NOTE
label.
when entering a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
501
NOTE
label.
when leaving a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
tunnel.
NOTE
tunnel.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
502
Table 10-26 QoS parameters for service access ports
Role For example, Working
Source
role of a service access port.
Based on different protection
types, service access ports
can function as different
roles, for example, working
source, working sink,
protection source, protection
sink, FRR source, and FRR
sink.
SAI - Displays and specifies a
service access port.
Direction Ingress, Egress Displays and specifies the
direction of a service access
port.
l Ingress indicates the
inbound direction of a
service.
l Egress indicates the
outbound direction of a
service.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled, Disabled Specifies or displays the
bandwidth limit.
If you set Bandwidth
Limited to Enabled,
on the specified CIR, PIR,
CBS, and PBS.
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
The Committed
discarding policy.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
503
Default: 4294967295
information.
s)
64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
allowed by the PIR.
Click A.10.28 Peak
Default: 4294967295
of the PBS.
information.
Local QoS Policy - Displays the QoS policy at
the local end.
Default Forwarding Priority CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
Displays the service
forwarding priority.
Different values represent
voice services) with low
transmission delay and
low packet loss rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
504
Default Packet Marking
Color
Red, Yellow, Green, None Displays the default packet
marking color.
Based on the labels carried by
packets, different colors are
configured for marking the
packets. Red packets have the
highest priority.
Processing Mode of Green
Packet
mode of packets.
discarded.
forwarded.
CoS of Green Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
the packets marked green.
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Green Packet Green Sets the color of packets to
green.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
505
Processing Mode of Yellow
Packet
mode of packets.
discarded.
forwarded.
CoS of Yellow Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
the packets marked yellow.
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Yellow Packet Yellow Sets the color of packets to
yellow.
Processing Mode of Red
Packet
mode of packets.
discarded.
forwarded.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
506
CoS of Red Packet CS6, CS7, EF, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, BE, NONE
the packets marked red.
rate.
l AF1-AF4: indicate
assured forwarding,
delay or jitter.
processing.
Color of Red Packet - Sets the color of packets to
red.
VLAN Range - Specifies the VLAN range of
packets.

Setting the UNI parameters for an E-LAN service focuses on setting of the VLAN information
about UNI ports.
Table 10-27 lists the UNI parameters for an E-LAN service.
N1PETF8-1 (port-1)
(1-2)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
507
VLAN IDs.
Enabled
Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Enabled and Disabled Sets whether to enable the broadcast packet
suppression. Enabling the broadcast packet
suppression efficiently prevents the broadcast
storm and network congestion, and ensures the
normal running of services. The E-LAN service
supports this parameter.
Broadcast
Packet
Suppression
Threshold
0-100
Default: 30
Configures the threshold of the broadcast packet
suppression. The E-LAN service supports this
parameter.
When the broadcast packet suppression is
enabled, the broadcast packets are suppressed if
the following requirement is met: Occupancy
rate of the broadcast packet to the bandwidth of
the current port > the total bandwidth of the port
x the suppression threshold x 1%. A low
occupancy rate indicates that the number of
broadcast packets that pass through the port is
small. If the occupancy rate is 100%, it indicates
that the broadcast packets that pass through the
port are not suppressed.
Default
Forwarding
Priority
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, CS7,
NONE
Default: BE
more information.
Default Packet
Relabeling
Color
Red, Yellow, Green,
None
Default: Green

NNI parameters include the parameters that are used for a PW, a port and a QinQ link.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
508
PW
service.
PW Status Enable, Disable Specifies or displays the enable status of the PW.
PW Signaling
Type
allocated. The configuration at the two ends of a
PW should be consistent.
Tagged Mode
PWs of different types process the borne services
differently. For example, the PW in the Ethernet
tagged mode attaches the tag on the services on
this PW.
PW
Encapsulation
Type
PW Ingress
Label
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
to 32768.
PW Egress
Label
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
to 32768.
10.70.71.123
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
509
PW.
For example, 55
Default: -
information.
Control
Channel Type
None, CW
Default: CW
packets.
information.
VCCV
Verification
Mode
Local
Operating
Status
abnormally.
Remote
Operating
Status
abnormally.
Competitive
Working Status
more information.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN equipment, Static can only be set
to Up.
ETH request VLAN.
information.
TPID 0x88A8 Identifies the protocol.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
510
Port
Table 10-29 Parameters for an NNI Port
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)

QinQ Link
Table 10-30 Parameters for a QinQ link
QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Displays the QinQ link ID.
N1PETF8-10 (Port-10)
Displays the board and port.
S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays the S-VLAN ID.
Direction Ingress, Egress Displays the direction of the
service.
Bandwidth Limit Enabled, Disabled Displays the bandwidth limit.
When Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled, you can set
Committed Information
Rate and Peak Information
Rate.
(kbit/s)
For example, 16000 Displays the committed
guaranteed rate that can be
provided to the service.
Committed Burst Size(byte) - Displays the committed burst
burst.
s)
For example, 20000 Displays the peak
maximum rate that can be
provided for the service.
Maximum Burst Size(byte) - Displays the maximum burst
excessive burst.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
511
Policy Policy ID + Policy Name
For example, 1(policy1)
Displays the QinQ policy.

10.4.5 Split Horizon Group
A split horizon group is a group of V-UNIs or V-NNIs that do not allow for interconnection at
one station. The split horizon group prevents a cycling route and a loop.
Table 10-31 lists the parameters for a split horizon group.
Table 10-31 Parameters for a split horizon group
Split Horizon
Group ID
1
Default: -
The Split Horizon Group ID parameter
identifies the split horizon group.
Click A.3.11 Split Horizon Group ID(E-LAN
Service) for more information.
Split Horizon
Group Member
For example, PW-100,
21-N1PETF8-1-
PORT1[90, 100]
The Split Horizon Group Member parameter
indicates the logical port member in a split
horizon group.
Click A.3.12 Split Horizon Group Member

10.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters
This topic describes the parameters, such as Aging Ability, Aging Time, and Address Table
Specified Capacity, for configuring the MAS address learning function.
Table 10-32 lists the parameters for MAC address learning.
Table 10-32 Parameters for MAC address learning
Aging Ability Enabled, Disabled If no packets of an MAC address listed in the
MAC address table are received during a period,
the MAC address is deleted from the MAC
address table.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
512
Aging Time
(min)
1-640
Default: 5
Set the Aging Time (min) parameter to set the
aging time of the learnt MAC address. The
Aging Time (min) parameter indicates that the
MAC address is automatically aged after the
timing is set.
Click A.3.8 Aging Time (min)(E-LAN
Address Table
Specified
Capacity
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500: 0
to 32768
l Other products:
In the case of the
N4GSCC: 0 to
65536
In the case of the
N6GSCC: 0 to
131072
Sets the capacity of the MAC address table.
Address
Detection Upper
Threshold (%)
80-100 Sets a value of Address Table Specified
Capacity to the upper threshold for address
detection. The upper threshold needs to be
higher than the value of Address Detection
Lower Threshold (%). If the number of MAC
addresses actually learnt is more than the upper
threshold, the FDBSIZEALM_ELAN alarm is
generated.
Address
Detection
Lower
Threshold (%)
60-100 Sets a value of Address Table Specified
Capacity to the lower threshold for address
detection. The lower threshold needs to be lower
than the value of Address Detection Upper
Threshold (%).
Self-Learning
MAC Address
Default: - The Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN
Service) parameter indicates that the MAC
address is obtained by the board through self-
learning.
Click A.3.7 Self-Learning MAC Address (E-
LAN Service) for more information.

10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing
If the MAC address table fails to learn the MAC address of a packet, the MAC address table
considers this packet as an unknown frame.
Table 10-33 lists the parameters for unknown frame processing.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
513
Table 10-33 Parameters for unknown frame processing
Frame Type Unicast, Multicast Displays the type of the received unknown
frames.
Handing Mode Discard, Broadcast
Default: Broadcast
Selects the mode for handling the unknown
frames. Discard indicates that unknown frames
are directly discarded. Broadcast indicates that
unknown frames are broadcast at the forwarding
port.
Total For example, 2 Displays the count of unknown frames.
Selected For example, 1 Displays the count of selected unknown frames.

10.4.8 Static MAC Address
Static MAC addresses refer to a MAC address table manually set for the service. Entries in the
MAC address table are not automatically aged. Hence, unnecessary entries need to be manually
deleted.
Table 10-34 lists the parameters for a static MAC address. For more information, click A.3.6
Static MAC Address (E-LAN Service).
Table 10-34 Parameters for a static MAC address
VLAN ID For example, 12 Sets the ID of the service.
MAC Address For example, 00-e0-
fc-39-80-34
Sets a static MAC address.
Egress Interface For example, PW-100 Sets the egress interface, which can be a PW,
port or QinQ link.

Maintenance
Domain Name
network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
514
Maintenance
Association
Name
CC Test
Transmit Period
3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms,
1s, 10s, 1m, 10m
Default: 1s
more information.

10.4.10 MEP Point
Maintenance
Domain Name
entire network.
Maintenance
Association
Name
same MD.
N1PETF8
name.
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
information
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
515
for OAM operations.
MEP point.

10.4.11 V-UNI Group
A V-UNI group is a user-side logical interface group, which associates specified interfaces with
specified Ethernet services.
Table 10-37 lists the parameters for a V-UNI group.
Table 10-37 Parameters for a V-UNI group
V-UNI Group
ID
For example, 123 Sets and queries the ID of the V-UNI group.
V-UNI Group
Type
Ingress, Egress Ingress indicates the in-coming network
direction. Egress indicates the out-going
network direction.
CIR (Kbit/s) - Sets the committed information rate (CIR).
PIR (kbit/s) 128 to 10000000 Sets the maximum traffic size for each burst.
The committed burst size should not exceed the
maximum packet length.
CBS (byte) - Sets the maximum rate for the service. The peak
information rate should not be less than the
committed information rate.
PBS (byte) For example, 500000 Sets the maximum traffic size for the excessive
burst. The maximum burst size should not be
less than the extra burst buffer size.
Service ID For example, 12 Sets the ID of the created Ethernet service.
Interface For example, 21-
N1PETF8-1(Port14)
Displays the V-UNI interface selected by the
service in the format of Slot number - Board
name - Port number (VLAN ID).
Selecting
Interface
- Displays the available service IDs and V-UNI
interfaces for the service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
516
Selected
Interface
- Displays the selected service ID and V-UNI
interface for the service.

10.5 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-AGGR service configuration.
10.5.1 E-AGGR Service Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes parameters, such as Service ID, Service Name, and MTU(bytes), for
configuring an E-AGGR service.
Table 10-38 lists the parameters for configuring an E-AGGR service.
Table 10-38 Parameters for configuring an E-AGGR service
service.
Default: 1500
Sets the maximum transport unit (MTU). When
receiving packets of a length more than the
MTU, the port segments the packets and then
transports these segments. If the packets contain
a flag indicating that packet division is not
allowed, the port discards the packet.

10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring E-AGGR services in end-to-end mode.
Table 10-39 Basic parameters for E-AGGR services
enter it.
Specifies the ID of each E-
AGGR service. The service
ID is unique on an NE.
Service Name Manually enter it.
For example, E-Aggr-1
name of each E-AGGR
service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
517
Default: 1500
Specifies the maximum
transport unit (MTU). When
a port receives a packet
longer than the MTU that is
specified for the port, the port
slices the packet and
transports these slices. If the
packet contains a flag
indicating that packet slicing
is not allowed, the port
discards the packet.
Service Tag - Specifies the service tag role.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN
tags of packets are used as
user VLAN tags, and are
processed when the
l Service: C-VLAN/S-
VLAN tags of packets are
used as service VLAN
tags, and are not
processed when the
NOTE
For E-AGGR services, this
parameter cannot be set.

Table 10-40 Parameters in node lists
Location Source, Sink -
Unterminated Yes, No Specifies whether a node is
an unterminated node.
NOTE
If a node is not managed by the
U2000, the node is an
unterminated node.
Node NE-Slot ID-Board-Port Displays and specifies the
source and sink nodes of a
service.
NOTE
For unterminated nodes,
manually enter their IP
addresses.
VLAN ID For example, 20 -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
518
Priority 0 to 7 Specifies a QoS level. When
a network is congested,
packets with higher VLAN
priorities are processed and
packets with lower VLAN
priorities may be discarded.
Value 0 represents the lowest
priority, and value 7
represents the highest
priority.
CE - Specifies a customer edge,
which is directly connected
to a provider edge (PE) to
receive user-side services.
CE Interface - Specifies the CE's port that is
connected to a PE.
CE Interface IP Address - Specifies the IP address of
the CE's port that is
connected to a PE.

Source NE NE Displays and specifies the
source NE of a PW.
Sink NE NE Displays and specifies the
sink NE of a PW.
enter it.
identifier of a PW.
Static, manually specify the
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
egress label.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
519
NOTE
32768.
when entering a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
NOTE
32768.
when leaving a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
Forward Type Static binding Displays and specifies the
tunnel.
NOTE
supports only Static binding.
Reverse Type Static binding Displays and specifies the
tunnel.
NOTE
supports only Static binding.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
520
NOTE
NOTE
supports only MPLS tunnel.

Table 10-42 Parameters in the VLAN forwarding table
Source SAI NE-Slot ID-Board-Port Displays and specifies a
source service interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Displays and specifies a
source VLAN ID.
enter it.
identifier of a PW.
Transit VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Displays and specifies a
transit VLAN ID.
Sink SAI NE-Slot ID-Board-Port Displays and specifies a sink
service interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Displays and specifies a sink
VLAN ID.

Table 10-43 Service bandwidth parameters
Direction Forward, Reverse Specifies the direction of a
service.
Bandwidth Enabled Enabled, Disabled If you set Bandwidth
Enabled to Enabled,
on the specified CIR, CBS,
PIR, and PBS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
521
CIR (kbit/s) 1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
The Committed
discarding policy.
CBS (bytes) 64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
information.
PIR (kbit/s) 64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
allowed by the PIR.
Click A.10.28 Peak
PBS (bytes) 64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
of the PBS.
information.

Setting the UNI parameters for an E-Aggr service focuses on setting of the VLAN information
about UNI ports.
Table 10-44 lists the UNI parameters for an E-Aggr service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
522
ID For example, 1 Displays the ID of the UNI port.
Location Source, Sink Displays the location of the UNI port.
N1PETF8-1 (port-1)
(1-2)
VLAN IDs.
Default
Forwarding
Priority
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, CS7,
NONE
Default: BE
more information.
Default Packet
Relabeling
Color
Red, Yellow, Green,
None
Default: Green

NNI parameters include the parameters that are used for a PW or a port.
PW
ID For example, 1 Displays the sequence of the PWs. This
parameter is required for the E-AGGR service.
Location Source, Sink Specifies the location of the node on the PW.
This parameter is required for the E-AGGR
service.
service.
PW Status Enable, Disable Specifies or displays the enabling status of the
PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
523
PW Signaling
Type
allocated. The configuration at the two ends of
a PW should be consistent.
Tagged Mode
PWs of different types process the borne
services differently. For example, the PW in the
Ethernet tagged mode attaches the tag on the
services on this PW.
PW
Encapsulation
Type
PW Ingress
Label
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
l OptiX OSN 3500:
16 to 32768.
Specifies this parameter when the PW
Signaling Type is set to Static.
PW Egress
Label
according to the
product.
l OptiX OSN 1500:
Only 2048
consecutive values
are allowed in the
value range from 16
to 32768.
l OptiX OSN 3500:
16 to 32768.
Specifies this parameter when the PW
Signaling Type is set to Static.
10.70.71.123
PW.
For example, 55
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
524
Control Word Preferred Use, No Use
No Use, Used First
Default: -
information.
Control Channel
Type
None, CW
Default: CW
packets.
information.
VCCV
Verification
Mode
Local Operating
Status
abnormally.
Remote
Operating Status
abnormally.
Competitive
Working Status
more information.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN equipment, Static can be set to
only Up.
ETH request VLAN.
information.
TPID 0x88A8 Displays the protocol identification.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
525
Port
Table 10-46 Parameters for an NNI port
ID For example, 1 Displays the sequence of the PWs. This
parameter is required for the E-AGGR service.
service.
Location Source, Sink Specifies the location of the port involved in the
service. This parameter is required for the E-
AGGR service.
service.
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
service.

10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding Table Item
The VLAN forwarding table item is used for interconnection between the service traffic of source
interface and that of the sink interface, and for VLAN switching.
Table 10-47 lists the parameters for VLAN forwarding table items.
Table 10-47 Parameters for VLAN forwarding table items
Source Interface
Type
V-UNI, V-NNI
Default: -
Set the Source Interface Type parameter to set
the source interface type of the VLAN switching
table for the E-AGGR service. This parameter
can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI.
Click A.3.13 Source Interface Type(E-AGGR
Source Interface For example, [Port]3-
PEG16-1(Port-1)
Selects and queries the source interface. If
Source Interface Type is set to V-NNI, the sink
interface can be a port or PW.
Source VLAN
ID
1-4094 Sets and queries the source VLAN ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
526
Sink Interface
Type
V-UNI, V-NNI
Default: -
Set the Sink Interface Type parameter to set the
sink interface type of the VLAN switching table
for the E-AGGR service. This parameter can be
set to V-UNI or V-NNI.
Click A.3.14 Sink Interface Type(E-AGGR
Sink Interface For example, 3-
PEG16-1(Port-1)
Selects and queries the sink interface. If Sink
Interface Type is set to V-NNI, the sink
interface can be a port or PW.
Sink VLAN ID 1-4094 Sets and queries the sink VLAN ID.

Maintenance
Domain Name
network.
Maintenance
Association
Name
CC Test
Transmit Period
3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms,
1s, 10s, 1m, 10m
Default: 1s
more information.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
527
10.5.7 MEP Point
Maintenance
Domain Name
entire network.
Maintenance
Association
Name
same MD.
N1PETF8
name.
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
information
N1PETF8-1(Port-1)
for OAM operations.
MEP point.

10.6 Parameter Description: CES Port
Before configuring a CES service, you must configure the CES port.
10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port
Configuring a channelized STM-1 port includes setting of the parameters such as the
encapsulation type of the port, the maximum data packet size, and the enabling status of the
laser.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
528
Table 10-50 Parameters for the attributes of an SDH port
Port For example, 21-CQ1-1
(PORT-1)
Name For example, port1 Specifies the name of the port
specified by the user.
Port Mode Layer 1 Displays the working mode
of the CES port Layer 1
indicates the channelized
STM port is currently
available.
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. In
this case, the OptiX OSN
equipment can transmit
channelized STM-1 services.
Encapsulation Type Null Indicates the link layer
encapsulation type of the
port. It specifies the link layer
encapsulation type that can
be identified and processed
by the port.
When Encapsulation Type
is set to Null, no link layer
encapsulation is available or
the link layer encapsulation is
not performed.
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. For
this reason, Encapsulation
Type can only be set to Null
and cannot be changed.
Channelize No Displays whether the port is a
channelized port.
Channelize refers to the use
of the low-speed tributary
signals in the STM-N service.
One fiber is used to transmit
multiple channels of data that
are separated from each
other. Each channel of data
exclusively occupies the
bandwidth, in addition to the
starting point, terminating
point, and monitoring policy.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
529
Max Data Packet Size (byte) - Specifies the maximum size
of the packets that can be
received by the port.
This parameter is currently
inapplicable to the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Laser Interface Enabling
Status
On, Off
Default: On
Specifies the enabling status
of the laser on the port.
Laser Transmission Distance
(m)
- Displays the transmission
distance of the laser on the
port.
OSN equipment.
Scrambling Capability - Suppresses multiple 0s and
1s in the data when the
Scrambling Capability is
enabled.
OSN equipment.
CRC Check Length - Specifies the length of the
CRC field in the mapping
protocol.
OSN equipment.
Clock Mode - The Clock Mode parameter
specifies the re-timing mode
of a port.
NOTE
inapplicable to an SDH port.
Loopback Mode Non-loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-loopback
Specifies the loopback status
of the port.
The loopback mode is used
for locating a fault. Outloop
is used for testing whether the
port module and external
fiber or cable of a board are
proper. Inloop is used for
testing whether the cross-
connect unit and service path
of the equipment are proper.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
530
CES Encapsulation Clock
Mode
Null, Line Clock Mode,
System Clock Mode
Default: Null
Specifies the encapsulation
mode of the clock signal on a
UNI port on the master side
of the CES service.
l Null: The clock signal is
not encapsulated in the
service packets.
l Line Clock Mode: The
clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
l System Clock Mode:
The system frequency
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.
Poke
- Specifies the enabling status
of the CES encapsulation
clock poke.
OSN equipment.

Table 10-51 Parameters for an associated service
Service Type For example, CES service Displays the type of the
service associated with the
port.
Service ID For example, 20 Displays the ID of the service
associated with the port.
When you select the value of
the service ID, the active
window changes to the
service management dialog
box of the corresponding
service type.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
531
Service Name For example, CES Displays the name of the
port.
Used Resource For example, 64K
Timeslot1-31
Displays the resource used by
the service associated with
the port.

10.6.2 E1 Port
In addition to the general attributes of an E1 port, you need to set the frame format based on the
advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format specified for the E1 port is the same as the
service encapsulation format.
Table 10-52 Parameters for the general attributes of a PDH port
Port Slot ID-Board name-Port
(Port No.)
Name For example, Port 1 Enters the port name
specified by the user.
Port Mode Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3
NOTE
Port Mode can be set to only
Layer 1.
Specifies the working mode
of the PDH port.
When this parameter is set to
Layer 1, the port can transmit
TDM signals.
Encapsulation Type Null Specifies Encapsulation
Type.
When Port Mode is set to
Layer 1, Encapsulation
Type is defaulted to Null and
cannot be changed.
Max Data Packet Size (byte) - Specifies the maximum size
of the packets.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable
to an E1 port in the CES service.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
532
Table 10-53 Parameters for the advanced attributes of a PDH port
Port Slot ID-Board name-Port
(Port No.)
Frame Format Unframe, Double Frame,
CRC-4 Multiframe
Specifies the frame format.
When the E1 port transmits
CES services in CESoPSN
mode, this parameter can be
set to Double Frame or
CRC-4 Multiframe. It is
recommended that you set
this parameter to CRC-4
Multiframe. When the CES
services are in SAToP mode,
this parameter needs to be set
to Unframe.
Line Encoding Format HDB3 Displays the line encoding
format.
The HDB3 codes are
transmitted on the E1 port.
Clock Mode Master Mode, Slave Mode,
Line Clock Mode
Default: Master Mode
The Clock Mode parameter
specifies the re-timing mode
of a port.
Click A.4.4 Clock Mode for
more information.
Loopback Mode Non-loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Specifies the loopback status
of the port.
Impedance 75 ohm, 120 ohm
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 uses the N1MD75
board, Impedance is set to 75
ohm and cannot be changed.
When the N1MD12 board is
used, Impedance is set to 120
ohm and cannot be changed.
Displays the impedance of
the port.
Frame Mode - Specifies the value of the
frame mode.
The frame modes of the local
port and opposite port need to
be consistent.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
533
Mode
Null, Line Clock Mode,
System Clock Mode
Default: Null
Queries the encapsulation
mode of the clock signal on a
UNI port on the master side
of the CES service.
l Null: The clock signal is
not encapsulated in the
service packets.
l Line Clock Mode: The
clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
l System Clock Mode:
The system frequency
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.
Poke
- Queries the encapsulation
time stamp in the CES
service.
NOTE
Idle Timeslot Recovery
Value
- Queries the recovery value of
an idle timeslot in the CES
service.
NOTE

Service Type For example, CES service Displays the type of the
port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
534
Service ID For example, 20 Displays the ID of the service
When you select the value of
the service ID, the active
window changes to the
service management dialog
box of the corresponding
service type.
Service Name For example, CES Displays the name of the
port.
Used Resource For example, 64K
Timeslot1-31
Displays the resource used by
the service associated with
the port.

10.7 Parameter Description: CES Services
This section describes parameters for CES services.
10.7.1 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-UNI)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring and querying the attributes of CES services.
Table 10-55 Parameters for configuring and querying the attributes of CES services
Service ID (e.g.1,3-6) For example, 1 Displays the ID of the service.
Service Name For example, CES-1 Displays the name of the CES
service.
Level E1 Displays the level of the received
CES service.
Mode UNI-UNI Displays the mode of the CES
service.
UNI-UNI indicates the CES service
from the user side to the user side.
Source Board Slot-Board Name-Port
(Port No.)
For example, 33-
CQ1-1(PORT-1)
Specifies the source board of the
CES service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
535
Source High Channel For example, VC4-1 Specifies the source higher order
path.
For a line port, you need to set the
number of the VC-4 path.
Source Low Channel (e.g.
1,3-6)
For example, 1 Specifies the source lower order
path.
For an E1 port, you need to specify
the number of the E1 port; for a line
port, you need to set the number of
the VC-12 path.
Source 64K Timeslot (e.g.
1,3-6)
For example, 1 to 31 Specifies the source 64 kbit/s
timeslot for compression.
NOTE
You must specify two or more 64 kbit/s
timeslots.
Sink Board Slot-Board Name-Port
(Port No.)
For example, 33-
CQ1-2(PORT-2)
Specifies the sink board of the CES
service.
Sink High Channel For example, VC4-1 Specifies the sink higher order path.
Sink Low Channel (e.g.
1,3-6)
For example, 1 Specifies the sink lower order path.
the VC-12 path.
Sink 64K Timeslot (e.g.
1,3-6)
NOTE
timeslots.

10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-NNI)
This topic describes the parameters related to CES services that can be set and queried.
Table 10-56 Parameters for the basic information of CES service management
Service ID (e.g.1,3-6) For example, 1 Displays the ID of the service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
536
Service Name For example, CES-1 Displays the name of the CES
service.
Level E1 Displays the level of the received
CES service.
Mode UNI-NNI Displays the mode of the CES
service.
UNI-NNI indicates the CES service
from the user side to the network
side.
Source Board Slot-Board Name-Port
(Port No.)
For example, 33-
CQ1-1(PORT-1)
CES service.
Source High Channel For example, VC4-1 Specifies the source higher order
path.
Source Low Channel (e.g.
1,3-6)
For example, 1 Specifies the source lower order
path.
the VC-12 path.
Source 64K Timeslot (e.g.
1,3-6)
NOTE
timeslots.
Priority - Specifies the priority of the UNI.
The priority of the UNI can be set to
CS6, CS7, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
or BE.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to CES
services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
537
PW Type CESoPSN, SAToP Specifies the type of the PW.
l CESoPSN: Indicates structure-
aware TDM circuit emulation
service over packet switched
network. Timeslot compression
can be set.
l SAToP: Indicates structure-
agnostic TDM over packet.
Timeslot compression cannot be
set.
Protection Mode Unprotected, PW APS,
Slave Protection Pair
Specifies the protection mode of the
PW.
If the working and protection PWs of
multiple PW APS salve protection
pairs respectively have the same
source and sink with the working and
protection PWs of the existing PW
APS protection group. The slave
protection pairs can be bound with
the protection group to share the
OAM resources and achieve
synchronous detection/switching.

Table 10-57 General attributes of the PW
PW ID For example, 1 Specifies the ID of the PW.
PW Signaling Type Static The PW Signaling Type parameter
specifies the allocation mode
(automatic or manual) of ingress and
egress nodes of a PW.
Click PW Signaling Type for more
information.
Tagged Mode,
CESoPSN, SAToP
Displays the type of the PW.
l When Service Type is set to
Ethernet Service, PW Type can
be set to only Ethernet or
Ethernet Tagged Mode.
l When Service Type is set to CES
Service, PW Type can be set to
only CESoPSN or SAToP.
PW Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of the PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
538
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS Displays the encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/Source
Port
For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from
16 to 32768, in step of
2048.
For the OptiX OSN
1500, the maximum
value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500,
the maximum value is
32768.
This parameter needs to be set when
PW Signaling Type is set to Static.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port For example, 18
NOTE
The value ranges from
16 to 32768, in step of
2048.
For the OptiX OSN
1500, the maximum
value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500,
the maximum value is
32768.
This parameter needs to be set when
PW Signaling Type is set to Static.
Tunnel Section Mode Manually Specifies the tunnel that carries the
PW.
Tunnel Type MPLS Displays the type of the tunnel that
carries the PW.
Tunnel No. For example, 43 A created tunnel needs to be selected.
If no tunnel is available, no PW can
be created.
Peer LSR ID For example,
10.70.71.123
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the
remote end.

10.7.3 QoS (UNI-NNI)
This topic describes the QoS associated parameters used for configuring and querying CES
services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
539
Table 10-58 QoS parameters for CES service management
Attribute EXP Displays the QoS attribute.
EXP: The value can be set only for
the ingress node. The value 7
indicates the highest priority. EXP
can be set according to the planning
document.
Working PW Ingress Value 0-7, None
Default: None
Specifies the value of the working
PW ingress.
Working PW Egress Value - Specifies the value of the working
PW egress.
Protection PW Ingress
Value
0-7, None
Default: None
Specifies the value of the protection
PW ingress.
NOTE
When Protection Type is set to No
Protection, this parameter cannot be set.
Protection PW Egress
Value
- Specifies the value of the protection
PW egress.
NOTE
When Protection Type is set to No
Protection, this parameter cannot be set.

10.7.4 Advanced Attributes (UNI-NNI)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring and querying the advanced attributes of CES
services.
Table 10-59 Parameters for configuring and querying the advanced attributes of CES services
RTP Header Disable, Enable the
Huawei RTP, Enable a
Standard RTP
Default: Disable
The RTP Header parameter
specifies whether the RTP header
function is enabled.
Click A.4.2 RTP Headerfor more
information.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time (us)
125-64000
Default: 8000
The Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time (us) parameter
specifies the size of the jitter buffer.
Click A.4.3 Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time (us) for more
information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
540
Packet Loading Time (us) 125-5000
Default: 1000
The Packet Loading Time (us)
parameter specifies the packet
loading duration.
Click A.4.1 Packet Loading Time
(us) for more information.
Ingress Clock Mode - Specifies the clock mode for the
ingress PW of the CES service.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to PWs.
Egress Clock Mode - Specifies the clock mode for the
egress PW of the CES service.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to PWs.
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies whether the alarm
information of the CES service can
be transparently transmitted.
If this function is enabled, the fault
on the AC side of the CES service is
notified to the remote end. On
receiving the fault notification from
the network side or the remote end,
the local NE inserts the
corresponding alarm on the AC side.
Threshold of Entering R bit
Inserting Status
1 to 65535
Default: 100
Specifies the threshold of entering R
bit inserting status.
If the alarm information of the CES
service is transparently transmitted
and the number of consecutive lost
packets crosses the threshold, the
logic inserts the R bit to the network
side and reports the corresponding
alarm.
Threshold of Exiting R bit
Inserting Status
1 to 65535
Default: 5
Specifies the threshold of exiting R
bit inserting status.
If the number of consecutive lost
packets crosses the threshold, the
logic quits inserting the R bit to the
network side and reporting the
corresponding alarm.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
541
Sequence Number Mode Standard Mode,
Huawei Mode
Specifies the sequence number
mode.
l The standard mode is applicable
to the network consisting of
devices from Huawei and other
manufacturers.
l The Huawei mode is applicable to
the network consisting of only
Huawei devices.

Table 10-60 Parameters for the protection group in slave protection pair mode
Protection Mode Slave Protection Pair Displays Protection Mode as Slave
Protection Pair.
Protection Group ID For example, 1 Specifies the ID of the protection
group by selecting a resource. The
protection group ID needs to be
manually specified.
Working PW ID For example, 10 Displays the ID of the working PW.
After Protection Group ID is set, the
ID of the working PW is
automatically assigned here.
Protection PW ID For example, 20 Displays the ID of the protection PW.
After Protection Group ID is set, the
ID of the protection PW is
automatically assigned here.

Table 10-61 Parameters for the protection group in PW APS mode
Protection Type PW APS Displays Protection Type as PW
APS.
Protection Group ID For example, 1 Specifies the ID of the protection
group by selecting a resource. The
protection group ID needs to be
manually specified.
Enabling Status Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies whether the protection
group is enabled or disabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
542
Protection Mode 1+1, 1:1
Default: 1+1
The Protection Mode parameter
specifies the protection type of a PW
APS protection group.
Click A.9.1 Protection Mode for
more information.
Working PW ID - Displays the ID of the working PW.
This parameter cannot be set if
Protection Type is set to PW APS.
Protection PW ID - Displays the ID of the protection PW.
This parameter cannot be set if
Protection Type is set to PW APS.
Switchover Mode Single-ended
switching, Dual-ended
switching
Displays the switching status of a
protection group.
Restoration Mode Non-Revertive,
Revertive
Displays the restoration mode of the
PW APS protection group.
Switchover WTR Time
(mins)
1 to 12
Default: 1
Specifies the switchover restoration
time.
Switchover Delay Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
Default: 0
Specifies the switchover delay time.

Table 10-62 Parameters for PW OAM in PW APS mode
OAM Status Disabled, Enabled Specifies the status of PW OAM.
l Enabled: The PW OAM can be
performed.
l Disabled: The PW OAM cannot
be performed.
Detection Mode Auto-Sending, Manual
Default: Auto-Sending
Displays or specifies the detection
mode. This parameter can be set only
for the tunnel in Egress direction.
l Manual: The connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent at the
interval specified by the user.
l Auto-Sending: The connectivity
check (CC) packets are sent at the
interval of packet receiving.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
543
Detection Packet Type CV, FFD
Default: CV
Specifies the type of the detection
packet.
l CV: The detection packets are
sent at a fixed interval.
l FFD: The detection packets are
sent at the interval specified by
the user.
Detection Packet Period
(ms)
3.3, 10, 20, 50, 100,
200, 500
Displays or specifies the detection
packet period.
If Detection Packet Type is FFD,
this parameter can be set; if
Detection Packet Type is CV, the
value is always 1000.
LSR ID to Be Received For example,
10.70.73.156
Specifies the LSR ID to be received.
Transmitted PW ID For example, 1 Specifies the transmitted PW ID.

10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring CES services in end-to-end mode.
Table 10-63 Parameters for configuring PWE3 services
Service Template
NOTE
This parameter is optional and
helps users quickly configure
various services. If the
parameter value is not
specified, subsequent service
configuration is not affected.
DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_P
TN,
DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_P
TN
NOTE
does not support the following
service templates:
l DEFAULT_PWE3_ATM_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_CES_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_ETH_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_IWF_
ROUTER
l DEFAULT_PWE3_IP_R
OUTER
PWE3 service template.
Service Type varies with
Service Template.
Service Template improves
service configuration
efficiency.
NOTE
After you select a service
template, a dialog box is
displayed, saying After the
template is changed, the
parameters not contained in
the new template may be lost.
Are you sure to continue? You
can also select Apply the
template data to the
configured Objects.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
544
Service Type ETH, CES
NOTE
Specifies the required service
type based on service
configuration. When the
equipment is configured with
PWE3 Ethernet services,
Service Type is set to ETH.
When the equipment is
configured with PWE3 CES
services, Service Type is set to
CES.
type of each PWE3 service.
enter it.
Specifies the ID of each
PWE3 service. The service
ID is unique on the entire
network.
Service Name For example, E-Line-1
NOTE
name of each PWE3 service.
Protection Type Protection-Free Specifies the protection type
for the service.
If Protection Type is PW
Redundancy, you need to
select Single Source and
Dual Sink from Node List. If
Protection Type is PW
APS, you need to select Dual
Source and Single Sink
from Node List. If you select
Single Source and Dual
Sink, you need to configure
one source node and two sink
nodes. If you select Dual
Source and Single Sink, you
need to configure two source
nodes and one sink node. One
PW functions as the working
path and the other PW
functions as the protection
path.
Description For example, E-Line-1
NOTE
service description.
Customer - Displays and specifies the
customer to which a service
belongs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
545
Remarks - Displays and specifies the
service remarks.

role of a PW.
source NE of a PW.
sink NE of a PW.
enter it.
For example, 35
identifier of a PW.
Signaling Type to
Dynamic, the system
egress label.
NOTE
label.
when entering a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Forward Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
546
NOTE
label.
when leaving a PW.
Type to Dynamic,
Reverse Label is
Label can be
manually specified.
tunnel.
NOTE
tunnel.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE

10.8 Parameter Description: ATM/IMA Services
This section describes parameters for ATM/IMA services.
10.8.1 Creating an ATM Service
This section describes the parameters for creating an ATM service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
547
Table 10-65 lists the parameters for creating an ATM service.
Table 10-65 Parameters for creating an ATM service
Service ID 1 to 4294967295
Default: none
Specifies the service ID.
Set this parameter according to
the planning information.
Service Name - Specifies the service name.
Service Type UNIs-NNI, UNI-UNI
Default: UNIs-NNI
Specifies the type of the ATM
service.
l UNIs-NNI: This value
applies to ATM PWE3
services. The attributes in
Connection, PW, and CoS
Mapping need to be
configured.
l UNI-UNI: This value applies
to common ATM services.
Only the attributes in
Connection need to be
configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
548
Connection Type PVP, PVC, Port Transparent
l If Service Type is UNIs-
NNI, the default value is
PVC.
l If Service Type is UNI-UNI,
the default value is PVP.
Specifies the connection type of
the ATM service.
l PVP: Only the VPIs of the
source and sink are
exchanged.
l PVC: The VPIs and VCIs of
the source and sink are
exchanged.
For ATM PWE3 services (UNIs-
NNI):
l PVP: This value applies to
the N-to-1/1-to-1 VPC
encapsulation mode.
l PVC: This value applies to
the N-to-1/1-to-1 VCC
encapsulation mode.
Port Transparent: This value
applies if all services regardless
of their VPIs and VCIs are
transparently transmitted.
For details, see A.13.9
Connection Type(Per-NE
ATM Service Management).
Protection Type Unprotected, PW APS, Slave
Protection Pair
Default: Unprotected
Specifies the protection type of
the PW.
This parameter is available only
when Service Type is UNIs-
NNI.

10.8.2 Connection
This section describes the parameters for creating a connection.
Table 10-66 lists the parameters for creating a connection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
549
Table 10-66 Parameters for creating a connection
Connection Name A character string of less than 64
characters, which may contain
letters, numbers, Chinese
characters, or special symbols.
Example: 28-N1D12E
Specifies a name for an ATM
connection.
Source Board Slot ID-board name
Example: 28-N1D12E
ATM service.
Source Port Port ID(Port-port ID)
Example: 1(Trunk-1)
Specifies the source port of the
ATM service.
Source VPI
(example:35,36-39)
ATM UNI cell: 0 to 255
NNI ATM cell: 0 to 4095
Default: none
Specifies the VPI of the source
port of the ATM service.
Source VCI
(example:35,36-39)
32 to 65535
Default: none
Specifies the VCI of the source
port of the ATM service.
This parameter does not need to
be set if Connection Type is
PVP.
PW ID 1 to 4294967295
Default: none
Specifies the ID of the PW that
carries ATM services.
Sink Board Slot ID-board name
Example: 28-N1D12E
Specifies the sink board of the
ATM service.
l This parameter does not need
to be set if Service Type is
UNIs-NNI.
l This parameter needs to be set
if Service Type is UNI-UNI.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
550
Sink Port Port ID(port-port ID)
Example: 1(Trunk-1)
Specifies the sink port of the
ATM service.
l This parameter does not need
to be set if Service Type is
UNIs-NNI.
l This parameter needs to be set
if Service Type is UNI-UNI
and its value must be different
from that of the source port.
Sink VPI(example:
35,36-39)
UNI ATM cell: 0 to 255
NNI ATM cell: 0 to 4095
Default: none
Specifies the VPI of the sink port
of the ATM service.
Sink VCI(example:
35,36-39)
32 to 65535
Default: none
Specifies the VCI of the sink port
of the ATM service.
This parameter does not need to
be set if Connection Type is
PVP.
Uplink Policy - Specifies the QoS policy of the
uplink ATM connection (from
the source direction to the sink
direction).
For details, see A.13.10 Uplink
Policy(Per-NE Configuration
for ATM Connections).
Downlink Policy - Specifies the QoS policy of the
downlink ATM connection
(from the sink direction to the
source direction).
Downlink Policy(Per-NE
Configuration for ATM
Connections).

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
551
10.8.3 CoS Mapping
This section describes the parameters for CoS mapping.
Table 10-67 lists the parameters for CoS mapping.
Table 10-67 Parameters for CoS mapping
PW ID - Displays the ID of the PW that
carries services.
CoS Mapping Mapping Relation ID(Mapping
Relation Name)
Default: 1(DefaultAtmCosMap)
Specifies the policy for mapping
different ATM service classes to
CoS priorities. By setting this
parameter, different quality
levels are provided for different
ATM services.
For details, see A.13.12 CoS
Mapping(Per-NE
Configuration for CoS
Mapping).

10.8.4 Configuring an ATM Service Class Mapping Table
This section describes the parameters for configuring an ATM service class mapping table.
Table 10-68 lists the parameters for configuring an ATM service class mapping table.
Table 10-68 Parameters for configuring an ATM service class mapping table
Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8
Default: none
Specifies the ID of the ATM
service class mapping table.
NOTE
1 is the default ID for the ATM
Mapping Relation
Name
A character string of less than 32
characters, which may contain
letters, numbers, and underlines.
For example: mapping_1
Specifies the name of ATM
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
552
UBR BE, AF11, AF12, AF13, AF21,
AF22, AF23, AF31, AF32,
AF33, AF41, AF42, AF43, EF,
CS6, CS7
Default:
UBR: BE
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
Displays or specifies the PHBs
that correspond to different ATM
service categories.
l Eight PHB service classes are
available: BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7
for eight queues. Different
QoS policies are provided for
the queues of different PHBs.
l CS6 to CS7: highest service
classes, mainly applicable to
l EF: fast forwarding,
applicable to services of low
transmission delays and low
packet loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
services that require an
assured transmission rate
rather than delay or jitter
limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes three
subclasses: AF11, AF12, and
AF13. Only one of these
subclasses can take effect for
one queue. It is the same case
with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to
services that do not require
special processing.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
PORT-TRANS

10.8.5 ATM Policies
This section describes the parameters for configuring ATM policies.
Table 10-69 lists the parameters for configuring ATM policies.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
553
Table 10-69 Parameters for configuring ATM policies
Policy ID 1 to 256
Default: 1
Specifies the policy ID of the
ATM service.
Assign automatically Selected, Not selected
Default: Not selected
Specifies whether the ID is
automatically assigned.
Policy Name Synchronous Signal, Signaling,
Voice, Data, Video, or an entered
character string
Default: Synchronous Signal
Specifies the policy name of the
ATM service. The maximum
length of the value is 64 bytes.
NOTE
You can select one of the five ATM
service policy names from the drop-
down list or enter the policy name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
554
Service Type UBR, CBR, RT-VBR, NRT-
VBR, UBR+
Default: UBR
Specifies the type of the ATM
service.
l The UBR service is
characterized by non-real-
time applications and many
bursts. The UBR service does
not specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To be
specific, the UBR service
only requires that the network
side provides the service with
the best effort. The network
side does not provide any
assured QoS for the UBR
service. In the case of network
congestion, the UBR cells are
discarded first.
l The CBR service requires
tightly constrained delay
variation and requires that
data be transmitted at a
constant rate. In addition, the
CBR service requests a static
amount of bandwidth and the
highest priority. The CBR
service is characterized by
stable traffic and few bursts.
l The RT-VBR service
requires tightly constrained
delay and delay variation.
Compared with the CBR
service, the RT-VBR service
allows sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies with
time. Equivalently, the
sources can be described as
bursty. In addition, the RT-
VBR service does not require
a static amount of bandwidth.
l Compared with the RT-
VBR service, the NRT-VBR
service does not require
tightly constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-time
applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the UBR
service and is intended for
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
555
applications that require
assured minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by the
minimum cell rate (MCR)
parameter. The other
characteristics of the UBR+
service are the same as the
corresponding characteristics
of the UBR service.
Traffic Service The value range and default value
of Traffic Service vary with
Service Type.
For details, see A.13.13 Traffic
Service(ATM Policy).
The Traffic Service parameter
specifies the sub-type of a service
type. That is, multiple traffic
types are available for each type
of service. A traffic type specifies
the traffic parameters that can be
set, the methods of handling cells
whose cell loss priority (CLP)
values are 0 and 1, and the
supported functions (such as cell
labeling).
For details, see A.13.13 Traffic
Service(ATM Policy).
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90-149078
Default: None.
Specifies the peak cell rate of a
service whose CLP in the ATM
cell header is 1 or 0.
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90-149078
Default: None.
Specifies the sustainable cell rate
of a service whose CLP in the
ATM cell header is 1 or 0.
Clp01Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
556
Clp0Pcr(cell/s) 90-149078
Default: None.
Specifies the peak cell rate of a
service whose CLP in the ATM
cell header is 0.
For details, see A.13.16 Clp0Pcr
(cell/s)(ATM Policy).
Clp0Scr(cell/s) 90-149078
Default: None.
Specifies the sustainable cell rate
of a service whose CLP in the
ATM cell header is 0.
For details, see A.13.17 Clp0Scr
(cell/s)(ATM Policy).
Clp01Mcr(cell/s) 566-32664
Default: None.
Specifies the minimum
transmission rate of cells whose
CLP in the ATM cell header is 1
or 0.
Clp01Mcr(cell/s)(ATM
Policy).
Max.Cell Burst Size
(cell)
2-200000
Default: None.
Specifies the maximum number
of cells that are continuously
transmitted on ATM path of a
VBR service at a rate of r (SCR
< r <PCR).
Max.Cell Burst Size(cell)
(ATM Policy).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
557
Cell Delay Variation
Tolerance(0.1us)
7 to 13300000
Default: None.
Specifies the burst cell tolerance
of an ATM connection.
l The greater the parameter
value, the better performance
the service for burst cells. If
conditions are allowed, you
can set CDVT to a large value
to minimize packet loss.
l If UPC/NPC is enabled, The
CDVT recommended that
this parameter takes
maximum value.
For details, see A.13.20 Cell
Delay Variation Tolerance
(0.1us)(ATM Policy).
Discard Traffic
Frame
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies the frame discarding
mark in ATM policies. This
parameter is effective to AAL5
traffic.
It is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value.
UPC/NPC Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The UPC/NPC parameter
specifies the user-network
interface (UNI) traffic
parameters based on usage
parameter control (UPC) and
network parameter control
(NPC).
l Disabled: The configured
ATM QoS parameters do not
take effect.
l Enabled: The configured
ATM QoS parameters take
effect.
l It is recommended that this
parameter takes Enabled.
NOTE
On the TNN1AFO1 board, UPC/
NPC cannot be enabled on the
downlink ATM connection (from
the sink to the source).
For details, see A.13.21 UPC/
NPC(ATM Policy).

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
558
10.8.6 SDH Interface
This section describes parameters for a SDH interface.
Table 10-70 Descriptions of the parameters of the general attributes of an SDH port
Port Slot ID-board name-port
ID
Example: 36-N1AFO1-1
(PORT-1)
Name -
Example: Port1
Displays or specifies the name of the port.
Set this parameter according to the planning
information.
Port Mode Layer 2 Specifies the mode of the SDH port. The fixed
value is Layer 2.
Layer 2 indicates the current ATM STM port.
Encapsulatio
n Type
ATM Indicates the link layer encapsulation type of the
port. It specifies the link layer encapsulation type
that can be identified and processed by the port.
The fixed value is ATM.
ATM: The ATM encapsulation is identified and
processed.
Channelize No Specifies whether the port is channelized. The
fixed value is No.
No: The port is not channelized.
Max Data
Packet Size
(bytes)
- Specifies the maximum packet length. The fixed
value is -.
This parameter does not need to be set if Port
Mode is Layer 2.
Laser
Interface
Status
On, Off
Default: On
Enables or disables the laser.
The default value is recommended.

Table 10-71 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface Layer 2 Attributes
ID
(PORT-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
559
Port Type UNI, NNI
Default: UNI
Specifies the type of the ATM port.
l UNI: the port connecting user-side devices.
For example, the UNI port applies to the user-
side port on the common ATM network or to
the user-side port of the PE on the PSN
network that transmits ATM PWE3 services.
l NNI: the port connecting network-side
devices. For example, the NNI port applies to
the network-side port on the common ATM
network.
information.
ATM Cell
Payload
Scrambling
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The ATM Cell Payload Scrambling (ATM
Interface Management) parameter specifies
whether to scramble the payload of cells on
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) links.
l ITU-T G.804 stipulates that the payload (48
bytes) of ATM cells must be scrambled
before it is mapped into E1 signals.
Therefore, it is recommended that you set
ATM Cell Payload Scrambling to Enabled
for both end of an ATM link.
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling must
assume the same value on the two ends of an
ATM link. Otherwise, packet loss will occur.
For details, see A.12.1 ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling(ATM Interface Management).
Min. VPI UNI port: 0-255; NNI
port: 0-4095
Default: 0
The Min.VPI parameter specifies the minimum
virtual path identifier (VPI) value of the
permanent virtual paths (PVPs) and permanent
virtual channels (PVCs) that are applicable to a
selected board.
For details, see A.12.2 Min.VPI(ATM
Interface Management).
Max. VPI UNI port: 0-255; NNI
port: 0-4095
Default: 255
The Max. VPI parameter specifies the maximum
virtual path identifier (VPI) value of the
permanent virtual paths (PVPs) and permanent
virtual channels (PVCs) that are applicable to a
selected board.
Min. VCI 0-65535
Default: 65535
The Min.VCI parameter specifies the minimum
virtual channel identifier (VCI) value for
permanent virtual channels (PVCs) that are
applicable to a selected board.
For details, see A.12.3 Min.VCI(ATM
Interface Management).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
560
Max. VCI 0-65535
Default: 65535
The Max VCI parameter specifies the maximum
virtual channel identifier (VCI) value for
permanent virtual channels (PVCs) that are
applicable to a selected board.
VCC-
Supported
VPI Count
0-256, 65535
Default: 65535
The VCC-Supported VPI Count parameter
specifies the number of virtual path identifiers
(VPIs) available for a permanent virtual channel
(PVC) connection at a port. That is, only the
specified number of VPIs can be adopted for
establishment of a PVC connection regardless of
the specified VPI value. In other circumstances,
the specified number of VPIs can be adopted for
establishment of a permanent virtual path (PVP)
connection.
For details, see A.12.4 VCC-Supported VPI
Count(ATM Interface Management).

Table 10-72 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of the SDH interface
ID
(PORT-1)
Laser
Transmissio
n Distance
(m)
- Display the transmission distance of the laser.
The fixed value is -.
The Hybrid MSTP does not support this
parameter.
Scrambling
Capability
- Suppresses multiple 0s and 1s in the data when
the Scrambling Capability is enabled. The fixed
value is -.
parameter.
CRC Check
Length
- Specifies the length of the CRC field in the
mapping protocol. The fixed value is -.
parameter.
Clock Mode - Specifies the re-timing mode of a port. The fixed
value is -.
parameter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
561
Loopback
Mode
Non-loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-loopback
Specifies the loopback status of the port.
The loopback mode is used for locating a fault.
Outloop is used for testing whether the port
module and external fiber or cable of a board are
proper. Inloop is used for testing whether the
cross-connect unit and service path of the
equipment are proper.
information.

10.8.7 IMA Group Management
This section describes the parameters for configuring the management of an IMA group.
Table 10-73 and Table 10-74 list the parameters for configuring the management of an IMA
group.
Table 10-73 Parameters for configuring the management of an IMA group
VCTRUNK Slot ID-board name-
Trunk ID (Trunk-Trunk
ID)
For example: 29-
N1D12E-1(Trunk-1)
Specifies the ATM TRUNK that is the logical
port on the board for carrying ATM services.
IMA
Protocol
Enable
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies the IMA protocol enable status.
l Set IMA Protocol Enable Status to
Enabled if the links bound with the ATM
TRUNK require the IMA protocol;
otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
l After IMA Protocol Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the E1 links or Fractional E1
timeslots bound in the ATM TRUNK start
running the IMA protocol.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
562
Minimum
Number of
Active
Transmitting
Links
1-16
Default: 1
The Minimum Number of Active
Transmitting Links parameter specifies the
lower threshold of active links in the transmit
direction in an inverse multiplexing for ATM
(IMA) group to maintain proper operation of the
IMA group.
l The links of the IMA group can carry services
only when the number of activated links in
the transmit/receive direction is not smaller
than the value of Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting Links/Minimum
Number of Active Receiving Links.
l The values of Minimum Number of Active
Transmitting Links and Minimum
Number of Active Receiving Links must be
the same because the N1D12E/N1D75E
supports Symmetrical Mode and
Symmetrical Operation only. The
parameters Minimum Number of Active
Number of Active Receiving Links must
IMA link.
l The default value is recommended.
For details, see A.13.4 Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting Links(IMA Group
Management).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
563
Minimum
Number of
Active
Receiving
Links
1-16
Default: 1
The Minimum Number of Active Receiving
Links parameter specifies the lower threshold of
active links in the receive direction in an inverse
multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group to maintain
proper operation of the IMA group.
l The links of the IMA group can carry services
only when the number of activated links in
the transmit/receive direction is not smaller
than the value of Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting Links/Minimum
Number of Active Receiving Links.
l The values of Minimum Number of Active
Number of Active Receiving Links must be
the same because the N1D12E/N1D75E
supports Symmetrical Mode and
Symmetrical Operation only. The
parameters Minimum Number of Active
Number of Active Receiving Links must
IMA link.
For details, see A.13.5 Minimum Number of
Active Receiving Links(IMA Group
Management).
IMA
Protocol
Version
1.0, 1.1
Default: 1.1
Specifies the IMA protocol version.
l The parameter IMA Protocol Version must
IMA link.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
564
IMA Transit
Frame
Length
32, 64, 128, 256
Default: 128
The IMA Transit Frame Length parameter
specifies the length of an inverse multiplexing
for ATM (IMA) frame transmitted by the
equipment at the local end. That is, this
parameter specifies the number of asynchronous
transfer mode (ATM) cells in an IAM frame.
l Based on the IMA frame format, the receive
end rebuilds the ATM cell stream with the
cells arriving from diversely-delayed links.
Longer IMA frames result in higher
transmission efficiency and occupy more
resources. Once a member link fails, the
impact on the entire IMA group increases as
the length of IMA frames increases.
l The parameter IMA Transmit Frame
Length must assume the same value on the
two ends of an IMA link.
For details, see A.13.1 IMA Transit Frame
Length.
IMA
Symmetry
Mode
Symmetrical Mode and
Symmetrical Operation,
Asymmetrical Operation,
Asymmetrical Mode and
Asymmetrical Operation
Default: Symmetrical
Mode and Symmetrical
Operation
The IMA Symmetry Mode parameter specifies
the configuration and operation mode of inverse
multiplexing for ATM (IMA) links in an IMA
group.
l The N1D12E/N1D75E supports
Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical
Operation only.
l If the symmetrical mode and symmetrical
operation are adopted, the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always consistent in the
transmit direction and in the receive
direction, even when some member links fail.
In symmetrical mode:
Bandwidth of the IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the transmit direction,
bandwidth in the receive direction}
The unidirectional failure of one member
link is equivalent to the bidirectional
failure of one member link.
For details, see A.13.2 IMA Symmetry Mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
565
Maximum
Delay
Between
Links(ms)
1-120
Default: 25
The Maximum Delay Between Links(ms)
parameter specifies the maximum delay
tolerance between links in an inverse
multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group. That is, this
parameter specifies the allowed maximum
difference between the maximum delay value
and the minimum delay value of all links in an
IMA group. If the maximum difference exceeds
the specified value, the equipment reports the
lODS alarm for a link who has the largest offset
value compared with the average delay value of
all links in the MA group. Then, the equipment
removes the alarmed link from the IMA group.
l If this parameter is set to a value greater than
the allowed maximum value, the delay of
IMA services may be prolonged and even
packet loss may occur; if this parameter is set
to a value smaller than the allowed minimum
value, a working link will be deleted by
mistake.
l The parameter Maximum Delay Between
Links (ms) must assume the same value on
the two ends of an IMA link.
For details, see A.13.3 Maximum Delay
Between Links(ms)(IMA Group
Management).
Clock Mode CTC Mode, ITC Mode
Default: CTC Mode
The Clock Mode parameter specifies the clock
mode for operations of an inverse multiplexing
for ATM (IMA) group.
l Clock Mode is set to the same value for the
interconnected ends of IMA links.
l Set this parameter according to the planning
information.
For details, see A.13.6 Clock Mode(IMA
Group Management).

Service Type For example: ATM
service
Displays the type of the service associated with
the port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
566
Service ID For example: 20 Displays the ID of the service associated with the
port.
When you select the value of the service ID, the
active window changes to the service
management dialog box of the corresponding
service type.
Service
Name
For example: ATM Displays the name of the service associated with
the port.
Used
Resource
- Displays the resource used by the service

10.9 Parameter Description: MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM mechanism can be used to effectively detect, confirm, and locate internal
defects that occur on the MPLS layer network, and monitor the network performance.
10.9.1 Tunnel OAM Parameters
The OAM parameters include Tunnel ID, Tunnel Name, Node Type, OAM Status, and other
parameters.
Table 10-75 lists the parameters for configuring the OAM function.
Table 10-75 Parameters for configuring the OAM function
Tunnel ID For example, 3 Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name Character string Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the node type.
node
OAM Status Enabled, Disabled Sets and displays the OAM
status.
l Enabled: OAM-related
operations can be
performed.
l Disabled: OAM-related
operations cannot be
performed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
567
Detection Mode Auto-Sending, Manual Sets and displays the
detection mode.
l Manual: The frequency
set by the user is used to
test the tunnel
connectivity.
l Auto-Sending: The
frequency of the received
packets is used to test the
tunnel connectivity.
Detection Packet Type CV, FFD Sets the detection packet type
on the ingress node.
l CV: The detection
frequency is always the
same and is not
configurable.
l FFD: The detection
frequency is
configurable.
NOTE
If CV is selected, the system
sends one CV packet with a
length of 74 bit/s at an interval
of one second; if FFD is
selected, the system sends one
FFD packet with a length of 25
bit/s at an interval of 3.3 ms.
Detection Packet Period (ms) 3.3, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 Sets and displays the
detection packet period.
If Detection Packet Period
is set to FFD, the detection
packet period is
configurable. If Detection
Packet Period is set to CV,
the detection packet period is
always 1000.
It is recommended that
Detection Packet Period
(ms) be set to 3.3 to ensure
that the switching duration of
MPLS tunnel APS protection
is less than 50 ms.
Reverse Tunnel For example, 3 Selects the reverse tunnel.
CV/FFD Status Stop, Start Displays the CV/FFD status.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
568
LSP Status Near-End Available, Near-
End Defect Available, Near-
End Defect Unavailable,
Near-End Unavailable,
Remote Available, Remote
Defect Available, Remote
Defect Unavailable, Remote
Unavailable, Initialized
Displays the LSP status.
LSP Defect Type dServer, dLOCV,
dTTSI_Mismatch,
dTTSI_Mismerge, dExcess,
dUnknown, SD, SF, BDI,
FDI
Displays the LSP defect type.
Disable LSP Duration (ms) 0-655350 Displays the duration of the
disable status of the LSP.
Disable LSP Duration
indicates the duration when
the tunnel is unavailable.
LSP Defect Location For example, 192.168.11.1 Displays the LSP defect
location.
LSP Defect Location
identifies the location of the
defect in the network by
using the IP address.
SD Threshold 0-100 Sets and displays the SD
threshold.
only for the egress node of the
tunnel.
SF Threshold 0-100 Sets and displays the SF
threshold.
only for the egress node of the
tunnel.
SD SF
Source Node For example, 192.168.11.2 Displays the source node of
the tunnel.
Sink Node For example, 192.168.11.3 Displays the sink node of the
tunnel.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
569
10.9.2 Ping Test
You need to set parameters for a ping test, starting the ping test, and stopping the ping test when
configuring a ping test.
Table 10-76 lists the parameters for a ping test.
Table 10-76 Parameters for a ping test
Packet Count For example, 3 Sets the count of packets.
EXP Value 0-7 Sets the EXP value.
The packet priority increases
with the EXP value.
TTL 1-255 Sets the time to live (TTL).
Transmit Interval(10ms) 10-1000 Sets the interval of
transmitting packets.
Packet Length 64-1400 Sets the length of packets.
Wait-to-Response Timeout
Time(10ms)
50-6000 Sets the wait-to-response
timeout time.
Response Mode No Response, IPv4 UDP
Response
Sets the response mode.
NOTE
This parameters can be
currently set to only IPv4 UDP
Response. If this parameter is
set to No Response, a timeout
message is displayed as the test
result.
Test Result Character string Displays the test result.

10.9.3 Traceroute Test
You need to set the parameters such as Packet Length and Response Mode when configuring
the traceroute test.
Table 10-77 lists the parameters for configuring the traceroute test.
Table 10-77 Parameters for configuring the traceroute test
EXP Value 0-7 Sets the EXP value.
The packet priority increases
with the EXP value.
TTL 1-255 Sets the TTL.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
570
Packet Length 84-1400 Sets the length of packets.
Wait-to-Response Timeout
Time(10ms)
50-6000 Sets the wait-to-response
timeout time.
Response Mode No Response, IPv4 UDP
Response
Sets the response mode.
NOTE
You can set this parameter to
only IPv4 UDP Response. If
you set this parameter to No
Response, the test result will
time out.
Test Result Character string Displays the test result.

10.10 Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel APS
This topic describes the parameters related to the MPLS Tunnel APS.
10.10.1 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (on a Per-NE
Basis)
You need to set the necessary parameters when configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Table 10-78 lists the parameters for configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Table 10-78 Parameters for configuring MPLS Tunnel APS
Protection Group ID For example, 1 Displays the protection group
ID.
The system automatically
assigns the protection group
ID according to the sequence
of their creation.
Protection Type 1+1, 1:1 Selects a protection type.
Switching Mode Single-Ended, Dual-Ended Specifies the switching
policy to be adopted when a
tunnel fails.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
571
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive, Revertive Specifies whether the
services are switched from
the protection Tunnel to the
working Tunnel after the
working Tunnel is restored. If
you set this parameter to
Revertive, the services can
be switched from the
protection Tunnel to the
working Tunnel. If you set
this parameter to Non-
Revertive, the services
cannot be switched from the
protection Tunnel to the
working Tunnel.
WTR Time(m) 1 to 12
Default: 5
Specifies the WTR time of
the protection group.
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 to 100
Default: 0
Specifies the hold-off time of
Protocol Status Enabled, Disabled Specifies the protocol status.
If you set the parameter to
Enabled, the protection
group is available.
Switching Status Clear, Forced Switching,
Manual Switching\(Working
to Protection\), Manual
Switching\(Protection to
Working\), Exercise
Switching, Lockout
Indicates the switching status
of the protection group.

10.10.2 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-
End Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring MPLS tunnel APS protection groups in end-
to-end mode.
Table 10-79 Parameters for configuring MPLS tunnel APS
Protection Group ID For example, Tunnel APS 1 Specifies the name of the
protection group.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
572
Protection Type 1+1, 1:1
Default: 1+1
Specifies the type of the
protection group.
l 1:1: A protection tunnel
protects a working tunnel.
Normally, the working
tunnel carries services
and the protection tunnel
carries protocol packets.
When the working tunnel
fails, services are
switched from the
working tunnel to the
protection tunnel.
l 1+1: A protection tunnel
protects a working tunnel.
Normally, services are
transmitted on both
tunnels and selected from
either tunnel for
reception. When the
working tunnel fails,
services on the protection
tunnel are selected for
reception.
Switching Mode Single-Ended, Dual-Ended
Default: Single-Ended
NOTE
When Protection Type is set to
1:1, Switching Mode is
defaulted to Dual-Ended and
cannot be changed.
Specifies the switching mode
of the protection group.
l In single-ended
switching, if a fault is
detected at one end, only
the local end switches and
the opposite end is not
notified for performing a
switching.
l In dual-ended switching,
if a fault is detected at one
end, the local end
switches and the opposite
end is instructed to
perform a switching.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
573
Working Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of the
working tunnel.
When configuring MPLS
tunnel APS for unidirectional
tunnels, you need to select
four tunnels, which function
as the Forward Working
tunnel, Forward Protection
tunnel, Backward Working
tunnel, and Backward
Protection tunnel.
For a bidirectional tunnel,
you need to select two
tunnels, namely, the working
tunnel and protection tunnel.
Working Ingress Tunnel ID For example, 40 (source
node: 130.0.0.12; sink node:
75.75.75.75)
Selects the ID of the working
ingress tunnel.
Working Ingress Tunnel
Name
For example, 1 Displays the name of the
working ingress tunnel.
Working Egress Tunnel ID For example, 40 (source
75.75.75.75)
Selects the ID of the working
egress tunnel.
Working Egress Tunnel
Name
working egress tunnel.
Protection Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of the
protection tunnel.
Protection Ingress Tunnel ID For example, 40 (source
75.75.75.75)
Selects the ID of the
protection ingress tunnel.
Protection Ingress Tunnel
Name
protection ingress tunnel.
Protection Egress Tunnel ID For example, 40 (source
75.75.75.75)
Selects the ID of the
protection egress tunnel.
Protection Egress Tunnel
Name
protection egress tunnel.
Protocol Status Enabled, Disabled Specifies the protocol status.
If you set this parameter to
Enabled, the protection
group is available.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
574
Switching Status Non-Revertive, Revertive Specifies whether the
services are switched from
the protection tunnel to the
working tunnel after the
working tunnel is restored. If
you set this parameter to
Revertive, the services can
be switched from the
protection tunnel to the
working tunnel. If you set this
parameter to Non-
Revertive, the services
cannot be switched from the
protection tunnel to the
working tunnel.
WTR Time(min) 1-12
Default: 5
Specifies the WTR time of
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0-100
Default: 0
Specifies the hold-off time of

10.11 Parameter Description: Inband DCN
In this interface, you can manage DCN.
Tabs
Tab Description
Bandwidth Management Set the bandwidth used by the DCN. For
details, see 10.11.3 Bandwidth
Management.
Access Control Set parameters for the Ethernet port which
accesses the NMS information. For details,
see 10.11.2 Access Control.
Port Settings Set parameters for the port that transfers the
inter-NE management information. For
details, see 10.11.1 Port Settings.

10.11.1 Port Settings
This topic describes the parameters, such as Enabled Status, for configuring an in-band DCN
port.
Table 10-80 lists the parameters for configuring an in-band DCN port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
575
Table 10-80 Parameters for configuring an in-band DCN port
Port Name For example, 21-N1ETF8-1
(PORT-1)
Displays the ports used for
transmitting management
information between NEs.
DCN Enabled Status Enabled, Disabled
Default value: Enabled
Enables or disables a port.
l Enabled: Management
information between NEs
can be transmitted
through this port.
l Disabled: Management
information between NEs
cannot be transmitted
through this port.
OSPF Enabled Status Enabled, Disabled
Enables or disables the OSPF
protocol.
OPQ LSA Enabled Status Enabled, Disabled
Enables or disables the
opaque LSA.

10.11.2 Access Control
This topic describes the parameters, such as IP Address and Subnet Mask of a port, for
configuring in-band DCN access control.
Table 10-81 lists the parameters for configuring in-band DCN access control.
Table 10-81 Parameters for configuring in-band DCN access control
Port Name For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(PORT-1)
Displays the Ethernet port
that can receive the NMS
information.
Enabled Status Enabled, Disabled
Default value: Disabled
Enables or disables the port.
l Enabled: The
management information
of the U2000 can be
received through this
port.
l Disabled: The
management information
of the U2000 cannot be
received through this
port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
576
IP Address For example, 1.1.1.2
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Sets the IP address of the
port.
Subnet Mask For example, 255.255.255.0
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Sets the subnet mask of the
port.

10.11.3 Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters, such as VLAN ID and Bandwidth (kbps) of a board, for
configuring in-band DCN bandwidth management.
Table 10-82 lists the parameters for configuring in-band DCN bandwidth management.
Table 10-82 Parameters for configuring in-band DCN bandwidth management
Ethernet Board VLAN ID 2 to 4094
Default: 4094
Sets the VALN ID used by
the DCN. Set this parameter
when the U2000 and NE are
connected by the Ethernet
board, or the NEs are
connected to each other by
the Ethernet board.
Generally, set this parameter
to the default VLAN ID. If
the VLAN ID of a service
conflicts with the VLAN ID
of a DCN channel, you can
specify a VLAN ID. The
VLAN IDs of all the DCN
channels on a network,
however, must be the same.
Bandwidth (Kbit/s) 64 to 2048
Default: 512
Sets the bandwidth used by
the DCN. Set this parameter
when the U2000 and NE are
connected by the Ethernet
board, or the NEs are
connected to each other by
the Ethernet board.

10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration
Parameters
This topic describes the parameters related to QinQ links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
577
Table 10-83 QinQ link parameters
QinQ Link ID For example, 5 Displays or specifies the ID
of the QinQ link.
Board For example, 1-N1PEG8 Displays or specifies the
board.
Port For example, 4(PORT-4) Displays or specifies the port.
S-Vlan ID For example, 4 Displays or specifies the S-
VLAN ID.
Bandwidth Limit Enabled, Disabled Specifies or displays the
bandwidth limit.
The committed information
rate (CIR) and peak
information rate (PIR) can set
if Bandwidth Limit is set to
Enabled.
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
The Committed
discarding policy.
Default: 4294967295
information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
578
s)
64-10000000
Default: 4294967295
allowed by the PIR.
Click A.10.28 Peak
Default: 4294967295
of the PBS.
information.
Policy 64 bytes Specifies and displays the
policy.

10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse
This topic describes the parameters, such as ARP List IP, ARP List MAC, and ARP List
Type, for configuring the address parse function.
Table 10-84 lists the parameters for configuring the address parse function.
Table 10-84 Parameters for configuring the address parse function
ARP List IP For example, 129.9.1.23 Configures the IP address in
the ARP list.
ARP List MAC For example, 1C-
C4-31-88-1C-C4
Configures the MAC address
corresponding to the IP
address in the ARP list.
ARP List Type Static, Dynamic Displays the type of the ARP
list.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
579
A List of Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters for configuring and querying the common boards and
functions on the U2000. Each parameter is described in terms of the description, impact on the
system, values, configuration guidelines, and relationship with other parameters.
A.1 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
Before configuring an Ethernet service, you need to set the parameters associated with Ethernet
ports.
A.2 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
Before configuring an Ethernet service, you need to configure the relevant parameters for
Ethernet ports.
A.3 Ethernet Service Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring Ethernet services.
A.4 CES Service Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring CES services.
A.5 Data Service Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring Ethernet services and SAN services.
A.6 ETH OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the ETH-OAM function.
A.7 ETH-OAM Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the ETH-OAM function.
A.8 PW Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring PW services.
A.9 PW APS Protection Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring PW APS protection.
A.10 HQoS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the HQoS function.
A.11 QoS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the QoS function
A.12 ATM Interface Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM interface.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) A List of Parameters
580
A.13 ATM/IMA Services Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM/IMA services.
A.14 ATM OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM OAM.
A.15 ATM/IMA Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the ATM/IMA function.
A.16 RPR Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the RPR function.
A.17 LAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LAG function.
A.18 MC-LAG Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring MC-LAG protection.
A.19 LAG/DLAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring a link aggregation group (LAG) and a
distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
A.20 STP/RSTP Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and the
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
A.21 LCAS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the LCAS function.
A.22 Packet LPT Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the link state pass through (LPT) function
in packet services.
A.23 LPT Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the LPT function.
A.24 IGMP Snooping Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the IGMP Snooping function.
A.25 Test Frame Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Ethernet service test function.
A.26 Orderwire Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the orderwire function.
A.27 Clock Associated Parameters
To synchronize the clocks on a network, you need to set the parameters that are associated with
clocks.
A.28 Protection Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring multiplex section protection (MSP),
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), board protection switching (BPS), and path
protection switching (PPS).
A.29 Other Parameters
This topic describes the parameters related to PDH interfaces and SDH interfaces.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
581
A.1 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
Before configuring an Ethernet service, you need to set the parameters associated with Ethernet
ports.
A.1.1 MAC Loopback(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The MAC Loopback (Ethernet Interface) parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. Port loopback setting is applied to locating faults only.
Impact on the System
MAC loopback is a function of diagnosing faults. It may affect the services configured at the
port. If the loopback state is set to Inloop or Outloop, the services at the port may be interrupted.
Values
Valid Values Default Value
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Non-Loopback

The following table lists descriptions of each value.
Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates the normal state. If the equipment works normally, you
do not need to set the MAC loopback.
Inloop Loops back the services from the cross-connection side to the
cross-connection side within the equipment at the local end.
Outloop At the local equipment, the incoming services of an Ethernet port
are looped back at the MAC layer and output to this Ethernet
port.

Configuration Guidelines
To set the MAC loopback, decide the loopback direction according to the service direction when
you locate the faults.
Relationship with Other Parameters
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
582
Related Information
Loopb
ack
Point
Meaning Diagram
MAC
Loopba
ck
The Ethernet service is
looped from the MAC layer
of the Ethernet port.

A.1.2 PHY Loopback(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The PHY Loopback parameter indicates the loopback status of the physical layer of an Ethernet
port. This parameter is an advanced attribute of the Ethernet port.
As a fault diagnosis function, setting PHY loopback affects the services configured on the port.
In the case of loopback, services on the port are interrupted.
Values
Value Range Default Value
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Non-Loopback

Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates the normal status. When the equipment is operating normally,
loopback is not required.
Inloop At the local equipment, the outgoing services of an Ethernet port are
looped back at the physical layer and input to this Ethernet port.
Outloop At the local equipment, the incoming services of an Ethernet port are
looped back at the physical layer and output to this Ethernet port.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
583
The PHY loopback is mainly used to locate a fault. When setting this parameter, determine the
loopback type according to the service flow direction.
None.
Related Information
Loopb
ack
Point
Loopback Point Diagram
PHY
loopbac
k
The Ethernet service is
looped from the physical
layer of the Ethernet port.

A.1.3 Enable Port(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The Enable Port parameter sets whether the Ethernet port is usable.
When services are available on the Ethernet port, setting this port to disabled interrupts the
services.
Values
Enabled, Disabled. Enabled

Value Description
Enabled The port is usable.
Disabled The port is unusable.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
584
When a port is used for transmitting services, enable this port first.
None.
A.1.4 Encapsulation Type(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The Encapsulation Type parameter sets the link layer encapsulation type of the port, and
specifies the link layer encapsulation type that can be identified by this port.
Values
Null, 802.1Q, QinQ For details, see configuration guidelines.

Value Description
Null No link layer is available, or the link layer encapsulation is
not processed.
802.1Q In the Layer 2 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet
port is 802.1Q by default.
QinQ When the Ethernet port is used for QinQ Link, the port
attribute should be set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type
should be set to QinQ. In addition, QinQ Type Domain of
the two interconnected Ethernet ports should be set to the
same value.

Currently, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port can be set. In addition, the encapsulation
type can be switched only when the port does not carry services.
In the Layer 2 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port can be Null, 802.1Q, and
QinQ. In the Layer 3 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port, which is fixed to
802.1Q, cannot be set.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
585
Related Information
For details, see the Port Mode parameter.
A.1.5 Working Mode(Ethernet Interface)
Description
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board.
The Working Mode parameter indicates the maximum transmission rate and communication
mode of a port.
If the working modes of interconnected Ethernet ports are inconsistent, the services are not
available or have a severe packet loss problem.
Values
10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, Auto-
Negotiation, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, 10G Full-Duplex
LAN, 10G Full-Duplex WAN
Auto-Negotiation

Value Description
10M Half-Duplex The maximum transmission rate of the port is 10 Mbit/s and the
communication mode is half-duplex.
10M Full-Duplex The maximum transmission rate of the port is 10 Mbit/s and the
communication mode is full-duplex.
Auto-Negotiation The port uses the protocol to automatically specify the best
working mode that matches the opposite port for communication.
100M Half-Duplex The maximum transmission rate of the port is 100 Mbit/s and the
communication mode is half-duplex.
10G Full-Duplex LAN The maximum transmission rate of the port is 10 Gbit/s and the
communication mode is full-duplex. The port type is 10G Base-
SR/LR/ER/ZR and the port is used as an Ethernet port to connect
LAN equipment that functions as the DHCP server.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
586
Value Description
10G Full-Duplex WAN The maximum transmission rate of the port is 10 Gbit/s and the
communication mode is full-duplex. The port type is 10G Base-
SW/LW/EW/ZW and the port is used as an SDH port to connect
WAN access equipment that functions as the DHCP client host.

The Auto-Negotiation working mode is recommended. If the communication fails and the
working mode of the port is set to Auto-Negotiation, you need specify the working mode of the
port according to the working mode of the interconnected port.
If the working mode of the port is set to any other mode instead of Auto-Negotiation, the working
mode of the interconnected port should be the same. Otherwise, the communication is not
available.
In the case of equipment interconnection, set the communication modes of the interconnected
ports to full-duplex.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.1.6 Max Frame Length(byte) for an Ethernet Port
Description
The Max Frame Length(byte) parameter sets the maximum length of the data packets allowed
to be received by the Ethernet port.
After this parameter is set, all the data packets of a length longer than this parameter are
discarded.
Values
64-9600 1620

The maximum data packet length has a filtering mechanism, through which this parameter is set
to filter the data packets received on the Ethernet port of a length longer than a certain length.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
587
When setting this parameter, consider the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite
end. If the parameter value is less than the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite
end, this link cannot normally transmit service packets.
l The maximum data packet length defines the maximum bytes in a packet that is allowed
by an Ethernet port. All packets whose packet length is larger than the maximum data packet
length will be discarded by the Ethernet port.
l The service MTU defines the maximum data packet length allowed by a service. All packets
whose length is larger than the MTU will be discarded.
l When both the maximum data packet length and the service MTU are configured, the
smaller value takes effect.
A.1.7 Enable Tunnel(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The Enable Tunnel(Ethernet Interface) parameter sets the MPLS enabling state of the port.
When Enable Tunnel is set to Enabled, it indicates that the port can identify and process the
MPLS label.
If the MPLS is disabled, the services on the port are interrupted.
Values
Enabled, Disabled Enabled

Value Description
Enabled The MPLS is enabled.
Disabled The MPLS is disabled.

When the services are configured, the MPLS should not be disabled.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
588
Related Information
The MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform, which supports various
high layer protocols and services.
The MPLS uses short and fixed-length tags to encapsulate various link layer packets. Based on
the IP routing and control protocol, the MPLS provides switching to the connection at the
network layer.
A.1.8 Specify IP(Ethernet Interface)
Description
The Specify IP parameter, set by port, indicates the method of specifying the IP address
parameter of a specified port.
The IP address parameter of the port is the prerequisite for MPLS service creation. If the current
IP address parameter is invalid, the services cannot be created.
Values
Manually, Unspecified Unspecified

Value Description
Manually Indicates the IP parameter of the specified port. If the IP
address parameter is valid, specify an IP address to the current
port. If the IP address is invalid, release the IP address of the
current port.
Unspecified Indicates that the IP address of the port is not specified.

None.
The IP address parameter can be configured only when the port is in the Layer 3 mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
589
A.2 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
Before configuring an Ethernet service, you need to configure the relevant parameters for
Ethernet ports.
A.2.1 Port Attribute (Ethernet Port)
Description
The Port Attribute (Ethernet Port) parameter specifies the position of a port in the network.
Different port attributes support different packets.
The system operation is not affected.
Values
Board Name Valid Values Default Value
N2EMR0, N2EGR2,
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EFS0,
N2EFS0, N1EFS4,
N2EFS4, N1EMR0,
N2EMR0, N5EFS0
PE, P PE
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N1EAS2
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware UNI
N1EMS2 PE, P, C-Aware, S-Aware PE

Value Description
PE Indicates Provider Edge (PE), which refers to the edge port
of the service provider. A PE port (the default MPLS
encapsulation type is invalid) can transmit or receive standard
Ethernet packets.
P Indicates Provider (P), which refers to the port in the core
network of the service provider. A P port can transmit or
receive the data packets with the MPLS labels (the default
TAG attribute is invalid).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
590
Value Description
UNI Indicates the interface between CE and PE. This port
processes the packets with TAG attributes specified in IEEE
802.1Q. Moreover, this port identifies and processes the
VLAN IDs of the received packets according to the supported
Tag Aware, Access or Hybrid.
C-Aware A C-Aware (C-VLAN Aware) port in the network is located
in the position as the UNI port at the client access side. This
port identifies and processes the VLAN (C-VLAN) in the
packets. If the value of QinQ TYPE is valid, this port treats
the outer labels of the packets as C-VLAN.
S-Aware An S-Aware (S-VLAN Aware) port in the network is located
in the position as the interface on the network side. This port
identifies and processes the VLAN (S-VLAN) in the packets.
If the value of QinQ TYPE is valid, this port treats the outer
labels of the packets as S-VLAN.

The port attribute depends on the port position in the network and the service. For this reason,
select a proper port attribute as required. Generally, select the default value.
l For the MPLS service, select P for the port that transmits or receives packets with MPLS
labels.
l For the QinQ service, select C-Aware or S-Aware for the port. Connecting to the port of
the client network, a C-Aware port identifies and processes the packets with C-VLAN
labels. Connecting to the port at the network side, an S-Aware port identifies and processes
the packets with S-VLAN tags. The configuration examples are described as follows:
Add the S-VLAN tag to the service from Port A to Port B, and remove the S-VLAN
tag from the service from Port B to Port A. Then select C-Aware for Port A, and S-
Aware for Port B.
Configure a service from Port A to Port B to transparently transmit the C-VLAN tags
at the client side. Then select C-Aware for Ports A and B.
Configure a service from Port A to Port B to transparently transmit the S-VALN tags
at the network side. Then select S-Aware for Ports A and B.
Configure a service from Port A to Port B to switch the C-VLAN tags at the client side.
Then select C-Aware for Ports A and B.
Configure a service from Port A to Port B to switch the S-VALN tags at the network
side. Then select S-Aware for Ports A and B.
None.
Related Information
According to the position and role of the equipment in the networking, there are three types of
equipment: CE, PE (U-PE & N-PE), and P. Client Edge (CE) indicates the equipment at the
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
591
client side. Provider Edge (PE) indicates the edge equipment at the network side. Provider (P)
indicates the intermediate node at the network side.
A.2.2 Enable Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Enable Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies whether packets can be
transmitted or received at an Ethernet port.
If a port is disabled, it cannot transmit or receive packets. In this case, the service is unavailable.
Values
Enabled, Disabled Disabled

Value Description
Enabled The port can transmit or receive packets.
Disabled The port cannot transmit or receive packets.

l If the port does not bear a service, set the port attribute to Disabled.
l If the port bears services, set the port attribute to Enabled.
A.2.3 Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum frame
length that is supported at an Ethernet port.
If the packet length exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the packets are discarded.
Alternatively, the packet length is minimized to the specified frame length. This parameter takes
effect only when the packet enters the port rather than when the packet that exits the port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
592
Values
Board Name Valid Values Default Value Unit
N1EGS4, N3EGS4 1518-9216, in step
length of 2
1522 Byte
N1EMS4, N4EGS4 1518-9216, in step
length of 1
1522 Byte
N1EFT8, N1EFT8A,
R1EFT4
1518-1535, in step
length of 1
1522 Byte
N1EGT2, N1EAS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2,
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2
1518-9600, in step
length of 1
1522 Byte

Set this parameter as required. Generally, select the default value, unless otherwise specified.
None.
A.2.4 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port
Attribute)
Description
The Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute) specifies the flow
control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in non-auto-negotiation mode.
Values
Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control,
Send Only, Receive Only
Disable

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
593
Value Description
Disable Indicates that the port disables the flow control function.
Control
Indicates that the port can transmit PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
Send Only Indicates that the port sends the PAUSE frame only.
Receive Only Indicates that the port can only process the received PAUSE
frames.

This parameter is meaningful only when you configure the EPL service. You can select the value
as required.
None.
A.2.5 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute) specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in auto-negotiation mode.
If the negotiation result is to enable the flow control function, the PAUSE frame is transmitted
to the upstream port.
Values
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N1EAS2
Enable Symmetric/
Enable Symmetric/
N2EMR0, N2EGR2,
N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2
Disabled
Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Control
Enable Symmetric/
Disabled
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
594
N4EGS4 Disabled
Control
Control
Enable Symmetric/
Enable Symmetric/

Value Description
Disabled Indicates that the port disables the flow control function.
Control
Indicates that the port only transmits flow control frames, but
does not process the received flow control frames.
Control
Indicates that the port can transmit PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric/
Indicates that the symmetric/dissymmetric flow control mode
is decided by the auto-negotiation result.

For the N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N1EAS2 boards, this parameter is valid only when you
configure the EPL service.
Generally, set this parameter to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, unless
otherwise specified.
A.2.6 MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the MAC loopback state
at an Ethernet port. Port loopback setting is applied to locating faults only.
MAC loopback is a function of diagnosing faults. It may affect the services configured at the
port. If the loopback state is set to Inloop, the services at the port may be interrupted.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
595
Values
Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback

Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates the normal state. If the equipment works normally,
you do not need to set the MAC loopback.

None.
None.
A.2.7 PHY Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The PHY Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at
an Ethernet port. Port loopback setting is applied to locating faults only.
PHY loopback is a function of diagnosing faults. It may affect the services configured at the
port. If the loopback state is set to Inloop, the services at the port may be interrupted.
Values
Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
596
Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates the normal state. If the equipment works normally,
you do not need to set the PHY loopback.

None.
None.
A.2.8 QinQ Type Area
Description
The QinQ Type Area parameter indicates the VLAN protocol used by the packet that is
transmitted by QinQ.
The default value 0x8100 of this parameter is the protocol type that is specified by the related
standard. The original equipment of other vendors may use 0x88A8 or 0x9100 to represent the
VLAN protocol. To realize the interconnection with the original equipment, the user should set
this parameter accordingly.
l If QinQ Type Area is set to 0x8100 at the local end, QinQ Type Area must be set to
0x8100 at the opposite end. Otherwise, services are unavailable.
l If QinQ Type Area is set to a value other than 0x8100 from 0x600 to 0xFFFF at the local
end, QinQ Type Area must be set to 0x8100 or to the same value at the opposite end.
Otherwise, services are unavailable.
Values
0x600-0xFFFF 0x8100

Set this parameter according to the supported value of QinQ Type Area of the opposite
equipment.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
597
A.2.9 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the function of reporting
the self-loop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected.
l For the external physical interface of the board, the transmit direction is connected to the
receive direction by a fiber.
l The two external physical ports on the board are cross-connected to each other through
fibers.
l The cross-connection is created on the same VCTRUNK of the board.
l The cross-connection is created between different VCTRUNKs of the board.
After the self-loop check function is enabled for a port, the specified self-loop check packets are
transmitted from the port. One packet is transmitted each second.
Values

To check the self-loop port, select Enabled.
The loop port shut-down function takes effect only after the loop check function is enabled.
A.2.10 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter is set to disable the self-loop
port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the
self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection
packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.
If a port enables the loop port shut-down function, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol blocks the port
once the port is detected to be a self-loop port. In this case, the services at the port are interrupted.
All the packets based on the upper-level protocol are discarded.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
598
Values

To block a self-loop port, select Enabled. Otherwise, select Disabled.
The loop port shutdown function takes effect only after the IEEE 802.3ah protocol and the loop
detection function are enabled.
A.2.11 Traffic Threshold(Mpbs)(External Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Traffic Threshold(Mpbs) (External Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the
data flow threshold at external physical ports.
If the data flow at external physical ports is greater than the specified threshold, the
FLOW_OVER alarm is generated.
Values
Valid Values Default Value Unit
0-100 (FE), 0-1000 (GE), in
step length of 1
100 (FE), 1000 (GE) Mbps

Generally, select the value according to the bandwidth.
None.
A.2.12 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (Ethernet Interface
Attributes)
Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold(Ethernet Interface Attributes) parameter
allocates the specified bandwidth to the broadcast packets. The bandwidth is allocated on the
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
599
basis of the traffic proportion at the port. If the bandwidth allocated to the broadcast packets
reaches the specified threshold, the port discards the broadcast data packets that are received.
l If less bandwidth is allocated to the broadcast packets, some necessary broadcast services
are affected.
l If excessive bandwidth is allocated to the broadcast packets, excessive broadcast packets
may enter the network. Consequently, the network running is affected.
Values
1-10 3

You can set this parameter according to the percentage of the traffic at the port. The value 10
means that the whole bandwidth is allocated to the port.
Generally, use the default value.
None.
A.2.13 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression (Ethernet Interface
Attributes)
Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression (Ethernet Interface Attributes) parameter
specifies whether to enable the function for a port to suppress the broadcast packets and to control
the traffic of the broadcast data packets that enter the port. If the broadcast packet suppression
function is enabled, and if the broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold value, the
broadcast packets that enter the port are discarded.
If Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled, the port can effectively suppress
the traffic of the broadcast packets by using the statistic function of the network processor on
the board.
Values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
600
You can set this parameter according to whether to control the traffic of the broadcast packets.
None.
A.2.14 Zero-Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)
Description
The Zero-Flow Monitor parameter specifies whether the traffic on a port is monitored.
After the zero traffic monitoring function is enabled, the port can report the zero traffic alarm
after the state of zero traffic lasts for a certain period. Hence, the user can check whether the
service is interrupted due to the fault on the equipment side.
Values

Value Description
Enabled The zero traffic monitoring function is enabled on the port.
Disabled The zero traffic monitoring function is disabled on the port.

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Set this parameter to
Enabled if the traffic on a port needs to be monitored.
A.2.15 Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min)
Description
The Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min) parameter specifies the duration for a
VCTRUNK or an IP port to monitor the traffic after the zero traffic monitoring function of the
port is enabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
601
If the value of this parameter is too large, the port may fail to report the zero traffic alarm. If the
value of this parameter is too small, the jitter due to the zero traffic alarm may occur on the port.
Values
Value Range Default Value Unit
1-30 0 min

The user can set this parameter according to the actual service requirement.
A.2.16 Jumbo Frame Type
Description
Jumbo Frame Type specifies the value of the jumbo frame type on an Ethernet port. The jumbo
frame indicates the oversized Ethernet frame, whose maximum length is 65535 bytes. The
Ethernet service board determines whether the Ethernet frame is a jumbo frame according to the
value of the jumbo frame type.
Values
0 to 65535 34928

The value of this parameter must be the same as the value of the accessed jumbo frame type.
Otherwise, the Ethernet board does not consider the frame as a jumbo frame.
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) parameter is used for the Ethernet port. If the length of
Ethernet frames is greater than the length of the jumbo frame, the Ethernet port discards these
Ethernet frames. If the length of Ethernet frames is smaller than the length of the jumbo frame
but is greater than the MTU, the Ethernet port discards the Ethernet frames whose length is
greater than the MTU. If the length of Ethernet frames is smaller than the MTU, the Ethernet
port does not discard the received Ethernet frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
602
A.2.17 Default VLAN ID (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Default VLAN ID (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the default VLAN ID
of a port.
Values
1-4095 1

Allocate the default VLAN ID according to the networking plan of the service carrier.
l If Tag is set to Access for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are added with the default
VLAN IDs when they enter the port. After these packets are transmitted from the port, their
VLAN IDs are peeled off.
l If Tag is set to Hybrid for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are added with the default
VLAN IDs when they enter the port. After these packets are transmitted from the port, the
VLAN IDs are peeled off if they are the same as the default VLAN IDs. Otherwise, these
packets are directly transmitted.
l If Tag is set to Tag Aware for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are discarded before they
enter the port. Otherwise, these packets are directly transmitted.
A.2.18 VLAN Priority (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The VLAN Priority (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port. It indicates the priority of the service quality.
Values
0-7 0

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
603
Set the VLAN priority according to the service requirements and the allocation of the service
carrier.
None.
A.2.19 Entry Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Description
The Entry Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies whether to identify the tag
labels in the data packets.
The entry detection function can be disabled in the port-based services only. If the entry detection
function is disabled, you may fail to configure other VLAN-based services.
Values

Value Description
Enabled The port checks the Tag label. In this case, the Tag attribute
of the port is valid.
Disabled The port does not check the tag label. In this case, the Tag
attribute of the port is invalid.

l To transmit the data packet transparently, the user can disable the entry detection function.
l To forward the data packet according to the contents of the data packet, the user can enable
the entry detection function.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
604
A.2.20 Tag Identifier
Description
Tag Identifier indicates that the Ethernet port supports IEEE 802.1Q Ethernet packets that
contain VLAN tags. You can set three attributes to differentiate the packets from each other so
that these packets can be transmitted efficiently.
Values
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid Tag Aware

The following table lists the description of each value.
Value Description
Access A port receives only the packets that do not
contain VLAN tags. After receiving the packets,
the port adds the default VLAN tag (PVID) to
these packets. When the packets are transmitted
from the port, the VLAN tags are stripped off the
packets.
Tag Aware A port receives only the packets that contain
VLAN tags and discards the packets that do not
contain VLAN tags. When the packets are
transmitted from the port, they are directly
forwarded to the next port.
Hybrid A port can receive all the packets regardless of
VLAN tags. After receiving the packets that do
not contain VLAN tags, the port adds the default
VLAN tag (PVID) to these packets. When the
packets are transmitted from the hybrid port, the
egress port determines whether the VLAN tags
contained in the packets are the same as the
PVID. If yes, the egress port strips the VLAN
tags off the packets and then forwards these
packets. Otherwise, the egress port directly
forwards these packets.

The tag attributes are configured for MAC ports and VCTRUNK ports. Hence, the VCTRUNK
ports at both ends of the trunk link can be configured with the tag attributes. In the case of a link,
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
605
the services are available only when the parameters of the tag attributes are the same for the
VCTRUNK ports on the source and sink ports. No requirements are proposed for the tag
attributes of MAC ports.
l If Tag is set to Access for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are added with the default
VLAN IDs when they enter the port. After these packets are transmitted from the port, their
VLAN IDs are peeled off.
l If Tag is set to Hybrid for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are added with the default
VLAN IDs when they enter the port. After these packets are transmitted from the port, the
VLAN IDs are peeled off if they are the same as the default VLAN IDs. Otherwise, these
packets are directly transmitted.
l If Tag is set to Tag Aware for a port, packets without VLAN IDs are discarded before they
enter the port. Otherwise, these packets are directly transmitted.
l For C-Aware and S-Aware ports, the tag attribute cannot be set.
Related Information
Mapping relationship between the packets handled by the port and the tag identifiers
Packet Type Attribute of the Ingress
Port
Handling Method
Ethernet packets that contain
tags
Tag aware The port transmits these
packets.
Access The port discards these
packets.
Hybrid The port transmits these
packets.
Ethernet packets that do not
contain tags
Tag aware The port discards these
packets.
Access The port transmits these
packets after adding the
default VLAN ID to these
packets.
Hybrid The port transmits these
packets after adding the
default VLAN ID to these
packets.

A.2.21 Mapping Protocol
Description
The Mapping Protocol parameter specifies the mapping protocol of the VCTRUNK port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
606
The Mapping Protocol parameter of the VCTRUNK is the basic setting of the VCTRUNK port.
If the parameter value is different from that of Mapping Protocol for the VCTRUNK of the
interconnected equipment, the service is interrupted.
Values
Table A-1 shows the value range of each type of board.
Table A-1 The mapping protocol supported by each type of board
Board Name Value Range Default Value
N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4,
N4EGS4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A,
N1EGT2, N2EGT2, R1EFT4
l GFP
l LAPS
l HDLC
GFP
N4EFS0, N5EFS0, N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EAS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2
GFP GFP
N2EMR0, N2EGR2 l GFP
l LAPS
GFP

Value Description
GFP Uses the GFP protocol to encapsulate the data of the
VCTRUNK port.
LAPS Uses the LAPS protocol to encapsulate the data of the
VCTRUNK port.
HDLC Uses the HDLC protocol to encapsulate the data of the
VCTRUNK port.

The value of Mapping Protocol for VCTRUNK of the local equipment must be the same as
that of Mapping Protocol for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected equipment.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
607
A.2.22 Scramble
Description
The Scramble parameter specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation
protocol and the scramble mode.
If the value of Scramble for the VCTRUNK of the local equipment is different from that of
Scramble for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected equipment, the service is interrupted.
Values
Table A-2 Scramble supported by each type of board
Board Name Value Range
Default
Value
N4EFS0, N2EFS4, N2EGS2,
N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EGT2,
R1EFT4, N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4, N1EAS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2, N5EFS0,
N3EFS4, N3EGS2, N2EGT2
l Unscramble
l Scramble mode[X43+1]
Scramble mode
[X43+1]
N2EMR0, N2EGR2 Scramble mode[X43+1] Scramble mode
[X43+1]

Value Description
Unscramble Does not scramble the payload area.
Scramble mode[X43+1] Scrambles the payload area in [X43+1] mode.

The value of Scramble for VCTRUNK must be the same as that of Scramble for the VCTRUNK
of the interconnected equipment.
For the N4EFS0, N2EFS4, N2EGS2, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EGT2 or R1EFT4 board, if
Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS, Scramble can be set to Unscramble or Scramble mode
[X43+1] only.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
608
A.2.23 Set Inverse Value for CRC
Description
The Set Inverse Value for CRC parameter specifies whether to set an inverse value for the
CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol.
If the value of Set Inverse Value for CRC for the VCTRUNK of the local equipment is different
from that of Set Inverse Value for CRC for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected equipment,
the service is interrupted.
Values
Yes, No Yes

Value Description
Yes Sets an inverse value for the CRC field.
No Does not set an inverse value for the CRC field.

The value of Set Inverse Value for CRC for VCTRUNK of the local equipment must be the
same as that of Set Inverse Value for CRC for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected equipment.
This parameter takes effect only when Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC.
A.2.24 Check Field Length
Description
The Check Field Length parameter specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping
protocol.
If Mapping Protocol is set to HDLCor LAPS, and if the value of Check Field Length is
different from that for the interconnected VCTRUNKs at the two ends, the service is interrupted.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
609
Values
Table A-3 The length of the CRC field supported by each type of board
Board Name
Mapping
Protocol Value Range Default Value
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2,
N1EAS2
GFP l FCS32
l No
FCS32
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N1EGT2, N2EGT2
GFP l FCS32
l No
FCS32
LAPS FCS32
HDLC FCS32
N2EMR0, N2EGR2,
N1EGT2, N1EFT8,
N1EFT8A, R1EFT4
GFP l FCS32
l No
FCS32
LAPS FCS32

Value Description
No The protocol frame does not contain the CRC field. Only the
GFP protocol supports this option.
FCS32 The CRC field of the protocol frame contains 32 bits.

If Mapping Protocol is set to HDLC or LAPS, the value of Check Field Length must be
consistent for the interconnected VCTRUNKs at the two ends.
If Mapping Protocol is set to HDLC or LAPS, select FCS32 only.
A.2.25 FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Description
The FCS Calculated Bit Sequence parameter specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the
CRC field of the mapping protocol.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
610
If the value of FCS Calculated Bit Sequence for the VCTRUNK of the local equipment is
different from that of FCS Calculated Bit Sequence for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected
equipment, the service is interrupted.
Values
Table A-4 FCS calculated bit sequence supported by each type of boards
Board Name
Mapping
Protocol Value Range Default Value
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N1EGT2, N2EGT2
GFP Big endian l Mapping Protocol:
GFP
l FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence: Big endian
l LAPS
l HDLC
Little endian l Mapping Protocol:
GFP
N2EMR0, N2EGR2 GFP Big endian l Mapping Protocol:
GFP
LAPS Little endian
Big endian
l Mapping Protocol:
GFP
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2,
N1EAS2
GFP Big endian l Mapping Protocol:
GFP
N1EFT8, N1EFT8A,
R1EFT4
l GFP
l LAPS
l HDLC
Big endian
Little endian
l Mapping Protocol:
GFP

Value Description
Big endian Stores the FCS field based on Big endian.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
611
Value Description
Little endian Stores the FCS field based on Little endian.

The value of FCS Calculated Bit Sequence for the VCTRUNK of the local equipment must
the same as that of FCS Calculated Bit Sequence for the VCTRUNK of the interconnected
equipment.
None.
A.2.26 Extension Header Option
Description
The Extension Header Option parameter specifies whether Mapping Protocol of the GFP
protocol supports the extension header.
For the N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, R1EFT4 or N1EAS2 board, if the value of Extension Header
Option is inconsistent for the VCTRUNK ports of the interconnected equipment at the two ends,
the service is interrupted. Moreover, the FCS_ERR alarm is reported.
Values
Table A-5 Extension header option supported by each type of board
N4EFS0, N2EFS4,
N2EGS2, N1EFT8,
N1EFT8A, N1EGT2,
N2EGT2, R1EFT4,
N1EAS2, N2EMR0,
N2EGR2
l Yes
l No
No
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N5EFS0, N3EFS4,
N3EGS2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
No No

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
612
Value Description
Yes Supports the extension header.
No Does not support the extension header.

Select the value according to whether the GFP protocol is required to support the extension
header.
This parameter takes effect only when Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
A.3 Ethernet Service Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring Ethernet services.
A.3.1 PW Signaling Type(PW Management)
Description
The PW Signaling Type (PW Management) parameter can query the signaling type of a PW.
The signaling can be of the dynamic or static type. In the case of the dynamic PW, the services
are available after the signaling negotiation is successful. In the case of the static PW, the
signaling negotiation is not required. Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment supports only the
static PW.
This parameter does not affect the system operation.
Values
Static -

Value Description
Static Indicates that the PW is statically created.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
613
None.
None.
A.3.2 Bearer Type (E-Line Service)
Description
The Bearer Type (E-Line Service) parameter specifies the bearer type for different types of
Ethernet services. The value of this parameter can be set to Port, PW, or QinQ Link.
Values
Port, PW, QinQ Link -

Value Description
PW The bearer is the PW, and the PW ID needs to be specified.
Port The bearer is the physical port, and the slot ID and port
number needs to be specified.
QinQ Link The bearer is the QinQ link, and the QinQ link ID needs to be
specified.

l The bearer of the E-Line service V-NNI can be the PW, port, or QinQ link.
l The bearer of the E-LAN service V-NNI can be the PW, port, or QinQ link.
l The bear of the E-AGGR service V-NNI can be the PW or port.
A.3.3 PW ID(E-Line Service)
Description
The PW ID parameter identifies the PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
614
Values
1-4294967295 -

None.
None.
A.3.4 BPDU
Description
The BPDU parameter sets whether the service needs transparently transmit the bridge protocol
data unit (BPDU) packets. The BPDU is the information transmitted between bridges. It is used
to switch information between bridges, and then the spanning tree of the network is computed.
If the BPDU transparent transmission identifier of the Ethernet service of an NE is enabled, the
port where the service V-UNI resides cannot process the BPDU packets. After the BPDU
transparent transmission is enabled, the BPDU packets are transmitted.
Values
Transparently Transmitted, Not
Transparently Transmitted
Not Transparently Transmitted

Value Description
Transparently Transmitted BPDU packets are transparently transmitted to and processed
on the opposite NE instead of being terminated on the local
NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
615
Value Description
Not Transparently
Transmitted
BPDU packets are processed as service packets, which are
processed differently according to port attributes. When the
port attribute is Tag Aware, BPDU packets are discarded
because they do not carry any VLAN IDs.

If the BPDU packets need be transparently transmitted to the opposite end of the network, set
the BPDU to Transparently Transmitted during the service creation.
If the BPDU packets need be processed on the local NE as service packets for computing the
network spanning tree, set the BPDU to Not Transparently Transmitted during the service
creation.
None.
A.3.5 MTU(bytes)(E-Line Service)
Description
The MTU(bytes) parameter indicates the maximum transmitted packet length, which is the
length of the packet payload.
If the length of the packet payload exceeds the value set by the MTU, the packets are discarded
during the forwarding.
Values
46-9000 1500 Byte

MTU(bytes) should not be less than the maximum length of the user packet payload. Otherwise,
the packets whose length exceeds the service MTU are discarded. Hence, MTU(bytes) should
be set to a value larger than the maximum length of the user packet payload.
The value of MTU(bytes) and Max Frame Length(byte) of the port can be separately
configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
616
A.3.6 Static MAC Address (E-LAN Service)
Description
The Static MAC Address parameter indicates the packet forward MAC address that is manually
configured for the E-LAN service. This MAC address is not automatically aged. When the
destination MAC address is the same as this MAC address, the packets are directly forwarded.
Values
VLAN ID, MAC Address, Egress Interface -

The following table lists the values of the sub-parameters.
Parameter Value Range Default Value
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 -
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FF-
FF-FF-FF-FF-FE
-
Egress Interface For example, 13-
N1PEG16-2(Port-2)[10]
-

The static MAC address can be set as a unicast address, rather than as a multicast or broadcast
address.
None.
Related Information
When the E-LAN service works in IVL mode, packets are forwarded based on the VLAN and
MAC address.
When the E-LAN service works in SVL mode, packets are forwarded based on the MAC address.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
617
A.3.7 Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN Service)
Description
The Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN Service) parameter indicates that the MAC address
is obtained by the board through self-learning.
Querying the MAC address does not affect the system. Clearing the MAC address clears the
original unicast forwarding trails. In this case, the port broadcasts the received packets whose
MAC address is the deleted MAC address, and forwards these packets when the port learns the
deleted MAC address again.
Values
VLAN ID, MAC Address,
Egress Interface
-

Parameter Value Range Default Value
VLAN ID 1-4094 -
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FF-
FF-FF-FF-FF-FE
-
Egress Interface For example, 13-
N1PEG16-2(Port-2)[10]
-

Parameter Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID that is learnt by the board.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address that is learnt by the board.
Egress Interface Indicates the egress interface that is learnt by the board.

Configure the parameter according to the service configuration information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
618
When the E-LAN service works in IVL mode, packets are forwarded based on the VLAN and
MAC address.
When the E-LAN service works in SVL mode, packets are forwarded based on the MAC address.
Related Information
None.
A.3.8 Aging Time (min)(E-LAN Service)
Description
Set the Aging Time (min) parameter to set the aging time of the learnt MAC address. The Aging
Time (min) parameter indicates that the MAC address is automatically aged after the timing is
set.
When the Aging Time (min) parameter is reset, the MAC addresses learnt before the resetting
remains aged according to the original aging time, and the MAC addresses learnt after the
resetting are aged according to the current aging time. When the aging time is up, the original
unicast E-LAN services are broadcast.
Values
1-640 5 Minute as the unit and one as the
spacing.

Set the aging time of MAC addresses according to the user requirements. The minimum time is
one minute.
None.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
619
A.3.9 Default Forwarding Priority
Description
The Default Forwarding Priority parameter indicates the forwarding priority that the NE sets
The OptiX OSN NE forwards and schedules packets according to the priorities of the packets.
The forwarding priorities supported by the OptiX OSN NE include CS7, CS6, EF, AF4, AF3,
AF2, AF1, and BE (arranged from the highest priority to the lowest).
Values
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, CS7,
NONE
BE

Value Description
BE By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to BE.
AF1 By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to AF1.
EF By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to EF.
CS6 By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to CS6.
CS7 By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to CS7.
NONE The priority of the user packets on the V-UNI side is set according to the
mapping relationship in the DS domain.

CS7: Indicates the highest forwarding priority, for delivering the control packets (very important
protocol packets) in the network.
CS6: Indicates the priority that is lower than CS7, for delivering the control packets (important
protocol packets) in the network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
620
EF: Indicates the expedited forwarding priority that is lower than CS6, for the low delay services
(for example, voice services).
AF4: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 4, whose forwarding priority is lower than EF.
AF3: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 3, whose forwarding priority is lower than AF4.
BE: Indicates the best effort forwarding priority that is the lowest forwarding priority, for the
services without QoS in the network.
If a certain V-UNI does not use the V-UNI ingress policy, the packets on the V-UNI are
forwarded according to Default Forwarding Priority. If the V-UNI ingress policy is used, the
packets that do not match the Traffic classification of this policy are forwarded according to
Default Forwarding Priority.
A.3.10 Default Packet Relabeling Color(E-LAN Service)
Description
The Default Packet Relabeling Color indicates the color that the NE sets to the user packets
on the V-UNI side by default.
On a PTN NE, the packet color indicates the priority for discarding the packet. The packet colors
are red, yellow, and green. The red packet has the highest discard priority, and thus is discard
first in the case of congestion. The green packet has the lowest discard priority. The yellow
packet has the middle discard priority.
None.
Values
Red, Yellow, Green, None Green

Value Description
Red The user packets on the V-UNI side are set as red.
Yellow The user packets on the V-UNI side are set as yellow.
Green The user packets on the V-UNI side are set as green.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
621
Value Description
None. The priority of the user packets on the V-UNI side is set
according to the mapping relationship of the DS domain.

The user packets of a higher priority should be marked green. The user packets of a lower priority
should be marked red. The user packets of a medium priority should be marked yellow.
If a certain V-UNI does not use the V-UNI ingress policy, the packets on the V-UNI are marked
according to Default Packet Relabeling Color. If the V-UNI ingress policy is used, the packets
that do not match the Traffic classification of this policy should be marked according to Default
Packet Relabeling Color.
A.3.11 Split Horizon Group ID(E-LAN Service)
Description
The Split Horizon Group ID parameter identifies the split horizon group.
Values
Split Horizon Group ID
1 -

None.
None.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
622
A.3.12 Split Horizon Group Member (E-LAN Service)
Description
The Split Horizon Group Member parameter indicates the logical port member in a split
horizon group.
The member ports added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other.
Values
Slot number - board - port number - VLANs -

One service can be configured with only one split horizon group.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.3.13 Source Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)
Description
Set the Source Interface Type parameter to set the source interface type of the VLAN switching
table for the E-AGGR service. This parameter can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI.
Set the source interface type of the E-AGGR service as the same as the opposite logical interface
type.
Values
V-UNI, V-NNI -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
623
Value Description
V-UNI Indicates that the source interface is a V-UNI interface.
V-NNI Indicates that the source interface is a V-NNI interface.

The logical interface type of the source interface of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR
service can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI. The interconnected logical interfaces, however, should
be of the same type.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.3.14 Sink Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)
Description
Set the Sink Interface Type parameter to set the sink interface type of the VLAN switching
table for the E-AGGR service. This parameter can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI.
Set the sink interface type of the E-AGGR service same as the opposite logical interface type.
Otherwise, the E-AGGR service is not available.
Values
V-UNI, V-NNI -

Value Description
V-UNI Indicates that the sink interface is a V-UNI interface.
V-NNI Indicates that the sink interface is a V-NNI interface.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
624
The logical interface type of the sink interface of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR
service can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI. The interconnected logical interfaces, however, should
be of the same type.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.4 CES Service Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring CES services.
A.4.1 Packet Loading Time (us)
Description
The Packet Loading Time (us) parameter specifies the packet loading duration.
The efficiency of packet loading can be improved after the packet loading time is set.
The packet loading time affects the number of frames of E1 signals in each packet.
Values
125-5000 1000 us

The value of the packet loading time ranges from 125 to 5000 in steps of 125.
The default bandwidth for a PW that transmits an CES service is 3 Mbit/s. If Packet Loading
Time (us) is set to 125 or 250, and if RTP Header is set to Enable Huawei RTP or Enable a
Standard RTP, the bandwidth for a PW is 4 Mbit/s.
The packet loading time is closely related to the jitter compensation buffering time. The jitter
compensation buffering time must be greater than double packet loading time.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
625
Before changing the parameter value of a PW, you need to ensure that the PW is not bound with
the service. After the change, you need to bind the PW with the service, and then check whether
the parameter value is changed.
Related Information
If the default value of the packet loading time is 1000 ms/packet, because the rate of E1 signals
is 8000 frames/s, the number of the frames in each packet is: 8000 frames/s * 1000 ms/packet
= 8 frames.
A.4.2 RTP Header
Description
The RTP Header parameter specifies whether the RTP header function is enabled.
The RTP header is used to load clock signals.
Figure A-1 RPT Header Format
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 6 5
V P X CC M PT Sequence Number
Timestamp
Synchronization Source(SSRC) Identifiers
Contributing Source(CSRC) Identifiers

Set Version (V) to 2. Set Padding (P), Header Extension (X), CSRC Count (CC), and Marker
(M) to 0.
Payload type (PT):
l PT values are allocated to each direction of a PW, and the PT values are in a dynamic value
range. The receive and transmit directions of a PW can share a PT value. Different PWs
can share a PT value.
l The PE on the upstream PW puts the allocated PT value in the PT field of the RTP header.
l The PE on the upstream PW can detect exceptional packets according to the received PT
value.
The sequence number must be the same as the serial number in the CESoPSN control word.
The timestamp is used for carrying the time information in the network. Two timestamp
generation modes are as follows:
l Absolute mode: The TDM circuit can restore clock information and upstream PE sets the
timestamp according to the clock. The timestamp is closely related to the serial number.
All equipment supporting CESoPSN must support the absolute mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
626
l Differential mode: The PE on the PW receives high-quality synchronization clock source,
which is used to generate the timestamp. The timestamp indicates the difference between
the common clock source and the TDM circuit clock. The differential mode is optional.
The synchronization source identifiers are used for detecting errored connections.
The adaptive clock recover (ACR) is supported only when the RTP header is enabled.
Values
Disable, Enable the Huawei RTP, Enable
a Standard RTP
Disable

Value Description
Disable Indicates that the RTP is disabled.
Enable Huawei RTP Indicates that the Huawei RTP is enabled.
Enable a Standard RTP Indicates that a standard RTP is enabled.

The default bandwidth for a PW that transmits an CES service is 3 Mbit/s. If Packet Loading
Time (us) is set to 125 or 250, and if RTP Header is set to Enable Huawei RTP or Enable a
Standard RTP, the bandwidth for a PW is 4 Mbit/s.
A.4.3 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us)
Description
The Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us) parameter specifies the size of the jitter buffer.
The jitter compensation buffering time is configured to absorb jitters on the network side.
The jitter compensation buffering time affects the delay of services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
627
If the jitter compensation buffering time is set, the subsequent operations are performed after
the system has received packets for more than a half of the jitter compensation buffering time.
Values
125-64000 8000 us

The value of the jitter compensation buffering time ranges from 125 to 64000 in steps of 125.
The packet loading time is closely related to the jitter compensation buffering time. The jitter
compensation buffering time must be greater than double packet loading time.
Related Information
The principle of delays on the network side and jitters are as follows.
Total delays of CES services include:
l TDM transmission time (can be neglected)
l Packet encapsulation duration (packet loading duration)
l Packet processing and forwarding duration
l Packet transmission duration on Ethernet links
Assume that the interval between the arrival time of packet 1 and packet 2 is T. Encapsulation
of packet 1 is completed at t(0). After t1, packet 1 is processed and forwarded to the opposite
end. Encapsulation of packet 2 begins at t(0) and is completed after tp. Then, after t2, packet 2
is processed and forwarded to the opposite end. T = (tp + t2) - t1 = tp + (t2 - t1), that is,
transmission time difference between packet 1 and 2 equals the sum of packet loading time and
transmission time of the packets 1 and 2.
The interval between the arrival time of two packets is called jitters on the network side.
The more serious the delay jitter on the network side, the more system resource occupied to
smooth the jitters.
The working principle of the jitter buffer is as follows.
The jitter buffer is in the egress direction (from the network side to the TDM side) of the link.
Packets are transmitted on the network side and received periodically on the TDM side. The
packets received on the network side are burst packets, E1 services received on the TDM side
are constant data streams.
If the jitter compensation buffering time is set, after the system has received packets for a half
of the jitter compensation buffering time, the subsequent operations are performed. The attributes
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
628
of a jitter buffer include depth and delay. When configuring advanced attributes of PW on the
NMS, the jitter compensation buffering time is the depth of a jitter buffer. If the depth of a jitter
buffer is 8000 ms, the subsequent operations are performed after the jitter buffer has received
packets for 4000 ms. Therefore, even the packets from the network side haves jitters, the jitter
buffer stabilizes the downstream data streams.
The jitter compensation buffering time varies with network conditions. If the delays or jitters of
a network are large, the jitter compensation buffering time needs to be set to a greater value, and
therefore, the delay of the link is prolonged. If the network-side performance is stable with a
fixed delay, the size of the jitter buffer can be adjusted to approach the packet loading time to
decrease the delay of the link, In this manner, the delay of the entire link is increased to greater
than maximum interval between the arrival time of packet 1 and packet 2.
A.4.4 Clock Mode
Description
The Clock Mode parameter specifies the re-timing mode of a port.
The E1 signal can be output with the 2M clock from cross-connect boards or upstream services,
instead of the clock from the internal phase-locked loop, as the reference clock. If the tributary
clock is of inferior quality, this parameter is set to use the external clock from the cross-connect
board for tributary re-timing.
The clock mode affects the reference clock for outputting E1 signals.
Values
Master Mode, Slave Mode, Line Clock Mode Master Mode

Value Description
Master Mode Indicates that the internal clock is adopted.
Slave Mode Indicates that the clock from ACR is adopted.
Line Clock Mode Indicates that the clock from line boards is
adopted.

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
629
Only the slave mode supports the adaptive clock recover (ACR) function.
The parameters of a PW can be modified before the PW is bound with services, but can be
verified after the PW is bound with services.
A.5 Data Service Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring Ethernet services and SAN services.
A.5.1 Operation Type (EPL Service)
Description
The Operation Type (EPL Service) parameter specifies whether to add, strip, translate or
transparently transmit VLAN labels for service packets at a port when Service Type is set to
EVPL(QinQ).
After you select an operation type, the system performs the relevant operation.
Values
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
l For bidirectional services, the options are as
follows:
Add S-VLAN
Transparently Transmit C-VLAN
Transparently Transmit S-VLAN
Translate C-VLAN
Translate S-VLAN
l For unidirectional services, the options are as
follows:
Add S-VLAN
Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN
Strip C-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN and C-VLAN
Transparently transmit C-VLAN
Transparently transmit S-VLAN
Translate C-VLAN
Translate S-VLAN
Add S-VLAN
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
630
N1EAS2 l For bidirectional services, the options are as
follows:
Add S-VLAN
Translate S-VLAN
l For unidirectional services, the options are as
follows:
Add S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
Translate S-VLAN
Add S-VLAN

Value Description
Add S-VLAN Indicates that the one layer of S-VLAN label is added to the
processed packets in the service.
Translate S-VLAN If the source S-VLAN labels of the packets processed in the
service are translated into the sink S-VLAN labels, the source
S-VLAN label must be different from the sink S-VLAN label.
Transparently transmit S-
VLAN
Forwards the service packets according to the port or S-VLAN.
After the packets are processed in the service, the S-VLAN
labels in the packets are not changed.
Translate C-VLAN If the source C-VLAN labels of the packets processed in the
service are translated into the sink C-VLAN labels, the source
C-VLAN labels must be different from the sink C-VLAN labels.
Transparently transmit C-
VLAN
Forwards the service packets according to the port or C-VLAN.
After the packets are processed in the service, the C-VLAN
labels in the packet are not changed.
Add S-VLAN and C-
VLAN
Indicates that the C-VLAN and S-VLAN labels are added to the
packets processed in the service.
Strip C-VLAN Strips the C-VLAN label.
Strip S-VLAN Strips the S-VLAN label.
Strip S-VLAN and C-
VLAN
Strips the S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
631
Select a proper item according to network planning and service model.
None.
A.5.2 Service Type (EPL Service)
Description
The Service Type (EPL Service) parameter specifies the Ethernet private line service type.
Values
N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EGT2,
N2EGT2, R1EFT4
EPL EPL
N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N2EMR0,
N2EGR2, N1EFS0A, N1EMS2
EPL, Transit(MPLS), EVPL
(MPLS)
EPL
N4EGS4, N1EAS2
EPL, EVPL(QinQ) EPL

Value Description
EPL Indicates the transparent transmission service or the VLAN
private line service.
Transit(MPLS) Indicates the Ethernet virtual private line service of switching
MPLS labels.
EVPL(QinQ) Indicates the Ethernet QinQ virtual private line service.
EVPL(MPLS) Indicates the Ethernet virtual private line service of adding or
deleting MPLS labels.

Select a service type as required.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
632
None.
A.5.3 Encapsulation Format of P Port (Network Attributes)
Description
Encapsulation Format of P Port (Network Attributes) indicates that the board supports
receiving of data packets in the MPLS encapsulation format and normal Ethernet data packets.
The port needs to process different types of packets in different ways, so you need to set the port
to a PE port or a P port. The PE port is not configured with the encapsulation format, while the
P port is configured with the encapsulation format. The P port indicates a port for connecting
the equipment of the network provider, so the P port receives data packets in the MPLS
encapsulation format. You can set the packet encapsulation format of the P port by running the
configuration command.
If the encapsulation format of the data packet that enters the port is inconsistent with the
configured encapsulation format of the port, the data packet is discarded.
Values
MartinioE, stack VLAN MartinioE

Value Description
MartinioE Figure A-2 shows the encapsulation format of MartinioE.
Stack VLAN Figure A-3 shows the encapsulation format of Stack VLAN.

The user can choose an encapsulation format according to the requirements of the service.
Different encapsulation formats support different types of data packets. When the encapsulation
format is inconsistent with the type of the receive data packet, the data packet is discarded. When
configuring services, the user needs to make sure that the encapsulation format of the port is
consistent with the type of the data packet that is transmitted by the interconnected equipment.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
633
Related Information
Figure A-2 Encapsulation format of MartinioE
DA SA
6 6
0x8847
2
VC
4
Tunnel
4
Ethernet Data
N

Figure A-3 Encapsulation format of Stack VLAN
DA SA VLAN TAG 0x8100 VLAN L3Data

A.5.4 C-VLAN and S-VLAN
Description
The C-VLAN and S-VLAN parameter specifies the two types of VLAN tags defined in the
QinQ service and IEEE 802.1ad. C-VLAN is taken as the client VLAN tag. S-VLAN is taken
as the service VLAN tag. C-VLAN Tag (C-TAG) indicates the VLAN tag on the client side,
and S-VLAN Tag (S-TAG) indicates the VLAN tag at the service layer of the carrier.
DMAC SMAC S-VLAN C-VLAN Data FCS
6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes - 4 bytes

Values
Empty, 1-4095 Empty

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
634
Value Description
Empty Indicates that the port does check the C-VLAN/S-VLAN. The
services are forwarded according to the port.
1-4095 Indicates that the port checks the C-VLAN/S-VLAN. The
services are forwarded according to the port and C-VLAN/S-
VLAN.

Select the value according to the network. Generally, select C-VLAN and S-VLAN allocated
by the carrier.
None.
A.5.5 VLAN ID (For Creation of Ethernet Virtual Private Lines)
Description
VLAN ID-- stands for virtual local area network identifier. If port+VLAN is selected in the
policy of using a port, you can select different VLAN IDs (1-4095) to represent different Ethernet
services.
Values
1 to 4095 -

l The value range is relevant to the encapsulation format of the P port (Per-NE configuration).
In the case of Martinio E, the value ranges from 16 to 1023. In the case of stack VLAN,
the value ranges from 1 to 4095.
l The VLAN IDs at both ends of a link must be the same. In the case of different Ethernet
services, you can set the VLAN ID to different values.
This parameter is valid only when you set "Flow Type" to "Port+VLAN".
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
635
A.5.6 MAC Address Aging Time / Aging Time Unit
Description
The MAC Address Aging Time parameter specifies the valid duration of a dynamically learnt
MAC address in the MAC address table.
During the specified aging time:
l If no more packets are received from this MAC address, the MAC address is deleted from
the MAC address table.
l If more packets are received from this MAC address, reset the aging time of the MAC
address.
The aging time includes two parts: aging time value and aging time unit.
The parameter value may affect the forwarding efficiency of the EPLAN or EVPLAN service.
l Extremely long aging time results in expiration of the MAC address table in the board. In
this case, the board makes an incorrect decision to filter or forward packets. Consequently,
the forwarding efficiency is affected.
l Extremely short aging time results in frequent refreshing of the MAC address table. In this
case, the destination addresses fail to be found in the MAC address table for the large
quantity of received data packets. The board has to broadcast these data packets to all the
ports. Consequently, the forwarding efficiency is greatly affected.
Values
The value range of the aging time value is as follows:
1-120 5

The value range of the aging time unit is as follows:
Min, Hour, Day Min

The parameter value may affect the forwarding efficiency of the EPLAN or EVPLAN service.
Generally, use the default value.
For example, to set the aging time to 20 days, set the aging time to 20, and then set the aging
time unit to Day.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
636
None.
A.5.7 Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service)
Description
Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service) is used to separate packets between the logical ports in the
network bridge.
In the same VB VLAN filter or plain bridge:
l Communication is available between ports configured with Hub.
l Communication is available between a port configured with Spoke and a port configured
with Hub.
l Communication is unavailable between ports both configured with Spoke.
If Hub/Spoke is set improperly, services may be interrupted or packets may be forwarded to a
wrong user.
Values
Hub, Spoke Hub

Set this parameter according to the isolation domain range of the user.
For example, to make communication available between the headquarters and branch but
unavailable between the branches, Hub is set for the headquarters, and Spoke is set for the
branches. In this case, communication is available between the headquarters and any one of the
branches but unavailable between any two of the branches.
None.
A.5.8 Actual MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service)
Description
Actual MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service) indicates different meanings
for different Ethernet service processing boards.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
637
l For the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4, this parameter indicates the number of MAC addresses that
are dynamically learnt from a VB logical port or VLAN filter. The MAC addresses in the
static MAC address table and forbidden MAC addresses are not included.
l For the N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4, this parameter indicates the number of MAC
addresses that are dynamically learnt from a VLAN filter. The MAC addresses in the static
MAC address table and forbidden MAC addresses are not included.
l For the N2EMR0 and N2EGR2, this parameter indicates the number of MAC addresses
that are dynamically learnt from a VB logical port. The MAC addresses in the static MAC
address table and forbidden MAC addresses are not included.
l For the N1EAS2, this parameter indicates the number of dynamic MAC addresses that are
queried in the VLAN filter.
This parameter is for query only and the system operation is not affected.
Values
For example, for the N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4, if the port dynamically learns five MAC
addresses, the actual capacity of the MAC address is five.
None.
None.
A.5.9 Specified MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN
Service)
Description
Specified MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service) indicates the maximum
number of MAC addresses that are dynamically learnt from the VB logical port or the VLAN
filter. In excess of the maximum number, the source MAC address of the packet that enters the
logical port is not learnt and the packet is discarded.
When the number of addresses reaches the Specified MAC Address Table Capacity value, the
packet that is not listed in the MAC address table is not learnt and forwarded.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
638
Values
Board Name Value Range Default Value Description
N4EFS0, N2EFS4,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2, N3EFS4,
N3EGS2, N5EFS0
l No Limit
l 0-16384
No Limit No Limit indicates
that the MAC
address capacity is
16384.
0-16384 indicates the
allowable size of the
MAC address table,
which specifies
MAC Address
Table Capacity of
the VB logical port or
VLAN filter.
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4
l No Limit
l 0-129535
that the MAC
address capacity is
129535.
0-129535 indicates
the allowable size of
the MAC address
table, which
specifies MAC
Address Table
Capacity of the
VLAN filter.
N2EMR0, N2EGR2 l No Limit
l 0-65535
that the MAC
address capacity is
65535.
0-65535 indicates the
allowable size of the
MAC address table,
which specifies
MAC Address
Table Capacity of
the VB logical port.

The user can specify this parameter for the VB logical port or VLAN filter as required.
For the N4EFS0, N2EFS4, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EMR0 and N2EGR2, this capacity
is related to the number of MAC addresses that are dynamically learnt only. The MAC addresses
in the static MAC address table and forbidden MAC addresses are not included.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
639
A.5.10 Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN Service)
Description
Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN Service) indicates how the bridge learns the MAC
address. Bridge Learning Mode is classified into the shared VLAN learning and independent
VLAN learning modes. The shared VLAN learning mode indicates learning and forwarding
based on the MAC address. The independent VLAN learning mode indicates learning and
forwarding based on the VLAN and MAC address.
The independent VLAN learning mode realizes the functions of broadcast packet constraint and
virtual workgroup and ensures that the data are transmitted safely on the network.
The shared VLAN learning mode indicates the MAC address that is learnt by this VLAN
interface is shared by all the other VLAN interfaces, which reduces the safety of data packets.
Values
IVL, SVL IVL (The bridge type is compliant with IEEE
802.1q or IEEE 802.1ad), SVL (The bridge
type is compliant with IEEE 802.1d)

Value Description
SVL Indicates that in the shared VLAN learning mode, the bridge
learns all the data messages based on the MAC address.
IVL Indicates that in the independent VLAN learning mode, data
packets of different VLAN interfaces are not associated.

The user can set the parameter according to the networking requirements.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
640
A.5.11 Self-learning MAC Address (Ethernet LAN Service)
Description
Self-learning MAC Address (Ethernet LAN Service) indicates the starting MAC address for
the batch query in the address table. The starting MAC address can be the first one in the address
table, or the one where the last query ends.
Values
First Page, Previous Page, Next Page First Page

Value Description
First Page Indicates physical position 0 in the entire address table. There
are at most 20 MAC addresses on every page.
Previous Page Indicates querying the page that precedes the page where the last
query ends.
Next Page Indicates querying the page that follows this page where the last
query ends.

Normally the first page is the one where the first batch query starts, and the one where the second
query starts is the next page.
None.
A.5.12 Tunnel
Description
Tunnel indicates the tunnel ID of this node. a tunnel ID is specified for every new EVPL (MPLS)
or Transit (MPLS) service.
l When the port encapsulation format is MartinioE, the Tunnel flag is the outer flag
encapsulated in MPLS format that identifies a service with the VC flag.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
641
l When the encapsulation format of the port is Stack VLAN, the Tunnel flag is the outer
flag encapsulated in VMAN format.
Values
N5EFS0, N3EGS2, N3EFS4,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
l 0-4095 (Stack VLAN)
l 16-1023 (MartinioE)
-
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2,
N2EFS4
l 0-4095 (Stack VLAN)
l 16-1048575
(MartinioE)
-

The user can set this parameter within the value range as required. The Tunnel value of different
services at the same node, however, cannot be the same.
None.
A.5.13 VC
Description
VC indicates the VC number of the node. A VC number is specified for every new EVPL (MPLS)
service.
l When the port encapsulation format is MartinioE, the VC flag is the inner flag of the MPLS
encapsulation format and identifies a service with the tunnel flag.
l When the port encapsulation format is Stack VLAN, VC is not required.
Values
16-1023 -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
642
You can set this parameter to any value within the value range according to the requirements of
the user. The VC values of different services at the same node, however, cannot be the same.
None.
A.5.14 Operation Type(IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
Description
The Operation Type parameter specifies the mode that the port on the 802.1ad bridge uses to
process the ingress packet.
Different operation types have different effects. Set this parameter according to the actual
networking condition.
Values
Add S-VLAN base for Port, Add S-
VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN,
Mount Port, Mount Port and base for
Port and S-VLAN
Add S-VLAN base for Port

Value Description
Add S-VLAN base for Port Indicates that the S-VLAN is added to all the
ingress packets.
Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN Indicates that the S-VLAN is added to the packets
that carry the specified C-VLAN.
Mount Port Indicates the port mounting and an arbitrary S-
VLAN.
Mount Port and base for Port and S-
VLAN
Indicates the mounting based on port+S-VLAN.
In this case, the S-VLAN needs to be specified.

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
643
A.5.15 Bridge Type
Description
The Bridge Type parameter is applicable only to the EGS4, EMS4, and EAS2 boards that
support the 802.1ad bridge. In the case of the OptiX NG-SDH equipment series of a version
earlier than V100R008, you only need to select the bridge mode (pure bridge or virtual bridge)
to configure the VB. The 802.1d bridge supports the pure bridge and virtual bridge. To identify
the pure bridge and virtual bridge defined previously, VBs are currently classified into three
types, namely, 802.1d, 802.1q, and 802.1ad.
Various types of bridges realize different functions and require different configurations. An
incorrect selection of the bridge type fails to realize the expected functions.
Values
802.1d, 802.1q, 802.1ad 802.1q

Value Description
802.1d The 802.1d bridge is actually the pure bridge defined previously.
In contrast with the virtual bridge type supported by the board,
the 802.1d bridge forwards data based on the MAC address.
When the 802.1d bridge is used, the complex VLAN
management is not required and the management that is similar
to the Layer 2 switch is easier. A customer and a 802.1d bridge
set up the one-to-one relationship. The VLAN is managed by the
customer independently, which does not require the cooperation
of the carrier.
802.1q The 802.1q bridge is actually the virtual bridge defined
previously. The 802.1q bridge forwards data based on VLAN
+MAC. A customer and a VLAN set up the one-to-one
relationship. Services of different VLANs are isolated.
802.1ad The 802.1ad bridge supports the pure bridge and virtual bridge.
That is, the 802.1ad bridge forwards data based on VLAN+MAC
or the MAC address. The application of the 802.1ad bridge can
realize the service switch between the carrier and its users and
can isolate services of different users. In addition, the 802.1ad
bridge can identify the voice service and data service, which
improves the quality of the voice service.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
644
Set this parameter according to the actual service condition of the user.
A.5.16 SAN Service Type
Description
The SAN Service Type parameter specifies the service type at a board service port. This
parameter decides the service type, port transmission rate, and communication mode.
If the service type is different from that of the interconnected equipment, the service is
unavailable.
Values
FC service, FCION service,
ESCON service, DVB-ASI
service, SD-SDI service,
HD-SDI service, Invalid
service
Invalid service
NOTE
For the FCION, ESCON, DVB-ASI SD-SDI, and HD-SDI services,
each service maps a rate. For the FC service, select FC100 or
FC200.

Value Description
FCION service Rate: 1.062 Gbit/s
ESCON service Rate: 200 Mbit/s
DVB-ASI service Rate: 270 Mbit/s
SD-SDI service Rate: 270Mbit/s
HD-SDI service Rate: 1.485Gbit/s
FC service l FC100 Rate: 1.062 Gbit/s
l FC200 Rate: 2.125 Gbit/s

Select a proper service type as required.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
645
A.5.17 Concatenation Level (SAN)
Description
The Concatenation Level (SAN) parameter specifies the VC level that can be bound with a
VCTRUNK port.
If the specified service rate exceeds the rate of concatenated VCTRUNKs, the service is
unavailable. Otherwise, the service is available, but the bandwidth is wasted. Examples are
provided as follows:
If the service rate is set to VC4-4C, the FICON, FC100 or FC200 service is unavailable.
If the service rate is set to VC4-8C, the FC200 service is unavailable.
Values
Valid Value Default Value
VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C -

l To converge DVB-ASI services or ESCON services or SD-SDI services, select VC4-4C.
l To converge FICON services or FC100 services, select VC4-8C.
l To converge FC200 services or HD-SDI services, select VC4-16C.
None.
A.5.18 Enabled Flow Control of FC Port
Description
The Enabled Flow Control of FC Port parameter is valid for the FC100 and FC200 services
only. After this parameter is set, the transmission rate is not affected within the distance of 3000
km (for the FC100 service) or 1500 km (for the FC200 service). This parameter specifies whether
the distance expansion function is enabled.
l If Enabled Flow Control of FC Port is set to Disabled, the service rate in the link is
affected when the FC100 or FC200 service is transmitted over a long distance. For example,
if the CREDIT value is 20 for the storage equipment, and if the storage equipment is more
than 50 km away from the SAN board, the service rate is greatly decreased. When the
distance is between 20 km (for the FC200 service) or 40 km (for the FC100 service), the
buffer of the storage equipment is used up.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
646
l If Enabled Flow Control of FC Port is set to Enabled, the service rate in the link is not
affected when the FC100 or FC200 service is transmitted in a long distance.
l If the settings of the equipment are inconsistent at the two ends, the flow control function
is disabled, and the service is also unavailable.
Values

Value Description
Enabled Enables the flow control function.
Disabled Disables the flow control function.

The Enabled Flow Control of FC Port parameter must be consistent with each other for the
interconnected equipment at the two ends.
None.
A.5.19 Initial Value of CREDIT at the Client Side
Description
The Initial Value of CREDIT at the Client Side parameter specifies the initial credit value for
the boards at the client side. The value 1 maps the transmission distance of 2 km (for the FC100
service) and 1 km (for the FC200 service).
The FC100 service is transmitted in the link and the transmission distance is 10 km at the client
side.
l If the parameter value is less than 5, the service rate in the link is low.
l If the parameter value is not less than 5, the service rate in the link is close to the line speed.
side.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
647
l If the parameter value is not less than 10, the service rate in the link is close to the line
speed.
NOTE
If the credit value is large, the system is not affected. Generally, set it to the maximum value.
Values
0-20 20

The value indicates the buffer size.
1. The credit values at the client side should be consistent with each other for the
interconnected equipment at the two ends. In this case, the uplink rate is consistent with
the downlink rate.
2. This parameter is decided by the transmission distance at the client side. For the FC100
service, the value 0.5 maps the transmission distance of 1 km. For the FC200 service, the
value 1 maps the transmission distance of 1 km.
3. Generally, set it to 20.
None.
A.5.20 Initial Value of CREDIT at the WAN Side
Description
The Initial Value of CREDIT at the WAN Side parameter specifies the initial credit value for
the boards at the WAN side. The value 1 maps the transmission distance of 2 km (for the FC100
service) and 1 km (for the FC200 service).
side.
speed.
side.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
648
speed.
NOTE
If the credit value is large, the system is not affected. Generally, set it to the maximum value.
Values
0-1500 1500

The value indicates the buffer size.
1. The credit values at the WAN side need to be consistent with each other for the
interconnected equipment at the two ends. In this case, the uplink rate is consistent with
the downlink rate.
2. This parameter is decided by the transmission distance at the WAN side. For the FC100
service, the value 0.5 maps the transmission distance of 1 km. For the FC200 service, the
value 1 maps the transmission distance of 1 km.
3. Generally, set it to 1500.
None.
A.6 ETH OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the ETH-OAM function.
A.6.1 CC Test Transmit Period(Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The source end MEP constructs the CC frames, and then transmits them periodically to the
destination MEP. After the destination MEP receives the CCM messages from the source end,
the CC check function of the source MEP is directly started. Within a certain period (3.5 times
of the transmission period), if the destination MEP does not receive the CC packets from the
source end, an alarm is automatically reported. The CC Test Transmit Period parameter
indicates the transmission period of the unidirectional connectivity check.
After the CC check is started, a portion of the bandwidth on the port is used.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
649
Values
3.33ms, 10ms, 100ms, 1s, 10s, 1m, 10m 1s

It is recommended that you use three period values, that is, 3.33 ms for protection switching,
100 ms for performance check, and 1s for connectivity check. The configuration should comply
with user requirements. If the fast check is required, set to 3.33 ms. Hence, the fault can be
detected quickly. The bandwidth used, however, descends with the period value.
A.6.2 Maintenance Domain Level(Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The Maintenance Domain Level parameter indicates the level of the maintenance domain
(MD). The MD level restricts the usage scope of the OAM.
In one MD, the OAM packets at the same MD level can be normally transmitted and received.
The OAM packets at a higher MD level are not processed, but are transparently transmitted. The
OAM packets at a lower MD level are directly discarded.
Values
0-7 4

The following table lists descriptions of each value. You can also define the maintenance scope
for an MD level as required.
Value Description
0 Operator
1 Operator
2 Operator
3 Service Provider
4 Service Provider
5 Customer
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
650
Value Description
6 Customer
7 Customer

"0" indicates the lowest MD level and "7" the highest MD level. The parameter level defines
the maintenance scope of the OAM operations.
None.
Related Information
Before setting this parameter, obtain the information about the MD.
A.6.3 CC Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The CC Status parameter indicates whether the CC check function of this MEP is activated.
If the CC is activated, the bandwidth is used. Otherwise, the bandwidth is not used.
Values
Active, Inactive Active

If the check is needed, select Active. Otherwise, select Inactive.
A.6.4 Service Name(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The Service Name parameter indicates the type of the service to be detected by the OAM during
the creation of an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
651
Values
A character string of not more than 64
characters
-

None.
None.
A.6.5 Service Type(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The Service Type parameter indicates the type of the service to be detected by the OAM during
the creation of an MA.
Values
E-Line, E-LAN, E-AGGR -

Value Description
E-Line Indicates the Ethernet private line service.
E-LAN Indicates the Ethernet private network service.
E-AGGR Indicates the Ethernet aggregation service.

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
652
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.6 Activation Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The Activation Status parameter indicates whether to send the CC packet. The CC packet refers
to service connectivity checking packet.
When the activation status is "Active", the NE where the maintenance association end point
(MEP) is located starts to send the CC packet and the receive end, that is, the NE where the
remote maintenance association end point (RMEP) is located checks whether the CC packet is
received. If the receive end fails to receive the CC packet, the receive end reports corresponding
alarms.
For example, if the receive ends fails to receive the CC packet within 3.5 cycles, the receive end
reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the attributes of the received CC packet are inconsistent
with the attributes of the packet in the maintenance association (MA) of the maintenance domain
(MD), the receive end reports the Mismerge alarm.
When the activation status is "Inactive", the NE where the MEP is does not send any CC packet
and the NE where the RMEP is does not check for an alarm.
Values
Active, Inactive Active

Value Description
Active Indicates that the NE where the MEP is starts to send the CC
packet and the receive end, that is, the NE where the RMEP
is checks whether the CC packet is received. If the receive end
fails to receive the CC packet, the receive end reports
corresponding alarms.
Inactive Indicates that the NE where the MEP is does not send any CC
packet and the NE where the RMEP is does not check for an
alarm.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
653
The activation status is "Active" after the MEP is created on the NE and the service connectivity
can be checked. The activation status can also be set to "Inactive".
None.
Related Information
Before setting this parameter, obtain the information about the MD, MA, MEP and RMEP.
A.6.7 Transmitted Packet Count(Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The Transmitted Packet Count parameter indicates the number of the transmitted loopback
message (LBM).
Values
1-255 3

The time taken ascends with the number of transmitted packets.
None.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
654
A.6.8 Transmitted Packet Length(Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The Transmitted Packet Length parameter indicates the length of the transmitted loopback
message (LBM).
Values
64-1400 64

The default value is 64. Packets of different lengths may have different connectivity test results.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.9 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM) parameter indicates the VLAN
priority in the Ethernet service OAM protocol packets transmitted by the equipment.
Values
0-7 7

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
655
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority, and value 7 indicates the highest priority. By default, value
7, the highest priority, is used.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.10 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address(Ethernet
Service OAM Management)
Description
The Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address parameter indicates the MAC address of
the port where the destination maintenance point (MP) is located.
Values
Any valid destination unicast MAC address -

Indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination MP is located.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.11 Response Maintenance Point ID(Ethernet Service OAM
Management)
Description
The Response Maintenance Point ID parameter identifies the response MP according to the
MAC address.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
656
Values
Indicates the MAC address of the port. -

Indicates the MAC address of the port where the response MP is located.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.12 Hop Count(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The hop count, also called time to live (TTL), is carried with the OAM packets. The Hop
Count parameter indicates the connection from the response MP to the source MP. On the trail
from the source MP to the destination MP, the hop count for the packets decreases by one when
the packets pass through each maintenance intermediate point (MIP). For example, the packets
pass through one MIP and reach the response MP, the returned hop count is 1. The maximum
value of the Hop Count parameter is 64. If the packets pass through 64 MPs and fail to reach
the response MP, the OAM packets are discarded. In this case, value "/" is returned.
Values
1-64, / /

The Hop Count parameter cannot be set. When the loopback test (LT) is complete, a value is
returned. When the OAM packets pass through 64 MPs and fail to reach the response MP, the
"/" value is returned.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
657
None.
Related Information
None.
A.6.13 Test Result(Ethernet Service OAM Management)
Description
The Test Result parameter indicates the trail information about the link connection from the
source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point during the LT test. If the trail
from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point cannot be obtained, the
operation failure information is reported. If the trail from the source maintenance point to the
destination maintenance point transits the intermediate equipment or destination equipment, the
operation success information is reported.
Values
Character string -

None.
A.7 ETH-OAM Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the ETH-OAM function.
A.7.1 MP ID (Ethernet OAM)
Description
The MP ID (Ethernet OAM) specifies the flag that uniquely identifies a maintenance point.
The bytes from higher bits to lower bits are respectively described here. The first byte indicates
the network number. The second byte indicates the number of the node in the local network.
The third and forth bytes indicate the ID of the maintenance point on the network node. The
maintenance point ID must be unique in the entire network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
658
Values
00-00-0001 to FF-FF-FF00 00-00-0001

The maintenance point ID must be unique in the entire network. Moreover, the U2000 can check
whether the maintenance point ID is duplicate.
None.
A.7.2 Maintenance Point Type (Ethernet OAM)
Description
The Maintenance Point Type (Ethernet OAM) specifies the maintenance point type defined
in IEEE 802.1ag. MEP stands for Maintenance association End Point, and MIP stands for
Maintenance association Intermediate Point.
Values
MEP, MIP MEP

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
659
A.7.3 CC Status (Ethernet OAM)
Description
The CC Status (Ethernet OAM) parameter specifies whether to activate the connectivity check
(CC) function at a maintenance point.
After the CC function is activated, the maintenance point starts the CC. If the check is initially
successful, the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS alarm is reported if a CC failure occurs later.
Values
Activate, Inactivate Inactivate

To start the connectivity check, activate the CC function at a maintenance endpoint.
To stop the connectivity check, deactivate the CC function.
The CC function can be activated at a maintenance endpoint only.
A.7.4 CC Activate Flag
Description
The CC Activate Flag parameter specifies whether the CC function is enabled. This function
helps users check the link connectivity.
When the CC function is enabled, a CC cell is inserted every second if no user cells are
transmitted from the CC source end. In this case, the CC_LOC alarm is reported if no user cells
or CC cells are received at the CC sink end within a period ranging from 3s to 4s.
Values
Deactivate, Source activate,
Sink activate, Source + sink
activate
Deactivate

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
660
Value Description
Deactivate Indicates that the CC function is disabled.
Source activate Indicates that the local end with the CC function enabled
functions as the source end, that is, the end that initiates the
CC test by inserting the CC cell.
Sink activate Indicates that the local end with the CC function enabled
functions as the sink end, that is, the end that determines the
normal connectivity by receiving the CC cell.
Source + sink activate Indicates that the CC function is enabled at the source end
and at the sink end. That is, the local end inserts the CC cell
to initiate the CC check for the opposite end and receives the
CC cell and user cell inserted by the opposite end. In this case,
the local end functions as the sink end and source end.

A.7.5 Test Result (LB and LT Test)
Description
The Test Result (LB and LT Test) parameter specifies the result derived from the LB or LT
test each time.
Values
Succeeded, Failed -

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
661
A.7.6 Responding MP Type (Ethernet LT Test)
Description
The Responding MP Type (Ethernet LT Test) parameter specifies the type of the responding
maintenance point in each LT test.
Values
MEP, MIP, Unknown Unknown

None.
The responding maintenance point must return the type, which is specified when this
maintenance point is created.
A.7.7 Hop Count (Ethernet LT Test)
Description
The Hop Count (Ethernet LT Test) parameter specifies the number of hops from the
maintenance source endpoint to a maintenance intermediate point, namely, the number of
responding intermediate points from the maintenance source point to a certain responding point.
As shown in Figure A-4, MEP1 and MEP2 are the maintenance endpoints. MIP1, MIP2, MIP3
and MIP4 are the maintenance intermediate points. In this case, the number of hops from MEP1
to MEP2 is 5, and that from MEP1 to MIP3 is 3.
Figure A-4 An example of number of hops

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
662
Values
If the value of Hop Count is 2, there are two hops.
None.
None.
A.7.8 Send Mode (Ping Test)
Description
The Send Mode parameter specifies the transmission mode of the ping packet.
Values
Burst Mode, Continue Mode Burst Mode

Value Description
Burst Mode Indicates that a certain number of ping packets are
transmitted at one time.
Continue Mode Indicates that ping packets are continuously transmitted.

To check whether the link communication is available, set this parameter to Burst Mode to
transmit several ping packets at one time. To locate the fault on the link, set this parameter to
Continue Mode to continuously transmit ping packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
663
A.7.9 Packet Length (Ping Test)
Description
The Packet Length (Ping Test) parameter specifies the maximum length of the Ping packets if
the Ping operation is initiated at a maintenance endpoint.
Values
64-1522, in step length of 1 64 Byte

Set this parameter according to the expected frame length.
None.
A.7.10 Timeout (Ping Test)
Description
The Timeout (Ping Test) parameter specifies the waiting period in which no response message
is received from the opposite end after a maintenance point initiates the Ping test. In this case,
the maintenance point regards that the Ping test fails. This waiting period is called the Ping
timeout time.
After initiating the Ping test, the maintenance point returns a Ping timeout message if it fails to
receive the response message from the opposite end when the Ping timeout time is reached.
Values
3-60, in step length of 1 5 Second

Set this parameter to a lower value if the requirement is high for the response time.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
664
Set this parameter to a higher value if the requirement is low for the response time.
The values of Timeout and Ping Attempts decides the longest duration required to perform the
Ping test.
A.7.11 Time To Live
Description
The Time To Live parameter specifies the time to live. Currently, the Ping or performance test
is carried out in the equipment that is directly connected. For this reason, this parameter is always
set to 128.
Values

None.
None.
A.7.12 Delay
Description
The Delay parameter specifies the hold-off period from the time when packets are transmitted
to the time when packets are received in each OAM Ping or performance test.
Values
0-Timeout time - ms

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
665
None.
The delay involves the minimum delay and the maximum delay. For details, refer to A.7.14
Max. Delay and A.7.15 Min. Delay.
A.7.13 Average Delay
Description
The Average Delay parameter specifies the average delay in each OAM Ping or performance
test.
This parameter shows the overall responding speed of the opposite end.
Values
In each Ping test, set the number of Ping attempts to 4. The actual test results are as follows:
For the first Ping attempt, the delay is 100 ms.
For the second Ping attempt, the delay is 200 ms.
For the third Ping attempt, the delay is 300 ms.
The forth Ping attempt fails because of timeout.
In this case, the average delay is as follows:
Average delay = (100 + 200 + 300) / 3 = 200 ms
None.
For the description of Delay, refer to A.7.12 Delay.
A.7.14 Max. Delay
Description
The Max. Delay parameter specifies the maximum delay in each Ping or performance test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
666
Values
0-Timeout time - ms

None.
None.
A.7.15 Min. Delay
Description
The Min. Delay parameter specifies the minimum delay in each Ping or performance test.
Values
0-Timeout time - ms

None.
None.
A.7.16 Detect Attempts
Description
The Detect Attempts parameter specifies the detection attempts for performing performance
detection defined in IEEE 802.1ag.
If the value of Detection Count is larger, the test result is more accurate in each performance
detection test. In this case, more system resources are used, and longer time is consumed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
667
Values
1-1000, in step length of 1 1 Attempt

Set this parameter to a proper value according to the test accuracy and the system resource used
in the test.
None.
A.7.17 Send Direction (Ethernet Test)
Description
Send Direction (Ethernet Test) indicates the transmit direction of the test packet.
Values
SDH Direction, / /

Value Description
SDH Direction, / Indicates that the test packet is transmitted from the VC
trunk port to the SDH side.
/ Indicates that the parameter is invalid.

This parameter is valid and displayed as SDH Direction only when Send Mode is set to Burst
Mode or Continue Mode. This parameter is displayed as / when Send Mode is set to
Disabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
668
A.7.18 Error Frame Monitor Window(ms)
Description
The Error Frame Monitor Window(ms) parameter specifies the period during which the
number of error frames received at the port exceeds the specified upper threshold. In this case,
a link event alarm is reported.
After you set the Error Frame Monitor Threshold and Error Frame Monitor Window
(ms) parameters, a link event alarm is reported if the actual number of error frames in the link
exceeds the specified threshold.
Values
1000-60000, in step length of 100 1000 ms

Set this parameter according to the actual port rate and the monitoring period.
Make sure that the value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold is not greater than the maximum
number of frames received at the port within the time specified in Error Frame Monitor
Window (ms).
To set Error Frame Monitor Window (ms), set Error Frame Monitor Threshold. Moreover,
set Port Rate. For details, refer to the description of the Error Frame Period Window
(Frame) parameter.
A.7.19 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries)
Description
The Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries) parameter specifies the upper threshold of
error frames received at the port. In this case, a link event alarm is reported.
After you set the Error Frame Monitor Threshold and Error Frame Monitor Window
(ms) parameters, a link event alarm is reported if the actual number of error frames in the link
exceeds the specified threshold.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
669
Values
1-4294967295 (in step length of 1) 2 Frame

If higher link performance is required, set the threshold to a lower value. Otherwise, set the
threshold to a higher value.
Make sure that the value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold is not greater than the maximum
number of frames received at the port within the time specified in Error Frame Monitor
Window (ms).
To set Error Frame Monitor Threshold, set Error Frame Monitor Window (ms). Moreover,
set Port Rate. For details, refer to the description of the Error Frame Period Window (Frame)
parameter.
A.7.20 Error Frame Period Window (Frame)
Description
The Error Frame Period Window (Frame) parameter specifies the received N frames in which
the number of error frames reach the specified upper threshold. In this case, a link event alarm
is reported.
After you set the Error Frame Period Window (Frame) and Error Frame Period Threshold
(Frame) parameters, a link event alarm is reported if the number of error frames received within
a certain period reaches the specified upper threshold.
Values
Maxpps/10-Maxpps*60, in step length
of 1
Maxpps Frame

Set this parameter according to the actual data frame transmission rate and the frames. If the
data transmission rate is high, set this parameter to a higher value. Otherwise, set this parameter
to a lower value.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
670
The value range depends on the port rate.
Related Information
Maxpps: indicates the maximum number of frames per second.
Specifically,
l If the port rate is 10 Mbit/s, the Maxpps value is 14880.
l If the port rate is 10 Gbit/s, the Maxpps value is 14880000.
According to the rule of Maxpps/10 < Error Frame Period Window < Maxpps*60, you know
the value range of the Error Frame Period Window (Frame) parameter for a certain port rate.
A.7.21 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Frame)
Description
The Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Frame) parameter specifies the received N frames in
which the number of error frames reach the specified upper threshold. In this case, a link event
alarm is reported.
After you set the Error Frame Period Window (Frame) and Error Frame Period Threshold
(Frame) parameters, a link event alarm is reported if the number of error frames received within
a certain period reaches the specified upper threshold.
Values
1-892800000, in step length of 1 1 Frame

None.
None.
A.7.22 Error Frame Second Window(s)
Description
The Error Frame Second Window(s) parameter specifies the error frame second when any
error frames are received at the port within one second. If the error frame seconds within a certain
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
671
time period reach the specified upper threshold, link event alarms are reported. The time period
in which error frames are received is called the error frame second window.
After you set the Error Frame Second Window (s) and Error Frame Second Threshold (s)
parameters, link event alarms are reported if the actual error frame seconds in the link reach the
specified upper threshold.
Values

Set this parameter according to the monitoring time period.
Make sure that the value of Error Frame Second Window (s) is not less than that of Error
Frame Second Threshold (s).
Set the Error Frame Second Window (s) parameter together with the Error Frame Second
Threshold (s) parameter.
A.7.23 Error Frame Second Threshold(s)
Description
The Error Frame Second Threshold(s) parameter specifies the second during which error
frames are received at the port. If the error frame seconds within a certain time period reach the
specified upper threshold, a link event alarm is reported. The upper threshold is called the error
frame second threshold.
After you set the Error Frame Second Threshold (s) parameter, link event alarms are reported
if the actual error frame seconds in the link reach the specified upper threshold.
Values

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
672
None.
A.7.24 Enable OAM Protocol
Description
The Enable OAM Protocol parameter specified whether the end-to-end OAM protocol
(namely, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol) is enabled at a port.
Values

None.
None.
A.7.25 OAM Working Mode
Description
The OAM Working Mode parameter specifies a negotiation mode defined in IEEE 802.3ah. It
involves two modes: Passive and Active.
Before IEEE 802.3ah is enabled, the local and opposite ends fail to negotiate with each other if
OMA Working Mode is set to Passive.
Values
Active, Passive Active

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
673
Value Description
Active Indicates that a port actively transmits the IEEE 802.3 ah
packets.
Passive Indicates a port transmits the IEEE 802.3 ah packets to
the opposite end only after receiving IEEE 802.3 ah
packets from the opposite end.

None.
None.
A.7.26 Remote Alarm Support for Link Event
Description
The Remote Alarm Support for Link Event parameter specifies whether to report the detected
link events (for example, Error Frame Period Threshold, Error Frame Monitor
Threshold, and Error Frame Second Threshold) to the opposite end.
After the Remote Alarm Support for Link Event parameter is set to Enabled, link event alarms
are displayed in the opposite equipment if any link events occur.
Values

None.
None.
A.7.27 Unidirectional Operation
Description
The Unidirectional Operation parameter specifies the hardware capability. If a port fails at the
receive end, but can transmit data frames at the transmit end, it has the capability of performing
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
674
unidirectional operations. Otherwise, it does not have the capability of performing unidirectional
operations.
The unidirectional operation function specified in IEEE 802.3ah refers to whether the hardware
performs unidirectional operations if it has the capability of performing unidirectional
operations.
If the hardware does not have the capability of performing unidirectional operations, the
unidirectional operation function specified in IEEE 802.3ah is unavailable.
After the Unidirectional Operation parameter is set to Enabled, IEEE 802.3ah packets are still
transmitted to the opposite end if the receive end is faulty.
Values

If the hardware has the capability of performing unidirectional operations and supports
unidirectional software operations, generally, set Unidirectional Operation to Enabled.
This parameter depends on whether the port hardware has the capability of performing
unidirectional operations.
A.7.28 Loopback Status (OAM Parameter)
Description
The Loopback Status (OAM Parameter) parameter specifies whether a port on the board is
in the loopback state. If yes, the port is in the Initiate Loopback at Local or Respond Loopback
of Remote state.
Values
Initiate Loopback at Local, Respond
Loopback of Remote, Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
675
Value Description
Non-Loopback Indicates that the port is not in the loopback state defined
in IEEE 802.3ah.
Initiate Loopback at Local Indicates that the local end can transmit the loopback
packets to the remote end.
Respond Loopback of Remote Indicates that the local end can respond to the loopback
packets from the remote end.

None.
None.
A.8 PW Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring PW services.
A.8.1 Control Word
Description
The Control Word parameter specifies the PW control word usage policy.
The control word is the 4-byte encapsulation packet header. The control word is used to identify
the packet sequence or function as stuffing bits.
Values
No Use, Used First -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
676
Value Description
No use Indicates that the control word is not used.
Used First Indicates that the control word is
recommended.

None.
Related Information
Figure A-5 CW structure of CESoPSN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 6 5
0 0 0 0 L R M FRG LEN Sequence Number

Figure A-6 CW structure of SAToP
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 6 5
0 0 0 RSV FRG LEN Sequence Number 0 L R

Compared with the CESoPSN, the M bit is changed into the RSV bit and the RSV bit is set to
the value 0 in the SAToP.
A.8.2 Control Channel Type
Description
The Control Channel Type parameter specifies the type of channels for transmitting VCCV
packets.
VCCV packets are exchanged between PEs to verify connectivity of PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
677
Values
None, CW CW

Value Description
None Indicates that the control word is not used to
indicate the VCCV control channel information.
CW Indicates that the control word is used to indicate
the VCCV control channel information.

None.
A.8.3 VCCV Verification Mode
Description
The VCCV Verification Mode parameter specifies the verification mode of VCCV packets.
Values
None, Ping Ping

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
678
Value Description
None Indicates that the VCCV function is disabled.
Ping Indicates that the VCCV function is performed in Ping
mode.

None.
A.8.4 Request VLAN
Description
The Request VLAN parameter specifies the ETH request VLAN.
When the PW is in Ethernet tagged mode, the PW adds the request VLAN tag to the packets
that do not carry any VLAN tag from the opposite end.
In the case of static PW, the local equipment adds the VLAN tag to the packets when before PW
encapsulation. In the case of the dynamic PW, the opposite equipment adds the VLAN tag to
the packets before PW encapsulation if the local equipment cannot add the VLAN tag.
Values
1-4095, Non-specified Non-specified

When the Request VLAN parameter is set to Non-specified, the packets with tags are transmitted
transparently, and the packets without tags are added with 0 VLAN tags.
You need to set the PW Type parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
679
A.8.5 Competitive Working Status
Description
The Competitive Working Status parameter specifies the running status of a PW.
Values
Up, Down Up

Value Description
Up The creation of a PW is successful and the PW is working properly.
Down The creation of a PW fails and the PW cannot work properly.

Dynamic supports Down and Static supports Up.
The following table provides the relationship between the queried values of Competitive
Working Status, Local Working Status, and Remote Working Status.
Local Working Status Remote Working Status Competitive Working
Status
Non-Up Non-Up Down
Non-Up Up Down
Up Non-Up Down
Up Up Up

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
680
A.8.6 Associate AC State
Description
The Associate AC State parameter specifies whether to detect the working status of a pseudo
wire (PW) user-network interface (UNI) port (namely, checking whether a fault occurs on a
service PW).
If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment can detect the working status of a PW UNI
port. If a fault on a service PW is detected, the opposite NE reports the MPLS_PW_FDI alarm.
Values

Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the equipment can detect the working status of
a PW UNI port. If a fault on a service PW is detected, the
opposite NE reports the MPLS_PW_FDI alarm.
Disabled Indicates that the equipment does not detect the working
status of a PW UNI port.

When checking whether a fault occurs on a service PW, set this parameter to Enabled.
This parameter is available only when the protection type is set to PW APS.
Related Information
None.
A.8.7 Max.Concatenated Cell Count
Description
The Max.Concatenated Cell Count parameter specifies the maximum number of concatenated
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
681
Values
1-31 10

If Max.Concatenated Cell Count is set to 1, the concatenation function is disabled.
Before changing the settings of PW-related parameters, ensure that the PW is not bound with
any services. After changing the settings of PW-related parameters, bind the PW with services
before checking whether this parameter is successfully set.
A.9 PW APS Protection Associated Parameters (Packet
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring PW APS protection.
A.9.1 Protection Mode
Description
The Protection Mode parameter specifies the protection type of a PW APS protection group.
Values
1+1, 1:1 1+1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
682
Value Description
1+1 The service is dually transmitted to the working and protection channels at
the transmit end and selectively received at the receive end.
1:1 The service is transmitted to the working or protection channel and is
received from the working or protection channel based on the status of the
protection group.

When you create a protection group in 1:1 protection mode, the protection channel cannot be
configured with extra services. For this reason, the actual applications of 1+1 and 1:1 protection
groups are the same, except for the configuration.
None.
A.9.2 Protection Mode
Description
The Protection Mode parameter specifies a protection scheme of services transmitted on pseudo
wires (PWs) based on the service network.
None.
Values
PW APS, Slave Protection
Pair, Unprotected
No Protection

Value Description
PW APS Indicates a network protection mechanism. If the working PW
is faulty, services are automatically switched from the
working PW to the protection PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
683
Value Description
Slave Protection Pair Adds a slave PW automatic protection switching (APS)
protection pair to the existing PW APS protection group for
increase of operation, administration and maintenance
(OAM) resource utilization if the PW that has the same source
and sink needs to be configured with protection.
Unprotected Indicates that no protection is available for services.

Set this parameter according to the service network. For example:
l For an NE, set this parameter to PW APS.
l If the working and protection PWs that transmit the existing services on an NE have the
same source and sink, set this parameter to Slave Protection Pair.
l If services do not need to be protected, set this parameter to No Protection.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.9.3 Switchover Status
Description
The Switchover Status parameter specifies the current status of a protection group. If protection
switching occurs, this parameter also shows the switching causes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
684
Values
Working in working tunnel, Working in protection tunnel,
The current status is forcibly locked, Forcibly switching
status and working in the protection tunnel, Invalid
working tunnel\(because the OAM generates an SF
alarm), Invalid protection tunnel\(because the OAM
generates an SF alarm), Invalid working tunnel\(because
the OAM generates an SD alarm), Invalid protection
tunnel\(because the OAM generates an SD alarm), This
status is displayed while manually switching to the
working tunnel, This status is displayed while manually
switching to the protection channel, In restoration mode,
the working tunnel does not work and switches to the
protection tunnel. Then, the working tunnel works and
services automatically switch to the working tunnel.
Before WTR reaches, this status remains, The switching
is not required, This status is nearly displayed while
practising switching, This status is displayed while
practising switching, This status is remotely displayed
while practising switching.
-

Value Description
Working in working
tunnel
No switching request is received. Services are transmitted on the
working tunnel, and the protection tunnel is in standby state.
Working in protection
tunnel
No switching request is received. Services are transmitted on the
protection tunnel, and the working tunnel is in standby state.
The current status is
forcibly locked
Services are transmitted on the working tunnel all the time, and the
protection tunnel is in standby state.
Forcibly switching
status and working in
the protection tunnel
Services are forcibly switched from the working tunnel to the
protection tunnel. The working tunnel remains in standby state
regardless of whether the protection tunnel is available or not.
Invalid working tunnel\
(because the OAM
generates an SF alarm)
The OAM function detects an SF alarm on the working tunnel,
indicating that the working tunnel fails. Services are transmitted
on the protection tunnel, and the working tunnel is in standby state.
Invalid protection
tunnel\(because the
OAM generates an SF
alarm)
The OAM function detects an SF alarm on the protection tunnel,
indicating that the protection tunnel fails. Services are transmitted
on the working tunnel, and the protection tunnel is in standby state.
Invalid working tunnel\
(because the OAM
generates an SD alarm)
The OAM function detects an SD alarm on the working tunnel,
indicating that signal degrade occurs. Services are transmitted on
the working tunnel, and the protection tunnel is in standby state.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
685
Value Description
Invalid protection
tunnel\(because the
OAM generates an SD
alarm)
The OAM function detects an SD alarm on the protection tunnel,
indicating that signal degrade occurs. Services are transmitted on
the protection tunnel, and the working tunnel is in standby state.
This status is displayed
while manually
switching to the
working tunnel
Services are manually switched from the protection tunnel to the
working tunnel.
while manually
switching to the
protection channel
Services are manually switched from the working tunnel to the
protection tunnel.
In restoration mode, the
working tunnel does not
work and switches to
the protection tunnel.
Then, the working
tunnel works and
services automatically
switch to the working
tunnel. Before WTR
reaches, this status
remains. The switching
is not required.
If APS protection is in revertive mode, before being switched from
the protection tunnel to the working tunnel, services are in waiting
status within the WTR time after the fault on the working tunnel is
rectified. The services are currently transmitted on the protection
tunnel, and the working tunnel is in standby state.
The switching is not
required
If APS protection is in non-revertive mode, services are not
switched from the protection tunnel to the working tunnel after the
fault on the working tunnel is rectified. The services are currently
transmitted on the protection tunnel, and the working tunnel is in
standby state.
This status is nearly
displayed while
practising switching.
The system simulates the condition for triggering a switching
action, but does not issue a command to trigger a real switching
action. Practicing switching tests APS protection performance of
MPLS PWs without interrupting services. The services are
currently transmitted on the working tunnel, and the protection
tunnel is in standby state.
while practising
switching.
The system simulates the condition for triggering a switching
action, but does not issue a command to trigger a real switching
action. Practicing switching tests APS protection performance of
MPLS PWs without interrupting services. The services are
currently transmitted on the protection tunnel, and the working
This status is remotely
displayed while
A reverse request for protection switching is received. Services are
currently transmitted on the working tunnel, and the protection
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
686
Value Description
This status is remotely
displayed while
A reverse request for protection switching is received. Services are
currently transmitted on the protection tunnel, and the working

Protection switching is triggered when any of the following conditions is met: SF, external
switching commands, and WTR expiry.
None.
A.9.4 Protocol Status
Description
The Protocol Status parameter specifies whether the APS protocol of the current protection
group is enabled.
Values
Disabled, Enabled Disabled

Value Description
Disabled Indicates that the APS protocol is disabled.
Enabled Indicates that the APS protocol is enabled.

If the APS protocol of the local NE is Enabled before the APS protocol of the opposite NE is
Enabled, an exception may occur when the opposite NE receives the services. It is recommended
that the APS protocol be enabled after the MPLS APS protection group is configured for both
ends.
When you configure the MPLS APS protection, the default protocol status is Disabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
687
None.
A.9.5 PW Type
Description
The PW Type parameter is used for identifying the type of a service transmitted over a PW. A
PW can transmit multiple types of services.
Values
Ethernet, Ethernet Tag Mode, SATop, CESoPSN Ethernet

Value Description
Ethernet This item is used when an Ethernet service is created. No S_VLAN tag
is added to the service packets.
Ethernet Tag
Mode
This item is used when an Ethernet service is created. S_VLAN tags are
added to the service packets.
SATop This item is used when a CES service is created. It stands for Structure-
Agnostic TDM over Packet. In SAToP mode, the equipment does not
sense any format in the TDM signals. Instead, it regards TDM signals
as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM
signals is emulated. The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are
transparently transmitted.
CESoPSN This item is used when a CES service is created. It stands for Structure-
aware TDM Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network.
In CESoPSN mode, the equipment senses the frame structures, frame
alignment modes, and timeslots in the TDM circuits. The equipment
processes the overheads in and extracts the payloads from the TDM
frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to these payloads in a
specific sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and
visible in packets.

When creating a PW, select the PW type based on the type of the service bound with the PW.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
688
None.
A.10 HQoS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the HQoS function.
A.10.1 Traffic Classification Rule(Policy Management)
Description
The Traffic Classification Rule parameter indicates the rules for classifying service packets.
The necessary parameters should be set for Traffic Classification Rule, that is, Match Type
(required), Logical Relation Between Matched Rules, Match Value (required), and
Wilcard (optional).
Values
Set the traffic classification rule in the following formats:
[Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard]
And Logical Relation Between Matched Rules (the matched packets should meet all the traffic
classification rules)
[Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] & [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] &...& [Match
Type : Match Value : Wilcard]
Or Logical Relation Between Matched Rules: (the matched packets should meet one of the
traffic classification rule)
[Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] | [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] |...| [Match Type :
Match Value : Wilcard]
The traffic classification rules are applicable only to the port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
The character string of the match rule (match type, match value, and wilcard included) can
contain a maximum of 128 bytes.
None.
Related Information
Currently, the equipment cannot identify the IPv6 packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
689
For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Match Type, Match
Value, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.
A.10.2 Match Type(Policy Management)
Description
Each data packet has many feature values such as the IP address, MAC address, and port number.
These feature values can be considered as match types among the traffic classification rules.
Values
Source IP, Destination IP, Source MAC
Address, Destination MAC Address,
Protocol Type, Source Port, Destination Port,
ICMP Packet Type, DSCP Value, IP-
Precedence Value, CVlan ID, CVlan priority,
SVlan ID, SVlan priority, DEI
-

Value Description
Source IP The source IP address is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the source IP address matches is in the
format of [Source IP : Source IP Value : Wilcard].
For example, [Source IP : 192.168.1.1 : 0.0.0.255].
Destination IP The destination IP address is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the destination IP address matches is
in the format of [Destination IP : Destination IP Value : Wilcard].
For example, [Destination IP : 192.168.1.2 : 0.0.0.0].
Source MAC
Address
The source MAC address is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the source MAC address matches is
in the format of [Source MAC Address : Source MAC Address Value :
Wilcard].
For example, [Source MAC Address : 00-e0-fc-54-aa-59 :
00-00-00-00-00-00].
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
690
Value Description
Destination MAC
Address
The destination MAC address is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the destination MAC address matches
is in the format of [Destination MAC Address : Destination MAC
Address Value : Wilcard].
For example, [Destination MAC Address : 00-e0-fc-54-ab-59 :
00-00-00-00-00-00].
Protocol Type The protocol type is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the protocol type matches is in the
format of [Protocol Type : Protocol Type Value].
For example, [Protocol Type : icmp].
Source Port The source port is matched (available when the protocol type is TCP and
UDP).
The traffic classification rule that the source port matches is in the format
of [Source Port : Source Port Value : Wilcard].
For example, [Source Port : 23 : 23].
Destination Port The destination port is matched (available when the protocol type is TCP
and UDP).
The traffic classification rule that the destination port matches is in the
format of [Destination Port : Destination Port Value : Wilcard].
For example, [Destination Port : 80 : 80].
ICMP Packet
Type
The ICMP packet type is matched (available when the protocol type is
ICMP).
The traffic classification type that the ICMP packet type matches is in
the format of [ICMP Packet Type : ICMP Packet Type Value].
For example, [ICMP Packet Type : echo].
DSCP Value The DSCP value is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the DSCP value matches is in the
format of [DSCP Value : Value of DSCP : Wilcard].
For example, [DSCP Value : 7 : 7].
IP-Precedence
Value
The IP-Precedence Value is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the IP-precedence value matches is in
the format of [IP-Precedence Value : Value of IP-Precedence : Wilcard].
For example, [IP-Precedence Value : 6 : 6].
CVlan ID The CVlan ID is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the CVlan ID matches is in the format
of [CVlan ID : CVlan ID Value : Wilcard].
For example, [CVlan ID : 100 : 120].
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
691
Value Description
CVlan priority The CVlan priority is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the CVlan priority matches is in the
format of [CVlan priority : CVlan priority Value : Wilcard].
For example, [CVlan priority : 4 : 6].
SVlan ID The SVlan ID is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the SVlan ID matches is in the format
of [SVlan ID : SVlan ID Value : Wilcard].
For example, [SVlan ID : 100 : 120].
SVlan priority The SVlan priority is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the SVlan priority matches is in the
format of [SVlan priority : SVlan priority Value : Wilcard].
For example, [SVlan priority : 5 : 6].
DEI The DEI is matched.
The traffic classification rule that the DEI matches is in the format of
[DEI : DEI Value].
For example, [DEI : 1].

To process different service packets accordingly (make ACL for packets, apply different
scheduling priorities or discard polices), perform traffic classification for the packets according
to the varied feature values of packets. The feature value that can distinguish the packets
according to requirements is adopted to classify the packets.
For example, user A and user B access to a port. The network should provide services of different
QoS for the two users. Hence, the packets of user A and user B should be distinguished at the
port.
The analysis shows the following:
In the case of the service packets of user A, the prefix of the source IP address is 192.168.1.0
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
In the case of the service packets of user B, the prefix of the source IP address is 192.168.2.0
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
The packets of user A can be distinguished from the packets of user B according to the source
IP address. Hence, two traffic classification rules should be set at the port.
[Source IP : 192.168.1.0 : 0.0.0.255]
[Source IP : 192.168.2.0 : 0.0.0.255]
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
692
Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification Rule, Match
Value, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.
A.10.3 Match Value(Policy Management)
Description
The Match Value parameter indicates the value set for a specific match type among the traffic
classification rules. If certain bits of the match type value (source IP address, for example) are
consistent with the mapping bits of the match value of the traffic classification rule, the packets
match with the traffic classification rule.
Values
Precedence Value, CVlan ID, CVlan priority,
SVlan ID, SVlan priority, DEI
-

Value Description
Source IP Indicates the source IP value when the source IP address matches
the traffic classification rule.
For example, 192.168.1.1
Destination IP Indicates the destination IP value when the destination IP address
matches the traffic classification rule.
For example, 192.168.2.1
Source MAC Address Indicates the source MAC address value when the source MAC
address matches the traffic classification rule.
For example, 00-0f-ef-54-aa-00
Destination MAC
Address
Indicates the destination MAC address value when the destination
MAC address matches the traffic classification rule.
For example, 00-0f-ef-54-ab-00
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
693
Value Description
Protocol Type Indicates the protocol type value when the protocol type matches the
traffic classification rule.
Protocol type range: tcp, udp, icmp, igmp
Source Port Indicates the source port value when the source port (available when
the protocol type is TCP and UDP) matches the traffic classification
rule.
The source port value ranges from 0 to 65535.
Destination Port Indicates the destination port value when the destination port
(available when the protocol type is TCP and UDP) matches the
traffic classification rule.
The destination port value ranges from 0 to 65535.
ICMP Packet Type Indicates the ICMP packet type value when the ICMP packet type
(available whether protocol type is ICMP) matches the traffic
classification rule.
Value range of ICMP packet type:
echo
echo-reply
fragmentneed-DFset
host-redirect
host-tos-redirect
host-unreachable
information-reply
information-request
net-redirect
net-tos-redirect
net-unreachable
parameter-problem
port-unreachable
protocol-unreachable
reassembly-timeout
source-quench
source-route-failed
timestamp-reply
timestamp-request
ttl-exceeded
DSCP Value Indicates the value of DSCP when the DSCP value matches the
traffic classification value.
The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
694
Value Description
IP-Precedence Value Indicates the value of IP-Precedence when the IP-Precedence value
matches the traffic classification value.
The IP-Precedence value ranges from 0 to 7.
CVlan ID Indicates the value of CVlan ID when the CVlan ID matches the
The CVlan ID value ranges from 0 to 4095.
CVlan priority Indicates the value of CVlan priority when the CVlan priority
The CVlan priority value ranges from 0 to 7.
SVlan ID Indicates the value of SVlan ID when the SVlan ID matches the
The SVlan ID vale ranges from 0 to 4095.
SVlan priority Indicates the value of SVlan priority when the SVlan priority
The SVlan priority value ranges from 0 to 7.
DEI Indicates the value of DEI when the DEI matches the traffic
classification value.
The DEI value can be 0 or 1.

The match value of each match type should be within the valid range.
None.
Related Information
For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification
Rule, Match Type, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.
A.10.4 Wildcard(Policy Management)
Description
The Wildcard parameter indicates that the packets need match only a portion of the match
values. The number of digits of the wildcard is consistent with the number of digits of the match
value. After the wildcard is converted to the binary format, digit 0 in the match value should be
matched, but digit 1 need not be considered. In the user packets, if the value of the digit in the
Match Type that the user need consider is equal to the value of the corresponding digit in the
match value. In this case, the user packets match the flow classification rule. Otherwise, the user
packets do not match the flow classification rule.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
695
When the wildcard is set to all "0"s, it indicates that the packets should strictly match the match
value.
NOTE
The digits of the wildcard, user packet match type value, and match type value indicate the digits after the
values of the wildcard, user packet match type value, and match type are converted to the binary format.
The following example helps you understand the parameter.
l If the Match Type is Source IP, the match value is 192.168.1.100. In this case, if the
wildcard is 0.0.0.255, it indicates that all the packets whose source IP address starting from
192.168.1. comply with the flow classification rule.
l If the Match Type is CVLAN Priority, the match value is 7 (the corresponding binary
value is 111). In this case, if the wildcard is 6 (the corresponding binary value is 110), it
indicates that the packets whose CVLAN priorities are 7, 5, 3, and 1 (the corresponding
binary values are 111, 101, 011, and 001) comply with the flow classification rule.
Values
Precedence Value, CVLAN ID, CVLAN
Priority, SVLAN ID, SVLAN Priority, DEI
-

Match Type Description
Source IP Indicates the wildcard value when the source IP address matches.
For example, 0.0.0.255.
Destination IP Indicates the wildcard value when the destination IP address
matches. For example, 0.0.255.255.
Source MAC Address Indicates the wildcard value when the source MAC address
matches.
For example, 00-00-00-00-00-ff.
Destination MAC
Address
Indicates the wildcard value when the destination MAC address
matches.
For example, 00-00-00-00-0f-ff.
Protocol Type Indicates no wildcard.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
696
Match Type Description
Source Port Indicates the wildcard value when the source port matches.
Value range: 0-65535.
Destination Port Indicates the wildcard value when the destination port matches.
ICMP Packet Type Indicates no wildcard.
DSCP Value Indicates the wildcard value when the DSCP value matches.
Value range: 0-63.
IP-Precedence Value Indicates the wildcard value when the IP-Precedence value
matches.
Value range: 0-7.
CVLAN ID Indicates the wildcard value when the CVLAN ID matches.
CVLAN Priority Indicates the wildcard value when the CVLAN priority matches.
Value range: 0-7.
SVLAN ID Indicates the wildcard value when the SVLAN ID matches.
SVLAN Priority Indicates the wildcard value when the SVLAN priority matches.
Value range: 0-7.
DEI Indicates no wildcard.

The wildcard value of each match type should be within its own valid range. When the wildcard
is set to all "0"s, it indicates that the packets should strictly match the match value.
None.
Related Information
For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification
Rule, Match Type, Match Value, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
697
A.10.5 PW Direction(PW Policy)
Description
In the case of one PW, two directions, that is, the direction of entering the network and the
direction of exiting the network, are available. The PW Direction parameter indicates whether
the PW processes one direction or two directions.
If the PW is set to unidirectional, the PW processes the packets in only one direction. If the user
services are bidirectional, the packets in another direction cannot be processed.
Values
Bidirectional, Unidirectional -

Value Description
Bidirectional The PW processes packets in two directions, that is, the
directions of entering and exiting the network.
Unidirectional The PW processes packets that only enter or only exit the
network.

If the PW need to process packets in two directions, that is, the directions of entering and exiting
the network, the value should be set to bidirectional. Otherwise, the value should be set to
unidirectional. Generally, in the case of the broadcast PW, the value should be set to
unidirectional. In the case of unicast PW, the value should be set to bidirectional.
A.10.6 Direction (PW Policy)
Description
The Direction (PW Policy) parameter indicates the direction for the policy application.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
698
Values
Ingress, Egress -

Value Description
Ingress Indicates that the policy application direction is uplink, that
is, from the UNI to the NNI.
Egress Indicates that the policy application direction is downlink,
that is, from the NNI to the UNI.

None.
A.10.7 Duplicated Policy Name(PW Policy)
Description
The Duplicated Policy Name (PW Policy) parameter has the same meaning as the Policy
Name parameter and indicates the policy based on which a new policy is created.
You can apply a specified policy to the original policy. As a result, the service scheduling policy
of the original policy is changed by duplicating the service scheduling policy of the specified
policy.
Values
The Duplicated Policy Name parameter should contain letters or numbers or both with a
maximum length of 64 characters. The characters \ or / are not contained.
For changing the current policy, you can directly duplicate the existed policy that satisfies the
requirement to the current policy. In this case, no extra setting is required for the current policy.
A.10.8 Policy ID(Policy Management)
Description
The Policy ID (Policy Management) parameter identifies a policy.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
699
Values
Policy Type Value Range
Port policy 0-100
V-UNI ingress policy 0-2000
V-UNI egress policy 0-2000
PW policy 0-2000
QinQ policy 0-2000
WFQ scheduling policy 0-256
Port WRED policy 0-7
Service WRED policy 0-127

The IDs of policies of different types can be repeated, whereas the IDs of policies of the same
type must be unique.
A.10.9 Policy Name (Policy Management)
Description
The Policy Name (Policy Management) parameter specifies the name of a policy and thus
identifies a policy. Different policies can have the same policy name.
Values
The policy name should contain letters or numbers or both with a maximum length of 64
characters. The characters \ or / are not supported.
Different policies can have the same policy name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
700
A.10.10 QinQ Link ID(QinQ Policy)
Description
The QinQ Link ID parameter indicates the unique identifier of a QinQ link.
Values
1-4294967295 -

The QinQ Link ID parameter identifies a unique QinQ link. Hence, do not set the same ID for
different QinQ links.
A.10.11 Physical Port ID(QinQ Policy)
Description
The Physical Port ID parameter identifies the physical port that applies the QinQ policy.
Values
Slot number - board name - port number (PORT - number).
None.
A.10.12 S-VLAN ID(QinQ Policy)
Description
The S-VLAN ID parameter is a 12-bit field, indicating the VLAN ID. If a switch supports the
802.1Q protocol, all packets it transmitting contain this 12-bit field. In this case, a packet is
identified by its own VLAN.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
701
Values
1-4094 -

When creating the QinQ, you should define the port and S-LVAN ID. The port and S-LAN ID
cannot be occupied by other services. Moreover, the S-LVAN ID must be set within the valid
range.
A.10.13 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing(Policy
Management)
Description
Set the Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing parameter to enable or disable the traffic
classification bandwidth sharing.
Flow Classification of V-UNI Ingress Policy includes the preset Committed Information
Rate. When packets on multiple V-UNIs that use this policy match this Flow Classification, if
Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing is enabled, the total bandwidth of these flows is
restrained by the CIR set by Flow Classification. If Traffic Classification Bandwidth
Sharing is disabled, on each V-UNI, the flows that match Flow Classification are restrained
by the CIR set by Flow Classification.
Values

Value Description
Disabled It indicates that the traffic classification bandwidth sharing is
disabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
702
Value Description
Enabled It indicates that the traffic classification bandwidth sharing is
enabled.

This parameter is set according to service requirements.
For example, packets on multiple V-UNIs that use a certain V-UNI Ingress Policy match Flow
Classification of this policy. In addition, the service packets of these flows have the same service
features, such as the same destination IP address. In this case, if these service packets need share
the CIR bandwidth set in Flow Classification of this policy, set Traffic Classification
Bandwidth Sharing to Enabled.
When configuring Flow Classification of V-UNI Ingress Policy, set Bandwidth Limit to
Enabled. In addition, the CIR of Flow Classification should be configured. In this case, Traffic
Classification Bandwidth Sharing is valid.
Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see Traffic Classification Rule.
A.10.14 Coloring Mode (V-UNI Ingress Policy)
Description
The Coloring Mode (V-UNI Ingress Policy) parameter specifies the coloring mode of a certain
flow. Therefore, this parameter specifies whether the original color of the packets in this flow
is considered when the CAR processing is performed on these packets.
Values
Color-Blind, Chromatic-Sensitive Color-Blind

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
703
Value Description
Color-Blind Indicates the color blindness mode. The CAR is directly
performed for the user packets, which are marked according
to the CAR result.
Chromatic-Sensitive Indicates the color sensitive mode. In this mode, the original
color of the packet is considered when the CAR processing is
performed. Hence, the green packet is marked green and the
red packet is marked red as preference. In addition, after the
CAR processing is performed, the result is compared with the
original color of the packet and then the packet is marked with
the darker color. The darkness of packet colors in a
descending order is as follows: red, yellow, and green.

After the upstream DS domain marks the service packets accessed into the local DS domain, on
the ingress node of the local DS domain, if the coloration result of the upstream DS domain need
be considered, Chromatic-Sensitive is applicable to the Traffic Classification that matches
the service packets. Otherwise, Color-Blind is applicable.
When the service packets from the upstream DS domain enter the ingress node of the local DS
domain, the color of packets is obtained according to the mapping relation between the packet
priority and color, which is defined in the local DS domain mapping relation. If Coloring
Mode is set to Chromatic-Sensitive, the color of service packets from the upstream DS domain
should be restored. Ensure that the mapping relations of the service packets in the upstream DS
domain and local DS domain are consistent.
A.10.15 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules(V-UNI Ingress
Policy)
Description
When multiple traffic classification rules are set for a flow, set the Logical Relation Between
Matched Rules parameter to specify the logical relations among these traffic classification rules.
Values
And, Or And

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
704
Value Description
And The packet matches the flow only when the packet matches
each traffic classification rule.
Or The packet matches the flow when the packet matches one of
the traffic classification rules.

None.
Before setting the Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameter, set the Traffic
Classification Rule correctly.
A.10.16 Processing Mode(V-UNI Ingress Policy)
Description
The Processing Mode parameter indicates the processing mode for packets of different colors.
Values
Pass, Discard, Remark l Green, yellow: Pass
l Red: Discard

Value Description
Pass Indicates transparently transmitting or directly forwarding the
packet.
Discard Indicates discarding the packet.
Remark Indicates remarking the packet with a different color.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
705
When a network congestion occurs or the color of the packet needs adjusting, packets of different
colors can be configured with different processing modes.
A.10.17 AF1 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)
Description
The QoS scheduling modes include eight queues. The scheduling algorithm is: Schedule the
CS7 queue > schedule the CS6 queue > schedule the EF queue > schedule the AF1-AF4 queues
according to the weights of the queues > schedule the BE queue. The AF1 Schedule Weight
parameter indicates the percentage of the AF1 queue to the weight when the AF1-AF4 queues
are scheduled according to the weight.
Values
1-100 25 %

The bigger the value of the AF1 scheduling weight, the higher is scheduling priority of the AF1
queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller. Reversely,
the smaller the value of the AF1 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling priority of the
AF1 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is bigger.
The sum of values of AF1, AF2, AF3, and AF4 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.
Description
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
706
Values
1-100 25 %

The bigger the value of the AF2 scheduling weight, the higher is the scheduling priority of the
AF2 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller.
Reversely, the smaller the value of the AF2 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling
priority of the AF2 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio
is bigger.
The sum of values of the AF2, AF1, AF3, and AF4 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.
Description
Values
1-100 25 %

is bigger.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
707
Description
Values
1-100 25 %

is bigger.
A.10.21 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED
Policy)
Description
Users can set Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold for a queue. When the
length of a queue is less than the specified value of Discard Lower Threshold, the packet is
not discarded. When the length of a queue is within the range from the specified value of Discard
Lower Threshold to the specified value of Discard Upper Threshold, the weighted random
early detection (WRED) mechanism discards packets at random. When the length of a queue is
more than the specified value of Discard Upper Threshold, the packet is discarded according
to the discard probability that is set by the user.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
708
Values
0-4095 l Red: 1024
l Yellow: 1536
l Green: 2048
256 bytes

When the value of Discard Lower Threshold is smaller, the length of a queue is shorter. The
value of Discard Lower Threshold must not be more than the value of Discard Upper
Threshold.
None.
A.10.22 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED
Policy)
Description
Users can set Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold for a queue. When the
length of a queue is less than the specified value of Discard Lower Threshold, the packet is
not discarded. When the length of a queue is within the range from the specified value of Discard
Lower Threshold to the specified value of Discard Upper Threshold, the weighted random
early detection (WRED) mechanism discards packets at random. When the length of a queue is
more than the specified value of Discard Upper Threshold, the packet is discarded according
to the discard probability that is set by the user.
If Discard Upper Threshold is set to 0, all the packets in this queue are discarded and thus all
the services of this queue are interrupted.
Values
0-4095 l Red: 3072
l Yellow: 3584
l Green: 4095
256 bytes

The value of Discard Upper Threshold cannot be less than the value of Discard Lower
Threshold.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
709
None.
A.10.23 Discard Probability (%) (Service WRED Policy)
Description
The Discard Probability (%) (Service WRED Policy) parameter specifies the ratio of the
packets that are discarded to the total number of packets in a queue when the length of a queue
is more than the specified value of Discard Upper Threshold.
Values
1-100 100 %

The maximum discard probability can be 100%, which indicates that all the packets in a queue
are discarded when the length of the queue is more than the specified value of Discard Upper
Threshold.
A.10.24 PHB (Diffserv domain Management)
Description
The PHB parameter, per hop behavior, indicates a forwarding action applicable on the DS node.
This forwarding action belongs to the per hop forwarding aggregation defined in the DiffServ
domain.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
710
Values
BE, AF11, AF12, AF13, AF21, AF22, AF23, AF31,
AF32, AF33, AF41, AF42, AF43, EF, CS6, CS7
The CoS defines different service
classes:
l CS6-CS7: Highest service
classes applicable to transport of
the signaling.
l EF: Fast forwarding, applicable
to the service traffic with the
shortest delay and low packet
loss ratio, such as the audio
service and video service.
l AF1-AF4: Applicable to the
service traffic that requires a
certain rate, but not a certain
delay or jitter.
l BE: Applicable to the service
traffic that does not require
special processing.

When the equipment in different DS domains is interconnected, the mapping relationship in the
egress direction needs to be configured so that the CoS information can be mapped into the
priority bit of the packet.
None.
A.10.25 Packet Type (Diffserv domain Management)
Description
The Packet Type is used to set the packet type.
Values
cvlan, svlan, mpls-exp, ip-dscp -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
711
Value Description
cvlan Specifies the priority information of the C-VLAN packet.
svlan Specifies the priority information of the S-VLAN packet.
When the DEI is disabled, the CoS mapping is performed only
according to the priority of the S-VLAN packet. When the
DEI is enabled, the DEI bit also indicates the priority. That
is, four bits of a packet indicate the priority.
ip-dscp Specifies the DSCP domain of the IP packet.
mpls-exp Specifies the EXP information of the MPLS packet.

The value setting depends on the packet type.
A.10.26 Committed Information Rate (Kbit/s)
Description
The Committed Information Rate (Kbit/s) parameter specifies the CIR of the queue. The
packets whose rates are less than the CIR can be forwarded. When the rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR, all messages can be forwarded. If the rate of the packets is more than the
CIR, some packets are discarded according to a certain packet discarding policy.
Values
1024-10000000, Unlimited 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFFF is
invalid)
kbit/s

The greater CIR, the higher rate of the traffic, and the more packets forwarded.
It is recommended that the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR.
The CIR is not more than the PIR in each queue.
The CIR equals to the PIR in CS7, CS6, and EF queues.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
712
If the policy is applied to function points, such as PW, port, VUNI, and QINQ, you need to
ensure that the sum of the CIRs in the policies applied to the function point is not more than the
CIR of the function point.
A.10.27 Committed Burst Size (byte)
Description
The Committed Burst Size (byte) parameter specifies the committed burst size.
When the bandwidth is insufficient, some packets cannot be forwarded. Therefore, a buffer is
required to store these packets for forwarding when the bandwidth is sufficient. CBS is the size
of the buffer. When the size of the stored packets is less than the CBS, all these packets can be
forwarded.
Values
64-10000000 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFFF is
invalid)
byte

If the CBS is small, the buffer easily overflows and some packets are discarded when the
bandwidth is insufficient.
The greater the CBS is, the more packets can be buffered when the bandwidth is insufficient,
and the less the packet loss ratio is. The greater the CBS, the more serious the delay jitter when
For the OptiX OSN equipment, the CBS is reserved and cannot be set.
None.
A.10.28 Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)
Description
The Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) parameter specifies the maximum rate of services allowed
by the PIR.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
713
Values
64-10000000 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFFF is
invalid)
(kbit/s)

It is recommended that the PIR be not less than the CIR.
None.
A.10.29 Peak Burst Size (byte)
Description
The Peak Burst Size (byte) parameter specifies the size of the PBS.
When the bandwidth is insufficient and the CBS buffer is full, the packets that cannot be stored
in the CBS buffer are stored in the PBS buffer. When the PBS buffer is full, the extra packets
are discarded. The packets stored in the PBS buffer may also fail to be forwarded. The packets
whose rates are more than the CIR and less than the PIR attempt to preempt the remaining
bandwidth. The packets are forwarded only when they preempt the remaining bandwidth.
Values
64-10000000 4294967295 (FFFFFFFFFF is
invalid)
byte

Although the packets in the PBS buffer may also fail to be forwarded, the PBS buffer decreases
the packet loss ratio.
The greater the PBS, the less the packet loss ratio, and the more serious the delay jitter when
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
714
None.
A.10.30 EXP
Description
The EXP parameter specifies the field in the MPLS packets for identifying the priority of these
MPLS packets.
E-LSP is used to set the EXP. 77 is the highest priority.
Values
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None None

Value Description
0 The values 0-7 correspond to the eight levels of the CoS policy. The
value 0 corresponds to BE.
value 1 corresponds to AF1.
value 5 corresponds to EF.
value 6 corresponds to CS6.
value 7 corresponds to CS7.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
715
The higher the value of the EXP parameter, the higher the priority of the packets.
None.
A.10.31 LSP Mode
Description
The LSP Mode parameter specifies the mode in which the MPLS network processes packet
priorities.
When a label is allocated to a PW, the CoS policy of the packets may be changed. Therefore, it
is necessary to determine whether the CoS policy of the packets needs to be restored when the
PW label is stripped from the packets. The LSP Mode parameter specifies whether the CoS
policy of the packets needs to be restored.
Values
Pipe, Uniform Uniform

Value Description
Pipe Indicates that the CoS policy of the packets need not to be restored when
the tunnel labels are peeled off.
Uniform Indicates that the CoS policy of the packets need to be restored when the
tunnel labels are peeled off.

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
716
A.11 QoS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the QoS function
A.11.1 Flow Type (Flow Configuration)
Description
The Flow Type(Flow Configuration) parameter specifies Flow Type of the flow in the Ethernet
data board. This parameter decides the method of binding the service with the flow.
If the Flow Type parameter is set incorrectly, that is, the flow classification method is incorrect,
the (Bound CAR or Bound CoS) parameter may fail to meet the expected result. For the effects
of CAR and CoS, refer to the relevant description.
Values
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4
l Port Flow
l Port+VLAN Flow
l Port+SVLAN Flow
Port Flow
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2
l Port Flow
l Port+VLAN Flow
l Port+VLAN+Priority
Port Flow
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2, N4EGS4
l Port Flow
l Port+VLAN Flow
l Port+VLAN+Priority
l Port+SVLAN Flow
Port Flow
N1EAS2 l Port Flow
l Port+VLAN Flow
l Port+SVLAN Flow
l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow
Port Flow

Value Description
Port Flow All the packets entering the specified port are
regarded as one flow.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
717
Value Description
Port+VLAN Flow All the packets that enter the specified port, and
whose Tag VID is consistent with the specified VID,
are regarded as one flow.
Port+VLAN+Priority All the packets that enter from the specified port, and
whose VLAN Tag VID and priority are consistent
with the specified VID and priority, are regarded as
one flow.
Port+SVLAN Flow All the packets that enter from the specified port, and
whose SVLAN VID is consistent with the specified
VID, are regarded as one flow.
Port+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow All the packets that enter from the specified port, and
whose SVLAN VID and CVLAN VID are consistent
with the specified VID, are regarded as one flow.

Based on the required QoS and service type, set a proper value for Flow Type.
None.
A.11.2 Bound CAR (Flow Configuration)
Description
The Bound CAR (Flow Configuration) parameter specifies the method of binding a flow with
a CAR ID and querying the CAR ID bound with the flow. One flow can be bound with one CAR
ID only. The CAR takes effect only after the flow is bound with the CAR.
The CAR-based flow rate can take effect only after the flow is bound with the enabled CAR
policy.
Values
Created CAR ID -

The created flow can be bound with the created CAR policy only. For this reason, you can select
the value from the created CAR ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
718
A flow can be bound with the CAR only after the flow and CAR are created.
A.11.3 Bound CoS (Flow Configuration)
Description
The Bound CoS (Flow Configuration) parameter specifies the method of binding a flow with
a CoS ID and querying the CoS ID bound with the flow. A flow can be bound with one CoS ID
only. The CoS policy can be used to divide the packet priority after the flow is bound with the
CoS.
The flow packets can be divided into different priorities based on the CoS rules only after the
flow is bound with the CoS.
Values
Created CoS ID -

The created flow can be bound with the created CoS policy only. For this reason, you can select
the value from the created CoS ID.
A flow can be bound with the CoS only after the flow and CoS are created.
A.11.4 CAR ID (CAR Configuration)
Description
The CAR ID (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the ID of a committed access rate
(CAR). After a CAR is created, it needs to be specified with a CAR ID.
Values
The value ranges for each type of board is as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
719
N4EGS4
1-4095 1
N3EFS4, N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2, N1EAS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2
1-2048 1

You can set this parameter to any value within the value range as required. Each CAR has a
unique CAR ID.
None.
A.11.5 CAR Enabled/Disabled (CAR Configuration)
Description
The CAR Enabled/Disabled (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies whether a CAR can
limit the traffic volume.
After the CAR is enabled and bound with a flow, the traffic volume of the flow is limited
depending on the value of the CAR parameter. If the transmitted traffic is greater than the
specified value, the excessive traffic is discarded.
Values

Value Description
Disabled A CAR is created, but does not take effect.
Enabled A CAR is created, and takes effect.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
720
You can set this parameter to Enabled or Disabled, depending on whether the CAR is required
to limit the traffic volume.
A CAR can limit the traffic of a flow only when it is set to Enabled and bound with a flow.
A.11.6 Committed Information Rate (CAR Configuration)
Description
The Committed Information Rate (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) of the committed access rate (CAR). It specifies the minimum guarantee
bandwidth of a flow.
After the CAR is enabled and bound with a flow, the committed bandwidth of the flow is
guaranteed. If the traffic volume is greater than the guarantee bandwidth, the transmission of
excessive traffic cannot be guaranteed.
Values
Board Name Value Range Default
Value
Unit
N1EAS2 An integer of 0-10485760, in step
length of 64
0 kbit/s
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4
An integer of 0-2499968, in step
length of 64
0 kbit/s
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
length of 64
0 kbit/s

Based on the actual QoS requirement, set a proper value for Committed Information Rate.
Generally, the value of Committed Information Rate is not less than the expected average rate
for transmitting the flow.
You can set Committed Information Rate of a CAR only after creating the CAR.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
721
A.11.7 Committed Burst Size (CAR Configuration)
Description
The Committed Burst Size (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the maximum
guaranteed data volume of a flow, which can be transmitted within a certain period.
After the CAR is enabled and bound with a flow, if the volume of burst data in the flow is less
than the value of Committed Burst Size, the burst data can be guaranteed for transmission.
Otherwise, they cannot be guaranteed for transmission.
Values
Board Name Value Range Default Value Unit
N1EAS2 0-2048 0 Kbyte
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2
0-128 0 Kbyte
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4
0-32 0 Kbyte

Based on the actual QoS requirements, set a proper value for Committed Burst Size.
Generally, the value of Committed Burst Size is not less than the possible size of expected
burst data flow to be transmitted.
You can set Committed Burst Size of a CAR only after creating the CAR.
A.11.8 Peak Information Rate (CAR Configuration)
Description
The Peak Information Rate (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the peak information
rate (PIR) of the committed access rate (CAR). It specifies the allowed maximum rate of a flow.
After the CAR is enabled and bound with a flow, the flow rate is limited according to the peak
bandwidth of the CAR parameter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
722
If the traffic volume is greater than the value of Peak Information Rate, the excessive traffic
is discarded.
Values
N1EAS2 An integer of 0-10485760, in
step length of 64
0 kbit/s
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
length of 64
0 kbit/s
N4EFS0, N5EFS0,
N2EFS4, N3EFS4,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N2EMR0,
N2EGR2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
length of 64
0 kbit/s

Based on the actual QoS requirement, you can set a proper value for Peak Information Rate.
The value of Peak Information Rate should not be less than the guarantee bandwidth.
Generally, the value of Peak Information Rate is not greater than the expected maximum rate
of transmitting the flow.
You can set Peak Information Rate for a CAR only after creating the CAR.
A.11.9 Maximum Burst Size (CAR Configuration)
Description
The Maximum Burst Size (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the maximum excessive
data volume of a flow, which can be transmitted within a certain period.
After the CAR is enabled and bound with a flow, if the burst data volume of the flow is greater
than the value of Maximum Burst Size, the excessive data is discarded.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
723
Values
Board Name Value Range Default
Value
Unit
N1EAS2 0-2048 0 kbyte
N4EGS4
0-32 0 kbyte
N3EFS4, N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N2EMR0, N2EGR2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
0 0 kbyte

Based on the actual requirement of QoS, you can set a proper value for Maximum Burst
Size.
Generally, the value of Maximum Burst Size is not greater than the size of burst data flow to
be transmitted.
You can set Maximum Burst Size of a CAR only after creating the CAR.
A.11.10 CoS ID (CoS Configuration)
Description
The CoS ID (CAR Configuration) parameter specifies the ID of a class of service (CoS). When
a CoS is created, it needs to be specified with a unique CoS ID.
Values
The value ranges for each type of board is as follows:
N1EAS2, N3EGS2, N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4
1-65535 1
N3EFS4, N2EGS2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2, N2EMR0, N2EGR2
1-8192 1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
724
You can set this parameter to any value in the value range as required. A CoS maps a CoS ID.
None.
A.11.11 CoS Type (CoS Configuration)
Description
The CoS Type (CoS Configuration) parameter specifies the type of CoS of the flow in the
Ethernet data board. This parameter decides the method adopted to classify the flow in the
Ethernet data board.
If CoS Type is set incorrectly, packets cannot be correctly dispatched to a proper queue.
Values
N1EAS2, N2EFS0,
N2EGS2
Simple, VLAN priority Simple
N1EMS4, N1EGS4,
N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N5EFS0, N3EFS4,
N3EGS2, N2EMR0,
N2EGR2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2, N2EFS4,
N4EFS0
Simple, VLAN priority, IPTOS, DSCP Simple

Value Description
Simple Assigns the CoS Priority based on the flow.
VLAN priority Assigns the CoS Priority based on the VLAN priority.
IPTOS Assigns the CoS Priority based on the TOS field in the IP
packet header.
DSCP Assigns the CoS Priority based on the DSCP field in the IP
packet header.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
725
Based on the requirements of QoS, set a proper value for CoS Type.
None.
A.11.12 CoS Priority (CoS Configuration)
Description
The CoS Priority (CoS Configuration) parameter classifies packets into different levels based
on the CoS type, and maps these packets into different CoS priorities. The packets of higher
priorities are first processed.
The packets of higher priorities are transmitted before those of lower priorities. Moreover, better
service quality is available.
Values
For the CoS of the simple type, follow Table A-6 to set a simple CoS Priority.
Table A-6 CoS priority of the simple type
Data Board CoS
Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Priority
Default Value
of CoS
Priority
N4EFS0,
N2EFS4,
N2EGS2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2,
N1EAS2,
N3EGS2,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
Invalid Invalid 0-7 0
N5EFS0,
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4
Invalid Invalid 0-3 0
N3EFS4 Invalid Invalid 0-1 0
N2EMR0,
N2EGR2
Invalid Invalid A/B/C C

For the CoS of the VLAN Priority type, follow Table A-7 to set the mapping from VLAN
Priority to CoS Priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
726
Table A-7 CoS priority of the VLAN Priority type
Data Board CoS
Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Priority
Default Value
of CoS
Priority
N4EFS0,
N2EFS4,
N2EGS2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2
User priority
in VLAN
0-7 0-7 Value range of
the mapping
CoS priority: -
N1EAS2 User priority
in VLAN
0-7 0-7 The same as that
of VLAN
priority
N3EGS2 User priority
in VLAN
0-7 0-7 0
N5EFS0,
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
User priority
in VLAN
0-7 0-3 0
N3EFS4 User priority
in VLAN
0-7 0-1 0
N2EMR0,
N2EGR2
User priority
in VLAN
0-7 A/B/C C

For the CoS of the IPTOS type, follow Table A-8 to set the mapping from IPTOS Priority to
CoS Priority.
Table A-8 CoS priority of the IPTOS type
Data Board CoS
Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Priority
Default Value
of CoS
Priority
N4EFS0,
N2EFS4,
N2EGS2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2,
N3EGS2
IPTOS 0000-1111 (in
binary)
0-7 0
N5EFS0,
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
IPTOS 0000-1111 (in
binary)
0-3 0
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
727
Data Board CoS
Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Priority
Default Value
of CoS
Priority
N3EFS4 IPTOS 0000-1111 (in
binary)
0-1 0
N2EMR0,
N2EGR2
IPTOS 0000-1111 (in
binary)
A/B/C C

For the CoS of the DSCP type, follow Table A-9 to set the mapping from DSCP Priority to
CoS Priority.
Table A-9 CoS priority of the DSCP type
Data Board CoS
Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Parameter
Value Range of
CoS Priority
Default Value
of CoS
Priority
N4EFS0,
N2EFS4,
N2EGS2,
N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2,
N3EGS2
DSCP 000000-111111 (in
binary)
0-7 0
N5EFS0,
N1EMS4,
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
DSCP 000000-111111 (in
binary)
0-3 0
N3EFS4 DSCP 000000-111111 (in
binary)
0-1 0
N2EMR0,
N2EGR2
DSCP 000000-111111 (in
binary)
A/B/C C

Based on the requirements, you can map the packets into different queues by setting CoS
Priority.
If CoS Type is set to VLAN Priority, IPTOS or DSCP, generally, you can map the packets
into the proper CoS Priority according to the priority information contained in the packets.
At the application layer, if a service (for example, VOIP, video conference, video conferencing
call, and video on demand) has higher requirements for QoS, set a higher priority for the service
to get better bandwidth and service guarantee. To ensure good bandwidth multiplexing, be sure
to avoid a larger ratio of real-time services in the network. For a service (for example, Internet
access, E-Mail, and FTP) that has lower requirements for QoS, set a lower priority for the service
to provide better bandwidth sharing and contention mechanism.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
728
For the N1EAS2 board, queue 7 has the absolute priority. That is, if queue 7 is congested, all
the queues must wait. Generally, queue 7 is used for the protocol or management packets of light
traffic. The remaining bandwidth is allocated in proportion for other queues. Queue 0 has the
lowest priority. For a higher priority, no bandwidth is used if no service is available.
None.
A.11.13 Shaping
Description
Shaping indicates the flow shaping function of all the four queues of every port on the N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4. or N4EGS4. This parameter includes the guaranteed bandwidth and capacity
of extra burst cache.
For the N1EAS2, every port has eight queues, and every queue has flow shaping function. The
parameter to set includes the guaranteed bandwidth and peak bandwidth.
If the guaranteed bandwidth of the parameter is excessively high, the shaping effect is not good.
If the capacity of extra burst cache is large, more burst packets can be cached but the delay of
the cached packets at the port increases.
Values
Name Value Range Default Value
Port List l Indicates that every port of the N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4, and N5EFS0 has
four queues.
l The N1EAS2: Every port has eight queues.
-
Status l Enabled
l Disabled
Disabled
CIR l The N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and
N4EGS4: An integer between 0-2499968. The
step length is 64 and the unit is kbit/s.
l The N1EAS2: An integer between 0-10485760.
The step length is 64 and the unit is kbit/s.
0
DCBS l The N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, and
N4EGS4: 0-32 (kbyte)
l The N1EAS2: Not configurable
0
PIR l The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4: Not
configurable
l The N1EAS2: An integer between 0-10485760.
The step length is 64 and the unit is kbit/s.
0
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
729
Name Value Range Default Value
DMBS l The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4: Not
configurable
l The N1EAS2: Not configurable
0

The user can set this parameter according to the actual bandwidth rate of the output port.
None.
A.12 ATM Interface Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM interface.
A.12.1 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling(ATM Interface
Management)
Description
The ATM Cell Payload Scrambling (ATM Interface Management) parameter specifies
whether to scramble the payload of cells on asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) links.
Different settings of this parameter for ports at both ends of an inverse multiplexing for ATM
(IMA) link result in unavailable services.
Values

Set this parameter to the same value for the equipment at the local and opposite ends. That is, if
scrambling is performed on the payload of cells transmitted by the equipment at the opposite
end, the payload of cells transmitted by the equipment at the local end must also be scrambled.
Generally, set this parameter to the default value (Enabled).
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
730
Related Information
Scrambling is another type of coding technology that is commonly used for serial link
transmission. The purpose of scrambling is to suppress consecutive "1" bits and consecutive "0"
bits to facilitate extraction of clock signals from line signals. Line signals are scrambled only.
Therefore, the rate of SDH line signals is the same as that of standard signals at SDH electrical
interface, and this does not add extra optical power penalty to the laser at the transmit end.
An ATM cell is the basic carrier for transmitting ATM information. An ATM cell, which consists
of only 53 bytes, is divided into a 5-byte header and a 48-byte payload.
A.12.2 Min.VPI(ATM Interface Management)
Description
The Min.VPI parameter specifies the minimum virtual path identifier (VPI) value of the
permanent virtual paths (PVPs) and permanent virtual channels (PVCs) that are applicable to a
selected board.
The VPI value specifies the valid range of VPIs and identifies the number of available VPIs at
a port. You can change the number of VPIs to a proper value based on the requirements of the
port.
Setting this parameter results in re-creation of the deleted connections to the selected board. As
a result, service packets are lost.
Values
UNI port: 0-255; NNI port:
0-4095
0

Set this parameter according to the VPI values required for a port. For example, if a port needs
to converge 500 PVCs and if each PVC has a unique VPI, 500 VPIs are required for service
identification. Therefore, ensure that the offset value between the maximum number of VPIs
and the minimum number of VPIs is greater than 500.
For the TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards, this parameter cannot be set to the minimum
number of VPIs. That is, the number of VPIs is not limited.
For the TNN1AFO1 board, the sum of the minimum numbers of VPIs of all ports is less than
4096.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
731
Related Information
The operations on an ATM network are similar to a call connection process. Before a
conversation, a virtual channel connection (VCC), which is identified with a VPI/a virtual
channel identifier (VCI), must be set up between the source end and the destination end.
l VPI: stands for virtual path identifier.
l VCI: stands for virtual channel identifier.
l VP switching: changes only VPI values and transparently transmits VCI values in the
switching process.
l VC switching: changes VPI values and VCI values in the switching process.
l PVP: stands for permanent virtual path.
l PVC: stands for permanent virtual channel.
A.12.3 Min.VCI(ATM Interface Management)
Description
The Min.VCI parameter specifies the minimum virtual channel identifier (VCI) value for
permanent virtual channels (PVCs) that are applicable to a selected board.
The VCI value specifies the valid range of VCIs and identifies the number of available VCIs at
a port. You can change the number of VCIs to a proper value based on the requirements of the
port.
Setting this parameter results in re-creation of the deleted connections to the selected board. As
a result, service packets are lost.
Values
0-65535 65535

Set this parameter according to the number of VCIs required for a port. For example, if a port
needs to converge 500 PVCs and if each PVC has a unique VCI, 500 VCIs are required for
service identification. Therefore, ensure that the offset value between the maximum number of
VCIs and the minimum number of VCIs is greater than 500.
For the TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards, this parameter cannot be set to the minimum
number of VCIs. That is, the number of VCIs is not limited.
This parameter can be set to other values only when the number of VPIs that are applicable to
VCCs at a port is not 65535.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
732
None.
Related Information
conversation, a virtual channel connection (VCC), which is identified with a virtual path
identifier (VPI)/a VCI, must be set up between the source end and the destination end.
switching process.
A.12.4 VCC-Supported VPI Count(ATM Interface Management)
Description
The VCC-Supported VPI Count parameter specifies the number of virtual path identifiers
(VPIs) available for a permanent virtual channel (PVC) connection at a port. That is, only the
specified number of VPIs can be adopted for establishment of a PVC connection regardless of
the specified VPI value. In other circumstances, the specified number of VPIs can be adopted
for establishment of a permanent virtual path (PVP) connection.
This parameter limits the number of VPIs that can be used for establishment of a VC connection,
and therefore affects allocation of system resources. In practice, you need to set this parameter
based on services.
Values
TNN1AFO1 0-256, 65535 65535

Set this parameter according to the number of VCIs required for each VPI at a port.
For example, if 50 PVCs need to be established at a port and if each PVC has a unique VPI, 50
VPIs are required for service identification. Therefore, set the number of VPIs available for VC
switching to 50. The value 65535 indicates that the number of VPIs for establishment of a VC
connection is not limited.
If any connections are available at a port, this parameter is unavailable.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
733
The number of VPIs for a VCC must be less than the offset value between the maximum number
and the minimum number of VPIs.
Related Information
conversation, a virtual channel connection (VCC), which is identified with a VPI/a VCI, must
be set up between the source end and the destination end.
switching process.
A.13 ATM/IMA Services Associated Parameters (Packet
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM/IMA services.
A.13.1 IMA Transit Frame Length
Description
The IMA Transit Frame Length parameter specifies the length of an inverse multiplexing for
ATM (IMA) frame transmitted by the equipment at the local end. That is, this parameter specifies
the number of asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells in an IAM frame.
An IMA frame contains an IMA control protocol (ICP) cell for negotiation of the IMA control
protocol and transmission of information.
None.
Values
32, 64, 128, 256 128

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
734
The TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards support the IMA function. Therefore, set the length of
IMA frames to be the same as that of the IMA frames for the interconnected boards.
For example, if IMA groups on two NEs are connected to each other, set the length of IMA
frames transmitted at both the local and opposite ends to 128.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.2 IMA Symmetry Mode
Description
The IMA Symmetry Mode parameter specifies the configuration and operation mode of inverse
multiplexing for ATM (IMA) links in an IMA group.
Different symmetrical modes determine the unidirectional conductivity of an IMA link (that is,
only one receive or transmit direction is available for an IMA link).
Values
Operation, Symmetrical Mode and
Asymmetrical Operation, Asymmetrical
Mode and Asymmetrical Operation
Operation

Value Description
Symmetrical Mode
and Symmetrical
Operation
Indicates that all links in the IMA group are configured with the
capabilities of receiving and transmitting services in two directions
when you configure an IMA group (in symmetrical configuration
mode). If services on a link are simultaneously interrupted in the
receive and transmit directions, this link is bidirectionally unavailable
(in symmetrical operation mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
735
Value Description
Symmetrical Mode
and Asymmetrical
Operation
Indicates that all links in the IMA group are configured with the
capabilities of receiving and transmitting services in two directions
when you configure an IMA group (in symmetrical configuration
mode). If services on a link are interrupted in one direction but available
in the other direction, this link is unidirectionally available (in
asymmetrical operation mode).
Asymmetrical
Mode and
Asymmetrical
Operation
Indicates that some links in the IMA group are configured with only
the capabilities of receiving and transmitting services in one direction
when you configure an IMA group (in asymmetrical configuration
mode). If services on a link are interrupted in one direction but available
in the other direction, this link is unidirectionally available (in
asymmetrical operation mode).

For the TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards, this parameter can be set only to Symmetrical
Mode and Symmetrical Operation.
If IMA Symmetry Mode is set to Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation,
Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links must be equal to Minimum Number of
Active Receiving Links.
Related Information
None.
A.13.3 Maximum Delay Between Links(ms)(IMA Group
Management)
Description
The Maximum Delay Between Links(ms) parameter specifies the maximum delay tolerance
between links in an inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group. That is, this parameter specifies
the allowed maximum difference between the maximum delay value and the minimum delay
value of all links in an IMA group. If the maximum difference exceeds the specified value, the
equipment reports the lODS alarm for a link who has the largest offset value compared with the
average delay value of all links in the MA group. Then, the equipment removes the alarmed link
from the IMA group.
This parameter determines the allowed maximum difference between the maximum delay value
and the minimum delay value of all links. If delay variation of all links in an IMA group is great,
set delay tolerance to a large value to avoid removal of a link whose delay value is great from
the IMA group. If some links that have great delay values are not removed from the IMA group,
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
736
the transmit and receive rates of the IMA group decrease, and the transmission delay of the IMA
group may increase.
Values
1-120 25

Set this parameter properly according to the requirements for link delay and service delay.
It is recommended that you take the default value.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.4 Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links(IMA
Group Management)
Description
The Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links parameter specifies the lower threshold
of active links in the transmit direction in an inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group to
maintain proper operation of the IMA group.
An incorrect setting of this parameter may result in service interruption. If the number of active
links in the transmit direction of an IMA group is less than the bandwidth specified for boards
but equal to or greater than the specified minimum number of active links, the IMA group
functions properly. If the number of active links in the transmit direction of an IMA group is
less than the specified minimum number of active links, services of the IMA group are
interrupted.
Values
1-16 1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
737
Set the minimum number of active links, depending on the equipment at the opposite end. For
example, 10 active links are currently available, the total bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s, and the
interconnected equipment requires a minimum of 15 Mbit/s bandwidth. To meet the preceding
requirements, set the minimum number of active links to 8. If the minimum number of active
links is less than 8, the bandwidth is less than 15 Mbit/s. As a result, services in the IMA group
are interrupted.
For the TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards, configure a maximum of 16 IMA links for an IMA
group due to hardware constraints. Therefore, the minimum number of active links in the transmit
direction cannot be more than 16.
This parameter takes effect only after an IMA group is configured. If the IMA group is enabled,
Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links cannot be set to a value greater than the
number of links in the existing IMA group.
Related Information
None.
A.13.5 Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links(IMA Group
Management)
Description
The Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameter specifies the lower threshold of
active links in the receive direction in an inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group to maintain
proper operation of the IMA group.
An incorrect setting of this parameter may result in service interruption. If the number of active
links in the receive direction of an IMA group is less than the bandwidth specified for boards
but equal to or greater than the specified minimum number of active links, the IMA group
functions properly. If the number of active links in the receive direction of an IMA group is less
than the specified minimum number of active links, services in the IMA group are interrupted.
Values
1-16 1

Set the minimum number of active links, depending on the equipment at the opposite end. For
the TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E boards, configure a maximum of 16 IMA links for an IMA
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
738
group due to hardware constraints. Therefore, the minimum number of active links in the receive
direction cannot be more than 16.
You can specify the minimum number of active links based on the actual service transmission.
For example, 10 active links are currently available, the total bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s, and the
interconnected equipment requires a minimum of 15 Mbit/s bandwidth. To meet the preceding
requirements, set the minimum number of active links to 8. If the minimum number of active
links is less than 8. the bandwidth is less than 15 Mbit/s. As a result, services in the IMA group
are interrupted.
This parameter takes effect only after an IMA group is configured. If the IMA group is enabled,
the minimum number of active links in the receive direction cannot be set to a value greater than
the number of existing links in the IMA group.
Related Information
None.
A.13.6 Clock Mode(IMA Group Management)
Description
The Clock Mode parameter specifies the clock mode for operations of an inverse multiplexing
for ATM (IMA) group.
In an IMA group, all links can trace the same clock source, and a link can also use a separate
clock source. The clock mode of an IMA group determines the method of selecting a clock
source in the IMA group for signal transmission.
Values
CTC Mode, ITC Mode CTC Mode

Value Description
CTC Mode Indicates the common transmit clock (CTC) mode in which the same
clock source is used for all links in an IMA group.
ITC Mode Indicates the independent transmit clock (ITC) mode in which the
transmit clock on a link in an IMA group is independently derived
from a clock source.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
739
The clock modes must be the same at both ends of an IMA group.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.7 Near-End Group Status(IMA Group Status)
Description
The Near-End Group Status parameter displays the status of an inverse multiplexing for ATM
(IMA) group at the local end.
Values
Start-Up, Start-Up-ACK, Config-Aborted,
Insufficient-Links, Operational
Start-Up

Value Range Description
Start-Up Indicates that the equipment at the local end
starts up and waits for startup of the
equipment at the opposite end.
Start-Up-ACK Indicates the waiting state of the IMA group,
which is displayed after the equipment at the
local and opposite ends starts up.
Config-Aborted Indicates that the parameter settings for the
equipment at the local and opposite ends do
not match.
Insufficient-Links Indicates that the parameter settings for the
equipment at the local and opposite ends
match, but no sufficient link resource is
available.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
740
Value Range Description
Operational Indicates that the IMA group is enabled and
sufficient link resources are available.

None.
This parameter shows the IMA negotiation status on the NE side. If an IMA group is set to
Enabled, the status of the IMA group cannot be queried.
Related Information
None.
A.13.8 Differential Delay Check Status(IMA Link States)
Description
The Differential Delay Check Status parameter displays the result returned when you query
the statuses of inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) links.
Values
Unknown, Valid, Invalid Unknown

Value Description
Unknown Indicates that the delay value of links is not computed. If an IAM group
is configured or if the equipment at the local end cannot receive
information from links at the opposite end, the delay on links cannot
be computed.
Valid Indicates that the loss of delay synchronization (LODS) alarm is not
reported on links.
Invalid Indicates that the LODS alarm is reported on links.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
741
None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.9 Connection Type(Per-NE ATM Service Management)
Description
The Connection Type parameter specifies the type of an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
connection.
Values
PVP, PVC, Port Transparent UNIs-NNI: PVC, UNI-UNI: PVP

Value Description
PVP Transmits services that contain the same
virtual path identifier (VPI) but different
virtual channel identifiers (VCIs).
PVC Transmits services that contain the same VPI
and VCI.
Port Transparent
Transparently transmits all services
regardless of their VPIs and VCIs without
establishment of connections.

If services that contain the same VPI need to be converged at a port, set this parameter to
PVP.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
742
If services that contain the same VPI and VCI need to be transmitted, set this parameter to
PVC. A permanent virtual channel (PVC) and a permanent virtual path (PVP) are virtual
transmission paths, but a PVC is contained in a PVP.
None.
Related Information
A PVC and a PVP are virtual transmission paths, but a PVC is contained in a PVP.
switching process.
A.13.10 Uplink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM
Connections)
Description
The Uplink Policy parameter specifies the traffic policy ID in a specified direction of an
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) connection. For user-network interface (UNI) - network-
network interface (NNI) services, the specified direction is from the UNI side to the pseudo wire
(PW). For UNI - UNI services, the specified direction is from the source UNI port to the
destination UNI port.
Setting the uplink policy of an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) connection determines the
traffic policy (such as scheduling priority, leaky bucket processing, shaping, and UNI scheduling
priority) in a specified direction of an ATM connection. An incorrect setting of this parameter
may result in packet loss and failed assurance for higher-priority services.
Values
1-256 -

An uplink policy determines the traffic parameters and QoS parameters in a specified direction
of an ATM connection. An uplink policy is also used for setting the forwarding priority of QoS
parameters of a network, based on the characteristics of data transmitted on the ATM connection.
For services that require high transmission quality, select an ATM policy that is preferred to
ensure proper data transmission.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
743
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.11 Downlink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM
Connections)
Description
The Downlink Policy parameter specifies the traffic policy ID in a specified direction of an
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) connection. For user-network interface (UNI) - network-
network interface (NNI) services, the specified direction is from the pseudo wire (PW) to the
UNI side. For UNI-UNI services, the specified direction is from the source UNI port to the
destination UNI port.
Setting the downlink policy of an ATM connection determines the traffic policy (such as
scheduling priority, leaky bucket processing, shaping, and UNI scheduling priority) in a
specified direction of an ATM connection. An incorrect setting of this parameter may result in
packet loss and failed assurance for higher-priority services.
Values
1-256 None.

A downlink policy determines the traffic parameters and QoS parameters in a specified direction
of an ATM connection. A downlink policy is also used for setting the forwarding priority of
QoS parameters of a network, based on the characteristics of data transmitted on the ATM
connection. For services that require high transmission quality, select an ATM policy that is
preferred to ensure proper data transmission.
None.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
744
A.13.12 CoS Mapping(Per-NE Configuration for CoS Mapping)
Description
The CoS Mapping parameter specifies the priories of packets based on the class of service (CoS)
for mapping between packets and CoS priorities. For different priorities of packets, different
services are available.
Compared with lower-priority packets, higher-priority packets are preferred for transmission in
better service-quality mode.
Values
Value Default Value
2-8 1(DefaultAtmCosMap)

The ATM service class mapping table specifies mapping between ATM services and CoS
priorities to provide differentiated assurance of service quality. You can adopt the default or
user-defined ATM service class mapping table. You can define a maximum of seven ATM
service class mapping tables.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.13.13 Traffic Service(ATM Policy)
Description
The Traffic Service parameter specifies the sub-type of a service type. That is, multiple traffic
types are available for each type of service. A traffic type specifies the traffic parameters that
can be set, the methods of handling cells whose cell loss priority (CLP) values are 0 and 1, and
the supported functions (such as cell labeling).
A change of QoS parameter settings may result in packet loss.
For example, different types of services have different parameters for the traffic type. For a
constant bit rate (CBR) service, five traffic types can be configured. In practice, if a small number
of burst services whose transmission rate is greater than the peak cell rate (PCR), extra cells are
absolutely discarded for the NoClpNoScr traffic type, and therefore services are transiently
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
745
interrupted. For the other four types of services, a certain amount of buffer size is allocated, and
the burst services whose transmission rates are greater than the PCR are discarded only when
they exceed the buffer size.
Values
For different service types, available traffic types are different.
Service Type Value Range Default Value
CBR NoClpNoScr
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
ClpTaggingNoScr
ClpTransparentNoScr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
NoClpNoScr
rt-VBR ClpTransparentScr
NoClpScrCdvt
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
ClpTransparentScr
nrt-VBR NoClpScr
ClpNoTaggingScr
ClpTaggingScr
NoClpScr
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor
NoClpNoScr
NoClpTaggingNoScr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
NoTrafficDescriptor
UBR+ atmNoTrafficDescriptorMcr
atmNoClpMcr
atmNoClpMcrCdvt
atmNoTrafficDescriptorMcr

For CBR services, this parameter is set as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
746
Traffic
Type
CDVT
Supporte
d
Handlin
g Cells
With
CLPs
Being 0
and 1
Different
ly
Cell
Labeling
Supporte
d
PCR
Supporte
d
MBS
Supporte
d
SCR
Supporte
d
NoClpNo
Scr
No No No Yes No No
ClpNoTag
gingNoScr
No Yes No Yes No No
ClpTaggin
gNoScr
No Yes Yes Yes No No
ClpTransp
arentNoSc
r
Yes No No Yes No No
NoClpNo
ScrCdvt
Yes No No Yes No No

For rt-VBR services, this parameter is set as follows:
Traffic
Type
CDVT
Suppor
ted
Handli
ng Cells
With
CLPs
Being 0
and 1
Differe
ntly
Cell
Labelin
g
Suppor
ted
PCR
Suppor
ted
MCR
Suppor
ted
MBS
Suppor
ted
SCR
Suppor
ted
ClpTran
sparentS
cr
Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
NoClpSc
rCdvt
Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
ClpNoT
aggingS
crCdvt
Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
ClpTag-
gingScr
Cdvt
Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

For nrt-VBR services, this parameter is set as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
747
Traffic
Type
CDVT
Suppor
ted
Handli
ng Cells
With
CLPs
Being 0
and 1
Differe
ntly
Cell
Labelin
g
Suppor
ted
PCR
Suppor
ted
MCR
Suppor
ted
MBS
Suppor
ted
SCR
Suppor
ted
NoClpSc
r
No No No Yes No Yes Yes
ClpNoT
aggingS
cr
No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
ClpTagg
ingScr
No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

For UBR services, this parameter is set as follows:
Traffic
Type
CDVT
Suppor
ted
Handli
ng Cells
With
CLPs
Being 0
and 1
Differe
ntly
Cell
Labelin
g
Suppor
ted
PCR
Suppor
ted
MCR
Suppor
ted
MBS
Suppor
ted
SCR
Suppor
ted
NoTraffi
cDescrip
tor
No No No No No No No
NoClpN
oScr
No No No Yes No No No
NoClpT
aggingN
oScr
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
NoClpN
oScrCdv
t
Yes No No Yes No No No

For UBR+ services, this parameter is set as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
748
Traffic
Type
CDVT
Suppor
ted
Handli
ng Cells
With
CLPs
Being 0
and 1
Differe
ntly
Cell
Labelin
g
Suppor
ted
PCR
Suppor
ted
MCR
Suppor
ted
MBS
Suppor
ted
SCR
Suppor
ted
atmNoTr
afficDes
criptorM
cr
No No No No Yes No No
atmNoCl
pMcr
No No No Yes Yes No No
atmNoCl
pMcrCd
vt
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

NOTE
l CDVT: stands for cell delay variation tolerance.
l CLP: stands for cell loss priority in an ATM cell header.
l Cell labeling: sets the CLP of a cell that does not comply with the specified traffic parameters to 1. If
network congestion occurs, a cell whose CLP is 1 is immediately discarded. Therefore, you need to
select a service type based on the network type and service characteristics.
This parameter is available only when Service Type is selected.
Related Information
None.
A.13.14 Clp01Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Clp01Pcr(cell/s) parameter specifies the peak cell rate of a service whose cell loss priority
(CLP) in the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cell header is 1 or 0.
In this parameter, Pcr stands for peak cell rate, which is the maximum transmission rate of a cell
flow.
An incorrect setting of this parameter may result in packet loss.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
749
Values
90-149078 None. Cell/s

The parameter value must be not larger than the physical bandwidth of an ATM port or an inverse
multiplexing for ATM (IMA) group.
For example, the bandwidth (based on the number of ATM cells) of one E1 in an IAM group is
derived from the formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8) ((M-1) / M) x (2048 / 2049).
l The expression 30 8 8000 represents the bandwidth of an E1 service in an IMA group.
The value 30 represents 30 of the 32 timeslots in an E1 (if 31 timeslots are used, change
the value from 30 to 31.)
l The expression 538 represents the number of bits in an ATM cell.
l The letter M indicates the frame length of an IMA group. According to the MA protocol,
an IMA control protocol (ICP) cell is inserted to every M-1 user cells. An ICP cell, which
is not a user cell, is used for transmission of IMA protocol information. In practice, the ICP
cell needs to be removed from the available bandwidth. The expression 2048 / 2049
indicates that one more ICP cell needs to be inserted to every 2048 cells.
l If the frame length (M) of an IMA group is 128, the maximum number of cells derived
from the preceding formula is 4490 (rounded off to an integer). Therefore, the Clp0Pcr
value specified for an IMA group in which only one E1 service is available needs to be not
more than 4490.
l If the IMA protocol is disabled for the E1 service, the bandwidth is derived from the
formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8).
The value 30 represents 30 of the 32 timeslots in an E1 service in an IMA group. (If only
10 timeslots are used, change the value from 30 to 10.)
l If the transmission rate at a port of AFO1 is STM-1, the bandwidth (based on the number
of ATM cells) is 149760 (rounded off to an integer).
None.
Related Information
According to ATM Forum, ATM traffic is currently controlled by two-level token buckets.
Generally, a level-1 token bucket limits the PCR, and a level-2 token bucket limits the sustainable
cell rate (SCR). The two-level token buckets adopt the GCRA algorithm to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
750
Figure A-7 Dual token bucket model
Non-conforming cells
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
level-2 leaky bucket:
SCR
BT+CDVT
Parameters for a level-1
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

Figure A-8 Structure of the ATM UNI cell header in the dual token bucket model
GFC (4) VPI (4)
VPI (4) VCI (4)
VCI (4) CLP (1) PT (3)
VCI (8)
HEC (8)

A.13.15 Clp01Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Clp01Pcr(cell/s) parameter specifies the substainable cell rate of a service whose cell loss
priority (CLP) in the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cell header is 1 or 0.
In this parameter, Scr stands for sustainable cell rate, which is an average cell transmission rate
for a long time.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
751
Values

The value 30 represents 30 of the 32 timeslots in an E1 service in an IMA group (if 31
timeslots are used, change the value from 30 to 31.)
l The expression 53 8 represents the number of bits in an ATM cell.
l The letter M indicates the frame length of an IMA group. According to the IMA protocol,
an ICP cell is inserted to every M-1 user cells. An IMA control protocol (ICP) cell, which
more than 4490.
formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8).
The parameter value must be not larger than the maximum cell transmission rate.
Related Information
Generally, a level-1 token bucket limits the peak cell rate (PCR), and a level-2 token bucket
limits the SCR. The two-level token buckets adopt the GCRA algorithm to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
752
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
SCR
BT+CDVT
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

GFC (4) VPI (4)
VPI (4) VCI (4)
VCI (4) CLP (1) PT (3)
VCI (8)
HEC (8)

A.13.16 Clp0Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Clp0Pcr(cell/s) parameter specifies the peak cell rate of a service whose cell loss priority
(CLP) in the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cell header is 0.
In this parameter, Pcr stands for peak cell rate, which is the maximum transmission rate of a cell
flow.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
753
Values

more than 4490.
formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8).
None.
Related Information
Generally, a level-1 token bucket limits the PCR, and a level-2 token bucket limits the sustainable
cell rate (SCR). The two-level token buckets adopt the GCRA algorithm to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
754
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
SCR
BT+CDVT
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

GFC (4) VPI (4)
VPI (4) VCI (4)
VCI (4) CLP (1) PT (3)
VCI (8)
HEC (8)

A.13.17 Clp0Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Clp0Scr(cell/s) parameter specifies the substainable cell rate of a service whose cell loss
priority (CLP) in the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cell header is 0.
In this parameter, Scr stands for sustainable cell rate, which is an average cell transmission rate
for a long time.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
755
Values

The value 30 represents 30 of the 32 timeslots in an E1 (if 31 timeslots are used, change
the value from 30 to 31.)
value specified for an MA group in which only one E1 service is available needs to be not
more than 4490.
formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8).
This parameter value must be not larger than the maximum cell transmission rate.
Related Information
limits the SCR. The two-level token buckets adopt the GCRA algorithm to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
756
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
SCR
BT+CDVT
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

GFC (4) VPI (4)
VPI (4) VCI (4)
VCI (4) CLP (1) PT (3)
VCI (8)
HEC (8)

A.13.18 Clp01Mcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Clp01Mcr(cell/s) parameter specifies the minimum transmission rate of cells whose cell
loss priority (CLP) in the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cell header is 1 or 0.
In this parameter, Mcr stands for the minimum cell rate, which is the minimum transmission
rate of a cell flow.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
757
Values

an ICP cell is inserted to every M-1 user cells. An ICP cell, which is not a user cell, is used
for transmission of IMA protocol information. In practice, the ICP cell needs to be removed
from the available bandwidth. The expression 2048 / 2049 indicates that one more ICP cell
needs to be inserted to every 2048 cells.
more than 4490.
formula: (30 8 8000) / (53 8).
The parameter value must be not larger than the maximum transmission rate of a cell flow.
Related Information
limits the sustainable cell rate (SCR). The two-level token buckets adopt the GCRA algorithm
to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
758
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
SCR
BT+CDVT
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

GFC (4) VPI (4)
VPI (4) VCI (4)
VCI (4) CLP (1) PT (3)
VCI (8)
HEC (8)

A.13.19 Max.Cell Burst Size(cell)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Max.Cell Burst Size(cell) parameter specifies the maximum number of cells that are
continuously transmitted on an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) path of a variable bit rate
(VBR) service at a rate of r (SCR < r <PCR).
In this parameter, MBS stands for the maximum burst size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
759
None.
Values
2-200000 None. cell

The greater the parameter value, the deeper the level-2 token bucket on the ATM path, and the
better performance the service for burst cells. Therefore, if conditions are allowed, you can set
the maximum burst size to a greater value.
None.
Related Information
Token bucket algorithm: The equipment constantly monitors the rate of burst cells. If the rate
of burst cells exceeds the specified value (1/I), the equipment computes and accumulates the
offset value between the theoretical arrival time of cells and the actual arrival time of cells. If
the accumulated offset value is within the specified value (1/I), the equipment considers that the
cells are conforming cells. If the accumulated offset value exceeds the specified value (L), the
equipment considers that the cells are non-conforming cells, which are handled according to the
methods specified in the contract. That is, non-conforming cells are discarded (based on the CLP
values or regardless of the CLP values) or added with tagging labels.
l For a level-1 token bucket, the value I is 1/PCR, and the value L is CDVT. If the rate of
burst cells exceeds the specified PCR value, the equipment computes and accumulates the
offset value between the theoretical arrival time of cells and the actual arrival time of cells.
If the accumulated offset value exceeds the specified value L (the CDTV value for a level-1
token bucket), the cells are discarded.
l For a level-2 token bucket, the value I is 1/SCR, and the value L is derived from the formula:
BT + CDVT. The equipment performs the same operations as those for a level-1 token
bucket, except that the parameters are different. The value BT is derived from the formula:
(MBS - 1)(1/SCR - 1/PCR).
A.13.20 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance(0.1us)(ATM Policy)
Description
The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance(0.1us) parameter specifies the burst cell tolerance of an
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) connection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
760
In this parameter, CDVT stands for cell delay variation tolerance.
If the actual arrival time of a cell is later than the theoretical arrival time, the cell is considered
as a burst cell. The number of burst cells is measured according to the offset value between the
actual arrival time and the theoretical arrival time of cells. If the total number of consecutive
burst cells exceeds the CDVT value for a token bucket of the service, extra cells are discarded.
Values
7 to 13300000 None. 0.1us

The greater the parameter value, the better performance the service for burst cells. If conditions
are allowed, you can set CDVT to a large value to minimize packet loss.
None.
Related Information
Token bucket algorithm: The equipment constantly monitors the rate of burst cells. If the rate
of burst cells exceeds the specified value (1/I), the equipment computes and accumulates the
offset value between the theoretical arrival time of cells and the actual arrival time of cells. If
the accumulated offset value is within the specified value (1/I), the equipment considers that the
cells are conforming cells. If the accumulated offset value exceeds the specified value (L), the
equipment considers that the cells are non-conforming cells, which are handled according to the
methods specified in the contract. That is, non-conforming cells are discarded (based on the cell
loss priority (CLP) values or regardless of the CLP values) or added with tagging labels.
l For a level-1 token bucket, the value I is 1/PCR, and the value L is CDVT. If the rate of
burst cells exceeds the specified PCR value, the equipment computes and accumulates the
offset value between the theoretical arrival time of cells and the actual arrival time of cells.
If the accumulated offset value exceeds the specified value L (the CDTV value for a level-1
token bucket), the cells are discarded.
l For a level-2 token bucket, the value I is 1/SCR, and the value L is derived from the formula:
BT + CDVT. The equipment performs the same operations as those for a level-1 token
bucket, except that the parameters are different. The value BT is derived from the formula:
(MBS - 1)(1/SCR - 1/PCR).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
761
A.13.21 UPC/NPC(ATM Policy)
Description
The UPC/NPC parameter specifies the user-network interface (UNI) traffic parameters based
on usage parameter control (UPC) and network parameter control (NPC).
None.
Values

The traffic monitoring function is classified into UPC and NPC by interface position.
The UPC function is available for UNI-NNI interfaces, whereas the NPC function is available
for NNI-NNI interfaces. The UPC and NPC functions are similar and used for processing non-
conforming packets during a communication (for example, the number of burst packets exceeds
the specified value).
The UPC and NPC functions process packets in three modes: transmitting conforming packets;
labeling non-conforming packets (setting the CLP field in the packets to the value 1) and
lowering their forwarding priorities; and discarding non-conforming packets immediately.
If the UPC and NPC functions are disabled, that is, if the token bucket protocol is disabled, the
flow control function does not take effect for services.
Related Information
According to asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Forum, ATM traffic is currently controlled
by two-level token buckets. Generally, a level-1 token bucket limits the peak cell rate ( PCR),
and a level-2 token bucket limits the sustainable cell rate (SCR). The two-level token buckets
adopt the GCRA algorithm to control the traffic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
762
Conforming
cells
CLP0+1
C
L
P
0
+
1
CLP1
CLP0
CLP0
S
C
R
0
Parameters for a
SCR
BT+CDVT
leaky bucket:
PCR
CDVT

A.14 ATM OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring ATM OAM.
A.14.1 Connection Direction
Description
The Connection Direction parameter specifies whether to enable the asynchronous transfer
mode (ATM) operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) function at the source or sink
end of a connection.
Values
Source, Sink Source

Select a proper direction of the connection as required at the end where ATM OAM cells are
identified and processed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
763
None.
Related Information
An ATM connection has a source end and a sink end. When setting the segment point and
endpoint attributes, specify the direction of the ATM connection. That is, specify whether to set
the segment and end attributes for the source or sink end of the ATM connection.
Figure A-18 Setting a segment point
NE
Connection ID = 1
Source end Sink end
A segment
point is set.

After you specify the segment and end points in a direction of an ATM connection for an NE,
the NE can identify and process ATM OAM cells in the receive direction of the port where the
segment and end points are specified. For example, as shown in Figure A-18, if a segment point
is specified for the source end of connection 1, the NE can identify and process ATM OAM cells
transmitted between two segment points in the receive direction at the source end.
A.14.2 Segment and End Attribute
Description
The Segment and End Attribute parameter specifies the type of an operation, administration
and maintenance (OAM) maintenance point. For different segment and end attributes, different
ranges of asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) OAM cells are processed.
Values
Non segment and Endpoint, Segment point,
Endpoint, Segment and Endpoint
Non segment and Endpoint

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
764
Value Description
Non segment and
Endpoint
Indicates that ATM OAM cells are not terminated.
Endpoint Identifies, processes, and terminates the ATM OAM cells whose
OAM maintenance points are set to the segment attribute.
Segment point Identifies, processes, and terminates the ATM OAM cells whose
OAM maintenance points are set to the end attribute, but identifies
and discards the ATM OAM cells whose OAM maintenance points
are set to the segment attribute.
Segment and
Endpoint
Identifies, processes, and terminates all ATM OAM cells.

According to different OAM maintenance segments, as shown in Figure A-19, set the segment
and end attributes properly.
Figure A-19 Schematic diagram of a maintenance segment
1 2 3 4 5
End Seg Inner Inner Seg + End
End to end
Segment
User 1 User 2

1. When enabling the ATM OAM function for a maintenance segment, set the endpoint
attribute for the boundary of the maintenance segment. For example, as shown in Figure
A-19, separately set the endpoint attribute for points 1 and 2 of the maintenance segment
of user 1.
2. You can divide a maintenance segment into different maintenance sub-segments to
facilitate management. When dividing a maintenance area into different maintenance sub-
segments, set the segment attribute for both ends of a maintenance sub-segment. For
example, as shown in Figure A-19, if the sub-segment between points 2 and 5 is considered
as a maintenance sub-segment, separately set the segment point attribute for points 2 and
5 of the maintenance sub-segment.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
765
3. When working as an end point and a segment point at the same time, a point needs to be a
segment-end point, such as point 5 shown in Figure A-19.
None.
Related Information
An ATM connection has a source end and a sink end. When setting the segment point and
endpoint attributes, specify the direction of the ATM connection. That is, specify whether to set
the segment and end attributes for the source or sink end of the ATM connection.
Figure A-20 Setting a segment point
NE
Connection ID = 1
Source end Sink end
A segment
point is set.

After you specify the segment and end points in a direction of an ATM connection for an NE,
the NE can identify and process ATM OAM cells in the receive direction of the port where the
segment and end points are specified. For example, as shown in Figure A-20, if a segment point
is specified for the source end of connection 1, the NE can identify and process ATM OAM cells
transmitted between two segment points in the incoming direction at the source end.
A.14.3 Country Code(Hexadecimal Code)
Description
The Country Code(Hexadecimal Code) parameter specifies the values of bytes 2 and 3 in the
loopback location identifier (LLID).
Values
[2BYTE]00 00-ff ff [2BYTE]00 00

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
766
The binary coded decimal (BCD) is used for a country code. For example, 0x0086 is used for
China, 0x0001 for U.S.A., and 0x0044 for U. K.
The default value is 0x0000, which is recommended.
None.
Related Information
According to ITU-T I.610, an LLID is specified in multiple coding methods and the first byte
of the LLID is used to identify the coding method.
In the GUI interface of a network management system, an LLID is specified in coding method
2 (the first byte is 0x01) described in ITU-T I.610, and a window is available for setting the other
15 bytes.
The sequence and meaning of each filed are described as follows:
2-byte country code (the BCD is defaulted to be 0x0086) + 2-byte network code (the BCD is
defaulted to 0x0000) + 11-byte NE code (the first four bytes are defaulted to be an NE ID, and
the last seven bytes are defaulted to be 0s)
CAUTION
After being specified, an NE code that is different from an NE ID (that is, the first four bytes
are not the same as an NE ID, and the other seven bytes are not 0s) remains unchanged regardless
of the NE ID.
A.14.4 Network Code(Hexadecimal Code)
Description
The Network Code(Hexadecimal Code) parameter specifies the values of bytes 4 and 5 in the
Values
[2BYTE]00 00-ff ff [2BYTE]00 00

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
767
The binary coded decimal (BCD) is used for a network code. You can set a network code as
required within the specified value range.
The default network code is 0x0000. It is recommended that you set the network code to 0x0000.
None.
Related Information
15 bytes.
CAUTION
of the NE ID.
A.14.5 NE Code(Hexadecimal Code)
Description
The NE Code(Hexadecimal Code) parameter specifies the values of bytes 6 through 16 in the
Values
[11BYTE]00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00-
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
4-byte NE ID + 7-byte 0s

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
768
If an NE on a network has a unique LLID, set the values of the 11 bytes as required.
The first four bytes are defaulted to be a network ID, and the last seven bytes are 0s. It is
recommended that you set the network code to the default value.
None.
Related Information
15 bytes.
CAUTION
of the NE ID.
A.15 ATM/IMA Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the ATM/IMA function.
A.15.1 VCTRUNK Port (ATM Bound Path Management)
Description
The VCTRUNK Port (ATM Bound Path Management) parameter identifies the ATM ports.
One VCTRUNK can be bound with multiple SDH timeslots of the same level.
Values
For N1ADQ1/N1ADL4 boards:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
769
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK16 UNI

Value Description
VCTRUNK1-4 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC4-xv
only.
VCTRUNK5-16 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC3-xv or
VC4-xv.

For N1IDQ1/N1IDL4 boards:

Value Description
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK66 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC12-xv
or VC4-xv.
VCTRUNK67-
VCTRUNK70
Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC4-xv
only.

For N1IDQ1A and N1IDL4A boards:

Value Description
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK94 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with the VC12-
xv or VC4-xv.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
770
Value Description
VCTRUNK95-
VCTRUNK98
Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with the VC4-
xv only.

Principles of binding internal ports (VCTRUNK):
For N1ADQ1 and N1ADL4 boards:
Port Number Binding Level Path Number
VCTRUNK1-4 VC4-xv 1-4



NOTE
For the IDQ1 or IDL4, if the binding level is VC12-xv, 16 ports at the VC-12 level can be bound. The path
number is allocated from 1 to 63 on the NMS.
For the IDQ1A or IDL4A, if the binding level is VC12-xv, 93 ports at the VC-12 level can be bound. The
path number is allocated from 1 to 189 on the NMS.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
771
A.15.2 Level (ATM Bound Path Management)
Description
The Level (ATM Bound Path Management) parameter specifies the VC level that can be
bound to VCTRUNK ports.
For N1ADQ1/N1ADL4 boards, the level can be VC4-xv or VC3-xv; for N1IDQ1/N1IDL4
boards, the level can be VC4-xv or VC12-xv.
If this parameter is set improperly, the service may fail.
Values
For N1ADQ1/N1ADL4 boards:
VC3-xv, VC4-xv VC3-xv

l VC12-xv
l VC4-xv
VC12-xv

For N1IDQ1A/N1IDL4A boards:
VC12-xv, VC4-xv VC12-xv

Principles of binding internal ports (VCTRUNK):
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
772


For N1IDQ1A/N1IDL4A boards:

None.
A.15.3 Direction (ATM Bound Path Management)
Description
The Direction (ATM Bound Path Management) parameter specifies the direction of a
connection to be set up at a VCTRUNK port. The direction can beUplink, Downlink and
Bidirectional.
If this parameter is set improperly, only unidirectional communication is achieved in a
bidirectional service.
Values
Bidirectional, Uplink, Downlink Bidirectional

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
773
Value Description
Uplink The uplink ATM connection of the port is available. That is,
the ATM connection is from the optical interface side to the
cross-connection side.
Downlink The downlink ATM connection of the port is available. That
is, the ATM connection is from the cross-connection side to
the optical interface side.
Bidirectional The ATM connection of the port is available bidirectionally.

An end-to-end connection is bound with VCTRUNKs in both directions, because the end-to-
end ATM connection is bidirectional.
A multicast connection can be bound with a VCTRUNK in one direction, because the multicast
ATM connection is unidirectional.
None.
A.15.4 Port (ATM Port Management)
Description
The Port (ATM Port Management) parameter specifies identities of the external and internal
ports on the ATM or IMA board.
Values
l External ports 1-4
l Internal ports 1-16
UNI

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
774
Value Description
External ports 1-4 Indicates the external ports on the N1ADQ1 or N1ADL4
board, which are numbered from 1 to 4 in the top down order.
Note that only one external port is available on the N1ADL4
board.
Internal ports 1-4 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound only with VC4-
xv.
Internal ports 5-16 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC3-xv or
VC4-xv.

For N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards:
UNI

Value Description
External ports 1-4 Indicates the external ports on the N1IDQ1 or N1IDL4 board,
which are numbered from 1 to 4 in the top down order. Note
only one external port is available on the N1IDL4 board.
Internal ports 1-66 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with VC12-xv
or VC4-xv.
Internal ports 67-70 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound only with VC4-
xv.

UNI

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
775
Value Description
External ports 1-4 Indicates the external ports on the N1IDQ1A or N1IDL4A
board, which are numbered from 1 to 4 in the top down order.
Note that only one external port is available on the N1IDL4A
board.
Internal ports 1-94 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound with the VC12-
xv or VC4-xv.
Internal ports 95-98 Indicates the VCTRUNKs that can be bound only with the
VC4-xv.

Principles of binding internal ports (VCTRUNKs):
Internal ports 1-4 VC4-xv 1-4

For N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards:


OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
776
None.
A.15.5 Port Type (ATM Port Management)
Description
The Port Type (ATM Port Management) parameter specifies ATM ports, which are classified
into UNI and NNI ATM ports. The maximum number of VPI bits in a cell header for a UNI port
is different from that for a NNI port.
Values
UNI, NNI UNI

Value Description
UNI The maximum number of VPI bits is 8.
NNI The maximum number of VPI bits is 12.

If the number of VPIs received at a port is large (for example, greater than 255), select NNI to
increase the number of VPI bits. As a result, more VPIs are available.
None.
A.15.6 Max. VPI Bits
Description
The Max. VPI Bits parameter specifies the maximum number of available VPIs at a port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
777
The number of VPI bits determines the number of available VPIs. It shows the number of
available VPIs at a port. This number can be increased or decreased, depending on the VPIs
required at the port.
Values
UNI port: 1-8
NNI port: 1-12
8 bits

NOTE
The IDQ1A and IDL4A boards do not support this parameter.
Max. VPI Bits refers to the number of bits in the valid VPI fields in a cell header that a port
supports. The VPI value and the value of Max. VPI Bits have the following relationship: VPI
= 2
Bits
-1.
This parameter is invalid if a service connection is set up at the port.
A.15.7 Max. VCI Bits
Description
The Max. VCI Bits parameter specifies the maximum number of available virtual channel
identifiers (VCIs) at a port.
The number of VCI bits specifies the number of available VCIs. It shows the number of available
VCIs at a port. This number can be increased or decreased, depending on the VCIs required at
the port.
Values
6-16 7 bits

NOTE
The IDQ1A and IDL4A boards do not support this parameter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
778
Max. VCI Bits refers to the number of bits in the valid VCI fields in the cell header that a port
supports. The VCI value and the value of Max. VCI Bits have the following relationship: VCI
= 2
Bits
-1.
A.15.8 Max. VPC
Description
The Max. VPC parameter specifies the maximum number of permanent virtual paths (PVPs)
that can be set up at a port.
Values
0-4096 224 Piece

NOTE
The N1IDQ1A and N1IDL4A boards do not support this parameter.
None.
None.
A.15.9 Max. VCC
Description
The Max. VCC parameter specifies the maximum number of permanent virtual connections
(PVCs) that can be set up at a port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
779
Values
1-8192 3072 Piece

NOTE
None.
None.
A.15.10 VPC Configured
Description
The VPC Configured parameter specifies the number of permanent virtual paths (PVPs) that
have been set up at a port.
Values
N1IDQ1A,
N1IDL4A
0-4000 0 Number
N1ADQ1, N1ADL4,
N1IDQ1, N1IDL4
0-4096 0 Number

For example, two PVPs have been set up and activated at internal port 1. In this case, the number
of configured VPCs is 2.
None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
780
A.15.11 VCC Configured
Description
The VCC Configured parameter specifies the number of PVCs that have been set up at a port.
Values
0-8192 0 Number

For example, two PVCs have been set up and activated at internal port 1. In this case, the number
of configured VCCs is 2.
None.
None.
A.15.12 Number of VPI that Supports VCC
Description
The Number of VPI that Supports VCC parameter specifies the number of VPIs supporting
PVCs at a port. That is, only the VPIs specified by this parameter can be used to set up VC
connections, regardless of the number of VPI bits. Other VPIs can be used to set up only VP
connections.
Because this parameter specifies the number of VPIs that can be used to set up VC connections,
the system resource allocation is affected. Therefore, set this parameter based on the actual
service configurations.
Values
0-1802, in step length of 1 32 Number

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
781
NOTE
Set this parameter based on the number of VCIs required for each VPI at each port. For example,
if 50 PVCs need to be set up at a port and the VPI is different for each PVC, 50 VPIs are required
to differentiate the PVCs. In this case, set the number of VPIs that support VC label switching
to 50.
The value of the Number of VPI that Supports VCC parameter must be smaller than the
number of VPIs derived from the MAX. VPI Bits parameter.
A.15.13 UPC/NPC Enabled/Disabled
Description
The UPC/NPC Enabled/Disabled parameter specifies user parameter control or network
parameter control. It indicates whether to enable the flow control function, namely, whether the
flow parameters for the connection are valid.
Other service connections at the same port may be affected.
For example, a VC-4 port (total bandwidth of 353207 cells/s) involves two connections: variable
bit rate (VBR) service and unspecified bit rate (UBR) service. The peak cell rate (PCR) of the
VBR service is set to 100000 cells/s, and the UPC/NPC function is enabled. If the transmission
rate of the UBR service connection is 253207 cells/s, and if the UPC/NPC function is enabled,
the VBR service flow does not exceed the rate of 100000 cells/s. If the VBR service flow exceeds
the rate of 100000 cells/s, the excessive cells are discarded. If the UPC/NPC function is disabled,
the VBR service is not limited. In this case, the VBR service flow can exceed the rate of 100000
cells/s. The excessive cells preempt the bandwidth of the UBR service, because the VBR service
is of higher priority. Consequently, the UBR service cells are discarded.
Values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
782
Value Description
Enabled The flow parameters are valid. In this case, the system
controls the flow based on the flow parameters, for example,
discarding cells or labeling cells.
Disabled The flow parameters are invalid, except for PCR of the CBR
service. In this case, the system provides the guaranteed
bandwidth. Moreover, the system grooms the unguaranteed
services based on the service priority.

The value is not limited. Instead, it is selected according to the networking environment and the
application scenario. Generally, select Enabled for important voice services and signaling
services if the flow needs to be strictly controlled. Select Disabled for connectionless services
if service burst and grooming are allowed.
A.15.14 Positive UPC/NPC(ATM Service Management)
Description
The Positive UPC/NPC parameter specifies whether the flow control function is enabled and
whether the flow parameters used for setting up a connection function. UPC and NPC stand for
user parameter control/network parameter control respectively.
The setting of this parameter for one service connection affects other service connections on the
same port. For example, a VC-4 port (with a total bandwidth of 353207 cells/s) has two
connections, namely, a VBR service and a UBR service. The PCR of the VBR service is set to
100000 cells/s, and the UPC/NPC function is enabled. If the transmission rate of the UBR service
is 253207 cells/s, the rate of the VBR service traffic cannot exceed 100000 cells/s because the
UPC/NPC function is enabled. If the rate of the VBR service exceeds 100000 cells/s, the
excessive cells are discarded. If the UPC/NPC function is disabled, the VBR service is not
limited. In this case, the rate of the VBR service can exceed 100000 cells/s. The excessive cells
preempt the bandwidth of the UBR service because the VBR service is of a higher priority.
Consequently, the UBR service cells are discarded.
Values
Enable, Disable Enable

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
783
Value Description
Enable Indicates that the flow parameters function. In this case, the
system controls the flow based on the flow parameters. For
example, the system discards cells or labels cells.
Disable Indicates that the flow parameters does not function. In this
case, the system provides the guaranteed bandwidth and
schedules the unguaranteed services based on the service
priority.

Select a proper value according to the networking environment and application scenario.
Generally, set this parameter to Enable for services that require strict flow control. Set this
parameter to Disable for services that allow service burst and grooming.
A.15.15 ID (ATM Traffic Management)
Description
The ID (ATM Traffic Management) parameter specifies a traffic ID. An ID is allocated for
each type of traffic.
The value of this parameter is automatically allocated on the U2000. When an ATM connection
is configured, services may be discarded or interrupted if the services are allocated with an
incorrect ID. The ID is service-specific. For example, when wireless base stations are
interconnected, a voice service from the opposite station is of the CBR type. If the UBR service
type is selected to set up the connection, some calls may be dropped in case of heavy traffic.
The bandwidth is guaranteed for CBR services, but not for UBR services.
Values
Value
Range
Default
Value Description
1-2048 - This parameter is related to the number of created connections.
When a connection is created, a traffic is added to the traffic list.
To set up a connection, you can either select a created connection
from the ATM traffic table, or input the traffic ID for the created
connection.

Select a traffic type required for the connection from the ATM traffic table.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
784
This parameter is valid only when an ATM traffic is created.
A.15.16 Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management)
Description
The Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management) parameter specifies sub-types of a service type.
Each service has multiple traffic types. The traffic type specifies the traffic parameters that can
be set, for example, processing the cells whose priority is 0 or 1 in different ways, and whether
to enable the labeling function.
If this parameter is incorrectly set, some packets may be discarded.
Traffic parameters depend on the traffic type. Use the CBR service as an example. The CBR
service has two traffic types: NoClpNoScr and NoClpNoScrCdvt. For the NoClpNoScr CBR
service, only PCR can be set. For the NoClpNoScrCdvt CBR service, both PCR and CDTV can
be set. In practical applications, if there is a small amount of service at a rate higher than the
PCR, all excessive cells are discarded for the NoClpNoScr CBR service. Consequently, the
service is transiently interrupted. For the NoClpNoScrCdvt CBR service, a buffer space is
allocated. When a transient burst event occurs, the cells are not discarded.
Values
The following table lists the available traffic types for each service type.
Service Type Traffic Type Default Value
CBR l NoClpNoScr
l ClpNoTaggingNoScr
l ClpTaggingNoScr
l ClpTransparentNoScr
l NoClpNoScrCdvt
NoClpNoScr
rt-VBR l ClpTransparentScr
l NoClpScrCdvt
l ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
l ClpTaggingScrCdvt
ClpTransparentScr
nrt-VBR l NoClpScr
l ClpNoTaggingScr
l ClpTaggingScr
NoClpScr
UBR l NoTrafficDescriptor
l NoClpNoScr
l NoClpTaggingNoScr
l NoClpNoScrCdvt
NoTrafficDescriptor
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
785
Service Type Traffic Type Default Value
UBR+ l NoTrafficDescriptorMcr
l NoClpMcr
l NoClpMcrCdvt
NoTrafficDescrip-
torMcr

For CBR services:
Traffic
Type
CDVT Process
ing
Cells
with
CLP of 0
and 1 in
Differe
nt Ways
Labelin
g Cells
PCR MCR MBS SCR
NoClpN
oScr
Not
supporte
d
No No Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
ClpNoT
aggingN
oScr
Not
supporte
d
Yes No Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
ClpTagg
ingNoSc
r
Not
supporte
d
Yes Yes Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
ClpTran
sparentN
oScr
Supporte
d
No No Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpN
oScrCdv
t
Supporte
d
No No Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d

For rt-VBR services:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
786
Traffic
Type
CDVT Process
ing
Cells
with
CLP of 0
and 1 in
Differe
nt Ways
Labelin
g Cells
PCR MCR MBS SCR
ClpTrans
parentSc
r
Supporte
d
No No Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d
NoClpSc
rCdvt
Supporte
d
No No Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d
ClpNoTa
ggingScr
Cdvt
Supporte
d
Yes No Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d
ClpTag-
gingScrC
dvt
Supporte
d
Yes Yes Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d

For nrt-VBR services:
Traffic
Type
CDVT Process
ing
Cells
with
CLP of 0
and 1 in
Differe
nt Ways
Labelin
g Cells
PCR MCR MBS SCR
NoClpSc
r
Not
supporte
d
No No Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d
ClpNoTa
ggingScr
Not
supporte
d
Yes No Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d
ClpTaggi
ngScr
Not
supporte
d
Yes Yes Supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Supporte
d
Supporte
d

For UBR services:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
787
Traffic
Type
CDVT Processing
Cells with
CLP of 0 and
1 in
Different
Ways
Labeli
ng
Cells
PCR MCR MBS SCR
NoTraff
icDescri
ptor
Not
supporte
d
No No Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpN
oScr
Not
supporte
d
No No Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpT
aggingN
oScr
Support
ed
Yes Yes Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpN
oScrCd
vt
Support
ed
No No Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d

For UBR+ services:
Traffic
Type
CDVT Labeli
ng
Cells
Processin
g Cells
with CLP
of 0 and 1
in
Different
Ways
PCR hether
to
Suppor
t MCR
MBS SCR
NoTraffi
cDescrip
torMcr
Not
supporte
d
No No Not
supporte
d
Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpM
cr
Not
supporte
d
No No Support
ed
Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d
NoClpM
crCdvt
Support
ed
No No Support
ed
Support
ed
Not
supporte
d
Not
supporte
d

Note: Cell labeling means that setting the cell loss priority (CLP) of the cells that do not meet
the traffic parameters to 1. In case of network congestion, the cells with CLP of 1 are first
discarded.
Select a service type based on the network type and service configurations.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
788
NOTE
Only the IDQ1A and IDL4A boards support UBR+ services.
This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set.
A.15.17 Service Type (ATM Traffic Management)
Description
The Service Type (ATM Traffic Management) parameter specifies a service type provided
by the ATM technology. Available service types are CBR services, rt-VBR services, nrt-VBR
services, UBR services, and UBR+ services. The services of different types differ from each
other in the reserved bandwidth, service priority, and transmission delay.
If this parameter is set incorrectly, services may be unavailable, or the cells may be discarded.
For example, when a mobile phone makes a call, the call request signal is important and needs
to be transmitted in the most reliable CBR service. In such a case, if the UBR service is selected,
the call may fail to be connected during the peak hours. For application scenarios for each service
type, see "Values" and "Configuration Guidelines" in this topic.
Values
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, UBR+ -

NOTE
Only the IDQ1A and IDL4A boards support UBR+ services.
Value Description
CBR Indicates the constant bit rate.
On the user side (namely, for the service applicant), the CBR service is
sensitive to the delay variation of the service data flow. For this reason,
the network is required to transmit data at a constant rate. On the network
side (namely, for the service provider), the CBR service must be allocated
with a fixed static bandwidth within the connection period. Moreover,
the CBR service must be of the highest priority. The CBR service features
stable service data flow. On the user side, data is transmitted periodically
at a constant rate. The service burst event seldom occurs. The circuit
emulation service and the voice service are typical examples. When
applying for the CBR service from the network side, you must specify
the PCR parameter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
789
Value Description
rt-VBR Indicates the real-time variable bit rate.
The rt-VBR service is sensitive to the delay and delay variation of the
data flow. The voice and interactive video services are the typical
applications, which are similar to the CBR service. Some burst events
are allowed for the rt-VBR service. At different time segments, the data
rate may be different at the source end. Moreover, static bandwidth is not
allowed for the rt-VBR service on the network side (namely, the service
provider). Instead, the rt-VBR service runs in statistical multiplexing
mode. When applying for the rt-VBR service from the network side, you
must specify the parameters such as peak cell rate (PCR), sustainable cell
rate (SCR), maximum burst size (MBS), and cell delay variation
tolerance (CDVT).
nrt-VBR Indicates the non-real-time variable bit rate.
Compared with the rt-VBR service, the nrt-VBR service has lower
requirements for the real-time feature and it has lower priority than the
rt-VBR service when service data is processed on the network side. The
other features, such as burstness, statistical multiplexing, and service
parameters, are almost the same as those of the rt-VBR service.
UBR Indicates the unspecified bit rate.
The UBR service is also applicable to the scenarios where realtimeness
and burst events are not highly required. You can require only the best
effort of the network side to provide the service. When applying for the
UBR service, you do not need to specify the service quality parameters.
The network side does not guarantee the UBR service. In the case of
network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. Services such as
FTP and E-mail are the typical applications of the UBR service.
UBR+ The UBR+ service supports the setting of the MCR parameter. There are
UBR+ services on many NodeBs. The UBR+ services are configured
with the MCR. When the service rate does not exceed the configured
MCR, the normal service transmission is ensured. The features of the
UBR+ service other than the MCR are the same as the features of the
UBR service.

Each service has its application scenario. Moreover, the service may be affected because of the
network environment and the interconnected equipment. The following table lists application
scenarios for each service type.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
790
ATM Service Service Category Service Type Application
CBR Category A Voice service Conference call
Audio transmission
(broadcast)
Audio library
Voice mails
Video Video conference
call
Video transmission
Video on demand
rt-VBR Category B Voice service Voice mails
Conference calls
based on voice
packets
Video Visual graph and text
NTSC TV
HDTV TV
nrt-VBR Category C Data Air interface
reservation
Banking service
Frame relay network
interconnection
UBR Category C or D Data E-mail service
File transmission
Database browse
Remote terminal
access
UBR+ Category C or D Data E-mail service
File transmission
Database browsing
Remote terminal
access

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
791
A.15.18 PCR (ATM Traffic Management)
Description
The PCR (ATM Traffic Management) parameter specifies the peak cell rate (PCR), which
indicates the upper threshold of the service rate. That is, if the specified PCR threshold is
exceeded because the service rate bursts for a long time, excessive packets are discarded.
If this parameter is set improperly, some cells may be discarded. For example,
a wireless base station accesses a voice service, and the CBR service is selected to set up the
connection. In such a case, a correct PCR setting is important. If this parameter is set to a small
value, the bandwidth is not enough. Calls may fail to be set up and the service is unavailable. If
this parameter is set to a large value, other voice services may fail to use the available bandwidth,
and some cells are discarded. Consequently, some calls are interrupted.
Values
5-1412828 90 cells/s

For other boards:
90-1412828 90 Cells/s

Generally, set PCR according to service configurations on the interconnected equipment.
Different services are used in different scenarios. The details are as follows:
l For CBR services, PCR equals the reserved bandwidth. If the UPC/NPC function is enabled,
the traffic is controlled according to the PCR value. That is, the excessive packets are
discarded.
l For VBR services, if the UPC/NPC function is enabled, excessive packets are discarded
when the service rate exceeds the PCR. If the UPC/NPC function is disabled, this parameter
is meaningless. That is, the traffic rate can exceed the specified PCR. In such a case, PCR
is set only for the reserved bandwidth computation.
l For UBR services, the bandwidth depends on the available physical bandwidth of a port.
For UBR services, PCR is set to determine the maximum rate only.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
792
Except for PCR of CBR services, the PCR parameter is valid only when the UPC/NPC function
is enabled.
A.15.19 SCR (ATM Traffic Management)
Description
The SCR (ATM Traffic Management) parameter specifies the sustainable cell rate (SCR).
Excessive cells are labeled or discarded, depending on the traffic type.
If this parameter is set improperly, certain cells may be discarded or labeled. For example,
SCR is set to label or discard excessive cells. The labeled cells are discarded in the case of
congestion. Therefore, SCR is a mechanism of avoiding congestion. For the traffic whose cells
are not labeled (see A.15.16 Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management)), excessive cells are
also discarded.
Values
5-1412828 90 cells/s

For other boards:
90-1412828 90 cells/s

Generally, set SCR based on service configurations of the interconnected equipment. Different
services are deployed in different scenarios. Details are as follows:
l For CBR services, SCR does not need to be set.
l For UBR services, SCR does not need to be set.
l For VBR services, there are two cases as follows:
If the UPC/NPC function is enabled and the service rate exceeds the specified PCR,
excessive cells are discarded or labeled.
If the UPC/NPC function is disabled, this parameter is meaningless. That is, the service
rate can exceed the specified SCR. When this occurs, SCR is set to compute the reserved
bandwidth only.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
793
The SCR parameter is valid only when the UPC/NPC function is enabled.
A.15.20 MBS
Description
The MBS parameter specifies the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted over the
connection and that burst continuously based on the peak cell rate. This parameter is set to
increase the capability of a system to respond to transient cell burst events, and to enhance the
anti-jitter performance of a service.
The parameter value affects the anti-jitter performance of a service that bursts transiently.
Values
2-200000, in step length of 1 2 Cells

Generally, set this parameter to a large value to prevent cells from being discarded in case of a
transient burst event. The recommended value is 100000.
The MBS parameter is valid only when the UPC/NPC function is enabled.
Related Information
If the UPC/NPC function is enabled, this parameter allows transient burst of a service. The PCR
is similar to a container at constant size. The MBS and cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
help to increase the container size. When the transient traffic entering the container increases,
the increased size of the container takes effect. If the transient traffic keeps increasing, an
overflow occurs.
l If this parameter is set for the opposite equipment, set it to the same value for the local
equipment.
l If this parameter is not set for the opposite equipment, set it to the integer part of {1+L/(1/
SCR-1/PCR) } for the local equipment. Letter L indicates the CDVT, representing the
maximum tolerance range for a cell to reach the destination in advance if MBS is set to an
expected value.
l If the UPC/NPC function is disabled, this parameter is meaningless.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
794
A.15.21 CDVT
Description
The CDVT parameter specifies the upper threshold of the cell sending interval. This parameter
is set to increase the capability of a system to respond to transient cell burst events, and to enhance
the anti-jitter performance of a service.
The parameter value affects the anti-jitter performance of a service that bursts transiently.
l If this parameter is set to a small value, certain cells may be discarded in case of a service
burst event.
l If this parameter is set to a large value, the system is not affected. Generally, set it to the
maximum value.
Values
0.7-1330000, in step length
of 0.1
0.7 ms

In most cases, set it to the maximum value.
The CDVT parameter is valid only when the UPC/NPC function is enabled. For different service
types and different traffic types, the CDVT values are different. For details, refer to A.15.16
Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management).
Related Information
Fix the PCR value of the level-1 leaky bucket, and estimate the CDVT value. After passing the
level-1 leaky buckets, the data flow is of burst nature, and the average rate is the PCR. Generally,
the data traffic is transmitted at intervals of PCR, 0, PCR, 0, and so on. The CDVT value needs
to be set to meet the following condition:
CDVT<1-424*(MBS-1) (1/SCR-1/PCR)
(SCR and PCR are expressed in bit/s. 424 bits / cell = 53 bytes/cell*8 bits/byte)
A.15.22 Open Flow Frame Discarding Flag
Description
The Open flow frame discarding flag parameter is set for services at the AAL5 layer only.
AAL5 is a frame structure at the ATM adaptation layer. In this structure, multiple ATM cells
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
795
are encapsulated into one AAL5 frame to provide functions (for example, signaling and routing)
of the upper-layer services. If the AAL5 service bandwidth exceeds the bandwidth on the port
or the specified bandwidth, excessive packets are discarded according to the AAL5 data frame.
One AAL5 data frame may contain multiple ATM cells.
Other AAL-layer services may be interrupted. For example,
if the traffic of other services (such as AAL0 services or AAL2 services) exceeds the bandwidth
on the port or the specified bandwidth, the system may discard all the cells because it fails to
find the frame trailer of the AAL5 service. Although the service traffic is restored normally, the
services cannot be restored.
Values
Yes, No No

Select Yes or No based on the encapsulation type at the ATM adaptation layer. Generally, select
No.
Enable this flag only when the service is at the AAL5 layer.
If any service at other adaptation layers is available, do not enable this flag.
None.
A.15.23 Positive Traffic Descriptor
Description
The Positive Traffic Description parameter specifies the flow used by an ATM connection, in
the aspects of service type, flow type, settings of the relevant parameters (PCR, SCR, MBS, and
CDVT), and flow frame discarding flag.
Improper setting of this parameter may result in a service loss or service interruption. Different
service types are used in different scenarios. Assume that the equipment is interconnected with
Node B. If the voice service transmitted from the opposite equipment is of the CBR type and
the service created on the local equipment is of the UBR type, the call may drop during traffic
peak hours. This is because that the bandwidth for the CBR service is fully guaranteed whereas
the bandwidth for a UBR service is not guaranteed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
796
Values
1-2048 -

This parameter depends on the created flow. When a flow is created, it is added to the flow table.
To set up a connection, you can select a created flow from the flow table, or enter the ID of the
created flow.
This parameter is valid only when the ATM flow is created.
A.15.24 Connection ID (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Connection ID (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies IDs of the working and
protection links in a protection group.
Values
For IDQ1A/IDL4A boards:
1-32768 -

For other boards:
1-8192 -

Set this parameter to a value within the value range.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
797
A.15.25 Connection Type (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Connection Type (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies whether the setup
connection is a PVP or a PVC. Each PVC transmits services that are marked with unique VPI
and VCI only. Each PVP transmits all services with the same VPI over the connection. That is,
the connection transmits all services with different VCIs over the connection with the same VPI,
regardless of VCI.
Values
PVP, PVC PVC

Value Description
PVP Each PVP transmits all services marked with VCI with the
same VPI over the connection.
PVC Each PVC transmits services marked with unique VPI and
VCI only.

To converge services of the same VPI at a port, select PVP.
To transmit services marked with unique VPI and VCI only, select PVC.
As shown in Figure A-21, PVC and PVP are both virtual transmission paths. PVC is, however,
contained in PVP. A PVC is a channel, but a PVP is a path. PVCs in the PVP are used to transmit
services.
Figure A-21 Relation between PVC and PVP
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
798

A.15.26 Spread Type (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Spread Type (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies the spread type of the setup
connections, including unicast connection (p2p), multicast root connection (p2mpRoot), and
multicast leaf connection (p2mpLeaf).
Values
Board Name Valid Value Default Value
N1IDQ1A, N1IDL4A p2p p2p
N1ADL4, N1DQ1, N1IDL4,
N1IDQ1
p2p, p2mpRoot, p2mpLeaf p2p

Value Description
p2p Provides an end-to-end connection from one port to another port.
p2mpRoot Provides a root connection for multicast services from one point to
multiple points. The branches of the root connection are the leaf
connections, for example, the black lines shown in the figure.
IDQ1
MAC Port
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
799
Value Description
p2mpLeaf Provides leaf connections for p2mp multicast services. The leaf nodes
are multicast over the root connection, for example, the blue lines shown
in the figure.

The p2p connection is used for communication from a segment to an end, for example, phone
calls and Internet access services. The p2mpRoot and p2mpLeaf connections are used for
multicast communication, for example, IPTV services and broadcast services.
A unicast service is a bidirectional service, but a multicast service is a unidirectional service.
The application scenarios are respectively described in Figure A-22and Figure A-23.
Figure A-22 Multicast service

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
800
Figure A-23 Unicast service

p2p: To set up a point-to-point bidirectional connection, select p2p.
p2mpRoot: To set up a p2mp unidirectional multicast connection, set up a root connection for
multicast services. In this case, select p2mpRoot.
p2mpLeaf: To set up a p2mp unidirectional multicast connection, and to set up leaf connections
for multicast services after the root connection is set up, select p2mpLeaf.
Related Information
To set up a multicast connection, set up a root connection for multicast services, and then set up
multiple leaf connections that have the same source but different sinks. These leaf connections
are multicast to different ports (spatial multicast) or the same port (logical multicast). A multicast
service is a unidirectional service.
A.15.27 VPI and VCI (ATM Service Management)
Description
The VPI and VCI (ATM Service Management) parameter indicates virtual path identity and
virtual channel identity, which are used to respectively identify virtual paths and virtual channels
inside a virtual path. A VPI and a VCI are used to identify a virtual connection. VPI and VCI in
the cell header constitute routing information of a cell.
If this parameter is set improperly, services may be unavailable. Figure A-24 shows an example.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
801
Figure A-24 Schematic diagram of an example
ATM
Node1
ATM
Node2
ATM
Node3
VPL
VPL
VPI-77
VCI-22
VPI=76
VCI=19,26,39
VPI=69
VCI=34,48
VPI=77
VCI=22,26
VPI=76
VCI=19,26,39
VPI=53
VCI=19,26,39
VPC
VCC
IN OUT
VPI-69
VCI-34
VCI-48
VPI in
77
22
VPI out
31
33
VPI in
53
VPI out
76
VPI in
76
VPI out
53
VPI=31
VCI-26

The sink VPI/VCI of ATM Node1 must be the same as the source VPI/VCI of ATM Node2.
(VPI = 77, VCI = 22, 26). Otherwise, ATM Node2 may fail to identify the data (VPI in the cell
header is not 53. Alternatively, VCI in the cell header is not 22 or 26) received from ATM Node1.
ATM Node2 can identify the cells whose VPI is 77 and whose VCI is 22 or 26 only. In other
words, a service between different nodes is transmitted on the basis of the same VPI and VCI.
Values
Parameter
Value
Value
Range
Default
Value Description
VPI 0-4095 - Switches VPI labels between nodes. Note that
values 0-4095 are subject to the maximum
configuration. By default, set this parameter to a
value ranging from 0 to 255. You can adjust the
value range by setting Port Type and Max. VPI
Bits. Port resources are specified. If this parameter
is set to a large value for a port, set it to a small
value for other ports. For the configuration method,
refer to Relationship with Other Parameters in this
topic.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
802
Parameter
Value
Value
Range
Default
Value Description
VCI 32-65535 - Switches VCI labels between nodes. Note that
values 32-65535 are subject to the maximum
configuration. By default, set this parameter to a
value ranging from 32 to 127 (Max. VCI Bits is 7
bits). You can adjust the value range by setting
Max. VCI Bits. Port resources are specified. If this
parameter is set to a large value for a port, set it to
a small value for other ports. For the configuration
method, refer to Relationship with Other
Parameters in this topic.

NOTE
For the N1IDQ1A or N1IDL4A board, the value range of the VPI parameter is not determined by setting
the Max. VPI Bits parameter. Instead, the actual value range of the VPI parameter is determined by setting
it to a specific value range (for example, from 1 to 1000). The value of the VCI parameter ranges from 32
to 65535, and this value range cannot be modified.
This parameter identifies connections only regardless of requirements. Note that the specified
VPI must be consistent with the VPI of the downstream or upstream service on the node to ensure
that the labels are switched correctly in the case of multipoint transmission. An example is shown
in Impact on the System in this topic.
The VPI value range depends on Port Type and Max. VPI Bits.
l If Port Type is set to UNI, Max. VPI Bits of the port can be set to 8 only. In this case, set
VPI to a value ranging from 0 to 255.
l If Port Type is set to NNI, Max. VPI Bits of the port can be set to 12. In this case, set
VPI to a value ranging from 0 to 4095.
The VCI value range depends on Max. VCI Bits of the port.
l If the value of Max. VCI Bits is increased, set VCI to a larger value range.
l If Max. VCI Bits is set to 16, set VCI to a value ranging from 32 to 65535.
A.15.28 Positive Service Status(ATM Service Management)
Description
The Positive Service Status parameter indicates the current status of a positive ATM service.
Positive refers to the direction from the source to the sink of an ATM connection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
803
When this parameter is set to Up, the ATM service is normal. Otherwise, the service is
interrupted.
Values
Up, Down Up

Value Description
Up Indicates that the service is normal.
Down Indicates that the service is interrupted.

There are no specific principles for setting this parameter because it is used for querying.
A.15.29 Positive Service Failure Reason(ATM Service
Management)
Description
The Positive Service Failure Reason parameter indicates the cause of a positive service failure.
Positive refers to the direction from the source to the sink of an ATM connection.
When this parameter is set to OK, the service is normal. Otherwise, the service is interrupted.
Values
OK, LCD, AIS, CCLOC OK

Value Description
OK Indicates that the positive service is normal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
804
Value Description
CCLOC Indicates that the service is interrupted because the user cell
or the CC cell is not received within a period ranging from 3s
to 4s after the CC sink is configured.
AIS Indicates that the positive service is interrupted because AIS
signals are received.
LCD Indicates that the positive service is interrupted because LCD
is received.

There are no specific principles for setting this parameter because this parameter is used for
querying.
A.15.30 Source/Sink Switching Cause
Description
The Source/Sink Switching Cause parameter specifies a condition that triggers switching of
an ATM protection pair.
Values
Idle, Protection Route Signal Fail, Working
Route SF, Non-Revertive, Wait-To-Restore,
Manual to Active, Manual to Standby,
Freeze, Lockout, Force to Standby
Idle

Value Description
Idle Indicates that the working channel and the protection pair are normal.
Protection Route
Signal Fail
Indicates that a failure in the working channel triggers switching.
Working Route SF Indicates that the protection channel fails but switching does not occur.
Force to Standby Indicates that services are manually switched from the working channel
to the protection channel when both channels are normal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
805
Value Description
Non-Revertive Indicates that the working channel is restored to normal and the
protection channel remains normal. The protection group is in non-
revertive mode.
Wait-To-Restore Indicates that the working channel is restored to normal and the
protection channel remains normal. The protection group is in revertive
mode. In this case, services are waiting to be restored to the working
channel. The duration of the waiting time is determined by the
restoration time of the working channel.
Manual to Active Indicates that services are switched from the protection channel to the
working channel.
Manual to Standby Indicates that services are switched from the working channel to the
protection channel.
Freeze Indicates that the status of the protection pair is frozen.
Lockout Indicates the protection lockout of the protection pair.

This parameter is used for querying.
A.15.31 Protection Type (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Protection Type (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies whether an ATM
connection is configured with 1+1 or 1:1 protection.
Values
For IDQ1A/IDL4A boards:
1:1 1:1

For other boards:
1+1, 1:1 1+1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
806

Select a value according to the protection type specified by users.
None.
Related Information
1+1 protection: Uses the dual-fed and selective receiving mechanism.
Figure A-25 shows the normal status.
Figure A-25 Normal status
Working entity
protection domain
Protection entity
Service data
Source node protection domain Destination node

Figure A-26 shows the switching status.
Figure A-26 Switching status
Working entity
Protection entity
Service data
Destination node protection domain Source node protection domain

1:1 Protection: Adopts the redundant connection protection mechanism.
Working entity
Protection entity
Working service data
Extra service data

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
807
Extra service data
Protection entity
Working entity

A.15.32 Switching Direction (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Switching Direction (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies whether the
switching occurs at one end (source or sink), or at both ends (namely, both the source and sink
ends) simultaneously.
Values
Source + Sink, Source, Sink Sink

l If two P2P ATM connections have the same source but different sinks, select Sink.
l If two P2P ATM connections have the same sink but different sources, select Source.
l If two P2P ATM connections have different sources and sinks, select Source + Sink.
None.
A.15.33 Switching Status (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Switching Status (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies the status of an ATM
protection group. It identifies whether switching occurs or whether the protection protocol stops.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
808
Values
Stop, Normal, Switch -

Value Description
Stop Indicates that the protection protocol stops or the protection
pair is not added.
Normal Indicates the normal status.
Switch Indicates the switching status.

None.
None.
A.15.34 Switching Type (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Switching Type (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies whether a bidirectional
ATM connection is switched at both ends when a protection switching event occurs.
Values
Single-Ended, Dual End Single-Ended

Select a proper value according to the protection type specified by users.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
809
None.
Related Information
The 1+1 protection is used as an example to describe differences between single-ended
protection and dual-ended protection.
In single-ended protection, if the working link fails in one direction, services are switched from
the working link to the protection link only in this direction. Switching does not occur in another
direction.
Working entity
protection domain
Protection entity
Service data
Source node protection domain Destination node

Working entity
Protection entity
Service data
Destination node protection domain Source node protection domain

Dual-ended protection means that a switching event occurs automatically in another direction
if it occurs in one direction. In this case, a bidirectional service is completely switched to the
protection link.
Working entity
Protection entity
Extra service data

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
810
Extra service data
Protection entity
Working entity

A.15.35 Revertive Mode (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Revertive Mode (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies whether a service is
switched to the original working link after the working link is restored to normal.
Values
Revertive, Non-Revertive Revertive

Select a proper value, depending on whether the ATM service needs to be switched to the original
working link.
None.
A.15.36 Pause Time(0-100) *100 ms (ATM Service Management)
Description
The Pause Time(0-100) *100 ms (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies the period
from the time when a fault is detected to the time when switching occurs in the ATM protection
group. It is used for ATM protection. If a link is restored to normal within the hold-off time,
switching does not occur.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
811
Values
(0-100)*100, in step length of
1
100 ms

Select a proper value according to requirements.
None.
A.15.37 WTR Time(0-30min) (ATM Service Management)
Description
The WTR Time(0-30min) (ATM Service Management) parameter specifies the period from
the time when the original working link is restored to normal to the time when services are
switched from the protection link back to the original working link.
Values
1-30, in step length of 1 12 min

Set this parameter properly based on the actual network conditions.
This parameter is valid only when A.15.35 Revertive Mode (ATM Service Management) is
set to Revertive.
A.15.38 External Command (ATM Protection Group)
Description
The External Command (ATM Protection Group) parameter specifies the external command
operations in 1+1 or 1:1 protection switching of ATM connections.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
812
The switching state may be changed. Moreover, some cells may be discarded in the switching
process.
Values
Clear, Freeze, Lockout of Protection, Force to
Standby, Manual to Active, Manual to
Standby, Stop Protection Controller, Start
Protection Controller
Clear

Value Description
Clear Clears all the external commands.
Freeze Freezes the protection group. After the Freeze command is
issued, the protection group keeps the current state, which is
not changed any more.
Lockout of Protection Locks the protection connection. That is, forcibly switches to
the working connection.
Force to Standby Forcibly switches to the protection connection.
Manual to Active Manually switches to the working connection.
Manual to Standby Manually switches to the protection connection.
Stop Protection Controller Disables the functions of the protection controller.
Start Protection Controller Enables the functions of the protection controller.

Select the value according to the switching operation to be performed.
This parameter is valid only after the protection group is added.
A.15.39 IMA Group Number
Description
The IMA Group Number parameter specifies that each IMA group is allocated with a unique
number for identification. To query the IMA group status and link status, set this parameter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
813
Values
IDQ1A/IDL4A:
1-93 -

IDQ1/IDL4:
1-32 -

When you create IMA groups, the IMA group number is automatically allocated by the
U2000. The number of IMA groups for the IDQ1 or IDL4 cannot be more than 16, and the
number of IMA groups for the IDQ1A or IDL4A cannot be more than 93.
None.
A.15.40 IMA Protocol Version
Description
The IMA Protocol Version parameter specifies the version number of the IMA protocol adopted
at the local end. The IMA protocol has two versions: IMA1.0 and IMA1.1.
The IMA protocol version of the interconnected equipment must be consistent. Otherwise, the
IMA service may fail to interwork.
Values
1.0, 1.1 1.1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
814
The IMA protocol version for the interconnected equipment should be consistent at the two ends.
None.
A.15.41 IMA Transmit Frame Length
Description
The IMA Transmit Frame Length parameter specifies the length of one IMA frame transmitted
by the local equipment. That is, how many ATM cells are contained in one IMA frame. An IMA
frame can contain 32, 64, 128 or 256 ATM cells. Moreover, each IMA frame contains an IMA
control protocol cell (ICP), which is used to negotiate the IMA protocol and to transmit
information.
If the value of IMA Transmit Frame Length for the interconnected equipment at one end is
inconsistent with that at another end, the IMA negotiation may fail.
Values
32, 64, 128, 256 128

IMA Transmit Frame Length should be consistent with that of the interconnected board.
None.
A.15.42 IMA Group Configuration Mode
Description
The IIMA Group Configuration Mode parameter specifies the configuration and working
modes of the links in an IMA group. These configuration and working modes are Symmetrical
Mode and Symmetrical Operation, Symmetrical Mode and Asymmetrical Operation and
Asymmetrical Mode and Asymmetrical Operation.
The configuration decides whether an IMA link is of unidirectional conductivity. For examples,
see Principle of Selecting Values.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
815
Values
Operation, Symmetrical Mode and
Asymmetrical Operation,
Asymmetrical Mode and Asymmetrical
Operation
Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation

Value Description
Symmetrical Operation
Indicates that each link in an IMA group is configured to be
capable of transmitting and receiving packets in two
directions (namely, symmetrical mode). When the IMA group
works normally, if a link is interrupted in the transmit or
receive direction, it is interrupted accordingly in another
direction. That is, this link is bidirectionally unavailable (this
is called symmetric operation).
capable of transmitting and receiving packets in two
directions (namely, symmetrical mode). When the IMA group
works normally, if a link is interrupted in the transmit or
receive direction, it works normally in another direction. That
is, this link is unidirectionally available (this is called
asymmetric operation).
Asymmetrical Mode and
capable of transmitting or receiving packets only in one
direction (namely, asymmetrical mode). When the IMA
group works normally, if a link is interrupted in the transmit
or receive direction, it works normally in another direction.
That is, this link is unidirectionally available (this is called
asymmetric operation).

Select the value according to the following application scenarios.
Figure A-33 shows the asymmetrical mode and symmetrical operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
816
Figure A-33 Schematic diagram of symmetrical mode and symmetrical operation

Figure A-34 shows the asymmetrical mode and asymmetrical operation.
Figure A-34 Schematic diagram of symmetrical mode and asymmetrical operation

Figure A-35 shows the asymmetrical mode and asymmetrical operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
817
Figure A-35 Schematic diagram of asymmetrical mode and asymmetrical operation

If the two directions of an E1 link in the IMA group are in both transmit or both receive directions,
the IMA group fails to negotiate.
None.
A.15.43 Minimum Number of Active Links
Description
The Minimum Number of Active Links parameter specifies the minimum threshold of the
active links required in an IMA group for normal running of the IMA group.
If the parameter value is set improperly, the services may be interrupted. If the number of active
links in an IMA group is not less than the value of Minimum Number of Active Links, the
IMA group works normally. Otherwise, the services of the IMA group are interrupted.
Values
0-32 0

Set this parameter according to the minimum number of active links supported by the opposite
equipment.
Alternatively, set the value according to the actual capability of the services. For example, there
are 10 active links, and the total bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. In this case, the interconnected
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
818
equipment provides the bandwidth of at least 15 Mbit/s. Then set Minimum Number of Active
Links to 8. If the number of links is less than 8, the bandwidth is less than 15 Mbit/s. In this
case, the services of the IMA group are interrupted.
This parameter is valid only after IMA Group is set.
A.15.44 IMA Group Status
Description
The IMA Group Status parameter specifies the status of the IMA group state machine. By
referring to this state, you can diagnose the faults of the IMA group protocol.
Values
Not Configured, Start-Up, Start-Up-Ack, Config-Aborted,
Insufficient-Links, Blocked, Operational
-

Value Description
Not Configured Displays this state if the IMA group does not exist.
Start-Up Displays this state if the IMA group state machine is started
at the local end, and waits for being started at the opposite
end.
Start-Up-Ack This is a transitional state. After the IMA group state
machine is started at the two ends, the IMA group changes
to the Start-up-Ack state.
Config-Aborted Displays this state if the parameters adopted at the local end
do not match those at the opposite end.
Insufficient-Links Displays this state if the parameters at the local end match
those at the opposite end, but the link resources are
insufficient.
Blocked Indicates that the IMA group is blocked. To maintain an
IMA group, you can block it.
Operational Displays this state if the IMA group is not suppressed and
the link resources are sufficient.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
819
None.
None.
A.15.45 Protocol Mode (IMA1.0 Mode)
Description
The Protocol Mode parameter indicates the management mode of the IMA 1.0 protocol. The
management modes of the IMA 1.0 protocol contain ITU-T mode and European mode.
This parameter affects the negotiation between the two ends of an IMA group. If the
configurations of the two ends are different, the negotiation may fail and hence the service is
affected.
Values
ITUT Mode, European
Mode
ITUT Mode

Value Description
ITUT Mode Indicates that the ITU-T mode is used.
European Mode Indicates that the European mode is used.

The IMA 1.0 management mode cannot interwork with the IMA 1.1 management mode.
Ensure that the configurations of the two ends of an IMA group are the same when you select
the IMA 1.0 management mode. In addition, IMA Transmit Frame Length must be set to 128;
IMA Group Configuration Mode must be set to Symmetrical Mode And Symmetrical
Operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
820
A.15.46 Enable/Disable Cell Payload Scramble
Description
The Enable/Disable Cell Payload Scramble parameter specifies whether to scramble the
payload of the cells in the E1 link.
Values

Select the value according to the equipment at the opposite end. Generally, select Enabled.
None.
A.15.47 Link Frame Format
Description
The Link Frame Format parameter specifies whether the frames in the E1 link are in dual frame
format or multiframe format.
Values
E1 Dual Frame, E1 CRC-4 Multiframe E1 CRC-4 Multiframe

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
821
Value Description
E1 Dual Frame Indicates that an E1 dual frame consists of ITU-T G.704 basic
frames (32 bytes form one ITU-T G.704 basic frame), and its
name is decided by the frame delimitation method. ITU-T G.
706 specifies the framing method of alternating E1 FAS and
E1 NFAS frame flow. For this reason, an E1 dual frame is
regarded as a multiframe that consists of two ITU-T G.704
basic frames. An E1 dual frame is formed for delimitation.
E1 CRC-4 Multiframe Indicates that an E1 CRC-4 multiframe consists of 16 ITU-T
G.704 basic frames. An E1 CRC-4 multiframe is defined in
ITU-T G.706. It carries the CRC information and the line
monitoring information. An E1 CRC-4 multiframe flow is
first delimitated in dual frame format. After the dual frame is
framed correctly, the CRC-4 multiframe is framed.

Currently, E1 dual frames are almost not used. Instead, E1 CRC-4 multiframes are used in most
cases. For this reason, select E1 CRC-4 Multiframe.
None.
A.15.48 Connection Direction (ATM Segment End Attribute)
Description
The Connection Direction (ATM Segment End Attribute) parameter is based on one node.
Figure A-36 shows the forward and backward of node B.
Figure A-36 An example of connection direction
A B C
Forward Backward

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
822
Values
Forward, Backward -

Value Description
Forward Indicates the direction from the source port to the sink port.
Backward Indicates the direction from the sink port to the source port.

None.
None.
A.15.49 Segment and End Attribute (ATM Segment End Attribute)
Description
The Segment and End Attribute (ATM Segment End Attribute) parameter specifies the
OAM maintenance point type. For different segment and end attributes, OAM cells are processed
in different segments.
Values
Non segment and Endpoint, Segment point, Endpoint, Segment
and Endpoint
Non segment and
Endpoint

Value Description
Non segment and Endpoint Indicates not to terminate OAM cells.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
823
Value Description
Segment point Indicates terminating OAM cells between two segment points
only.
Endpoint Indicates terminating OAM cells between two end points
only.
Segment and Endpoint Indicates terminating OAM cells between two segment points
and between two end points.

According to different OAM maintenance segments, as shown in Figure A-37, set the segment
and end point attribute properly.
Figure A-37 Schematic diagram of the maintenance segment
1 2 3 4 5
end seg inner inner seg+end
segment
end to end
user1 user2

l To maintain the entire ATM connection, select Endpoint for the two ends of the connection.
l To maintain one segment of the entire ATM connection, select Segment point for the two
ends of the segment to be maintained.
l If the endpoint overlaps the segment point, select Segment and Endpoint.
CAUTION
l For a protection link that is added into the 1+1 source or 1+1 sink protection group, do not
select Segment and Endpoint. Moreover, the CC function cannot be enabled.
l For a connection that is added into the protection group, do not select Segment.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
824
A.15.50 LLID
Description
The LLID parameter specifies the loopback location. It contains 15 bytes.
Values
Field Valid Values Default Value Description
Country Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
2 bytes [2 bytes] 0000 Indicates the country code.
Network Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
2 bytes [2 bytes] 0000 Indicates the network
code.
NE Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
11 bytes 4-byte NE ID + 7-
byte all 0s
Indicates the NE code.

Generally, select the default value.
Related Information
Loopback Test:
1. To start the LB test, issue a command at the initiating point.
2. For the segment LB test, the loopback point may be the intermediate point or the segment
point. Regardless of the destination LLID, the seg-LB cells are captured at the segment
point. For this reason, the seg_LB test cannot be carried out across different segment points.
3. For the end-to-end LB test, the loopback point must be the endpoint rather than the middle
point. Likewise, regardless of the destination LLID, the e-t-e_LB cells are captured at the
endpoint. For this reason, the e-t-e_LB test cannot also be carried out across different
segment points.
LLID:
Indicates the coding mode of LLID. In practice, the APC LLID can be set to any value. For the
Qx or NE-board interface, the LLID can contain 16 bytes. For the U2000 server and client, the
window is designed according to the second codiong mode (0x01) specified in ITU-T I.610. For
this reason, you can enter 15 bytes, which consist of 2-byte country code (the default value is
0000 in the case of hexadecimal system), 2-byte network code (the default value is 0000 in the
case of BCD code pattern), and 11-byte NE code (by default, the first four bytes indicate the NE
ID. Enter 0 for the last seven bytes). If you set the LLID, and if the NE code is different from
the NE ID, the LLID does not change although the NE ID is changed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
825
A.15.51 Maximum Ingress Bandwidth
Description
The Maximum Ingress Bandwidth parameter specifies the maximum ingress bandwidth that
a port on the ATM board supports.
During service configuration, ensure that total bandwidth of the configured services does not
exceed the value of this parameter. Otherwise, the system prompts that the verification fails. If
the maximum ingress bandwidth of each optical port on the N1IDQ1 board is 353207 cell/s, the
total bandwidth of the configured services at the port should not be greater than 353207 cell/s.
Values
4528-1412828 cell/s -

The maximum ingress bandwidth of each external optical port on the N1IDQ1 and N1ADQ1
boards is 353207 cell/s. The maximum ingress bandwidth of each external optical port on the
N1IDL4 and N1ADL4 boards is 1412828 (353207x4) cell/s.
For internal ATM ports, the maximum ingress bandwidth depends on the type of the bound
services and number of the services. If VCTRUNK1 is bound with two VC-12s, the maximum
ingress bandwidth is 9056 (4528x2) cells/s. If VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC-4s, the
maximum ingress bandwidth is 1412828 (353207x4) cell/s.
Plan properly before configuring or using a board to ensure that the ingress bandwidth of each
port does not exceed the permitted value range.
A.15.52 Maximum Egress Bandwidth
Description
The Maximum Egress Bandwidth parameter specifies the maximum egress bandwidth that a
port on the ATM board supports.
During service configuration, ensure that the total bandwidth of the configured services does
not exceed the value of this parameter. Otherwise, the system prompts that the verification fails.
If the maximum egress bandwidth of each optical port on the N1IDQ1 board is 353207 cell/s,
the total bandwidth of the configured services at the port should not be greater than 353207 cell/
s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
826
Values
4528-1412828 cell/s -

The maximum egress bandwidth of each external optical port on the N1IDQ1 and N1ADQ1
boards is 353207 cell/s. The maximum egress bandwidth of each external optical port on the
N1IDL4 and N1ADL4 boards is 1412828 (353207x4) cell/s.
For internal ATM ports, the maximum ingress bandwidth depends on the type of the bound
services and number of the services. If VCTRUNK1 is bound with two VC-12s, the maximum
egress bandwidth is 9056 (4528x2) cells/s. If VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC-4s, the
maximum egress bandwidth is 1412828 (353207x4) cell/s.
Plan properly before configuring or using a board to ensure that the egress bandwidth of each
port does not exceed the permitted value range.
A.16 RPR Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the RPR function.
A.16.1 RPR Node ID
Description
The Node ID parameter indicates the ID of a node in the resilient packet ring (RPR). In the RPR,
each node has a unique ID to facilitate RPR management and packet forwarding.
Values
1-255 0

In the same RPR, each node must have a unique ID. IDs of nodes in different RPRs can be
allocated separately.
When planning a network, you need to uniformly plan IDs for nodes in the RPR. For a new
project, node IDs increase in an ascending order in the direction of ring 0.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
827
After you configure services, node IDs cannot be modified. Otherwise, the following results
may be caused:
l Some packets in a service that is forwarded at the local node are lost for up to 50 ms.
l The service whose destination node is the local node may be unavailable. When this occurs,
you need to reconfigure the service according to the new ID of the local node.
None.
A.16.2 RPR Protocol
Description
The RPR Protocol parameter specifies whether to enable the resilient packet ring (RPR)
protocol for a node in the RPR. If the RPR protocol is enabled, you can use the RPR features to
forward and protect a service.
As a new MAC protocol defined in IEEE 802.17, RPR is designed to optimize the transmission
of data packets, and to serve as the Ethernet standard that is fairly shared by the transmission
media bandwidth. The RPR technology integrates many advantages, such as high bandwidth
usage and multi-service access in the Ethernet network, and wide bandwidth and powerful self-
healing capability in the optical network. As a result, the RPR technology features dual-ring
structure, spatial reuse mechanism, flexible granularity of service bandwidth, dynamic sharing
and allocation of bandwidth, statistical multiplexing, support for various service levels,
automatic identification of network topology, and protection switching based on the source route.
After you switch the status of the RPR protocol, the services forwarded from the node are
interrupted transiently. The packets are lost for up to 50 ms.
A node whose RPR protocol is disabled cannot add or drop any service.
Values

Value Description
Enabled Enables the RPR protocol. In this case, a node is added to the
RPR network.
Disabled Disables the RPR protocol. In this case, a node is deleted from
the RPR network.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
828
l To configure a RPR network, enable the RPR protocol for all the nodes in the RPR.
l For a node that adds or drops a service, you must enable the RPR protocol.
l For a node that does not add or drop a service at the moment, generally, you also need to
enable the RPR protocol.
If a node with the RPR protocol disabled needs to add or drop services, enabling the RPR protocol
at this moment may result in a service interruption for 50 ms. If a node does not need to add or
drop a service, disable the RPR protocol to shorten the time for the node to learn the topology
and to minimize service interruption time due to a change in the RPR network topology
accordingly.
If some services are available in the RPR network, enable or disable the RPR protocol on the
node only when you make sure that this operation does not affect any service in the network.
Before enabling the RPR protocol, set Node ID for the local node. Otherwise, the RPR protocol
cannot be enabled.
A.16.3 RPR Node Protection Slow Timer Value(ms)
Description
The Protection Slow Timer Value(ms) parameter specifies the three timers in the resilient
packet ring (RPR) protocol. The three timers are fast, slow and wait-to-restore (WTR). The fast
timer and slow timer specify the interval of transmitting topology protection (TP) messages in
an RPR.
If any protection information is changed, the fast timer transmits eight TP messages. Then, the
changed protection information is advertised to all other nodes in the RPR network at the earliest
time. After the fast timer transmits the eight TP messages, the slow timer is used to transmits
the TP message so that the bandwidth occupancy is minimized.
Values
N1EMR0
(Not produced any
more)
50-10000, in a step length of
50 ms
1000 ms
N2EGR2, N2EMR0 100-1000, in step length of
100 ms
100 ms

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
829
For the slow timer on each node, the default value is the same. Generally, use the default value.
If any requirements are proposed by customers, set the slow timer to a proper value, depending
on the board software version. The value should not exceed, however, the range allowed in
practice.
This parameter is valid only when RPR Protocol is set to Enabled.
A.16.4 RPR ATD Timer Value(s)
Description
The ATD Timer Value(s) parameter specifies the interval of transmitting the attribute discovery
(ATD) message. It is also called a topology timing value.
After the RPR network is configured, each node in the network actively broadcasts its
information using the topology discovery protocol to discover the RPR topology. The
information is transmitted through ATD messages and is used with topology and protection (TP)
messages to maintain the RPR network topology. TP messages are used to transmit a real-time
and urgent topology message. ATD messages are used to transmit a non-real-time topology
message.
If the RPR network runs properly, the system operation is not affected after you modify the
setting of ATD Timer Value.
Values

Generally, use the default value. If any requirement is proposed by customers, you can set ATD
Timer Value to a proper value based on the RPR network status. The value of ATD Timer
Value, however, cannot exceed the range allowed in practice.
A.16.5 RPR Protection Mode
Description
The Protection Mode parameter specifies the protection mode of a node in the RPR network.
That is, it specifies how to protect services upon a fault in the RPR network. Three modes are
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
830
available to protect services in the RPR network. For details, see "Related Information" in this
topic.
After the setting of Protection Mode is modified, all the services that pass through the node are
interrupted for up to 50 ms.
If the protection mode is set to Steering, the service interruption time can be less than 50 ms
when there are 16 or less nodes on the ring.
Values
Wrapping, Steering, Wrap and Steering Steering

Value Description
Steering Changes the service route to protect the RPR network. In this case,
less bandwidth is used, but more time is taken to respond, and more
packets are discarded in case of a switching event.
Wrapping Switches the loop to protect services in the RPR network. In this case,
less time is taken to respond, fewer packets are discarded in case of
a switching event, but some bandwidth is wasted.
Wrap and Steering Switches the loop and changes the service route to protect services
in the RPR network. This mode integrates the advantages such as
short response time in Wrapping mode and optimized transmission
path in Steering mode.

Configure a proper protection mode for every node in the RPR network based on the service
characteristics and actual requirements. The protection modes for all the nodes in the same RPR
network must be compatible with each other. If not, an alarm is generated and services are not
protected in the way as expected by customers. Use the default setting, unless otherwise
specified.
You can set this parameter based on the compatibility of the protection mode. The Wrapping
mode is compatible with the Wrap and Steering mode. The Wrapping mode or the Wrap and
Steering mode, however, is incompatible with the Steering mode. For example, you can set
Protection Mode to Steering or Wrapping for all the nodes in the RPR network. You can also
set Protection Mode to Wrapping for some nodes, and to Wrap and Steering for other nodes.
You can also set Protection Mode to Steering for some nodes, and to Wrapping or Wrap and
Steering for other nodes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
831
Related Information
Steering: Steers the loop to protect services in the RPR network.
This mode is the default mode for all the nodes. If a part of the RPR is faulty, the information
that contains faulty point and fault type is transmitted to each node. The topology is changed
accordingly. The source node only needs to directly transmit the data to the destination node
based on the new topology. The data that has been transmitted to the faulty point is discarded at
the point. In Steering mode, the bandwidth usage is improved to transmit data over an optimal
route, but the switching time is long. After the topology becomes stable, you need to determine
a new route based on the new topology.
Figure A-38 and Figure A-39 respectively shows the network status before a fiber cut and after
the Steering mode is adopted for protection.
Figure A-38 Network before a fiber cut

Figure A-39 Network after the Steering mode is configured

Node 2 transmits packets to node 6. Normally, the service flow is in the direction of s2 -> s3 -
> s4 -> s5 -> s6. If the fiber between nodes 3 and 4 is cut, the topology is updated to optimize
the route. In this case, the service flow is in the direction of s2 -> s1 -> s7 -> s6.
Wrapping: Wraps the route to protect services in the RPR network.
This mode is optional. If a point on the RPR ring is faulty, the node close to the faulty point
automatically loops back to connect ring 0 with ring 1. In Wrapping mode, the switching time
is short to minimize the frame loss resulted from the fault. The bandwidth usage, however, is
low.
Figure A-40 and Figure A-41 respectively shows the network status before a fiber cut and after
the Wrapping mode is adopted for protection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
832
Figure A-40 Network before a fiber cut

Figure A-41 Network after the Wrapping mode is configured

Node 2 transmits packets to node 6. Normally, the service flow is in the direction of s2 -> s3 -
> s4 -> s5 -> s6. If the fiber between nodes 3 and 4 is cut, it is switched on nodes 3 and 4. In this
case, the service flow is in the direction of s2 -> s3 -> s2 -> s1 -> s7-> s6 -> s5 -> s4 -> s5 ->
s6.
Wrap and Steering: Wraps and then steers the route for protection.
Wraps and then steers the route for protection. This mode integrates the advantages such as the
short response time in the Wrapping mode and the optimal route in the Steering mode. In Wrap
and Steering mode, the route is wrapped to avoid loss of more packets, and then the route is
steered for protection after the new topology becomes stable.
A.16.6 RPR Hold-off Time(ms)
Description
The Hold-off Time(ms) parameter specifies the time to wait for switching (namely, hold-off
time) after the signal fail (SF) or signal degrade (SD) condition is detected in the RPR network.
l After the time specified in Hold-off Time expires, switching occurs in the RPR network
if the SF or SD condition persists.
l Switching does not occur in the RPR network if the SF or SD condition is cleared.
Values
0-200, in a step length of 10 0 ms

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
833
l If no SDH protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP) is configured, use the default
value to avoid loss of more packets within the hold-off time in the RPR network.
l If any SDH protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP) is configured, make sure that
the hold-off time is longer than the time for all the SDH protection switching. For example,
the hold-off time is set to 50 ms. In this case, the SDH protection schemes have the priority
to be implemented. If the SDH protection schemes fail, the RPR switching is implemented
for protection.
A.16.7 RPR Protection Restoration Mode
Description
The Protection Restoration Mode parameter specifies whether to switch the node to the normal
state and to groom the service in the loop as a normal service after a node in the SF/SD state
detects that the SF/SD condition is cleared.
l If the service in the RPR network is not switched, or if the forced switching (FS) or manual
switching (MS) occurs, the system operation is not affected after you modify the setting.
l In the case of switching based on SF or SD on the node:
If this parameter is set to Enabled, the node switches to the normal state when it has
detected that the SF or SD condition is cleared, and grooms the service in the loop as a
normal service. During the period of service restoration, some packets are lost for up to
50 ms.
If this parameter is set to Disabled, the node is always in the switching state. In this
case, the service is not switched to the working path, no service packets are lost, but the
bandwidth utilization is decreased.
Values

Value Description
Enabled If the working path recovers after service switching, the node changes to the
normal state and the service is switched back to the working path.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
834
Value Description
Disabled If the working path recovers after service switching, the node does not change
its state. Instead, it keeps in the WTR state all the time and the service is not
switched back to the working path.

The node changes to the WTR state only when it recovers from the SD or SF condition. For this
reason, this parameter takes effect only when the node recovers from the SD or SF condition,
but does not take effect when the node recovers from the FS or MS condition.
The default value is Enabled. Use the default value, unless otherwise specified. In this case,
although some packets are lost transiently when the link recovers, less bandwidth is used and
service forwarding efficiency is improved.
A.16.8 RPR Protection Wait-to-restore(s)
Description
The Protection Wait-to-restore(s) parameter specifies the time for the RPR network to change
to the wait-to-restore state and keep in this state for some time (namely, the protection wait-to-
restore time). When an RPR network recovers from a fault, it does not immediately switch to
the normal state. Instead, it keeps in the switching state. If no fault is detected within the wait-
to-restore time, the node changes from the WTR state to the normal state, and grooms services
in the loop as normal services.
The value of Protection Wait-to-restore determines the time for restoring a service to the
normal state. It does not affect the system running.
Values
0-1440, in a step length of 1 10 Second

Generally, use the default value. If any requirements are proposed by customers, you can set
Protection Wait-to-restore to a proper value according to the requirements and RPR network
status. The value of Protection Wait-to-restore cannot exceed the range allowed in practice.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
835
This parameter is valid only when RPR Protocol and Protection Restoration Mode are set to
Enabled.
A.16.9 RPR Send link weight
Description
The Send link weight parameter specifies the weight of the send link of an RPR node. It is
classified into the weight of the eastern send link and that of the western send link. The weight
value is valid only for the services whose priority is B_EIR or C. It is invalid for the services
whose priority is A0, A1 or B_CIR. It decides the bandwidth of adding a service whose priority
is B_EIR or C to the ring.
For the services whose priority is B_EIR or C, the fairness algorithm is used to derive the
bandwidth of each service according to the weight value when the RPR is congested. For
example, the traffic rate is 1 Gbit/s respectively for services A and B whose priority is C. If
services A and B pass an RPR network at a rate of 1 Gbit/s, and if their weight value is in
proportion of 7:3, the bandwidth proportion for services A and B is 700 Mbit/s : 300 Mbit/s.
This parameter is invalid if the RPR network is not congested. After the parameter value is
modified, the system operation is not affected.
If the RPR network is congested, and if the parameter value is changed, the traffic of the services
whose priority is B_EIR and C is affected in the RPR network. The greater the weight value,
the heavier the traffic added to the RPR.
Values
1-255 1

NOTE
The greater the value, the greater the weight.
Use the default value, unless otherwise specified. That is, if the weight is the same for each node,
the bandwidth of the service in the RPR network is consistent. Otherwise, set the weight value
based on the required bandwidth. The wight values can be separately set for 0 ring and 1 ring.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
836
A.16.10 RPR Used and Reserved bandwidth of priority A
Description
The Used bandwidth of priority A parameter is divided into two parts: reserved bandwidth of
priority, which is called A0 bandwidth, and the remaining bandwidth, which is called A1
bandwidth. A0 bandwidth is the allocated reserved bandwidth and cannot be reclaimed by other
nodes. Although the local node does not transmit the services whose priority is A, this bandwidth
must be reserved. A1 bandwidth is the allocated committed bandwidth and can be reclaimed by
the services of other priorities, as shown in Table A-10.
Table A-10 RPR service priority
Service Priority Service Quality Adopt
the
Fairne
ss
Algor
ithm
or Not
Prior
ity
Applica
tion
Sub-
Priority
Bandwi
dth
Guarant
eed or
Not
Jitter Bandwid
th Type
Bandwid
th Sub-
Type
A Real-
time
service
A0 Yes Low Pre-
allocated
Reserved No
A1 Yes Low Pre-
allocated
Reclaimab
le
B Near-
real-time
service
B-CIR Yes Middle
B-EIR No Wider Used
randomly
Reclaimab
le
Yes
C Best-
effort
delivery
C

The bandwidth is used for the RPR node whose service priority is A. It limits the traffic of the
services whose priority is A in the loop. If the traffic of priority A has the bandwidth that exceeds
the A0 bandwidth, they are transmitted by the A1 bandwidth. If the traffic of priority A has the
bandwidth that exceeds the A1 bandwidth, it is discarded.
The A0 bandwidth is irreclaimable. The proportion of total A0 bandwidth cannot be extremely
large in the RPR network. Otherwise, the bandwidth utilization is affected. If the total A0
bandwidth in the RPR network exceeds the total bandwidth in the RPR network, the services of
priority B or C fail to be transmitted because no bandwidth is available in the RPR network.
Values
The parameter values for A0 and A1 bandwidth are the same and are as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
837
0-Maximum bandwidth in a single ring,
in step length of 1 Mbps
0 Mbps

The A0 bandwidth can be set within the bandwidth range in the RPR network, but cannot exceed
the bandwidth of the services whose priority is A. The proportion of the total A0 bandwidth
cannot be extremely large in the RPR network. Otherwise, the bandwidth utilization is decreased.
If no service of priority A is available in the RPR network, generally, set the bandwidth to 0 for
the service of priority A. If any service of priority A is available, generally, set the A bandwidth
to 0, and set the bandwidth to the A1 bandwidth for all the services of priority A.
A.16.11 RPR Used bandwidth of priority B-CIR(Mbps)
Description
The RPR Used bandwidth of priority B-CIR(Mbps) parameter specifies the committed
bandwidth for the nodes whose service priority is A in the RPR network. It is also called the
B_CIR bandwidth. If the traffic of priority B has the bandwidth that exceeds the B_CIR
bandwidth, it is transmitted by the B_CIR bandwidth.
Values
0-Maximum bandwidth in a single ring,
in step length of 1 Mbps
0 Mbps

You can plan the B_CIR bandwidth for each node in the RPR network based on the transmitted
near-real-time service traffic. If no service of priority B is available to the nodes in the RPR
network, generally, set the B_CIR bandwidth to 0. The B-CIR bandwidth should not exceed the
total bandwidth in the RPR network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
838
A.16.12 RPR Circle Name
Description
The Circle Name parameter specifies the ring number to distinguish the two rings from each
other, including 0 Ring and 1 Ring.
The RPR network is of a topology that consists of two rings in different directions. The external
ring is named Outer Ring (namely, 0 ring), and the internal ring is named Inner Ring (namely,
1 ring). Figure A-42 shows the topology of the RPR network.
Figure A-42 Topology of the RPR network
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0 Ring
1 Ring
RPR Network
OptiX NE

Values
0 Ring, 1 Ring -

Value Description
0 Ring Indicates the outer ring of the RPR network.
1 Ring Indicates the inner ring of the RPR network.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
839
None.
None.
A.16.13 RPR Node Reachability
Description
Reachability indicates the reachability from this node to another RPR node.
l If the reachability of 0 Ring (or 1 Ring) is Reachable, no fault occurs on the link between
this node and another node on 0 Ring (or 1 Ring). Services of this node can be directly
forwarded to another node on 0 Ring (or 1 Ring).
l If the reachability of 0 Ring (or 1 Ring) is Unreachable, a fault occurs on the link between
this node and another node on 0 Ring (or 1 Ring). Services between this node and another
node are unavailable on 0 Ring (or 1 Ring).
Values
Reachable, Unreachable Unreachable

Value Description
Reachable Indicates that the link between this node and another node on 0 Ring (or
1 Ring) is available.
Unreachable Indicates that the link between this node and another node on 0 Ring (or
1 Ring) is unavailable.

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
840
A.16.14 RPR Node Hop
Description
RPR node hop indicates the hop from this node to another RPR node. That is, this parameter
indicates the number of nodes from this node to the destination node.
Services are transmitted in the shortest path of the ring network by default. That is, after 0 ring
hop and 1 ring hop between this node and the destination node are compared, the ring ID with
the smallest hop count is chosen as the transmission direction of the service.
Values
0-255 255 (Indicates an invalid hop.)

When a node is unreachable, the value 255 is displayed indicating that the node hop is invalid.
None.
None.
A.16.15 RPR Adjacent node ID
Description
adjacent node ID indicates adjacent node ID of this node. Every node has two adjacent nodes,
that is, East adjacent node ID and West adjacent node ID.
Values
1-255 -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
841
None.
None.
A.16.16 RPR Node Direction
Description
RPR Node Direction indicates Direction of the RPR node, including East and West to distinct
two directions of the node.
The RPR network is classified into the dual-ring topology. The outer ring is 0 Ring, and the
inner ring is 1 Ring. Figure A-43 shows the ring network topology.
Figure A-43 RPR network topology
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
0 Ring
1 Ring
RPR Network
OptiX NE
East
East
East
East
East
East
West
West
West
West
West
West

Every node on the RPR network has two directions. East indicates the transmit direction of 0
Ring and the receive direction of 1 Ring, and West indicates the receive direction of 0 Ring and
transmit direction of 1 Ring. Services on 0 Ring are transmitted from West to East, and services
on 1 Ring are transmitted from East to West.
None.
Values
East, West -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
842
Value Description
East East of the node indicates the transmit direction of 0 Ring and the receive
direction of 1 Ring.
West West of the node indicates the receive direction of 0 Ring and the transmit
direction of 1 Ring.

None.
None.
A.16.17 ECHO Path ID (RPR Node Information)
Description
The ECHO Path ID parameter specifies the ID of the path used for the ECHO function. The
ECHO function is one of the RPR OAM functions. It is used to monitor the connection between
two nodes in the RPR network and to locate any fault.
For the ECHO function, 16 paths are always available on each node. After you configure the
ECHO path ID, a node can initiate the connectivity test for other 16 nodes at the same time.
Values
This parameter is for query only. Each node always has 16 ECHO paths, which are numbered
from 1 to 16.
None.
None.
A.16.18 ECHO Working Mode (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO Working Mode indicates the working mode of the ECHO channel, used for determining
whether the ECHO function the ECHO channel is enabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
843
The RPR OAM function is used for the configuration management, fault management and
performance management on the RPR network. The ECHO function is an RPR OAM function,
used for connection monitoring and fault localization of the two nodes on the ring network.
The ECHO frame is an OAM request or response frame. That is, an ECHO request frame is
transmitted from the source address to the destination address. The destination address receives
and resolves the request frame, and then transmits an ECHO response frame to the request node.
The request node analyzes the link connection situation according to the received response
frame.
The value of this parameter has no impact on normal services. After the ECHO function is
enabled, the ECHO frame, however, occupies a small amount of bandwidth of the ring network
and some CPU resources.
Values
Start, Stop, Clear Stop

Value Description
Start Indicates that the ECHO function of this ECHO channel is enabled. That is, the
source node starts to transmit an ECHO request frame to the destination node.
Stop Indicates that the ECHO function of this ECHO channel is disabled. That is, the
source node stops transmitting an ECHO request frame to the destination node.
Clear Indicates that the statistics information about this ECHO channel is cleared. The
statistics information includes the number of ECHO messages that are
transmitted, the number of ECHO messages that are processed successfully, the
number of ECHO messages that are processed unsuccessfully, and whether the
LOC and dLoc alarms are detected.

This parameter is used to determine whether the ECHO function the ECHO channel is enabled.
To test the link connectivity between the two nodes, you need to enable the ECHO function of
the ECHO channel after configuring the parameters of the channel. After the test, disabling the
ECHO function of the ECHO channel to avoid wasting the bandwidth of the ring network and
the CPU recourses.
You are recommended to disable the ECHO function before clearing the statistics information
about the ECHO channel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
844
None.
A.16.19 ECHO Request Loop (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO Request Loop indicates the transmission direction of the ECHO request frame of the
ECHO channel.
Values
0 Ring, 1 Ring, Default Directionality Default Directionality

Value Description
0 Ring Indicates transmitting the ECHO request frame from 0 Ring after the ECHO
function of the ECHO channel is enabled.
1 Ring Indicates transmitting the ECHO request frame from 1 Ring after the ECHO
Default
Directiona
lity
Indicates that the protocol automatically chooses the shortest path as the transmit
direction of the ECHO request frame.

The ECHO frame is used to test the link connection situation between the two nodes. The user
can specify the transmit direction of the ECHO request frame according to the test requirements.
This parameter is valid only when Working Mode of the ECHO channel is set to Start.
A.16.20 ECHO Response Loop (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO Request Loop indicates the transmission direction of the ECHO response frame of the
ECHO channel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
845
The value of this parameter has no impact on normal services. After the ECHO function is
enabled, the ECHO frame, however, occupies a small amount of bandwidth of the ring network
and some CPU resources.
Values
0 Ring, 1 Ring, Default Directionality, Backward Default Directionality

Value Description
0 Ring Indicates transmitting the ECHO response frame from 0 Ring after the ECHO
1 Ring Indicates transmitting the ECHO response frame from 1 Ring after the ECHO
Default
Directiona
lity
Indicates that the protocol automatically chooses the shortest path as the transmit
direction of the ECHO response frame.
Backward Indicates transmitting the ECHO response frame from the direction that is
opposite to the request direction after the ECHO function of the ECHO channel
is enabled.

can specify the transmit direction of the ECHO response frame according to the test
requirements.
A.16.21 ECHO Frame Service Type (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO Frame Service Type indicates the transmission priority of the ECHO frame on the ring
network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
846
Values
A0, A1, B, C A0

Value Description
A0 Indicates that the ECHO frame is transmitted with priority A0 on the ring
network and occupies bandwidth A (including bandwidths A0 and A1).
A1 Indicates that the ECHO frame is transmitted with priority A1 on the ring
network and occupies bandwidth A (including bandwidths A0 and A1).
B Indicates that the ECHO frame is transmitted with priority B on the ring network
and occupies bandwidth B (including bandwidths B_CIR and B_EIR).
C Indicates that the ECHO frame is transmitted with priority C on the ring network
and occupies bandwidth C.

can specify ECHO Frame Service Type according to the test requirements. For example, to
test the connectivity of service A0, the user sets ECHO Frame Service Type to A0.
A.16.22 Is ECHO Path Protected (RPR Node Information)
Description
Is Path Protected indicates the protection type of the ECHO frame and is used to determine
how to handle the ECHO frame in the case of a loop switching.
l When the ECHO frame is set to Yes, if the protection status is set to Wrapping or Wrap
and Steering, the ECHO request frame or the response frame that is transmitted in the
channel is switched when the frame passes through a node in the protection switching status;
if the protection status is set to Steering, the ECHO request frame or the response frame
that is transmitted in the channel is discarded when the frame passes through a node in the
protection switching status.
l If the ECHO frame is set to NO, the ECHO request or response frame that is transmitted
in the channel is discarded when it passes through a node in the switching status.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
847
Values
Yes, No No

Value Description
Yes Indicates the ECHO frame is protected.
No Indicates the ECHO frame is unprotected.

The user can specify Is Path Protected according to the test requirements.
A.16.23 ECHO T1 Transmit Period (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO T1 Transmit Period indicates the transmit period of the ECHO frame that is tagged with
time T1. The ECHO frame is classified into the request frame and response frame. If the user
enables an ECHO channel at the NE, an ECHO request frame is transmitted in the channel every
T1.
The occupied bandwidth and CPU resources increase with the decrease in the value of T1
Transmit Period.
Values

The user can modify the value of this parameter according to the ring network situation. The
modification should not go beyond the value range.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
848
A.16.24 ECHO T2 Response Time (RPR Node Information)
Description
ECHO T2 Response Time indicates the response timeout of the ECHO frame that is marked
with time T2.
If the node fails to receive the response frame within time T2 after transmitting the ECHO frame,
the node reports the dLoc alarm.
Values

The user can modify the value of this parameter according to the ring network situation. The
modification should not go beyond the value range.
A.16.25 Number of Echo Messages Received (RPR Node
Information)
Description
Number of Echo Messages Received indicates the number of ECHO messages that the node
receives. From the time when the node enables the ECHO function, the parameter value increases
by one every time the node receives an ECHO response frame.
Values
For example, the value 100 indicates that the node receives 100 ECHO messages.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
849
None.
None.
A.16.26 Successfully Processed (RPR Node Information)
Description
Successfully Processed indicates the number of ECHO messages that are successfully processed
by the node. The NE starts to count when the ECHO function is enabled at the source node.
After the node transmits an ECHO request frame, the parameter value increases by 1 if the node
receives a correct ECHO response frame within the specified response time.
Values
For example, the parameter value "100" indicates that the node receives 100 ECHO messages
that are processed successfully.
None.
None.
A.16.27 Unsuccessfully Processed (RPR Node Information)
Description
Unsuccessfully Processed indicates the number of ECHO messages that are unsuccessfully
processed by the node. The parameter value is counted when the ECHO function is enabled at
the source node. After the node transmits an ECHO request frame, the parameter value increases
by 1 if the node fails to receive a correct ECHO response frame within the specified response
time.
Values
For example, the parameter value 100 indicates that the node receives 100 ECHO messages that
are processed unsuccessfully.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
850
None.
None.
A.16.28 dLoc Detected (RPR Node Information)
Description
dLoc Detected indicates an alarm for a link failure. That is, this parameter specifies that the link
communications may be abnormal.
This parameter is used to query whether the node detects the dLoc alarm when the ECHO
function is enabled at the source node. When the node transmits an ECHO request frame, the
node reports the dLoc alarm if the node fails to receive a correct ECHO response frame within
time T2. The node clears this dLoc alarm after the node receives a correct ECHO response frame.
Values
Yes, No No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that the node detects the dLoc alarm.
No Indicates that the node does not detect any dLoc alarm.

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
851
A.16.29 Loc Detected (RPR Node Information)
Description
Loc Detected indicates that the link communications is severely abnormal.
This parameter is used to query whether the node detects an LOC alarm when the ECHO function
is enabled at the source node. When the node detects a dLOC alarm, and if the dLOC alarm
persists two seconds, the node reports an LOC alarm. If the node does not receive any dLOC
alarm for 10 seconds, the LOC alarm is cleared.
Values
Yes, No No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that the node detects an LOC alarm.
No Indicates that the node does not detect any LOC alarm.

None.
None.
A.16.30 RPR Node Protection Status
Description
The RPR Node Protection Status parameter specifies the protection request status of the link
in the current direction of the RPR network. The eastern and western RPR nodes respectively
have a protection status.
After the RPR protocol is enabled for a node, it continuously checks the status of the links in
the RPR network. After the RPR protocol checks any protection request status such as signal
fail (SF), signal degrade (SD), forced switching (FS) or manual switching (MS), the current
direction of the RPR network is set to the proper protection status. In the case of the forced
switching or manual switching, if no protection requests are detected or the protection request
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
852
is cleared, this direction of the RPR network is set to IDLE. In the case of SF or SD, if no
protection requests are detected or the protection request is cleared, this direction of the RPR
network is set to IDLE when the WTR time expires.
Values
Force Switching, SF, SD, Manual Switching,
Wait-to-Restore, Idle
Idle

Value Description
Force
Switching
Indicates that the RPR node is in the forced switching status.
SF Indicates that the RPR node is in the automatic switching status resulted from
the signal fail (SF) condition.
SD Indicates that the RPR node is in the automatic switching status resulted from
the signal degrade (SD) condition.
Manual
Switching
Indicates that the RPR node is in the manual switching status.
Wait-to-
Restore
Indicates that the RPR node is in the Wait-to-Restore status.
Idle Indicates that the RPR node is in the Idle status.

These switching request signals have the priorities from high to low: FS, SF, SD, MS, WTR,
IDLE. The FS and SF have the highest and equal priorities. That is, FS and SF can preempt
switching signals of each other. The switching signals of higher priorities can preempt the
switching signals of lower priorities. The switching schemes whose priority is higher than SF
can be used to protect the RPR network at the same time. The switching schemes whose priority
is lower than SF should not be used in the RPR network at the same time. The switching request
of higher priorities contends the switching request of lower priorities. The RPR node can change
to the WTR status only when it recovers from the SD or SF status.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
853
None.
A.16.31 RPR Node Switching Status
Description
The RPR Node Switching Status parameter specifies the switching status of an RPR node. In
the eastern and western directions of a node, a switching status is available to show whether the
link in the current direction of the RPR network is normal.
Values
Not switched, Switched Not switched

Value Description
Not switched Indicates that the node is not in the switching status in this direction.
Switched Indicates that the node is in the switching status in this direction.

None.
None.
A.16.32 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Times
Description
The Accumulated Protection Times parameter specifies the accumulated protection count of
a node, which is also called accumulated switching count. The count starts after the RPR protocol
is enabled on the node. The count is added by 1 when the switching occurs once. The accumulated
protection count in the eastern direction of the node is separate from that in the western direction
of the node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
854
Values
For example, if the displayed value is 10, the accumulated protection count is 10 after the RPR
protocol is enabled on the node.
None.
None.
A.16.33 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Time
Description
The Accumulated Protection Time parameter specifies the accumulated protection time. The
count starts after the RPR protocol is enabled on the node. When a switching occurs, the duration
from the start time to the end time is recorded. This parameter value is derived from accumulation
of all the duration. The accumulated protection time in the eastern direction of the node is
separate from that in the western direction of the node.
Values
For example, if the displayed value is 10, the accumulated protection duration is 10 seconds
after the RPR protocol is enabled on the node.
None.
None.
A.16.34 RPR Node Last Switch Request
Description
The Last Switch Request parameter specifies the last switching request of a node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
855
Values
Force Switching, Manual Switching, Idle Idle

Value Description
Force Switching Indicates that the last switching request issued to the node is a forced
switching.
Manual Switching Indicates that the last switching request issued to the node is a
manual switching.
Idle Indicates that no switching request is issued to the node. This is the
default value.

None.
None.
A.16.35 RPR Switch Request
Description
RPR Switch Request indicates the type of a protection request that is issued to the node,
including Force Switching, Manual Switching and Clear. This operation can be performed on
the east node and west node of this node.
When the user issues a switching request to the node, the services that are forwarded by this
node are interrupted transiently with a packet loss time less than 50 ms.
If the protection mode is set to Steering, the service interruption time can be less than 50 ms
when the number of nodes on the ring is not more than 16.
Values
Force Switching, Manual Switching, Clear -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
856
Value Description
Force Switching When adding a node to the ring network, you need to protect the current
services. Because the link is normal, a switching cannot be performed
automatically but can be performed forcibly only. This protection
request is with the highest priority and cannot be preempted by other
protection requests on the ring network.
Manual Switching Indicates performing a switching in 0 Ring or 1 Ring. But services can
be switched back when a more severe link failure occurs on the ring
network.
Clear Indicates clearing the forced switching and manual switching.

Usually, the protection request is required only when the network topology changes. The user
can determine whether to issue the switching request to the node according to the actual situation.
If the user allows the switching request to be preempted by the SF/SD, a manual switching
request is issued. Make sure that all switchings at this node are cleared after all the operations
are completed.
A.17 LAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LAG function.
A.17.1 LAG Type(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The LAG Type parameter can be set to Manual or Static. In the case of the manual LAG, the
LACP protocol is not enabled. In the case of the static LAG, the LACP protocol is enabled and
protocol packets are exchanged. The protocol state machine determines whether the port can
carry services.
As the LACP protocol is not enabled for the manual LAG, the LAG Type parameter should be
set to Manual for the interconnected ports. In addition, the Load Sharing and Revertive
Mode parameters should be set as the same for the interconnected ports. Otherwise, the working
ports do not belong to the same link and services are interrupted.
If the manual LAG works in the full-duplex mode and a unidirectional fiber cut occurs, the
services are interrupted.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
857
When a static LAG is initially created, the services are interrupted until the two ends negotiate
and determine a port that can carry the services.
Values
Manual, Static Static

Value Description
Manual The LACP protocol is not enabled. The link status, rate, and
duplex mode of a port determine whether the port can carry
services.
Static The LACP protocol is enabled and protocol packets are
exchanged. The protocol state machine determines whether
the port can carry services.

If the user does not require the LACP protocol, set the LAG Type parameter to Manual.
If the user requires the LACP protocol and the two ends use the LACP protocol, set the LAG
Type parameter to Static.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.17.2 Revertive Mode(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
In the case of the link aggregation group (LAG) that does not share the load, the Revertive
Mode parameter specifies whether the services are switched after the original working port
recovers. Revertive and Non-Revertive are available for this parameter.
If the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive, the services are switched after the port
with the highest priority recovers. During the switching, the services are transiently interrupted
for not more than 3s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
858
Values
Revertive, Non-Revertive Non-Revertive

Value Description
Revertive After the original working port recovers, the services are
switched to this port.
Non-Revertive After the original working port recovers, the services are not
switched.

To switch the services only when the service-carried port fails, set the Revertive Mode
parameter to Non-Revertive.
To ensure that only the port with the highest priority carry services whenever the port is fine,
set the Revertive Mode parameter to Revertive.
The Revertive Mode parameter is valid only when the Load Sharing parameter is set to Non-
Sharing.
Related Information
None.
A.17.3 Load Sharing(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The Load Sharing parameter indicates whether multiple ports are allowed to carry the services
at the same time when multiple ports in the aggregation group can be used.
In Non-Sharing mode, only the port with the highest priority in the link aggregation group
carries the service and the other port functions as backup port.
In Sharing mode, multiple ports can carry the services at the same time.
When manually configuring the aggregation group, ensure that the load sharing modes at both
ends are same. Otherwise, certain service packets are lost.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
859
Values
Sharing, Non-Sharing Non-Sharing

Value Description
Non-Sharing Indicates that only one port carries the services. Only one
slave port can be configured.
Sharing Indicates that multiple ports are allowed to carry the services
at the same time. A maximum of 15 slave ports can be added.

When manually configuring the aggregation group, configure the load sharing modes at the two
ends to the same. Otherwise, certain service packets are lost.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.17.4 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm(Link Aggregation Group
Management)
Description
The Encapsulation Type parameter indicates the traffic distribution algorithm for different
ports in the aggregation group.
If multiple ports in the aggregation group can carry the services, the traffic distribution effect
varies with the Hash algorithms configured. If the Hash algorithm is properly configured, the
traffic on each port is evenly distributed. Otherwise, the traffic is not evenly distributed, and the
port bandwidth cannot be fully used.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
860
Values
Automatic, Source MAC, Destination MAC,
Source and Destination MACs
Automatic

Value Description
Automatic The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and
destination MACs of the packets.
Source MAC The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source
MAC of the packets.
Destination MAC The traffic is distributed among ports according to the destination
MAC of the packets.
Source and Destination
MACs
The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and
destination MACs of the packets.

To evenly distribute the traffic on each port as possible, select a proper Hash algorithm according
to different packets on the ports.
This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing.
A.17.5 System Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The System Priority parameter indicates the priority level of a link aggregation group (LAG).
This parameter affects the working state of the member ports in the LAG.
When the LAG at the local end negotiates with the LAG at the opposite end by using the LACP
packets, the LAGs can obtain the system priority information of each other. The result computed
by the selection logic of the LAG with the higher priority is considered as the common result
for both LAGs. If the two LAGs have the same system priority, the system MAC addresses of
the two LAGs are compared. The LAG with the lower MAC address is adopted.
The system priority increases as the value decreases.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
861
Values
0-65535, 1 as the spacing 32768

To adopt the result computed by the selection logic of a static LAG, set a higher system priority
for this static LAG.
The System Priority (Link Aggregation) parameter is valid only when the LAG Type
parameter is set to Static.
Related Information
None.
A.17.6 Main Port(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The Main Port parameter indicates the LAG member port available for creating services. Each
LAG has only one main port.
Values
For example, 3-PEG16-1(PORT-1) -

Every Ethernet port on the NE can be used as the main port.
The main port and the slave port must be of the same type. The rate of the main port must be
the same as the rate of the slave port.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
862
Related Information
None.
A.17.7 Main Port Status(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The Main Port Status parameter indicates the port status computed by the selection logic for
the LAG.
If one port is in the out-of-service state, the service cannot be loaded on this port.
If a port is in the in-service state, the service can be loaded on this port.
Values
In Service, Out of Service Unknown

Value Description
In Service Indicates that the port can be added to an LAG and can carry
the service.
Out of Service Indicates that the port cannot be added to an LAG and cannot
carry the service.

This parameter is used for query only. No rule is specified for selecting a value.
In the case of the static LAG, the LACP protocol is used. The port status depends on the port
working mode, port working rate, port priority, and LAG priority.
In the case of the manual LAG, the LACP protocol is not used. The port status depends on the
port working mode and port working rate.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
863
A.17.8 Port Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)
Description
The Port Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Ethernet port. If other attributes, such
as the port rate and port working mode, are the same, in the LAG member ports that enable the
LACP protocol, the port with a higher priority carries services first. This parameter is invalid
for the LAG (manual LAG, for example) that does not run the LACP protocol.
Values
0-65535 32768

The port priority increases as the value decreases.
To make a port carry services with priority, set the priority of the port to a higher value.
In a LAG, which port has the priority to carry services is jointly determined by Port Priority
and System Priority of the LAG, and is first determined by System Priority.
For example, as shown in Figure A-44, the non-load sharing static LAG is created between NE
A and NE B.
Figure A-44 Non-load sharing static LAG is created between NE A and NE B
NEA
NEB
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
LAGa LAG b
Working
Protection

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
864
Each port of LAG a and LAG b meets the requirements of carrying services. System Priority
of LAG a is higher than System Priority of LAG b. In LAG a, Port Priority of port1 is higher
than Port Priority of port2. In LAG b, Port Priority of port2 is higher than Port Priority of
port 1.
In this case, in LAG a, port1 is the working port, port2 protects port1, and port2 does not share
the service traffic. The protection relation in LAG b is the same as the protection relation in LAG
a, because System Priority of LAG a is higher than System Priority of LAG b. That is, in LAG
b, port1 is the working port, port2 protects port1, and port2 does not share the service traffic,
even if Port Priority of port2 is higher than Port Priority of port1 in LAG b.
Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see System Priority.
A.18 MC-LAG Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring MC-LAG protection.
A.18.1 Protocol Channel ID
Description
The Protocol Channel ID parameter specifies the ID of the protocol channel when the MCSP
channel is created. This parameter can be allocated automatically.
Values
1-15 -

You need to enter this parameter when creating MCSP channels. This parameter also can be
allocated automatically.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
865
A.18.2 Hello Packet Sending Interval (s)
Description
The Hello Packet Sending Interval (s) parameter specifies the interval at which the Hello
packets are transmitted to the opposite end to check whether the link is normal.
Values
1-10 1 Second

This parameter must be set according to the network planning and requirements. Generally, the
smaller the value of this parameter, the shorter the interval (s) for transmitting Hello packets to
the opposite end, and the faster the speed of detecting whether the link is normal.
None.
A.18.3 Timeout Time (s)
Description
The Timeout Time (s) parameter is used for checking whether the configuration messages time
out.
When the value of Timeout Time (s) of received Hello messages exceeds the specified threshold,
the opposite end is faulty and the relevant alarm is reported.
Values
30-3600 600 Second

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
866
You need to set this parameter according to the network planning and requirement. This
parameter is related to the Hello Interval parameter set on the opposite end. The smaller the
value of this parameter, the faster the speed of detecting a fault on the link.
None.
A.19 LAG/DLAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring a link aggregation group (LAG) and a
distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
A.19.1 Port Priority (Link Aggregation)
Description
The Port Priority (Link Aggregation) parameter specifies the priority of the ports in the link
aggregation group of the LACP protocol. The port priority can be set. It indicates the priority
level of a port to be aggregated. If a port is of higher priority, this port is preferred to carry the
services. If a link aggregation group (for example, manual aggregation group) does not run the
LACP protocol, it does not take effect after the port priority is set.
If other conditions (for example, port rate, and port working mode) are the same, a port of higher
priority is preferred to carry the services.
Values
0-65535, in step length of 1 32768

If the value of Port Priority is smaller, the priority is higher.
When using a port to carry the services, set Port Priority to a smaller value. Otherwise, set Port
Priority to a greater value.
The member port state in the link aggregation group is decided according to these parameters,
such as port working mode, port working rate, whether the port receives LACP packets, port
priority, and LAG priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
867
A.19.2 System Priority (Link Aggregation)
Description
The System Priority (Link Aggregation) parameter specifies the priority level of a link
aggregation group. It may affect the working state of the member ports in the link aggregation
group.
When the link aggregation groups at the local and opposite ends negotiate with each other by
sending LACP packets, they can get the system priority of the link aggregation groups from each
other. The result selected at the end of higher priority is taken as the result for the two ends. If
the system priority of the link aggregation group is the same at the two ends, the system MAC
addresses are compared. A MAC address is used if it is of lower value.
If the value of System Priority is smaller, the system priority of the link aggregation group is
higher.
Values

To take the result selected by the static link aggregation group as the actual value, set System
Priority to a smaller value.
The member port state in the link aggregation group is decided according to these parameters,
such as port working mode, port working rate, whether the port receives LACP packets, port
priority, and system priority.
A.19.3 Slave Port (Link Aggregation)
Description
The Slave Port (Link Aggregation) parameter specifies that a link aggregation group is
manually created rather than being automatically created by the system. A link aggregation group
contains main ports and slave ports. The slave ports in a link aggregation group are fixed. Unless
they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from
the link aggregation group.
A main port can be added to the link aggregation group, regardless of the service. A slave port
can be, however, added to the link aggregation group only if no services are available. After
being added to the link aggregation group, a slave port cannot be configured with any services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
868
Values
N1EAS2 PORT1-PORT2
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK34
-
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4 PORT1-PORT4 -
N1EMS4 PORT1-PORT20 -

Value Description
Available Slave Ports Indicates the number of the physical port that can be set
to the slave port.
Selected Slave Ports Indicates the number of the physical port that is already
set to the slave port.

Add the relevant slave port to the link aggregation group as required. The maximum number of
slave ports differs with the board type.
Board Maximum Number of Slave Ports
Sharing Non-Sharing
N1EAS2 23 1
N1EGS4, N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
15 1
N1EMS4 15 1

A port can be aggregated only when the maximum frame length is consistent.
Moreover, all the ports in the link aggregation group must be on the same processing board or
on the relevant interface board.
A.19.4 Status (Link Aggregation)
Description
The Status (Link Aggregation) parameter specifies the state, which is derived from logical
computation, of each member ports in a link aggregation group.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
869
When a port is not configured with services, this port can be added to a link aggregation group.
If this port is in service in this link aggregation group, this port can share the service. If this port
is out of service in this link aggregation group, this port cannot share the service.
When a port is already configured with services, this port cannot be added to a link aggregation
group and cannot share the service.
Values
Unknown, In Service, Out of Service Unknown

Value Description
Unknown Indicates that the link aggregation group is not queried.
In Service Indicates that the port can carry the service.
Out of Service Indicates that the port cannot carry the service.

This parameter is used for query only. No rules are provided for selecting a value.
l For static link aggregation, the LACP protocol is used. The member port state in the link
aggregation group is decided by these parameters, such as port working mode, port working
rate, port priority, and link aggregation group priority.
l For manual link aggregation, the LCAP protocol is not used. The member port state in the
link aggregation group is not related to these parameters, such as port working mode and
port working rate.
A.19.5 Branch Port
Description
The Branch Port parameter specifies that a link aggregation group is created manually rather
than automatically. A link aggregation group consists of main ports and branch ports. Branch
ports in a link aggregation group are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does
not automatically add them to or delete them from a link aggregation group.
Regardless of services, a main port can be added to a link aggregation group. A branch port can
be added to a link aggregation group only when it is not configured with any services. After
being added to a link aggregation group, a branch port cannot be configured with any services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
870
Values
N2EGR2, N2EGS2,
N3EGS2
PORT1-PORT2 -
N2EFS4, N3EFS4 PORT1-PORT4 -
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0 PORT1-PORT8 -
N2EMR0 PORT1-PORT13 -
N1EFS0A PORT1-PORT16 -
N1EMS2 PORT1-PORT18 -

Value Description
Available Branch Port Indicates the number of the physical port that can be set
to a branch port.
Selected Branch Port Indicates the number of the physical port that is already
set to a branch port.

Add a relevant branch port to a link aggregation group as required.
Ports can be added to a link aggregation group only when their physical attributes are consistent
with each other, including Working Mode, Flow Control Mode and Max. Packet Length.
The link aggregation function can be configured only when the broadcast packet suppression
function is disabled. All the ports in a link aggregation group must be on the same processing
board or on the relevant interface board.
A.19.6 Load Sharing(Ethernet Link Aggregation)
Description
The Load Sharing parameter specifies the load sharing mode of an aggregation group.
Different load sharing modes have different effects. In load sharing mode, the ports in the
aggregation group can share the service. In load non-sharing mode, only one port in the
aggregation group can carry the service and the other port provides protection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
871
Values
Sharing, Non-Sharing Sharing

Value Description
Sharing Indicates that the ports in the aggregation group share the
service.
Non-Sharing Indicates that the ports in the aggregation group do not share
the service. Only one port in the aggregation group carries the
service.

If the bandwidth needs to be increased and several ports need to be enabled to share the service,
select the load sharing mode. If only one port needs to carry the service and protection is required
for this port, select the load non-sharing mode.
A.19.7 Revertive Mode (DLAG)
Description
The Revertive Mode (DLAG) parameter specifies whether to switch a service back to the main
board that recovers from a fault.
l If the service needs to be switched back to the main board, set Revertive Mode to
Revertive.
l If a service need not be switched back to the main board and is still transmitted at the slave
board, set Revertive Mode to Non-Revertive.
If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive, the service is switched back to the main board that
recovers from a fault.
For each switching event, the transient interruption time of the service is less than three seconds.
Values
Revertive, Non-Revertive Revertive

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
872
l To avoid frequent switching and to switch the service only when the working board port
fails, select Non-Revertive.
l If the user requires that the main port carries the service if it works normally, select
Revertive.
None.
A.19.8 Main Port Priority (DLAG)
Description
The Main Port Priority (DLAG) parameter specifies the priority of the main port in a distributed
link aggregation group (DLAG). A port of higher priority is preferred to carry the services.
If other conditions (such as port rate and port working mode) are the same, modifying the port
priority may cause service switching and interruption.
Values
0-65535 32768

To enable a port to be preferred to carry the services, set Port Priority to a smaller value.
Otherwise, set Port Priority to a greater value.
For a DLAG, to enable the main port to be preferred to carry the services, set the priority of the
main port in the DLAG higher than that of the slave port.
A DLAG uses the LACP. The working state of a member port in a link aggregation group is
decided by these parameters such as port working mode, port rate, port priority, and link
aggregation group priority.
If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the set port priority does not take effect.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
873
A.19.9 Slave Port Priority (DLAG)
Description
The Slave Port Priority (DLAG) parameter specifies the priority of the slave port in a DLAG.
The priority is specified in the LACP. A port of higher priority is preferred to carry the services.
If other conditions (such as port rate and port working mode) are the same, modifying the port
priority may cause service switching and interruption.
Values
0-65535 32768

To enable a port to be preferred to carry the services, set Port Priority to a smaller value.
Otherwise, set Port Priority to a greater value.
For a DLAG, to enable the slave port to be preferred to carry the services, set the priority of the
slave port in the DLAG higher than that of the main port.
A DLAG uses the LACP. The working state of a member port in a link aggregation group is
decided by these parameters such as port working mode, port rate, port priority, and link
aggregation group priority.
If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the set port priority does not take effect.
A.20 STP/RSTP Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and the
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
A.20.1 Protocol Enabled (Spanning Tree)
Description
Protocol Enabled (Spanning Tree) indicates whether the spanning tree protocol is enabled on
the VB.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
874
After the protocol is enabled and when the computation of the spanning tree is performed
according to the protocol type (STP/RSTP), the network topology changes and services are
interrupted temporarily.
Values

The user can set this parameter according to the actual service requirement.
This parameter can be set only when the VB is created and Protocol Type is selected.
Related Information
The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) can realize all the functions of the spanning tree. Similar
to the STP, the RSTP avoids temporary loops. Different from the STP, the RSTP shortens the
time delay at the ports from blocking to forwarding, restores the network connectivity more
rapidly, and provides better services.
A.20.2 Protocol Type (Spanning Tree Protocol)
Description
Protocol Type (Spanning Tree) indicates that the Ethernet data board of the OptiX OSN
equipment supports two spanning tree protocols, that is, the spanning tree protocol (STP) and
the rapid spanning tree Protocol (RSTP).
l The STP is a Layer 2 management protocol that avoids Layer 2 loops by selectively
blocking redundant network links and supports the link backup.
l The RSTP develops from the STP and shortens the convergence time.
If this parameter is changed incorrectly, a network topology oscillation may occur and services
are severely affected.
Values
STP, RSTP RSTP

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
875
The RSTP and STP can be configured at the same time. The RSTP is compatible with the STP.
It is recommended that you use the default value RSTP.
None.
A.20.3 VB Priority (Bridge Parameters)
Description
VB Priority (Bridge Parameters) indicates the fixed parameters of the bridge, used for
selecting the role of the bridge and computing the topology of the spanning tree. As the value
of the parameter decreases, the VB priority increases and the bridge is more likely to be selected
as a root bridge.
Changing the value of VB Priority may affect the selection of a root bridge, which may finally
affect the entire network topology.
Values
0-65535, in step length of 4096 32768

Set this parameter according to what role the user expects the bridge to play in the spanning tree
topology.
None.
A.20.4 Max Age(s)
Description
The Max Age(s) parameter specifies the maximum life cycle of the configuration message. A
configuration message contains the message aging time and maximum aging time of the
message. The maximum life cycle of the configuration message is equivalent to the maximum
aging time of the message.
If the message aging time exceeds the maximum aging time of the message, the received message
is discarded and the port that receives the message becomes a designated port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
876
Values
6-40 20 s

When you set the value of this parameter, ensure that the following requirement is met:
2 x (Hello Time + 1) Max Age 2 x (Forward Delay - 1)
This parameter is related to the Hello Time and Forward Delay parameters. For details, refer
to the principles for setting these parameters.
A.20.5 Hello Time(s) (Spanning Tree)
Description
The Hello Time(s) parameter specifies the transmission period of the message.
The bridge time consists of the following parts: forward delay of the bridge, handshake time of
the bridge, maximum bridge aging time, and message aging time (0). The Hello Time parameter
is equivalent to the bridge handshake time.
This parameter ensures the stable operation of the STP.
Values
1-10 2 s

2 x (Hello Time + 1) Max Age 2 x (Forward Delay - 1)
This parameter is related to the Max Age and Forward Delay parameters. For details, refer to
the principles for setting these parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
877
A.20.6 Forward Delay(s) (Spanning Tree)
Description
The Forward Delay(s) parameter specifies the delay of the port state migration.
This parameter is actually a timer that is used by the ports in the listening state and in the learning
state to control the migration from the listening state to the learning state and the migration from
the learning state to the forwarding state. The timer is started when the port enters the listening
state. When the timer expires, the port automatically migrates to the learning state and the timer
is started again. When the timer expires the second time, the port automatically migrates to the
forwarding state and the timer is stopped.
The restoration time of the service from the learning state to the forwarding state is affected.
Values
4-30 15 s

2 x (Hello Time + 1) Max Age 2 x (Forward Delay - 1).
This parameter is related to the Hello Time and Max Age parameters. For details, refer to the
principles for setting these parameters.
A.20.7 TxHoldCount(per second) (Spanning Tree)
Description
The TxHoldCount(per second) parameter enables the transmission state machine of the port
to specify the maximum transmission rate of the BPDU packet.
This parameter ensures that the number of the BPDU packets transmitted within a period of hello
time does not exceed the preset value.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
878
Values
1-10 times/s 6

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. It is recommended that you
use the default value.
A.20.8 Root Path Cost
Description
Each bridge has the root path cost. The root path cost of the root bridge is equal to 0. In the case
of non-root bridges, the root path cost of each bridge is equal to the sum of path cost values of
each port on the other bridges that a non-root bridge passes when the bridge receives the frame
from the root bridge along the minimum cost path. The path cost of each port can be managed.
The network segment in each LAN has the root path cost. The root path cost of the network
segment is equal to the root path cost of the bridge whose cost is the smallest among all the
bridges that are connected to the network segment through the bridge ports. In this case, the
bridge whose cost is the smallest is selected as the designated bridge. If the root path cost values
of two or more bridges are the same and the smallest, the bridge with a higher priority is selected
as the root bridge.
In the case of non-root bridges, the root path cost of each bridge is equal to the sum of path cost
values of each port on the other bridges that a non-root bridge passes when the bridge receives
the frame from the root bridge along the minimum cost path. That is, the value of the root path
cost is the sum of the path cost values of all bridges.
The root path cost can determine the designated bridge and the service flow in the STP.
Values
Based on the protocol, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the network
topology. This parameter is used for querying.
There are no principles for setting the value of this parameter because this parameter is used for
querying.
A.20.9 Hold Count (Spanning Tree)
Description
The Hold Count parameter indicates the maximum number of BPDUs that are actually
transmitted within a period of hello time.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
879
The system is not affected because this parameter is used to check the counter of the BPDU
packet.
Values
This parameter is used for querying.
There are no principles for setting the value of this parameter because this parameter is used for
querying.
A.20.10 Port ID
Description
The Port ID parameter contains 16 bits, which show the port priority and the unique port number
in the bridge. The first eight bits indicate the port priority, and the later eight bits indicate the
port number. The port ID represents the priority in the spanning tree. If the value of the port ID
is smaller, the port priority in the bridge is higher. To enable the RSTP to be compatible with
the STP, the port priority is represented by eight bits, of which the later four bits are 0 for easy
management.
This parameter is for query only. The system is not affected.
Values
The parameter value is in decimal system. For example, Port ID = 32769.
You can change the parameter value by setting the port priority. In this case, however, the
topology of the spanning tree may be rearranged.
If the port priority is smaller, the port ID is smaller. When the port priorities are the same, the
port ID is smaller if the port number is smaller.
A.20.11 Port Path Cost
Description
The Port Path Cost parameter is used for computation of the spanning tree state machine. Based
on the port path cost, you can compute the root path cost at the port of the switch. Each bridge
has a root path cost, namely, the cost of the path from the root bridge to the local bridge. The
path cost of each port can be set through the management module. For a root bridge, the root
path cost is 0. For Port Path Cost, the recommended values, which are decided by the MAC
type and the transmission rate.are shown in Table A-11. The recommended values for RSTP
are the same as those for STP.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
880
Table A-11 Recommended values of the port path cost
Parameter Link Speed Recommende
d value
Recommende
d range
Range
Path Cost <=100 Kb/s 200000000 20000000-2000
00000
1-200000000
1 Mb/s 20000000 2000000-20000
0000
1-200000000
10 Mb/s 2000000 200000-200000
00
1-200000000
100 Mb/s 200000 20000-2000000 1-200000000
1 Gb/s 20000 2000-200000 1-200000000
10 Gb/s 2000 200-20000 1-200000000
100 Gb/s 200 20-2000 1-200000000
1 Tb/s 20 2-200 1-200000000
10 Tb/s 2 1-20 1-200000000

After this parameter is modified, the protocol conducts the computation again based on the
modified value. Consequently, the network topology may be changed.
Values
N4EFS0, N2EFS4,
N2EGS2, N2EMR0,
N2EGR2, N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4,
N1EAS2
1-200000000 l 19 (FE port)
l 4 (GE port)
l 2 (VCTRUNK, 10 GE and
RPR ports)

If the port rate is greater, the port path cost is smaller. Generally, use the default value.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
881
A.20.12 Designated Path Cost
Description
The Designated Path Cost parameter is applicable to the port and is used for the state machine
calculation of the spanning tree. Based on the port path cost, you can calculate the root path cost
of the port of the switch. The root path cost is equal to 0 in the case of a root bridge. In the case
of other bridges, the root path cost of the bridge refers to the path cost from the root bridge to
this bridge. The root path cost is the sum of the minimum root path cost of the port on this bridge
and the path cost of this port. The path cost of each port can be set through the management
module. Table A-12 shows the recommended values of the port path cost. The values are
generally related to the MAC type and transmission rate.
Table A-12 Recommended values of the port path cost
Parameter Link Speed Recommende
d value
Recommende
d range
Range
Path Cost <=100 Kb/s 200000000 20000000-2000
00000
1-200000000
1 Mb/s 20000000 2000000-20000
0000
1-200000000
10 Mb/s 2000000 200000-200000
00
1-200000000
100 Mb/s 200000 20000-2000000 1-200000000
1 Gb/s 20000 2000-200000 1-200000000
10 Gb/s 2000 200-20000 1-200000000
100 Gb/s 200 20-2000 1-200000000
1 Tb/s 20 2-200 1-200000000
10 Tb/s 2 1-20 1-200000000

This parameter affects the calculation of the root path cost based on the STP and hence affects
the service flow in the spanning tree.
Values
1-65535 0

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
882
Value Description
1-65535 Indicates the cost required by the transmission of the bridge port.

If the port rate is greater, the designed path cost is smaller. It is recommended that you use the
default value.
A.20.13 Designated Root Bridge Priority
Description
The Designated Root Bridge Priority parameter indicates the priority of the root bridge that
is selected based on the STP. The selection is based on the bridge IDs in a network. A bridge
ID consists of the priority and MAC address of the bridge. The bridge whose ID is the smallest
is selected as the root bridge in this network.
This parameter is used for querying. It indicates the priority of the current root bridge and may
change in the case of a spanning tree topology change.
Values
0-65535 32768

There are no specific principles for setting the value of this parameter because this parameter is
used for querying.
A.20.14 Designated Bridge Priority(Spanning Tree)
Description
The Designated Bridge Priority parameter indicates the priority of each bridge during the
selection of the root bridge based on the STP. The bridge priority is a part of the bridge ID. A
bridge ID consists of the bridge priority and MAC address of the bridge. The bridge whose ID
is the smallest is selected as the root bridge in the network.
If the priority of a bridge is higher, the probability is higher that the bridge is selected as the root
bridge.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
883
Values
0-61440 32768

If the value of the parameter is smaller, the priority of the bridge is higher. Set this parameter
according to the actual network condition.
A.20.15 Designated Bridge MAC Address (Spanning Tree)
Description
The Designated Bridge MAC Address parameter indicates the MAC address of a bridge.
To ensure that the bridge protocols operate normally, the following requirements should be met:
l The multicast MAC address must be unique and be identified by all the bridges in the LAN.
The multicast MAC address identifies the protocol entities of a bridge that is connected to
different and individual physical network segments.
l Each bridge has a unique ID in the entire LAN.
l Ports on a bridge have port IDs, which are different from each other. Ports IDs of different
bridges are different. The values of these IDs can be assigned independently. The values
can also be used by other bridges.
l Each bridge must provide the values of the parameters that are described previously or
provide the mechanism for assigning values for these parameters.
The MAC address of a bridge affects the priority of the bridge.
Values
unicast mac address 00-00-00-00-00-00

It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.20.16 Protocol Enabled (Port Parameter of Spanning Tree)
Description
The Protocol Enabled parameter specifies whether the STP is enabled for a port.
The STP is used in the loop network. This protocol realizes routing redundancy by adopting a
certain algorithm and breaks the loop network into a loop-free tree network. Hence, the
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
884
application of this protocol can prevent the packets from increasing and cycling in an endless
manner in the loop network.
The RSTP is developed based on the STP, which transmits spanning tree information through
configuration messages and conducts the calculation according to the priorities. The RSTP
reduces the delay when the root port and designated port enters the forwarding state to a great
extent, and hence reduces the time required for stabilizing the network topology.
The RSTP can realize all the functions of the STP. Compared with the STP, however, the RSTP
can restore the connectivity of the network more quickly, which can provide better services for
the user. This is because the RSTP reduces the delay when a port migrates from the blocking
state to the forwarding state without causing temporary loops.
Values

Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the STP is enabled on the local port and that this
port is involved in the calculation.
Disabled Indicates that the STP is disabled on the local port and this
port is not involved in the calculation.

Set this parameter according to the networking condition. If the topology calculation requires a
VB, enable the STP for this VB. Otherwise, the STP is disabled for all VBs.
The STP of a port can be enabled or disabled only after the STP is enabled for a VB.
A.20.17 Admin Edge Attribute
Description
Edge ports are directly connected to the terminal equipment and are not connected to any bridge
in a network. The Admin Edge Attribute parameter is important in the RSTP. The status of
these ports does not affect the topology of the entire network, and does not result in any loop.
Hence, after the bridge protocol is enabled, these ports can change to the forwarding status
without any delay.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
885
If you set the ports that are directly connected to the terminal equipment as edge ports, the
convergence time of the RSTP is minimized, and the system reliability is enhanced.
Values

You can set this parameter based on the network topology.
None.
A.20.18 Edge Port Status (Spanning Tree)
Description
The Edge Port Status parameter specifies whether a bridge port is an edge port. Edge ports are
directly connected to the terminal equipment and are no longer connected to any bridges. This
parameter is important in the RSTP. The status of these ports does not affect the connectivity of
the entire network, and does not cause any loops. Hence, these ports can enter the forwarding
state without any delay after the bridge starts.
After this parameter is enabled, convergence time of the RSTP is reduced and thus the reliability
of the system is improved.
Values

Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the edge port function is enabled. In this case,
the port can enter the forwarding state directly without any
delay during the calculation process of the state machine.
Disabled Indicates that the edge port function is disabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
886

The user can set this parameter according to the network topology to reduce the delay in the case
of a state migration of the network edge port.
A.20.19 VB Port Priority
Description
The VB Port Priority parameter is the key part of the port ID for the spanning tree feature of
the OptiX OSN equipment. The port ID consists of the port priority and the unique port number
in the bridge. The port number is fixed and cannot be set. The port ID contains 16 bits, of which
the first eight bits indicate the port priority and the later eight bits indicate the port number.
For computation based on the spanning tree, a port with a smaller specified port priority is
preferred as the root port if the other conditions of this port are the same as conditions of the
other ports. In the same bridge, if the overhead of the root path is the same for multiple ports,
compare the specified bridge IDs, and then compare the specified port IDs.
The priority value of the VB port affects the selection of the root port of the downstream bridge
and the selection of the designated port. Consequently, the entire network topology is changed.
Values

The value of VB Port Priority must be an integer multiplied by 16. If the value is smaller, the
priority is higher. You can set the value based on the requirement of the user.
A.20.20 VB Port Status
Description
The VB Port Status parameter specifies that a bridge port processes the data packets based on
the port status computed by the spanning tree protocol.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
887
Values
Discarding, Forwarding, Learning Forwarding

Value Description
Discarding In this state, the port cannot receive or forward service packets.
Forwarding In this state, the port can receive and forward service packets.
Learning In this state, the port can receive but cannot forward service packets.
The port learns the source MAC addresses contained in the received
service packets so that the port is ready for entering the forwarding
state.

None.
A.20.21 Point to Point Attributes(External Ethernet Port Attributes)
Description
The Point to Point Attributes (External Ethernet Port Attributes) parameter specifies the
mode of connecting Ethernet ports to the external equipment. According to this parameter, the
spanning tree protocol (STP) decides whether to rapidly transit the port state from discarding to
forwarding.
If the connection is in shared media mode and if the port is not defined as an edge port, the STP
cannot rapidly transit the port state. After the STP updates the network topology, the service
restoration time becomes longer.
Values
Adaptive connection, Shared media, Link
connection
Adaptive connection

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
888
Value Description
Adaptive connection If the port is a full-duplex port or a VCTRUNK port, and if
the port has the point-to-point attribute, the port state can be
transited rapidly.
Shared media If the port has the non-point-to-point attribute, the port state
cannot be transited rapidly.
Link connection If the port has the point-to-point attribute, the port state can
be transited rapidly.

If the port connection mode is known, select Shared media or Link connection. Otherwise,
select Adaptive connection.
None.
A.21 LCAS Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the LCAS function.
A.21.1 Enabling LCAS
Description
The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without
affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is
automatically increased if the member recovers.
As a bidirectional protocol, the LCAS can work normally only when some bandwidth is available
in the bidirectional physical paths. If the bandwidth is available in the unidirectional physical
paths only, the LCAS may fail to correctly adjust the bandwidth.
Values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
889
Value Description
Disabled Disables the LCAS protocol.
Enabled Enables the LCAS protocol.

You can set Enabling LCAS as required.
None.
A.21.2 LCAS Mode
Description
The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.
Values
Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Huawei Mode

Value Description
Huawei Mode Inverts the RS_Ack message, and then transmits the MST
message.
Standard Mode Transmits the MST message, and then Inverts the RS_Ack
message.

To set the LCAS mode, follow the principles:
l If the interconnected equipment at the two ends are Huawei equipment, select Huawei
Mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
890
l If Huawei equipment is interconnected to a third-party equipment, set the interconnected
equipment to the same mode according to the mode supported by the third-party equipment.
None.
A.21.3 Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS)
Description
The Hold off Time(ms)(LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It
specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with
another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this
parameter to postpone the LCAS switching.
The LCAS switching time is affected.
For example, if both the MSP and the LCAS are available in a network, set the LCAS hold off
time to 2000 ms. If the network fails, only the MSP switching occurs, but the LCAS switching
does not occur.
Values
0, 2000-10000 2000 ms

The User can set this parameter according to the expected hold off time of LCAS switching.
This parameter is valid only when Enabling LCAS is set to Enabled.
A.21.4 WTR Time(s) (LCAS)
Description
The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies
WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact
caused by the alarm jitter on the link status.
The fault recovery time of the LCAS protocol is affected. After the network recovers from a
fault, the LCAS protocol can recover only after a WTR duration.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
891
Values
0-720 300 Second

The User can set this parameter according to the expected WTR duration of LCAS recovery.
A.21.5 TSD (LCAS)
Description
The TSD (LCAS) parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK
member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails
and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol
does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.
Values

You can set whether to enable the TSD as required.
A.21.6 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit Direction
Description
When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit
direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Minimum
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
892
Number of Members in the Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the
valid members in the transmit direction.
When the LCAS is enabled, failure in certain paths does not affect the service in the case of
sufficient bandwidths. The user can set this parameter to enable the reporting of the LCAS_PLCT
alarm only when the number of the valid members in the transmit direction is smaller than a
certain value.
Values
2-256 256

A.22 Packet LPT Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the link state pass through (LPT) function
in packet services.
A.22.1 Binding Status
Description
The Binding Status parameter specifies whether the LP function is bound with a service.
Values
Unbound, Bound Unbound

Value Description
Bound Indicates that the LTP function is already bound with the service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
893
Value Description
Unbound Indicates that the LTP function is not bound with the service.

You need to configure a service before setting the binding status between the LTP function and
the service. This parameter is defaulted to Unbound.
Before binding a service, you need to enable the LPT function.
A.22.2 Primary Function Point
Description
The Primary Function Point parameter displays the port ID, board and slot ID of the primary
function point.
The primary function point is the master mode that operates the LPT protocol and determines
the LPT protocol status based on the operating information. The secondary function point senses
or transmits the status change information, such as the status change of a port or a remote node.
The point-to-multipoint LPT includes a primary function point and multiple second function
points, which respectively correspond to the root and leaves in the topology.
Values
Slot ID-Board-Port ID -

Value Description
Slot ID-Board-
Port ID
Indicates the port ID, board and slot ID of the primary function point.

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
894
None.
A.22.3 Secondary Function Point Type
Description
The Secondary Function Point Type parameter specifies the type of the port of the secondary
function point when you configure point-to-point LPT.
Values
PW, UNI -

Value Description
PW Indicates the type of the PW on the NNI side.
UNI Indicates the type of the PW on the UNI side.

In packet mode, LPTs are classified as point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT. NEs
are classified as Primary Function Point and Secondary Function Point. The Secondary
Function Point Type can be set only when you configure the point-to-point LPT.
Secondary Function Point Type must match with Primary Function Point Type.
A.22.4 Secondary Function Point
Description
The Secondary Function Point parameter displays the port, board, and slot ID of the secondary
function point.
The primary function point is the master node that operates the LPT protocol and determines
the LPT protocol status based on the operating information. The secondary function point senses
or transmits the status change information, such as the status change of a port or a remote node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
895
The point-to-multipoint LPT includes a primary function point and multiple secondary function
points, which respectively correspond to the root and leaves in the topology.
Values
Slot ID-Board-Port -

Value Description
Slot ID-Board-
Port
Indicates the port, board, and slot ID of the secondary function point.

None.
None.
A.22.5 Fault Detection Mode
Description
The Fault Detection Mode parameter specifies the mode to detect the LPT link status.
Values
LPT OAM, PW OAM LPT OAM

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
896
Value Description
LPT OAM Indicates that the LPT protocol suite negotiates and determines the LPT
link status according to the protocol packets.
PW OAM Indicates that the LPT protocol suite determines the LPT link status
according to the protocol packets and the PW OAM status reported by
a certain board. The LPT protocol suite regards that the LPT link is in
good status only when both the negotiation status of the protocol packets
and the PW OAM status are normal.

If the LPT detection modes differ at both ends, the LPT fails to work normally.
You need to enable the PW OAM function before configuring the PW OAM detection mode.
A.22.6 User-Side Port Status
Description
The User-Side Port Status parameter specifies the status of the laser on the LPT enabling port
on the user side.
Values
CLOSE, OPEN OPEN

Value Description
OPEN Indicates that the laser on the LPT enabling port is opened.
CLOSE Indicates that the laser on the LPT enabling port is closed.

When the LPT protocol works normally, OPEN is displayed. When a fault occurs on the network
side, the OptiX OSN equipment shuts down the laser on the local end and reports CLOSE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
897
None
A.23 LPT Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the LPT function.
A.23.1 LPT
Description
The LPT parameter specifies whether the link state pass through (LPT) function is enabled. The
LPT is a technology developed by Huawei to increase the speed of the link state response.
Through the LPT protocol, the faults on the service access point and in the intermediate network
can be detected and reported.
When the LPT function is enabled, the faults on the service access point and in the intermediate
network can be detected and reported. For example, the service access point can be informed of
the fault in the intermediate network and thus can handle the fault accordingly (switch the service
to the backup link). When the LPT function is disabled, the link fault in the intermediate network
is not reported to the service access point.
Values
Yes, No No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that the LPT function is enabled.
No Indicates that the LPT function is disabled.

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Set this parameter to Yes if
the LPT function is required.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
898
A.23.2 Bearer Mode
Description
The Bearer Mode parameter specifies the frame format of the LPT protocol packet for
transmission. Three bearer modes are available, namely, GFP (HUAWEI), Ethernet, and GFP
(CSF).
All the equipment on the service access point and in the intermediate network should use the
same LPT bearer mode. Otherwise, the LPT function cannot work normally.
Values
GFP(HUAWEI), Ethernet, GFP(CSF) GFP(HUAWEI)

Value Description
GFP(HUAWEI) Indicates the frame format specially used by Huawei.
Ethernet Indicates the Ethernet frame format.
GFP(CSF) Indicates the standard CSF frame format.

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Ensure that the configurations
of the two interconnected ports are consistent.
A.23.3 Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms)
Description
The Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) parameter specifies the interval for the PORT to
transmit the LPT fault information after it receives the information.
The greater the hold-off time of the PORT, the slower is the transmission of fault information
between networks.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
899
Values
0-100000 0 ms

A.23.4 VCTRUNK Port Hold-off Time(ms)
Description
The VCTRUNK-Type Port Hold-off Time(ms) parameter specifies the interval for the
VCTRUNK port to transmit the LPT fault information after it receives the information.
The greater the hold-off time of the VCTRUNK port, the slower is the transmission of fault
information between networks.
Values
0-100000 0 ms

A.24 IGMP Snooping Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the IGMP Snooping function.
A.24.1 Protocol Enable (IGMP Snooping Protocol)
Description
IGMP Snooping is a Layer-2 multicast protocol. If the IGMP Snooping is supported, an Ethernet
board can detect the IGMP packets that are transmitted between IP multicast routers or switches
and IP multicast hosts, and then check the detected IGMP packets. After being successfully
checked, these packets are transmitted transparently. An Ethernet board retrieves the registration
information of the multicast group from the checked IGMP packets. Moreover, it configures the
relevant functions to generate route ports and multicast groups. The multicast service packets
are forwarded according to the multicast group information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
900
This parameter specifies whether to enable the IGMP Snooping protocol within the specified
virtual bridge (VB).
l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is enabled, the Ethernet physical port captures and analyzes
the received IGMP packets. Then the Ethernet physical port registers the multicast
information to generate the router port and the multicast group. Finally the Ethernet physical
port transparently transports the packets.
l If the IGMP Snooping protocol is disabled, the Ethernet physical port does not analyze the
received IGMP packets. Instead, the Ethernet physical port broadcasts the IGMP packets
as ordinary multicast packets.
Values

Value Description
Enabled If the IGMP Snooping protocol is enabled, multicast groups
and router ports can be generated.
Disabled If the IGMP Snooping protocol is disabled, multicast groups
and router ports cannot be generated.

l To create and maintain a multicast service, select Enabled.
l Otherwise, select Disabled.
A.24.2 Multicast Aging Time
Description
The Multicast Aging Time parameter specifies the aging time of the router port in the multicast
group. The time is learnt by the board port.
This parameter decides the valid time of the router port in the multicast group. Within the aging
time period, if the router port is learnt again, its aging time is reset. Otherwise, when the aging
time expires, the relevant router port in the multicast group is aged. After the router port is aged,
the whole multicast group is deleted if no other router ports exist in the multicast group.
The parameter value may affect the forwarding efficiency of the EVPLAN service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
901
l If the aging time is long, and if the multicast MAC address table in the board fails to be
updated in time, the board forwards the service packets incorrectly. Consequently, the
forwarding efficiency is decreased.
l If the aging time is short, the multicast MAC address table may be updated rapidly.
Moreover, a great number of received multicast service packets fail to be found in the MAC
address table. Consequently, the board broadcasts these data packets to all the ports. As a
result, the forwarding efficiency is also decreased.
Values
1-120, in step length of 1 8 Min

Generally, select the default value, unless otherwise specified. Otherwise, set the value according
to the requirements. Do not set the value beyond the range allowed by the board.
None.
A.25 Test Frame Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Ethernet service test function.
A.25.1 Frames to Send
Description
Frames to Send indicates the number of test packets to be transmitted. With this parameter
enabled, the system transmits a test packet at the intervals of certain period of time until the
number of transmitted test packets reaches the specified value.
Values
0-255 0 Unit

The user can set the number of test packets to be transmitted as required.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
902
This parameter is valid only when Send Mode is set to Burst Mode.
A.25.2 Status
Description
Status indicates the transmit status of the current test frames at the port. This parameter is
displayed as the current test status after you configure Send Mode and Frames to Send and
then click Apply.
Values
Sending, Finished Sending -

Value Description
Sending Indicates that the port is currently transmitting the test frames.
Finished Sending Indicates that the port finishes transmitting the test frames.

None.
None.
A.25.3 Counter of Frames Sent
Description
Counter of Frames Sent indicates the number of test frames that are transmitted by the VC
trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative. The value indicates the
total number of test frames that are transmitted from last time when the parameter value is cleared
to this time when the value is queried.
This parameter is for query only and does not affect the system operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
903
Values
For example, the parameter value 5indicates that the port transmits five test frames.
None.
None.
A.25.4 Counter of Received Response Test Frame
Description
Counter of Received Response Test Frame indicates the number of response test frames that
are received by the VC trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative.
The value indicates the total number of response test frames that are received from last time
when the parameter value is cleared to this time when the value is queried.
Values
For example, the parameter value 5indicates that this port receives five response test frames.
None.
None.
A.25.5 Counter of Test Frames to Receive
Description
Counter of Test Frames to Receive indicates the number of test frames that are received by
the VC trunk port in the Ethernet test. This parameter value is accumulative. The value indicates
the total number of test frames that are transmitted from last time when the parameter value is
cleared to this time when the value is queried.
Values
For example, the parameter value 5indicates that the port receives five test frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
904
None.
None.
A.25.6 Bearer Mode (Ethernet Test)
Description
Bearer Mode (Ethernet Test) indicates the transmit path of the test frame. Different bearer
modes correspond to different types of test frames. If the bearer mode of the received test frame
is inconsistent with the bearer mode of this port, the test frame is discarded directly.
Values
N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N2EGT2,
N1EFS0A, N1EMS2, N1EAS2
l /
l GFP
l Ethernet
/
N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N1EFT8, 1EFT8A,
N1EGT2, R1EFT4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4
GFP GFP

Value Description
/ Indicates that the bearer mode is unknown.
GFP Indicates that the test frame is transmitted as a GFP management
frame.
Ethernet Indicates that the test frame is transmitted as an Ethernet frame.

The Bearer Mode values of the test frame at the two ends of the SDH link must be consistent
so that the test frame can function properly.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
905
A.25.7 Send Mode (Ethernet Test)
Description
Send Mode(Ethernet Test) is used to set the test frame and the transmit mode of the test frame.
The test frame is used for simulating packet transmission to check whether the link is normal.
Values
Disabled, Burst Mode, Continue Mode Disabled

Value Description
Disabled Indicates the test is not performed.
Burst Mode Indicates that the system transmits a test frame every one
second. The test ends after a specified number of test frames
are transmitted.
Continue Mode Indicates that the system continuously transmits test frames
with a frequency of 1 frame per second.

Set this parameter according to the requirements of the test.
l To perform the test continuously, set the parameter to Continue Mode.
l To stop the test, set the parameter to Disabled.
None.
A.26 Orderwire Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the orderwire function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
906
A.26.1 Call Waiting Time(s)
Description
The Call Waiting Time(s) parameter specifies the timeout period of searching an orderwire
route. If the period of searching an orderwire route exceeds the specified value, the orderwire
phone changes to the busy tone status.
Values
1-9 9 s

For all the network elements (NEs) that communicate with each other over the orderwire phone,
this parameter must be set to the same value.
l If the number of NEs is less than 30, usually, set the value to 5 seconds.
l If the number of NEs is not less than 30, usually, set the value to 9 seconds.
Generally, set it to the default value (namely, 9 seconds).
A.26.2 Conference Call
Description
The Conference Call parameter specifies the phone numbers of network-wide orderwire calls.
Values
100-99999999 999

l For orderwire conference calls on each node of the same subnet, the phone number must
be the same.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
907
l The length of an orderwire conference call number can be set as required. The value range
is 3-8.
l The length of an orderwire conference call number must be consistent with that of the
addressing call number.
None.
A.26.3 Phone
Description
The Phone parameter specifies the phone numbers of orderwire addressing calls. An addressing
call refers to a point-to-point call.
Values
100-99999999 101

l The phone numbers of orderwire addressing calls cannot be duplicate within the same
subnet.
l The length of an orderwire call number can be set as required. The value range is 3-8.
Within the same orderwire network, the length of orderwire call numbers must be consistent
for each node.
l The length of phone numbers used to make orderwire addressing calls must be consistent
with that of conference call numbers.
If the length of an orderwire phone number is set to another value, the orderwire addressing call
number is changed to the default phone number that maps the length.
For example, if the length of a phone number is set to contain three digits, the addressing call
number is changed to the default number 101. If the length of the phone number is set to contain
four digits, the addressing call number is changed to the default number 1001, and the rest may
be deduced by analogy.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
908
A.26.4 Available Orderwire Port
Description
The Available Orderwire Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used to make
orderwire calls.
Values
Available Orderwire Port Bid-BidType-PortID

Value Description
Bid-BidType-PortID Indicates the available optical interface of a board in a slot,
which is used to set orderwire calls.
l Bid indicates the slot number of the board used to set
orderwire calls.
l BidType indicates the name of the board used to set
orderwire calls.
l PortID indicates the number of the optical interface on the
board used to set orderwire calls.
For example, to set optical interface 1 on the N2SL16 board
in slot 7, select 7-N2SL16-1.

None.
For the OptiX NG-SDH V100R003 and later versions, dynamically allocate the orderwire bytes.
To make addressing calls or conference calls, add the optical interface from Available
Orderwire Port to Selected Orderwire Port.
A.26.5 Available Conference Call Port
Description
The Available Conference Call Port parameter specifies whether the optical interface is used
to make conference calls.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
909
Values
Available Orderwire Port Bid-BidType-PortID

Value Description
Bid-BidType-PortID For example, to set optical interface 1 on the N2SL16 board

The NG-SDH equipment supports the function of automatically releasing the ring of an
orderwire conference call. For this reason, when the NG-SDH equipment is interconnected to
each other, do not set this parameter when you make an orderwire conference call. When the
NG-SDH equipment is interconnected to other equipment (for example, the OptiX OSN 9500),
you can make orderwire conference calls only after Selected Conference Call Port is selected
for the interconnected optical ports.
None.
A.26.6 Subnet No. Length
Description
The Subnet No. Length parameter specifies the length of the subnet number of the orderwire
subnets if the entire network is divided into multiple orderwire subnets.
Values
1, 2 1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
910
Value Description
1 Indicates that the subnet number contains one digit. Value
range: 0-9
2 Indicates that the subnet number contains two digits. Value
range: 0-99

Select the value according to the number of orderwire subnets.
l If the number of orderwire subnets is less than 10, set Subnet No. Length to 1.
l If the number of orderwire subnets is greater than 10, set Subnet No. Length to 2.
None.
A.26.7 Subnet (Subnet No. for the Optical Interface)
Description
The Subnet (Subnet No. for the Optical Interface) parameter specifies the subnet number of
the orderwire phone connected to the optical interface.
Values
0-99 -

If the subnet number is set to 1, the value range is 0-9.
If the subnet number length is set to 2, the value range is 10-99.
For the optical ports in the same orderwire subnet, the subnet number must be the same.
If the subnet number length is changed, to avoid conflict between the subnet number length and
the number length of the subnet connected to the optical port, the system automatically clears
all the specified numbers of the subnets connected to the optical port. All the subnet numbers
mapping the optical ports are empty.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
911
A.26.8 No.(F1 Data Port)
Description
The No. (F1 Data Port) parameter specifies the numbers of the F1 data ports that have the same
direction.
Values
1-88 -

Value Description
1-60 Supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
1-88 Supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B do not support the F1 data ports that have the same
direction.
None.
None.
A.26.9 Data Channel (F1 Data Port)
Description
The Data Channel (F1 Data Port) parameter specifies the uplink and downlink ports that pass
through the F1 data.
After the data channel is cancelled, the services that pass through the F1 data port are interrupted.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
912
Values
F1, Bid-BidType-PortID -

Value Description
F1 Indicates the F1 data port of the NE.
Bid-BidType-PortID Indicates a port that can be used to set a slot of the F1 data
port.

When using the F1 data port, you need to configure its route. That is, set the 64 Kbit/s data being
added to or dropped from the NE, or passing through the NE.
You can correctly set the F1 data ports that have the same direction only when the F1 port is not
set to Transparent ECC Overhead Transmission.
A.26.10 Overhead Byte (Broadcast Data Port)
Description
The Overhead Byte (Broadcast Data Port) parameter specifies the number of the overhead
bytes, which are used to transmit orderwire broadcast data services, in the SDH frame header.
Values
SERIAL1, SERIAL2,
SERIAL3, SERIAL4
SERIAL1

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
913
Value Description
SERIAL1 Indicates the S1 byte in the SDH frame header.

Select the value according to the configuration.
If the S1 byte, the S2 byte, the S3 byte, the S4 byte, or an optical interface is set to transparently
transmit DCC overhead, the broadcast data port may fail to be set.
A.26.11 Working Mode (Broadcast Data Port)
Description
The Working Mode (Broadcast Data Port) parameter specifies the working mode of the local
interface at which broadcast data services are added or dropped.
Values
Value Valid Values
RS232, RS422 -

Value Description
RS232 Indicates an asynchronous transmission mode, in which no
handshake signal is available. An NE operating in RS232
mode can communicate with an NE operating in RS232 or
RS422 mode directly; in this case, data transmission is
transparent and the maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s.
RS422 RS422 port specifications differ from RS232 port
specifications only in that an RS422 port can become an
RS232 port by means of hardware jumpers.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
914
Select the value according to the interface.
None.
A.26.12 Broadcast Data Source (Broadcast Data Port)
Description
The Broadcast Data Source (Broadcast Data Port) parameter specifies the source of the
orderwire broadcast data service.
Values
No Data, SERIALx, Bid-
BidType-PortID
-

Value Description
No Data Clears all the broadcast data services.
SERIALx Indicates the local broadcast data port.
For example, SERIAL1.
Bid-BidType-PortID Indicates a port that is used to set a slot of the F1 data port.

If the S1 byte, the S4 byte, or an optical interface is set to transparently transmit DCC overhead,
the broadcast data service may fail to be set.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
915
A.26.13 Broadcast Data Sink (Broadcast Data Port)
Description
The Broadcast Data Sink (Broadcast Data Port) parameter specifies the sink of the orderwire
broadcast data service.
Values
SERIALx, Bid-BidType-
PortID
-

Value Description
SERIALx Indicates the local broadcast data port,
for example, SERIAL1.
Bid-BidType-PortID Indicates a port that is used to set a slot of the F1 data port.

If the S1 byte, the S4 byte, or an optical interface is set to transparently transmit DCC overhead,
the broadcast data service may fail to be set.
A.27 Clock Associated Parameters
To synchronize the clocks on a network, you need to set the parameters that are associated with
clocks.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
916
A.27.1 External Clock Output Mode
Description
The External Clock Output Mode parameter sets the output mode of the external clock source
to 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz.
Modifying the output mode of the external clock source may result in switching between clock
sources, which may result in bit errors in services.
Values
l 2 MHz
l 2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s

Value Description
2 MHz Indicates that the output mode of the external clock source is
2 MHz. That is, the external clock source outputs 2 MHz clock
signals.
2 Mbit/s Indicates that the output mode of the external clock source is
2 Mbit/s.

Input modes of the two channels of external clock signals can be set to 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s. The
default input mode is 2 Mbit/s. In practical application, make sure that the output mode matches
the input mode on the receive end.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.2 External Clock Output Timeslot
Description
The External Clock Output Timeslot parameter sets the timeslot for transmitting the S1 byte
of the external clock source. The external clock source transmits the S1 byte through a certain
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
917
timeslot. After starting the SSM protocol, make sure that the timeslot for receiving the S1 byte
is consistent with the timeslot for transmitting the S1 byte so that the S1 byte can be received
correctly.
When the SSM protocol is enabled on NEs, setting the S1 byte may result in switching between
clock sources. This may generate bit errors in services when clock jitters occur.
Values
l SA4
l SA5
l SA6
l SA7
l SA8
l All versions
All versions

Value Description
SA4 Indicates that the S1 byte is transmitted through the SA4
timeslot of the external clock port.
All versions Indicates that the S1 byte is transmitted through all timeslots
of the external clock port.

None.
This parameter is valid only when the External Clock Output Mode parameter is set to 2 Mbit/
s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
918
Related Information
None.
A.27.3 External Source Output Threshold
Description
The External Source Output Threshold parameter sets the output quality threshold for the
external clock source. When output quality of the external clock source is inferior to the
threshold, the action specified for a 2M phase-locked source failure is invoked to control the
external clock source output.
Values
Threshold Disabled, Not Inferior to G.813
SETS Signal, Not Inferior to G.812 Local
Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.812 Transit
Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.811 Clock
Signal
Threshold Disabled

Value Description
Threshold Disabled Indicates that the external source quality threshold is
disabled.
Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal Indicates that the external clock source becomes
invalid when its output quality is inferior to the quality
defined in G.813.
Not Inferior to G.812 Local Clock
Signal
Indicates that the external clock source becomes
invalid when its output quality is inferior to the clock
quality of local nodes defined in G.812.
Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock
Signal
Indicates that the external clock source becomes
invalid when its output quality is inferior to the clock
quality of transit nodes defined in G.812.
Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal Indicates that the external clock source becomes
invalid when its output quality is inferior to the quality
defined in G.811.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
919
The output quality of the external clock source should not be inferior to the specified quality
threshold. Therefore, the quality threshold should be set to a value that is inferior to or equal to
the output clock quality of NEs.
This parameter is valid only when the Protection Status parameter is set to Start Standard
SSM Protocol.
Related Information
None.
A.27.4 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition
Description
The 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition parameter sets a failure condition for the 2M
phase-locked source.
Values
l No Failure Condition
l AIS
l LOF
l AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition

Value Description
No Failure Condition Indicates that no failure condition is set. The 2M phase-lock
source remains valid when an AIS or LOF alarm occurs in the
external clock signal.
AIS Indicates that the 2M phase-lock source becomes invalid
when an AIS alarm occurs in the external clock signal.
LOF Indicates that the 2M phase-lock source becomes invalid
when an LOF alarm occurs in the external clock signal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
920
Value Description
AIS OR LOF Indicates that the 2M phase-lock source becomes invalid
when an AIS or LOF alarm occurs in the external clock signal.

A failure condition can be set as required.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.5 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action
Description
The 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action parameter specifies the action to be invoked in the
case of a 2M phase-locked source failure. When the reference clock signal for locking external
clock output is invalid or the quality if inferior to the threshold, the specific action is invoked to
control the external clock output by either shutting down the output or inserting an AIS alarm.
Values
l Shut Down Output
l Send AIS
l 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable
Shut Down Output

Value Description
Shut Down Output Indicates that the external clock signal output is shut down.
Send AIS Indicates that the external clock sends all "1"s signals.
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Indicated that the S1 byte sent by the external clock is invalid.
That is, the external clock sends 0x0f.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
921
When the 2M phase-locked source is invalid, the output action can be set as required. When the
External Clock Output Mode parameter is set to 2 MHz, the external clock signal output is
shut down no matter what action is set.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.6 Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 Is the Highest)
Description
The Clock source priority sequence(1 is the highest) parameter specifies the priority level of
a certain clock source in the system clock priority table.
When the SSM protocol is disabled or the extended SSM protocol is enabled, the current trace
clock source may be changed if the clock source priority sequence is changed. As a result, bit
errors may occur in the service or the service may be interrupted transiently.
Values
1, 2, 3 1

Value Description
1 Indicates that this clock source is at the highest priority level
in the system clock priority table.
2 Indicates that this clock source is at the second highest priority
level in the system clock priority table.
3 Indicates that this clock source is at the third highest priority
level in the system clock priority table.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
922
This parameter specifies the priority level of a certain clock source in the system clock priority
table. The value ranges from 1 to N. N represents the total number of clock sources in the system
clock priority table. Generally, the internal clock source is at the lowest priority level.
For example, there are four clock sources in the system clock priority table: one external clock
source, one line clock source, one tributary clock source, and one internal clock source. The
priority level of the external clock source is set to 1, the priority level of the line clock source is
set to 2, the priority level of the tributary clock source is set to 3 (the priority levels of the external
clock source, line clock source, and tributary clock source cannot be the same), and the priority
level of the internal clock source is always set to 4.
In the actual application, this parameter is set according to the specific networking situation.
A.27.7 Clock Source Threshold
Description
The Clock Source Threshold parameter indicates the lower quality threshold of 2M external
clock source. When the clock quality level of the external clock source that is selected from the
2M phase-locked source priority table is inferior to the threshold, the 2M phase-locked source
becomes invalid, and the action specified for 2M phase-locked source failure is invoked to
control the external clock source output.
Values
l No Threshold Value
l G.813 SETS Signal
l G.812 Lock Clock Signal
l G.812 Transit Clock Signal
l G.811 Clock Signal
No Threshold Value

Value Description
No Threshold Value Threshold disabled
G.813 SETS Signal Indicates that the lower threshold is not inferior to the
G.813 SETS signal.
G.812 Lock Clock Signal Indicates that the lower threshold is not inferior to the
G.812 lock clock signal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
923
Value Description
G.812 Transit Clock Signal Indicates that the lower threshold is not inferior to the
G.812 transit clock signal.
G.811 Clock Signal Indicates that the lower threshold is not inferior to the
G.811 clock signal.

In actual application, the output quality threshold of external clock source should be determined
according to the quality information about the NE clock and the opposite NE.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.8 Protection Status
Description
The Protection Status parameter indicates the working mode of the clock protocol for a clock
subnet.
The algorithm adopted by the system to select a clock source varies with the parameter value.
Values
Start Extended SSM Protocol,
Start Standard SSM Protocol,
Stop SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol

The protection status of the entire clock subnet should be consistent. To avoid a clock tracing
loop on a ring or mesh network, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Start Extended
SSM Protocol.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
924
Related Information
As a mechanism adopted by the synchronous network for synchronization management, the
standard SSM protocol is loaded in the lower four bits of the S1 byte. The standard SSM protocol
allows nodes to exchange the quality information of clock sources. Hence, the SSM protocol
enables the system to automatically select the clock source with the highest priority and also
avoids a timing loop. The standard SSM protocol is applicable to interconnection with the
equipment of other suppliers.
Based on the standard SSM protocol, the extended SSM protocol presents a concept of clock
source ID. The higher four bits of the S1 byte indicate a unique clock source ID, which is
transmitted with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks the clock source ID to
see whether the clock source derives from itself. If the clock source derives from the node, the
node considers the clock source as unavailable. In this manner, a clock inter-lock loop is avoided
when the clock tracing path is configured as a ring. The extended SSM protocol is applicable to
the interconnection of transmission equipment from Huawei.
When the SSM protocol is disabled, the clock source is selected according to the priority table.
A.27.9 AIS Alarm Generated
Description
The AIS Alarm Generated parameter specifies whether an AIS alarm is a condition for
triggering the switching of clock sources.
Values
l Yes
l No
No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that an AIS alarm is the sufficient condition to
trigger clock source switching.
No Indicates that an AIS alarm is not a condition for triggering
clock source switching.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
925
It is recommended to set the AIS alarm as the condition for triggering clock source switching
in actual application to ensure system performance.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.10 B1 BER Threshold-Crossing Generated
Description
The B1 BER Threshold-Crossing Generated parameter specifies whether a B1 BER threshold-
crossing alarm is a condition for triggering clock source switching. B1 BER Threshold-Crossing
alarm is an index for measuring the performance of clock source signals.
Values
l Yes
l No
No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that a B1 BER threshold-crossing alarm is the
sufficient condition for triggering clock source switching.
No Indicates that a B1 BER threshold-crossing alarm is not the
condition for triggering clock source switching.

A B1 BER threshold-crossing alarm indicates that the transmitted signal and the clock in the
signal are being interfered. Therefore, this parameter can be set as a condition for triggering
clock source switching in actual application to ensure system performance.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
926
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.11 B2-EXC Alarm Generated
Description
The B2-EXC Alarm Generated parameter specifies whether a B2-EXC alarm is a condition
for triggering clock source switching. B2-EXC alarm is an index for measuring the performance
of clock source signals.
Values
l Yes
l No
No

Value Description
Yes Indicates that a B2-EXC alarm is the sufficient condition for
triggering clock source switching.
No Indicates that a B2-EXC alarm is not the condition for
triggering clock source switching.

A B2-EXC alarm indicates that the transmitted signal and the clock in the signal are being
interfered. Therefore, this parameter can be set as a condition for triggering clock source
switching in actual application to ensure system performance.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
927
Related Information
None.
A.27.12 Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode
Description
The Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode parameter specifies whether to switch
from the lower-priority clock source back to the higher-priority clock source after the higher-
priority clock source is restored to normal.
If the conditions for clock source switching are excessively strict, jitters may occur in the
monitoring results of the clock status. If the auto-revertive mode is selected, the frequent
switching of clock sources may affect the service.
Values
l Non-Revertive
l Auto-Revertive
Auto-Revertive

Value Description
Non-Revertive Indicates that the higher-priority clock source cannot be
selected automatically after it is restored to normal.
Auto-Revertive Indicates that the higher-priority clock source is selected
automatically after it is restored to normal.

If the conditions for clock source switching are properly set and the switching of clock sources
can be guaranteed, the Auto-Revertive mode can be selected to improve clock quality.
Otherwise, the Non-Revertive mode is recommended to avoid clock jitters.
None.
Related Information
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
928
A.27.13 Clock Source WTR Time
Description
The Clock Source WTR Time parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time when the
Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode parameter is set to Auto-Revertive. When a
clock source is restored to its valid status, the system does not regard it as a valid source
immediately but verifies the validity of the clock source in a specific period of time. The system
regards the clock source as a valid source only if the clock source remains valid during the
specific period of time. This specific period of time is called the WTR time of the clock source.
Insufficient WTR time may result in wrong judgments on clock source restoration and clock
status jitters, which may interrupt the service.
Values
0-12 5

The WRT time is counted in minutes. The shorter the WTR time is, the faster the clock is
recovered, and the higher the average clock quality is. On the other hand, the shorter the WTR
time is, the more likely the clock jitters are caused due to unstable clock signals. Therefore, do
not set the WTR time to 0 in actual application.
The setting of the WTR time is valid only when the Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion
Mode parameter is set to Auto-Revertive.
Related Information
None.
A.27.14 Switching Status (Clock)
Description
The Switching Status (Clock) parameter indicates the current switching status of a clock source
in the clock priority table.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
929
Values
l Normal
l Forced Switching
l Manual Switching
Normal

Value Description
Normal Indicates that the clock source in the clock priority table is in
the normal trace status.
Forced Switching Indicates that the clock source in the clock priority table is in
the forced switching status.
Manual Switching Indicates that the clock source in the clock priority table is in
the manual switching status.

None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.15 Lock Status (Clock)
Description
The Lock Status (Clock) parameter indicates the lock status of a clock source in the priority
table.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
930
Values
l Lock
l Unlock
Unlock

Value Description
Lock Indicates that a certain channel of clock source in the priority
table is in the lock status where the switching of clock sources
is not allowed.
Unlock Indicates that a certain channel of clock source in the priority
table is in the unlock status where the switching of clock
sources is allowed.

None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.16 Clock Source ID
Description
The Clock Source ID parameter specifies the clock source ID information that is transmitted
in the four most significant bits of the overhead S1 byte to avoid timing loops. This parameter
works in the extended SSM protocol mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
931
Values
l 1-15
l None.
None

In actual application where the extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock source IDs should
be set as required by network planning to ensure that the ID is network-wide unique.
This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is enabled.
Related Information
None.
A.27.17 Synchronous Source
Description
The Synchronous Source parameter indicates the synchronous clock source that is being traced.
The synchronous clock source here refers to a certain clock source contained in the system clock
priority table.
Values
Clock Source in System Clock Priority Table None

Value Description
Clock Source in System
Clock Priority Table
Indicates that the system clock priority table contains the
tributary clock sources, line clock sources, external clock
sources, and internal clock sources.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
932
None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.18 Synchronous Status Byte
Description
The Synchronous Status Byte parameter sets the timeslot for carrying SSM information in the
external clock source. The SSM information can be received from the external clock port only
when a timeslot is set correctly. The timeslot for receiving the S1 byte ranges from SA4 to SA8.
If the synchronous status byte of the external clock source cannot be set correctly as required,
the NEs may fail to receive the clock quality information correctly and the NE clock may be out
of synchronization.
Values
l SA4
l SA5
l SA6
l SA7
l SA8
SA4

Value Description
SA4 Indicates that timeslot slot 0 is used for receiving the S1 byte.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
933
The timeslot for receiving the S1 byte is set for external clock source only. The timeslot can be
set to SA4, SA5, SA6, SA7 or SA8. The default timeslot is SA6. In actual application, make
sure that the specified timeslot for receiving the S1 byte is the timeslot for carrying the SSM
information in the external clock source. That is, the specified timeslot for receiving the S1 byte
is the transmit timeslot of the opposite NE.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.19 S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Information
Description
The S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Information parameter indicates the synchronization
quality information in the S1 byte that is output by the current traced synchronous source. The
S1 byte defined by the ITUT is used to transmit the quality information about the clock sources.
It indicates the quality information of 16 types of synchronous sources with bits 5-8 of the S1
byte in the section overhead. With this quality information and certain switching protocols, the
automatic protection switching of the synchronization clock can be realized in the synchronous
network.
Values
l Synchronous Source Unavailable
l Quality Unknown
l G.811 Reference Clock
l G.812 Transit Clock
l G.812 Local Clock
l SDH equipment timing source (SETS)
signal
None

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
934
Value Description
Synchronous Source
Unavailable
Indicates that the SSM protocol is disabled and the S1 byte
synchronization quality information output by the
synchronous source is not available.
Quality Unknown Indicates that the SSM protocol is started but the S1 byte
synchronous source is unknown.
G.811 Reference Clock Indicates that the SSM protocol is started and the S1 byte
synchronous source is the G.811 reference clock.
G.812 Transit Clock Indicates that the SSM protocol is started and the S1 byte
synchronous source is the G.812 transit clock.
G.812 Local Clock Indicates that the SSM protocol is started and the S1 byte
synchronous source is the G.812 local clock.
SDH equipment timing
source (SETS) signal
Indicates that the SSM protocol is enabled and the S1 byte
synchronous source is the synchronous equipment timing
source (SETS) clock.

None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.20 NE Clock Working Mode
Description
The NE Clock Working Mode parameter sets the current working mode of the system clock
to the normal, holdover or free-run mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
935
Values
l Normal Mode
l Holdover Mode
l Free-Run Mode
-

Value Description
Normal Mode Indicates that the NE clock works in the tracing mode. That is, the
NE clock traces and locks the working mode of its upper-level
clock.
Holdover Mode Indicates that the NE clock works in the holdover mode. That is,
in this mode, the NE clock uses the frequency information that is
stored before all timing reference signals are lost as its timing
reference.
Free-Run Mode Indicates that the NE clock works in the free-run mode. That is,
the internal oscillator works in this mode when all external timing
reference signals are lost.

None.
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.21 Clock Source Quality
Description
The Clock Source Quality parameter specifies the clock source quality information. Such
information is extracted from the S1 byte of individual clock sources according to the SSM
encoding rules after the SSM protocol is enabled. If the clock quality information cannot be
extracted, this parameter needs to be set manually.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
936
Values
l Automatic Extraction
l G.811 Clock Signal
l G.812 Transit Clock Signal
l G.812 Local Clock Signal
l G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing source (SETS)
Signal
l Unknown Synchronization
Quality
Automatic Extraction

Value Description
Automatic Extraction Indicates that the clock quality information is extracted
automatically according to the encoding rules compliant
with the SSM protocol.
G.811 Clock Signal Indicates that the clock source quality is manually set to the
G.811 clock signal.
G.812 Transit Clock Signal Indicates that the clock source quality is manually set to the
G.812 transit clock signal.
G.812 Local Clock Signal Indicates that the clock source quality is manually set to the
G.812 local clock signal.
G.813 SDH Equipment Timing
source (SETS) Signal
Indicates that the clock source quality is manually set to the
SETS clock signal.
Unknown Synchronization
Quality
Indicates a message that is set in the negative direction of
the selected synchronization source to avoid direct mutual
locking of two adjacent NEs.

This parameter is usually set to Automatic Extraction. When the equipment is interconnected
to an NE from another manufacturer that complies with a different protocol, the clock source
quality can be specified manually.
The clock quality information is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
937
Related Information
None.
A.27.22 S1 Byte Received
Description
The S1 Byte Received parameter indicates the value of the S1 byte of the current traced source
in the system clock priority table.
Values
l SDH equipment timing source (SETS)
signal
l G.812 Local Clock
l Synchronous Source Unavailable
Synchronous Source Unavailable

Value Description
SDH equipment timing
source (SETS) signal
Indicates that the clock quality of the current traced source is
0x0b.
G.812 Local Clock Indicates that the clock quality of the current traced source is
0x08.
G.812 Transit Clock Indicates that the clock quality of the current traced source is
0x04.
G.811 Reference Clock Indicates that the clock quality of the current traced source is
0x02.
Synchronous Source
Unavailable
Indicates that the clock quality of the current traced source is
0x0f.

None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
938
None.
Related Information
None.
A.27.23 Line Port (Clock)
Description
The Line Port (Clock) parameter specifies the output port of SSM quality information about
the line clock source and external clock source available in the existing system. This output port
can transmit the quality information about the clock source by sending the S1 byte to the
downstream NE.
Values
l Line Clock Source Port
l External Clock Source Port
-

Value Description
Line Clock Source Port Indicates that only the port on the line board where both
physical board and logical board have been configured
properly can be used as the output port of SSM quality
information.
External Clock Source Port Indicates that only the port on the board with external clock
interfaces where both physical board and logical board have
been configured properly can be used as the output port of
SSM quality information.

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
939
Related Information
The standard SSM protocol mode, also called as QL_ENABLE mode in the Recommendation
G.781, is a universal switching mode of clock source. In this standard SSM protocol mode, when
a clock source becomes invalid, the system automatically traces the clock source of the highest
quality in the clock priority table according to the quality information contained in the SSM
protocol. If two clock sources are both of the highest quality, the clock source of a higher priority
is selected.
A.27.24 Control Status (Clock)
Description
The Control Status (Clock) parameter specifies whether the line port can transmit the quality
information about the clock source by sending the S1 byte to the downstream NE. By setting
this parameter, the transmission of the S1 byte through the ports of the clock source can be
enabled or disabled.
Modifying the Control Status (Clock) parameter may cause loss of clock quality information
transmitted to the downstream NE. Therefore, the clock of the downstream NE may be
asynchronous with the clocks of other NEs in the synchronous network.
Values
l Enable
l Disabled
Enable

Value Description
Enable Indicates that the transmission of the S1 byte through the
corresponding line port is enabled.
Disabled Indicates that the transmission of the S1 byte through the
corresponding line port is disabled.

The Control Status (Clock) parameter can be set to an enabled or disabled status as required.
The status is enabled by default. In actual application, if the output clock source on the line board
is valid, the transmission of the S1 byte through line port is allowed so that the clocks of the NEs
in the entire synchronous network are synchronous.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
940
None.
Related Information
The standard SSM protocol mode, also called QL_ENABLE mode in the G.781, is a universal
switching mode of the clock source. In this standard SSM protocol mode, when a clock source
becomes invalid, the system automatically traces the clock source of the highest quality in the
clock priority table according to the quality information contained in the SSM protocol. If two
clock sources are both of the highest quality, the clock source of a higher priority is selected.
A.27.25 Line Port (Clock ID)
Description
The Line Port (Clock ID) parameter sets clock source ID in the S1 byte for the interconnection
and isolation between different clock subnets. In the extended SSM protocol mode, the four most
significant bits of the S1 byte are used for identifying the clock source ID to improve the clock
protection performance in the SDH network and to effectively avoid the timing loop. The clock
source ID is output by the line port only. The external clock cannot output the clock source ID.
Values
Line Clock Source Port -

Value Description
Line Clock Source Port Indicates that only the port on the line board where both
physical board and logical board have been configured
properly can be used as the output port of the clock source ID.

None.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
941
Related Information
None.
A.27.26 Enabled Status (Clock ID)
Description
Then Enabled Status (Clock ID) parameter is used to enable or disable the output of the clock
source ID for the interconnection and isolation between different subnets. In the extended SSM
protocol mode, the four most significant bits of the S1 byte are used for identifying the clock
source ID to improve the clock protection performance in the SDH network and to effectively
avoid the timing loop. This parameter is used to enable or disable the output of the clock source
ID. The output of the clock source ID by internal clock source cannot be disabled. This parameter
is invalid for external clock, because the external clock cannot output the clock source ID.
In a system where the extended SSM protocol is adopted, modifying the Enable Status (Clock
ID) parameter may result in clock tracing loop, which may make the originally synchronous
clock sources asynchronous.
Values
l Enabled
l Disabled.
Enabled

Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the output of clock source ID through
corresponding line ports is allowed.
Disabled. Indicates that the output of clock source ID through
corresponding line ports is forbidden.

The Enabled Status (Clock ID) parameter can be set to an enable of disabled status as required.
The status is enabled by default. In actual application, as long as the extended SSM protocol is
started and the output clock source on the line board is valid, it is allowed to output clock source
ID in the four most-significant bits of the S1 byte through line ports. This can ensure clock
synchronization among the NEs in the entire synchronous network and prevent the occurrence
of timing loops.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
942
There are three working modes of the SSM protocol: the disabled, standard and extended SSM
protocol modes. This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol mode is adopted
by the current clock of the NEs.
Related Information
None.
A.27.27 Data Output Method in Holdover Mode
Description
The Data Output Method in Holdover Mode parameter specifies whether the data is output
normally or the latest data is kept when the NE clock is in the holdover mode.
Values
l Normal Data Output Mode
l Keep the Latest Data
Normal Data Output Mode

Value Description
Normal Data Output Mode Indicates the normal data output mode. The duration of this
output mode is determined by the phase lock. This data output
mode can continue for a maximum of 24 hours.
Keep the Latest Data Indicates that the latest phase-locked data is kept. This data
output mode is a forced holdover mode.

The Keep the Latest Data mode is a forced holdover mode. Therefore, the clock accuracy is not
high. In actual application, the Normal Data Output mode is recommended.
The NE clock can work in three modes: the trace, holdover, and free-run modes. This parameter
is valid only when the NE clock is working in the holdover mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
943
Related Information
None.
A.27.28 Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level
Description
The Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level parameter specifies the 0 quality level that is not
provided in the SSM protocol. Users can add this parsing rule to specify the quality level
represented by 0.
Values
l Do Not Use For
Synchronization
l G.812 Local Clock
l SETS Clock
l Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit
Clock
l Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock
l Between G.812 Local Clock
and synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS)
Do Not Use For Synchronization

Value Description
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Indicates a message that is set in the negative direction of
the selected synchronization source to avoid direct mutual
locking of two adjacent NEs.
G.811 Reference Clock Indicates that the clock signal complies with the G.811
protocol.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
944
Value Description
G.812 Transit Clock Indicates that the transit exchange clock signal complies
with the G.812 protocol.
G.812 Local Clock Indicates that the local office signal complies with the G.
812 protocol.
SETS Clock Indicates the synchronous equipment timing source
(SETS).
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit Clock
Indicates that the specified quality level is inferior to the
quality level of the G.811 reference clock signal but is
superior to the quality level of the G.812 transit clock
signal.
Between G.812 Transit Clock
and G.812 Local Clock
quality level of the G.812 transit clock signal but is superior
to the quality level of the G.812 local clock signal.
Between G.812 Local Clock
and synchronous equipment
timing source (SETS)
quality level of the G.812 local clock signal but is superior
to the quality level of the synchronous equipment timing
source (SETS) clock signal.

In actual application, this parameter can be set according to the quality information about specific
NE clocks.
The setting of this parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled.
Related Information
None.
A.27.29 Retiming Mode
Description
The Retiming Mode parameter specifies whether the retiming clock, tributary clock, or cross-
connect (external) clock is used.
If the downstream board that corresponds to this board provides the clock source for the
downstream NE, the selection of the user affects the precision of the downstream NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
945
Values
Normal, Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock, Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock
Normal

Value Description
Normal Indicates that the retiming clock is not used.
Retiming Mode of Tributary
Clock
Indicates that the tributary clock is used as the retiming
clock.
Retiming Mode of Cross-
Connect Clock
Indicates that the cross-connect (external) clock is used as
the retiming clock.

Select the proper clock according to the actual networking planning of the user.
This parameter is applicable to the PQ1 and PQM boards. When the PQM board functions as
the protection board, the function of setting the retiming mode is unavailable.
A.28 Protection Associated Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring multiplex section protection (MSP),
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), board protection switching (BPS), and path
protection switching (PPS).
A.28.1 Switching Mode (MSP)
Description
The Switching Mode parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
946
Values
Single-Ended Switching, Dual-
Ended Switching
Single-Ended Switching

Value Description
Single-Ended Switching Indicates that the transmit end continues to transmit
signals to the broken fiber after the switching occurs at
the faulty end.
Dual-Ended Switching Indicates that the transmit end does not transmit signals
to the broken fiber after the switching occurs at the
transmit end and at the receive end.

In the case of the 1+1 MSP, you can set this parameter to Single-Ended Switching or Dual-
Ended Switching. In the case of the 1:N MSP, you can set this parameter to Dual-Ended
Switching only.
A.28.2 Initiation Condition (SNCP)
Description
The Initiation Condition parameter specifies the condition for monitoring the switching of the
SNCP pair.
Values
TIM, EXC, SD, UNEQ EXC, SD

Value Description
TIM Indicates whether the HP_TIM alarm is monitored.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
947
Value Description
EXC Indicates whether the B3_EXC alarm is monitored.
SD Indicates whether the B3_SD alarm is monitored.
UNEQ Indicates whether the HP_UNEQ alarm is monitored.

A.28.3 Group Type (SNCP)
Description
The Group Type parameter specifies the grouping type of the SNCP services.
If switching occurs on any of several bound SNCP pairs, switching occurs on all the SNCP pairs.
Values
Null, Virtual Concatenation
Grouping
Null

Value Description
Null
Virtual Concatenation Grouping Indicates that the user needs to bind SNCP pairs.

To bind SNCP pairs, the user needs to set this parameter to Virtual Concatenation
Grouping for these SNCP pairs.
The levels and attributes of the SNCP pairs to be bound must be the same. In addition, these
SNCP pairs should be in the activated state.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
948
A.28.4 Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Description
If an NE is a tangent node on the SNCP ring, you can configure an SNCP group that has the
same source but different sinks for the NE after this function is enabled.
Values
Selected, Deselected Deselected

Value Description
Selected Specifies an SNCP group that has the same source but
different sinks.
Deselected Specifies an SNCP group that has the same source and same
sink.

When configuring SNCP for a tangent node on the SNCP ring, you can select the Configure
SNCP Tangent Ring check box.
None.
A.28.5 Source(Sink)Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Description
The Source(Sink)Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range
of a configured service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
949
Values
The value range varies according to the specified service type.
Service Type Value Range
VC-4 1
VC-3 1 to 3
VC-12 1 to 63

Enter multiple consecutive timeslots in the format of Start timeslot number-End timeslot
number. Enter multiple inconsecutive timeslots in the format of ts1, ts2, .... You can enter the
timeslots in a combination of the two formats.
None.
A.28.6 Switching Status (BPS)
Description
The Switching Status (BPS) parameter shows the status of BPS switching.
Values
Forced Switch Request, Auto Switching,
Idle, Unknown
Auto Switching

Value Description
Forced Switch Request Indicates that services in a protection group are forcibly
switched by using switching commands.
Auto Switching Indicates the switching status of the protection group, which
results from the faulty Ethernet board.
Idle Indicates that the working and protection boards are normal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
950
Value Description
Unknown Indicates that the switching status is unknown. You can learn
about the current status through a query.

None.
None.
A.28.7 Switching Status (PPS)
Description
The Switching Status (PPS) parameter specifies the status of PPS switching.
Values
Forced Switching(Protection to Working), Forced
Switching(Working to Protection), Normal
Normal

Value Description
Normal Indicates the status when no switching is required, namely,
the normal status.
Forced Switching(Protection
to Working)
Forcibly switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. The switching is implemented regardless of
the status of the protection path, unless the protection path
meets the bridging requirement of higher priority.
Forced Switching(Working
to Protection)
Forcibly switches the service from the protection path to the
working path. The switching is implemented regardless of the
status of the working path, unless the working path meets the
bridging requirement of higher priority.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
951
None.
None.
A.28.8 External Switching Command Type (BPS)
Description
External Switching Command Type (BPS) indicates forcibly switching services in the BPS
protection group to the working board or protection board by running the external switching
command.
If the working board and protection board are normal, a forced switching may lead to a transient
service interruption. If either one of the working board and protection board is faulty, a forced
switching may lead to a service interruption.
Values
Forced Switching to Working, Forced
Switching to Protection, Clear Switching
-

Value Description
Forced Switching to
Working
Indicates forcibly switching services from the protection
board to working board. This switching neglects the status of
the working channel, unless the working channel meets the
request of a bridge with a higher priority.
Forced Switching to
Protection
Indicates forcibly switching services from the working board
to protection board. This switching neglects the status of the
protection channel, unless the protection channel meets the
request of a bridge with a higher priority.
Clear Switching Indicates clearing the current switching status.

Set this parameter as required.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
952
None.
A.28.9 External Switching Command Type (PPS)
Description
External Switching Command Type (PPS) indicates forcibly switching services in the PPS
protection group to the working board or protection board by running the external switching
command.
If the working port and protection port are normal, a forcible switching may lead to a transient
service interruption. If either one of the working board and protection board is faulty, a forcible
switching may lead to a service interruption.
Values
Query Protection Group Status, Forced
Switch to Working, Forced Switch to
Protection, Manual Switch to Working,
Manual Switch to Protection, Lockout of
Protection, Clear
-

Value Description
Query Protection Group
Status
Indicates querying the status of the protection group.
Forced Switch to Working Indicates forcibly switching the service from the protection
channel to the working channel. This switching neglects the
status of the working channel, unless the working channel
meets the request of a bridge with a higher priority.
Forced Switch to Protection Indicates forcibly switching the service from the working
channel to the protection channel. The switching does not
consider the status of the protection channel, unless the
protection channel runs an external switching command of a
higher priority.
Manual Switch to Working Indicates manually switching the service from the protection
channel to the working channel. If the working channel is
normal, a switching is triggered. If the working channel fails
or is satisfying the switching request of a bridge with a higher
priority, a switching is not triggered.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
953
Value Description
Manual Switch to Protection Indicates manually switching the service from the working
channel to the protection channel. If the protection channel is
normal, a switching is triggered. If the protection channel fails
or is satisfying the switching request of a bridge with a higher
priority, a switching is not triggered.
Lockout of Protection The priority of the lockout of protection is lower than the
priority of the forced switching and the priority of the manual
switching. The lockout of protection can only lock the current
automatic switching status.
Clear Indicates clearing the current switching status.

Set this parameter as required.
None.
A.29 Other Parameters
This topic describes the parameters related to PDH interfaces and SDH interfaces.
A.29.1 E1/T1 Interconnection
Description
The E1/T1 Interconnection parameter specifies whether the frame structure is checked and
indicates the checking mode, in the case of an E1/T1 interconnection.
The local NE and downstream NE are not affected.
Values
Transparent transmission,
Interconnection monitored,
Interconnection unmonitored
Transparent transmission

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
954
Value Description
Transparent transmission Indicates that the frame structure is transparently
transmitted.
Interconnection unmonitored Indicates that the frame structure is not monitored in the
case of an E1/T1 interconnection.
Interconnection monitored Indicates that the frame structure is monitored in the case
of an E1/T1 interconnection.

When the service is of the E1 type, the setting of Interconnection unmonitored and
Interconnection monitored is not supported. When the service is of the T1 type, the setting of
Transparent transmission is not supported. When the service is changed from T1 to E1, the
value of this parameter is automatically changed to Transparent transmission.
This parameter is applicable to the PQM board.
A.29.2 T1 Frame Structure
Description
The T1 Frame Structure parameter specifies whether the structure of the T1 frame is set to
Unframed or whether the D4, ESF, SLC96, F4, or M13 frame structure is monitored.
Values
Unframed, D4, ESF, SLC96, F4, M13 Unframed

Value Description
Unframed Indicates that the frame format is not monitored in transparent
transmission mode.
D4 Indicates the structure of the T1 frame.
ESF Indicates the structure of the T1 frame.
SLC96 Indicates the structure of the T1 frame.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
955
Value Description
F4 Indicates the structure of the T1 frame.
M13 Indicates the structure of the T1 frame.

In transparent transmission mode, this parameter is valid when the frame is set to be monitored
and the service is of the T1 type. In this case, the frame format is the format of the accessed
service. If you need not monitor the frame format when the frame format is monitored, set this
parameter to Unframed.
In interconnection unmonitored mode, this parameter is valid and used to define the frame format
of the output service.
In interconnection monitored mode, this parameter is valid. In this case, the port monitors the
accessed service and defines the frame format of the output service according to the frame format
specified by this parameter.
None.
A.29.3 E1 Frame Structure
Description
The E1 Frame Structure parameter specifies whether the structure of the E1 frame is set to
Framed, Unframed or whether the PCM30, PCM31, PCM30CRC, or PCM31CRC frame
format is monitored.
Values
Framed, Unframed, PCM30,
PCM31, PCM30CRC,
PCM31CRC
Unframed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
956
Value Description
Framed Indicates that the frame format is monitored in
transparent transmission mode.
Unframed Indicates that the frame format is not monitored in
transparent transmission mode.
PCM30 Indicates the structure of the E1 signal. 30 timeslots are
available for users, that is, TS1-TS15 and TS17-TS31.
Timeslot TS16 is used to transmit signaling. This type
of structure does not provide the CRC check.
PCM31 Indicates the structure of the E1 signal. 31 timeslots are
Timeslot TS16 does not transmit signaling. This type of
structure does not provide the CRC check.
PCM30CRC Indicates the structure of the E1 signal. 30 timeslots are
Timeslot TS16 is used to transmit signaling. This type
of structure provides the CRC check.
PCM31CRC Indicates the structure of the E1 signal. 31 timeslots are
Timeslot TS16 does not transmit signaling. This type of
structure provides the CRC check.

In transparent transmission mode, this parameter is valid when the frame is set to be monitored
and the service is of the E1 type. In this case, the frame format is the format of the accessed
service. If you need to monitor the frame format when the frame format is not monitored, set
this parameter to Unframed.
In interconnection unmonitored mode, this parameter is valid and used to define the frame format
of the output service.
In interconnection monitored mode, this parameter is valid. In this case, the port monitors the
accessed service and defines the frame format of the output service according to the frame format
specified by this parameter.
None.
A.29.4 Service Mode
Description
The Service Mode parameter indicates the actual working mode of the board that supports the
M13/E13 function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
957
Values
Normal Mode, MUX
Mode, Server Mode
Normal Mode

Value Description
Normal Mode Indicates that the processing mode of the tributary board is
consistent with the processing mode of the board that does not
provide the M13/E13 function. For example, in normal mode,
the E1 service is added to or dropped from the N2PQ1 board and
the cross-connection at the VC-12 level is configured.
MUX Mode Indicates that three VC-3 cross-connections are configured. E1
signals are received or transmitted on the first 48 channels of the
interface board. Each VC-3 cross-connection corresponds to 16
E1 signals.
Server Mode Indicates that the tributary board does not drop any service, but
realizes the conversion between E1 and E3 signals only.

Select a proper value according to the actual requirement of the user.
This parameter is applicable to the N2PQ1, R2PD1, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, and N2PL3A
boards.
A.29.5 Service Type
Description
The Service Type parameter specifies the service type of PDH signals.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
958
Values
E13, M13 E13

Value Description
E13 Indicates the structure of the PDH frame.
M13 Indicates the structure of the PDH frame.

Set this parameter to E13 when you need to convert E1 signals to E3 signals or convert E3 signals
to E1 signals. Set this parameter to M13 when you need to convert T1 signals to T3 signals or
convert T3 signals to T1 signals.
This parameter is applicable to the N2PQ1, N2PQ3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2PD3, and R2PD1
boards that are used on the OptiX NG-SDH equipment series.
A.29.6 Service Frame Format
Description
The Service Frame Format parameter specifies whether the tributary board monitors the frame
format of the signal. This parameter determines whether the frame format of the signal is
monitored only, and does not affect services. If the frame format of the service transmitted from
the opposite end is inconsistent with the frame format of the service at the local end or if the
service transmitted from the opposite end does not have any frame format, a large number of
LFA/RFA alarms are reported.
When you set the frame format of the service supported by the board to Unframe, the system
is not affected if the framing mode set on the U2000 is inconsistent with the framing mode of
the board. When you set the frame format of the service supported by the board to Frame, alarms
indicating inconsistent frame formats may be reported on the U2000 if the framing mode set on
the U2000 is inconsistent with the framing mode of the board.
Values
Unframe, Frame Unframe

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
959
Value Description
Unframe Indicates that the tributary board does not monitor the frame
format of the signal.
Frame Indicates that the tributary board monitors the frame format of
the signal.

This parameter is applicable to the N2PQ1, N2PQ3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2PD3, and R2PD1
boards that are used on the OptiX NG-SDH equipment series.
A.29.7 Connection Mode (NE Attribute)
Description
The Connection Mode (NE Attribute) parameter indicates the connection mode between a
gateway NE and the U2000. If the gateway NE is connected to the U2000 based on IP, two
connection modes are available between them, namely, common mode, and security SSL mode.
The connection mode between the NE and the U2000 determines whether the NE and U2000
can communicate normally and securely with each other.
Values
Common, Security SSL Common

Value Description
Common Indicates that the connection between the NE
and the U2000 is not encrypted.
Security SSL Indicates that the connection between the NE
and the U2000 is encrypted.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
960
If the communication environment between the NE and the U2000 is secure, the common mode
can be used. If the security requirement for the in-between communication is high, the security
SSL mode can be used to prevent packet interception.
This parameter is valid only when Gateway Type is set to Gateway and Protocol is set to IP.
Related Information
None.
A.29.8 Enable Tandem Connection at the Source
Description
The Enable Tandem Connection at the Source parameter specifies whether the tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) function at the source end is enabled.
Values

Value Description
Disabled Indicates that the TCM function is disabled.
Enabled Indicates that the TCM function is enabled.

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. If the TCM function is
required, set this parameter to Enabled.
Only the N2 board series in the SDH board category support the setting of this parameter because
only these boards support the TCM function.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
961
A.29.9 APId to be Sent at the Source
Description
The APId to be Sent at the Source parameter indicates the N1 byte to be sent based on the
number of calculated bit errors.
The system is not affected because this function is used for testing.
Values
A 16-byte string [CRC Check] HuaWei SBS

Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. It is recommended that you
use the default value.
A.29.10 Optimize Higher Order Pass-Through
Description
The Optimize Higher Order Pass-Through parameter indicates that the lower order services
that do not necessarily require lower order cross-connection resources can use higher order cross-
connections, therefore reducing the usage of lower order cross-connection resources.
If you enable the higher order pass-through optimization function, the services may be
interrupted transiently, and the service interruption lasts for 50 ms.
Values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
962
Value Description
Enabled Indicates that the higher order pass-through optimization
function is enabled. In this case, the lower order services that
do not necessarily require lower order cross-connection
resources can use higher order cross-connections.
Disabled Indicates that the lower order services occupy lower order
cross-connection resources.

If lower order cross-connection resources are insufficient, you can enable the higher order path-
through function to configure more lower order services.
None.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
963
B Glossary
Numerics
2DM two-way delay measurement
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q
(QinQ)
A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private
VLANs.
A
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer.
ABR See available bit rate.
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ACR allowed cell rate
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADMC automatically detected and manually cleared
ADSL asymmetric digital subscriber line
AF See assured forwarding.
AGC automatic gain control
AIS alarm indication signal
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) B Glossary
964
ALC See automatic level control.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
AMU ATM cell multiplex unit
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APS automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation
Layer (AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of
information, including voice, video, and data.
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and
routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses.
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards.
access control list
(ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
adaptive modulation
(AM)
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the
low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
administrative unit
(AU)
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
administrative unit
group (AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload.
An AUG consists of AU-4s.
alternate mark
inversion (AMI)
A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent logical
1 values.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
965
assured forwarding
(AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
automatic laser
shutdown (ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control
(ALC)
A feature that identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay within a
comfortable range, improving user experience.
automatic transmit
power control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
avalanche photodiode
(APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BC boundary clock
BCD binary coded decimal
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BIP-X bit interleaved parity-X
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
966
BSC binary synchronous communication
BSS base station subsystem
BTS base transceiver station
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional
Forwarding Detection
(BFD)
A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic input/output
system (BIOS)
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neill-
concelman (BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity
(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment
at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first
bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the
BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal.
A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-
bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-
X.
bit interleaved parity-8
(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)
in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0"
over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is
odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU)
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
967
broadband integrated
services digital network
(B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote
access server (BRAS)
A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of network
to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of multiple services,
meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different
users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.
building integrated
timing supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
built-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the
OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
C
CAR committed access rate
CAS See channel associated signaling.
CAS multiframe A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM
frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for
multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for
synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal
(NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to
transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CAU See client automatic upgrade.
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
968
CMI coded mark inversion
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot
0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and
implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4
multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a
CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can
check the previous check block.
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF constraint shortest path first
CST See common spanning tree.
CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC)
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained
atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.
carrier sense multiple
access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
networking access method in which:
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
channel associated
signaling (CAS)
A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a dedicated voice
channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS signaling.
circuit emulation
service (CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
client automatic
upgrade (CAU)
A function that enables a user to automatically detect the update of the client version and
upgrade the client. This keeps the version of the client is the same as that of the server.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
969
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
(CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
collision A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time.
Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size
(CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate.
This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be
not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
common spanning tree
(CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region
is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree
generated with STP/RSTP.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC) Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved after
MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically.
customer edge (CE) A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy
check (CRC)
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common
(with ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with
ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCE data connection equipment
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
970
DE discard eligible
DEI device emulation interrupt
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSL See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency.
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services
(DiffServ)
An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host
to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation
of IP addresses to hosts.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and provision
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1D3 are
referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channels that are composed
of bytes D4D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data terminal
equipment (DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
delay measurement
(DM)
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
971
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
(DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation
of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same
fiber.
differentiated services
code point (DSCP)
According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and
two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is
the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure
that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is
compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore,
terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network
(DDN)
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital subscriber line
(DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without
affecting the POTS service.
access multiplexer
(DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
dispersion The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion
compensation module
(DCM)
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
dispersion of transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to
negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware
failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board,
achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
dual tone multiple
frequency (DTMF)
In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of
two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the
other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
EBS See excess burst size.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
972
EFM OAM Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EPD early packet discard
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics
manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is
the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The
speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/
s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain.
Ethernet aggregation
(E-Aggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual
domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet
service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet passive
optical network
(EPON)
A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of
up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted
broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is
shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
973
Ethernet private LAN
service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This
service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
(EVPLAN)
service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of
monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs
contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only
a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
embedded control
channel (ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside
IP.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
equipment serial
number (ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of
optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of
Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light
source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
974
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
excess information rate
(EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding
(EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
F
FC See fiber channel.
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDI packet See forward defect indication packet.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FEC See forwarding equivalence class.
FFD fast failure detection
FIB See forward information base.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FIFO See first in first out.
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FPS See fast protection switching.
FRR See fast reroute.
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect
(FICON)
A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units.
It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast protection
switching (FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working
PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives
the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function
(IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
975
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of a
network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an active
route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active route can be
switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the traffic can be
switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN FRR, and TE
FRR.
fiber channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber
channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode
and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair
copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and
connectionless services.
fiber distributed data
interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.
field programmable
gate array (FPGA)
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated circuit
(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
forward defect
indication (FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect
indication packet (FDI
packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the
upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward information
base (FIB)
A table that provides information for network hardware (bridges and routers) for them
to forward data packets to other networks. The information contained in a routing table
differs according to whether it is used by a bridge or a router. A bridge relies on both the
source (originating) and destination addresses to determine where and how to forward a
packet.
forwarding equivalence
class (FEC)
A class-based forwarding technology that classifies the packets with the same forwarding
mode. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. The
division of FECs is flexible, and can be a combination of the source address, destination
address, source port, destination port, protocol type, and VPN.
frame delay variation
(FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number
of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames
arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the
egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
976
frequency division
duplex (FDD)
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink
and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both
uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GCP GMPLS control plan
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE
is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a
Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data
packets.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
timing services to worldwide users.
Global System for
Mobile
Communications
(GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally.
GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station
subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gateway network
element (GNE)
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer.
H
HCS higher order connection supervision
HD high definition
HD-SDI See high definition-serial digital interface signal.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
977
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA high order path adaptation
HPT higher order path termination
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
HSL See high-level script language.
High Speed Downlink
Packet Access
(HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
header error control
(HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell
Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the
first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of
service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high definition
television (HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high definition-serial
digital interface signal
(HD-SDI)
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
high density bipolar of
order 3 code (HDB3)
A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
high-level script
language (HSL)
A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and extendable.
hot patch A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program
without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the
built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or
queried.
I
IAE incoming alignment error
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
978
ICC See ITU carrier code.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP IMA Control Protocol
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM incoming label map
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IN intelligent network
IP Internet Protocol
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.
IST internal spanning tree
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU carrier code (ICC) A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE)
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
979
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International
Telecommunication
Union (ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
radio networks (ITU-R).
International
Telecommunication
Union-
Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
(ITU-T)
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications
technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
(ICMP)
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force (IETF)
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
television (IPTV)
A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP", IPTV
uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or video-on-demand
(VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the
transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires either a computer and software
media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images in real time.
Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service
provider (ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
980
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the
connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA,
maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken
fiber.
intermediate frequency
(IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB local battery
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCN local communications network
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LED See light emitting diode.
LER See label edge router.
LIFO See last in first out.
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LMP link management protocol
LOC loss of clock
LOM loss of multiframe
LOP loss of pointer
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
981
LOS See loss of signal.
LPA low order path adaptation
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path.
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LVDS See low voltage differential signal.
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function
(LCK)
A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer, informs
consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and suppresses
the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign
labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switched path
(LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router
(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
light emitting diode
(LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice and laser-class printers.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group
(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
982
local area network
(LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control
(LLC)
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low voltage differential
signal (LVDS)
A low noise, low power, low amplitude method for high-speed (gigabits per second) data
transmission over copper wire.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF message communication function
MCR minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain.
MDF See main distribution frame.
MDP message dispatch process
MDU See multi-dwelling unit.
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG See maintenance entity group.
MEL maintenance entity group level
MEP maintenance end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB See management information base.
MIP maintenance intermediate point
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MP maintenance point
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS TP See Multiprotocol Label Switching traffic policing.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
983
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
MS multiplex section
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSB most significant bit
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
Media Access Control
(MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching traffic
policing (MPLS TP)
It is a scheme that supervises the specific traffic entering the communication devices.
By policing the speed of traffic that enters the network, it "punishes" the traffic out of
the threshold, so the traffic going into network is limited to a reasonable range, protecting
the network resources and the interests of the carriers.
main distribution
frame (MDF)
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
maintenance domain
(MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
984
maintenance entity
(ME)
An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a
transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity
group (MEG)
A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
l Exist within the same management edges.
l Have the same MEG hierarchy.
l Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
management
information base (MIB)
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between
failures (MTBF)
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair
(MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
metropolitan area
network (MAN)
A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or
region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered
by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single
larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network).
It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging
them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus
network.
mirror An action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of the original
site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically.
mirroring The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
multi-dwelling unit
(MDU)
A network access unit used for multi-dwelling units. It provides Ethernet and IP services
and optionally VoIP or CATV services; has multiple broadband interfaces on the user
side and optionally POTS ports or CATV RF ports. It is mainly applicable to FTTB,
FTTC, or FTTCab networks.
multicast listener
discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always
occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and
maintain multiframe alignment.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
985
multiple spanning tree
instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination (MST)
A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of forming an
SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
multiprotocol label
switching transport
profile (MPLS-TP)
A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet experience
of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual
private network
(MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
NAS network access server
NDF new data flag
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZI non-return to zero inverted
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
network parameter
control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network service access
point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
986
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OLT optical line terminal
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OPEX operating expense
OPU optical channel payload unit
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI See open systems interconnection.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit-k
Open Shortest Path
First (OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed with the network topology which is identical on all
routers in the area.
open systems
interconnection (OSI)
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
987
operation,
administration and
maintenance (OAM)
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection,
notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment
in an operational state, and support activities required to provide the services of a
subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit
(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used
in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical network
terminal (ONT)
A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
optical network unit
(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR = signal
power/noise power.
optical supervisory
channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain
reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light
loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transponder
unit (OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-
compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PADR PPPoE active discovery request
PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCM See pulse code modulation.
PCR See peak cell rate.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
988
PHP penultimate hop popping
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIR peak information rate
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMS Product Management System
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD partial packet discard
PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS port protection switching
PQ See priority queuing.
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PRI primary rate interface
PSD See power spectrum density.
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PSU power supply unit
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP See point to point.
PVID See port default VLAN ID.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet over SDH/
SONET (POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched
network (PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
989
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging
packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or
even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error,
may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum
burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that PBS should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR.
peak cell rate (PCR) The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
per-hop behavior
(PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual path
(PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase-locked loop
(PLL)
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
point to point (PTP) A type of service in which data is sent from a single network termination to another
network termination.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
port default VLAN ID
(PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no
VLAN tag when reaching the port.
power distribution unit
(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power spectrum
density (PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board
(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ) A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ
algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower
latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of
higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier
than others.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
990
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched
telephone network
(PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse code modulation
(PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses.
Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change
continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined
values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code
modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QAM See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
QoS See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals,
or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves,
using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude
modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are
out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature
components hence the name of the scheme.
quadrature phase shift
keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
991
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN See radio access network.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
REI remote error indication
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR resilient packet ring
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource ReserVation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTN radio transmission node
RTP real-time performance
RTS request to send
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A networking protocol that provides centralized Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting (AAA) management for computers to connect and use a network service.
Resource ReserVation
Protocol-Traffic
Engineering (RSVP-
TE)
An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in MPLS
networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs by initiating
label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP rerouting and
LSP bandwidth increasing.
Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP)
A network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) and designed
for Integrated Service and used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP
operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information
Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
992
radio access network
(RAN)
The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CN
from wireless network.
radio network
controller (RNC)
A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity
of the radio resources.
random early detection
(RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit
rate (rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
(VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x
10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
remote optical
pumping amplifier
(ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and
monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
SAI service area identifier
SAN storage area network
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP serious disturbance period
SDRAM See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SEMF synchronous equipment management function
SES severely errored second
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
993
SLA See service level agreement.
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SMB Server Message Block
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNCMP subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SP See service provider.
SPC soft permanent connection
SPE See superstratum provider edge.
SPI SDH physical interface
SRG See shared risk group.
SRLG shared risk link group
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the network
through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived and plain text
passwords from being captured.
Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Serial Line Interface
Protocol (SLIP)
A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission
of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function
with a known IP address.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
994
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
serial digital interface
(SDI)
An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
service level agreement
(SLA)
A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
service provider (SP) An entity that offers service subscriptions to individual subscribers and contracts with
carriers to implement services for a specific DN. A service provider may contract with
more than one carrier.
shared risk group
(SRG)
A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the
failure of all the resources in the group.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
single-pair high-speed
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans
determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies
according to transmission system type.
standard definition-
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
superstratum provider
edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that
are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up
between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The
SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the
UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
995
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous dynamic
random access memory
(SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional
memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of
running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about
twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in
computers.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple
data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but
multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI tag control information
TCM See trellis coded modulation scheme.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE See traffic engineering.
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch
TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TPS See tributary protection switching.
TST See Test.
TTI trail trace identifier
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TUG tributary unit group
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
996
Test (TST) A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service
diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors,
and so on.
Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is
small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
terminal multiplexer
(TM)
A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals
into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals
into multiple channels of low rate signals.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
time division
multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
traceroute A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams
with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages
that return to determine routers along the path.
traffic engineering (TE) A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
trail termination source
identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity
verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI
received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
trellis coded
modulation scheme
(TCM)
A modulation scheme which allows highly efficient transmission of information over
band-limited channels such as telephone lines.
tributary protection
switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary
processing boards.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
997
type-length-value
(TLV)
An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-
Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different
values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the
TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can
be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in
packets.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTC See Coordinated Universal Time.
User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that UDP messages will be
lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not
confirm whether a data packet is received.
unavailable time event
(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The
event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive
seconds.
usage parameter
control (UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network
interface (UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
998
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCI virtual channel identifier
VDSL very-high-data-rate digital subscriber line
VDSL2 See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN virtual local area network
VOA variable optical attenuator
VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switch instance.
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers
(including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual
router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The
host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the
active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group
becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
VoIP See voice over IP.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
very-high-speed digital
subscriber line 2
(VDSL2)
An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports
multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and
high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service.
virtual channel
connection (VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual concatenation
group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier
(VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
999
virtual private LAN
service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire
service (VPWS)
A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switch instance
(VSI)
An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voice over IP (VoIP) An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
W
WAN See wide area network.
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Wideband Code
Division Multiple
Access (WCDMA)
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing
(WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early
detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
wide area network
(WAN)
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
wireless local area
network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction
through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
1000
Z
Z interface extension Extending the analogue subscriber to another place by extending the Z interface.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
1001

OptiX OSN 7500 II&7500&3500&1500 Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) (V200R011)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OptiX OSN 7500 II&7500&3500&1500 Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) (V200R011)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500

Potrebbero piacerti anche